Cat. No. W266-E1-09
C200HW-SRM21-V1
CS1W-SRM21
CJ1W-SRM21
CQM1-SRM21-V1
SRT1 Series
SRT2 Series
CompoBus/S
OPERATION MANUAL
C200HW-SRM21-V1
CS1W-SRM21
CJ1W-SRM21
CQM1-SRM21-V1
SRT1 Series
SRT2 Series
CompoBus/S
Operation Manual
Revised August 2007
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
!DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to
an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything else.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
1,2,3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
OMRON, 1996
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xv
1
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvi
2
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvi
3
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvi
4
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvii
5
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
6
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxi
SECTION 1
System Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1-1
System Overview and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-2
CompoBus/S System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
1-3
Compatible Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
1-4
Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
SECTION 2
CompoBus/S System Specifications and Configuration
23
2-1
Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
2-2
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
2-3
Supplying Power to the Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
2-4
System Configuration Using Water-resistant Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
2-5
I/O Response Time Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
SECTION 3
CompoBus/S System Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
3-1
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
3-2
Connector Installation (Special Flat Cable Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
3-3
VCTF Cable Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
3-4
Master/Slave Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
3-5
Operations Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
SECTION 4
Master Unit Specifications and Operations . . . . . . . . . .
4-1
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS-series,
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
74
4-2
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
4-4
CQM1-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CQM1 PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
4-5
SRM1-C0@-V2 Master Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
4-6
CPM2C-S Series CPM2C-S@@@C (-DRT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5
Slave Specifications and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
5-1
Remote Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
5-2
Connector Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
194
5-3
Remote I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
260
5-4
Water-resistant Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
268
5-5
Sensor Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
287
5-6
Fiber Amplifier Communications Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
301
5-7
Analog Input Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
308
5-8
Analog Output Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
318
5-9
I/O Link Units for CPM1A and CPM2A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
327
5-10 I/O Link Units for CPM2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
331
5-11 Sensor Amplifier Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
335
5-12 Application Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
350
SECTION 6
Starting Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
353
6-1
Turning the Power ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
354
6-2
Checking Operations for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E,
and C200HS Master Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
356
6-3
Checking Operations of CS-series and CJ-series Master Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
365
6-4
Checking Operations of CQM1 Master Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
377
6-5
Checking Slave Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
382
6-6
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
384
6-7
Precautions for Replacement of Units or Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
385
Appendix
Standard Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
387
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
395
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
401
viii
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation and operation of the CompoBus/S system and includes the sections described below.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before
attempting to install and operate the CompoBus/S Master and Slave Units. Be sure to read the precautions provided in the following section.
Section 1 provides an overview of the CompoBus/S System and functions, and describes the various
Units that are used to configure a CompoBus/S System.
Section 2 provides details on the CompoBus/S System specifications and I/O response times, and
explains how to configure a CompoBus/S System.
Section 3 explains how to install Units in control panels, wire the signal and power lines, and make
other connections needed to assemble a CompoBus/S System. We recommend reading through the
information on wiring each Master and Slave that are provided in Section 4 and Section 5.
Section 4 explains the functions of each Master Unit, including information on specifications, switch
settings and allocation of Slave I/O.
Section 5 explains the functions of each Slave, including information on specifications, switch settings,
and I/O.
Section 6 provides information on error processing, periodic maintenance operations, and troubleshooting procedures needed to keep the CompoBus/S System operating properly. We recommend
reading through the error processing procedures before operation so that operating errors can be identified and corrected more quickly.
The Appendix provides tables of standard models including Masters, Slaves, and connecting devices.
In this manual, only the specifications of the CompoBus/S system and devices are described. For
details on Units, refer to their respective manuals. (Suffixes have been omitted from the catalog numbers.)
Product Name
CS-series Programmable Controllers
Series
CS Series
Manual Name
SYSMAC CS Series Operation
Manual
Cat. No.
W339
CJ-series Programmable Controllers
CJ Series
SYSMAC CJ Series Operation
Manual
W393
CS/CJ-series Programmable Control- CS/CJ Series
lers
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E Pro- C200HX/C200HG/
grammable Controllers
C200HE-(Z)E
SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Programming Manual
SYSMAC C200HX/C200HG/
C200HE-(Z)E Programmable
Controllers Installation Guide
W394
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E Pro- C200HX/C200HG/
grammable Controllers
C200HE-(Z)E
SYSMAC C200HX/C200HG/
C200HE-(Z)E Programmable
Controllers Operation Manual
SYSMAC C200HS Operation
Manual
W302
W322
C200HS Programmable Controllers
C200HS
C200HS Programmable Controllers
C200HS
CQM1H Programmable Controller
CQM1H
CQM1H Programmable Controller
CQM1H
SYSMAC CQM1H Programming
Manual
CQM1 Programmable Controller
CQM1
SYSMAC CQM1 Operation Man- W226
ual
SYSMAC C200HS Installation
Guide
SYSMAC CQM1H Operation
Manual
W235
W236
W363
W364
ix
Product Name
CQM1/CPM1/CPM1A/SRM1 Programmable Controller
Series
CQM1/CPM1/
CPM1A/SRM1
Manual Name
SYSMAC CQM1/CPM1/CPM1A/
SRM1 Programming Manual
CompoBus/S SRM1 Master Control
Unit
SRM1(-V2)
CPM2C-S Programmable Controller
CPM2C-S
W318
SYSMAC CompoBus/S SRM1
Master Control Units Operation
Manual
SYSMAC CPM2C-S Programma- W377
ble Controllers Operation Manual
CPM1A/CPM2A I/O Link Unit
CPM1A-SRT21
CPM2C I/O Link Unit
CPM2C-SRT21
SYSMAC CPM2A I/O Link Units
Operation Manual
SYSMAC CPM2C I/O Link Units
Operation Manual
Cat. No.
W228
W352
W356
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section
in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and
related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
x
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
xi
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
xii
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
xiii
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the CompoBus/S Units, Programmable Controllers, and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the CompoBus/S and
PLC. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate
a CompoBus/S and PLC system.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-1
Applicable Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3
Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xvi
xvi
xvi
xvii
xviii
xxi
xxi
xxi
xxi
xv
1
Intended Audience
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems,
aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used
improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide
the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for installing and operating OMRON CompoBus/S Units. Be sure to read this manual before operation and keep this
manual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that
can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PLC System to the above-mentioned applications.
3
Safety Precautions
!WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart while the power is being supplied. Doing
so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Do not touch any of the terminals or terminal blocks while the power is being
supplied. Doing so may result in electric shock.
!WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits, i.e., not in the Programmable
Controller (CPU Unit including associated Units; referred to as “PLC”), in
order to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor affecting the PLC operation. Not
doing so may result in serious accidents.
• Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety
measures must be provided in external control circuits.
• The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects
any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed.
As a countermeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be
provided to ensure safety in the system.
xvi
Operating Environment Precautions
4
• The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposition or burning of
the output relays or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided
to ensure safety in the system.
• When the 24-VDC output (service power supply to the PLC) is overloaded
or short-circuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being
turned OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety
measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system.
!WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do
so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
!Caution Execute online edit only after confirming that no adverse effects will be
caused by extending the cycle time. Otherwise, the input signals may not be
readable.
!Caution Confirm safety at the destination node before transferring a program to
another node or editing the I/O area. Doing either of these without confirming
safety may result in injury.
!Caution Tighten the screws on the terminal block of the AC Power Supply Unit to the
torque specified in the operation manual. The loose screws may result in
burning or malfunction.
4
Operating Environment Precautions
!Caution Do not operate the control system in the following places:
• Locations subject to direct sunlight
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified
in the specifications
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases
• Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts
• Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals
• Locations subject to shock or vibration
!Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in
the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity
• Locations close to power supplies
xvii
5
Application Precautions
!Caution The operating environment of the PLC System can have a large effect on the
longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can
lead to malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PLC
System. Be sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life
of the system.
5
Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the CompoBus/S Units or the
PLC.
!WARNING Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly
fatal injury. Always heed these precautions.
• Always connect to 100 Ω or less when installing the Units. Not connecting
to a ground of 100 Ω or less may result in electric shock.
• Always turn OFF the power supplies to the PLC, slaves, and communications before attempting any of the following. Not turning OFF the power
supplies may result in malfunction or electric shock.
• Mounting or dismounting Power Supply Units, I/O Units, CPU Units,
memory casettes, Master Units, or any other Units
• Mounting or dismounting circuits for Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier
terminal blocks
• Assembling the Units or Racks
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches
• Connecting or wiring the cables
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors
!Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation or
the PLC or the system or could damage the PLC or PLC Units. Always heed
these precautions.
• Failsafe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the
event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal
lines, momentary power interruptions, or other causes.
• Provide external interlock circuits, limit circuits, and other safety circuits in
addition to any provided within the PLC to ensure safety.
• Configure the control circuits to turn ON the power supply to I/O slaves
before turning ON the power supply to the PLC (Master Unit). If the I/O
slave power supply is turned ON after the PLC, correct operation may
temporarily not be possible.
• Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to
do so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock.
• Do not drop the Unit or subject it to excessive vibration or shock.
• Be sure that all the Backplane mounting screws, slave mounting screws,
terminal screws, and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque
specified in the relevant manuals. Incorrect tightening torque may result in
malfunction.
• Wire correctly according to specified procedures.
xviii
5
Application Precautions
• Pay careful attention to the polarity (+/−) when connecting the terminal
blocks or connectors. Wrong connections may cause malfunction of the
system.
• Wire all terminals, communications paths, power supplies lines, and I/O
lines with the specified polarity and voltages. Improper wiring may result
in faulty operation.
• Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may result in burning.
• Do not mount the Unit near equipment that generates strong high-frequency noise.
• Leave the label attached to the Unit when wiring to prevent wire clippings
and other foreign matter from entering the Unit. Removing the label may
result in malfunction.
• Remove the label after the completion of wiring to ensure proper heat dissipation. Leaving the label attached may result in malfunction.
• Use crimp terminals for wiring. Do not connect bare stranded wires
directly to terminals. Connection of bare stranded wires may result in
burning.
• Wire correctly and double-check all the wiring or the setting switches
before turning ON the power supply. Incorrect wiring may result in burning.
• Be sure that the terminal blocks, connectors, expansion cables, and other
items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper locking
may result in malfunction.
• Disconnect the LG and GR terminals on the Power Supply Unit before
performing insulation resistance or dielectric strength tests.
• Always use the power supply voltage specified in the operation manual.
An incorrect voltage may result in malfunction or burning.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the
rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places
where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result
in malfunction.
• Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input voltage. Excess voltages may result in burning.
• Do not apply voltages exceeding the maximum switching capacity to Output Units. The Output Units may be destroyed.
• Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on
the Unit. Not checking the program may result in an unexpected operation.
• Always turn OFF the power supplies to the PLC, slaves, and communications before attempting any of the following. Not turning OFF the power
supply may result in malfunction or electric shock.
• Mounting or dismounting Power Supply Units, I/O Units, CPU Units,
memory casettes Master Unit, or any other Units
• Mounting or dismounting circuits for Remote I/O Terminals with 3-tier
terminal blocks.
• Assembling the Units
• Setting DIP switches or rotary switches
• Connecting or wiring the cables
xix
5
Application Precautions
• Connecting or disconnecting the connectors
• Before touching the Unit, be sure to first touch a grounded metallic object
in order to discharge any static built-up. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage.
• Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting
any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• Changing the operating mode of the PLC. (including the Startup Mode
setting)
• Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory.
• Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory.
• When replacing parts, be sure to confirm that the rating of a new part is
correct. Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning.
• Resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit and/or Special I/O Units the contents of the DM and HR Areas required for resuming
operation. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation.
• When transporting the Units, use special packing boxes and protect them
from excessive vibration or shock during transportation.
• Connect all communications cables within the limits given in the specifications.
• Observe the following precautions when wiring communications cables.
• Separate the communications cables from power lines or high-tension
lines.
• Do not bend the communications cables.
• Do not pull on the communications cables with an excessive force.
• Do not place heavy objects on the communications cables.
• Be sure to put the communications cables inside conduits.
• Water-resistant Terminals used as Slaves are of IP67 construction. Do not
attempt to use the Watertight Terminals for applications where the Watertight Terminals are always underwater.
• Install the Unit properly as specified in the operation manual. Improper
installation of the Unit may result in malfunction.
xx
6
Conformance to EC Directives
6
Conformance to EC Directives
6-1
Applicable Directives
• EMC Directives
6-2
Concepts
EMC Directives
OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives also conform to the related
EMC standards so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the
overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to
EMC standards (see the following note). Whether the products conform to the
standards in the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by
the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of
the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed.
The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices
and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are listed in the
following table.
Unit
EMS (Electromagnetic
Susceptibility)
C200HW-SRM21-V1
CS1W-SRM21
EN61131-2
EN61131-2
CJ1W-SRM21
CQM1-SRM21-V1
EN61000-6-2 (See note 1.)
EN61131-2
EMI (Electromagnetic
Interference)
EN61000-6-4 (See note 2.)
SRM1-C0@-V2
EN61000-6-2 (See note 1.)
CPM2C-S@@@C(-DRT) EN61131-2
SRT1 and SRT2 Series
Note
EN61000-6-2 (See note 1.)
1. These products have configurations with less than 30 m of I/O wiring, and
less than 10 m of power supply wiring.
2. Radiated emission for EN61000-6-4: 10-m regulations
6-3
Conformance to EC Directives
Observe the follow precautions when installing the CompoBus/S Units that
conform to the EC Directives.
1,2,3...
1. Since the CompoBus/S Units are classified as built-in types, be sure to install the Units inside a control panel.
2. Provide reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC Power Supplies that are used as power sources for the alarm output, communications
circuits, and I/O circuits.
3. The CompoBus/S Units that conform to the EC Directives also conforms
to the Common Emission Standard (EN61000-6-4). When incorporated
into a device, however, the requirements may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel to be used, relationship with other devices to
be connected, wiring, etc. Users are therefore requested to confirm Unit
conformance to the EC Directives by themselves.
xxi
SECTION 1
System Design
This section provides an overview of the CompoBus/S System and functions, and describes the various Masters, Slaves,
and connection devices that are used to configure a CompoBus/S System.
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
System Overview and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-1-1
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-1-2
Network Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
1-1-3
Communications Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
CompoBus/S System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
1-2-1
Basic System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
1-2-2
CompoBus/S System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
Compatible Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
1-3-1
Compatible Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
1-3-2
Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
1-3-3
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
1-3-4
Connectors/Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
1
Section 1-1
System Overview and Features
1-1
1-1-1
System Overview and Features
System Overview
The CompoBus/S System is a remote I/O communications system with
reduced wiring that retains the functionality and ease of use of the original
remote I/O system (wired type), while providing higher-speed, longer-distance, and highly reliable communications.
The CompoBus/S System allows connection of up to 32 I/O devices (Slaves)
to a Master Unit using only two signal wires, even on long production lines that
require multiple I/O control.
Connect up to 32 Slaves
(256 Points) for Each
Master Unit
Each CompoBus/S Master Unit can be connected to up to 32 Slaves of various types, including I/O Terminals and Sensor Terminals, and allows I/O communications for up to 256 points (128 inputs, 128 outputs).
CompoBus/S Master Unit
SYSMAC CS Series, C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E,
C200HS, CJ Series, CQM1/CQM1H
(SRM1, CPM2C-S)
Main line length: 500 m max.
Terminator
Slaves
Up to 32 Slaves of various types
Flexible Wiring Configuration
CompoBus/S Master Unit
SYSMAC CS Series, C200HX/HG/
HE-(Z)E, C200HS, CJ Series, CQM1/
CQM1H (SRM1, CPM2C-S)
Total length: 200 m max.
Terminator
Up to 32 Slaves of various types
I/O Data Exchange without
Special Programming
2
I/O data can be exchanged between the Master and Slaves without requiring
any special ladder programming for communications. I/O information for each
Slave is exchanged between Slaves and the corresponding I/O Area in the
Master by simply setting the node number of each Slave.
Section 1-1
System Overview and Features
Input Slave
CPU Unit's I/O Area
Word
CIO
2000
CIO
2001
OUT
data
CIO
2002
to
CIO
2007
CIO
2008
IN
data
CIO
2009
CIO
2010
to
CIO
2015
Bit
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
to
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
00 to 07
08 to 15
to
00 to 07
08 to 15
Node number
00
01
02
03
04
05
to
14
15
00
01
02
03
04
05
to
14
15
Output
OUT node 0
8-point Output Slave
OUT node 2
16-point Output Slave
Input
Example settings using CJ1W-SRM21 Master
Unit with unit #00, connected to 32 Slaves.
1-1-2
IN/OUT node1
8-point Input/
8-point Output
Slave
OUT node 4
8-point Output Slave
IN node 0
8-point Input Slave
IN node 2
32-point Input Slave
IN node 14
16-point Input Slave
Network Features
The CompoBus/S has the following features.
Communications Modes
Select either a High-speed Communications Mode or Long-distance Communications Mode for the CompoBus/S according to the system configuration.
The differences between the High-speed Communications Mode and the
Long-distance Communications Mode are described in 1-1-3 Communications Modes.
Flexible Wiring Up to
200 m
In Long-distance Communications Mode, flexible wiring is possible up to a
total cable length of 200 m with no restrictions on branching or node connections, provided that 4-conductor VCTF cable or Special Flat Cable is used.
Long-distance
Communications Up to
500 m
In Long-distance Communications Mode, communications over the main line
of up to 500 m are possible to control I/O devices in a wide area, provided that
2-conductor VCTF cable is used. In this case, however, each branch line can
be connected to a single Slave only, because the branch line cannot be further branched. Furthermore, the Master must be connected to either end of
the main line.
High-speed
Communications
In High-speed Communications Mode, up to 16 Slaves with 128 I/O points
can be connected with a high-speed communications cycle time of only
0.5 ms. This cycle is fast enough for time-critical factory automation applications.
Water-resistance Slaves
Water-resistant Terminals (IP67) can be used as Slaves to exchange I/O in
places exposed to water. Water-resistant Terminals are, however, available
only when the communications cable is 4-conductor VCTF cable.
Reduced Wiring
A Slave can be connected to a Master or another Slave with just one connecting cable. If the 4-wire Special Flat Cable or 4-conductor VCTF cable is used,
the Slave’s communication power supply is also supplied through the cable,
so floor wiring can be reduced dramatically. Also, special connectors simplify
branching from a main cable.
3
System Overview and Features
Section 1-1
Connecting to 4conductor VCTF Cable
Easy-to-obtain 4-conductor VCTF cable can be used instead of the Special
Flat Cable. Furthermore improvement in the environmental resistance of the
system is possible by using shielded connectors.
Use Both T-branch and
Multidrop Methods
Both the T-branch and multidrop methods can be combined flexibly when wiring. In combination with the floor cables, this wiring feature allows a very flexible system configuration. There are three types of cables (2-conductor VCTF
cable, 4-conductor VCTF cable, and Special Flat Cable), and when the Special Flat Cable is used, T-branch Connectors can be installed by simply snapping the connector on.
Wide Variety of Masters
Master Units are available as Special I/O Units for the CS-series,
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, C200HS, CS-series, CJ-series, and CQM1
PLCs and also available integrated with a CPU for the SRM1 and CPM2C-S.
The variety of Masters provides flexibility in configuring a system to match
your application needs.
Wide Variety of Slaves
Units in a wide range are available as I/O Slaves for a variety of applications.
Such Units include Remote Terminals and Sensor Terminals, which vary with
the number of I/O points or I/O type, Connector Terminals, which allow easy
wiring, and Water-resistant Terminals, which have a better protective construction. There are many Slaves available with advanced functions, including
Analog I/O Terminals for analog-to-digital or digital-to-analog conversion, and
CPM1A/CPM2A/CPM2C I/O Link Units for sharing data with the host PLC.
Easy Startup
The CompoBus/S System can be started just by wiring the cables and making
some simple settings. Replacement of earlier Remote I/O Systems is also
easy.
Slave Node Number
Provided on Indicators
and in PLC Memory
Troubleshooting is easy because the Slave’s node number is shown on the
Master’s indicators if an error occurs with a Slave. When a CS-series,
C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E, or C200HS Master Unit is used, error information is
also stored in PLC memory.
When an error occurs with a Slave using a CS-series or CJ-series Master
Unit, the Slave's node number is stored in the DM Area using the Slave registration function.
Slave Monitoring for
Improved Reliability
Reliability of the CS-series and CJ-series Master Units has been further
improved by the addition of the following functions.
Slave Registration Function
Registering Slaves in the Master allows the user to check whether connected
Slaves are joined to the network, and to detect whether Slaves are illegally
joined due to incorrect connection, or missing from the network due to a delay
in startup or malfunction of registered Slaves.
Communications Stop Mode
System malfunctions can be avoided by setting remote I/O communications to
stop when a communications error occurs.
4
Section 1-1
System Overview and Features
1-1-3
Communications Modes
Both High-speed Communications Mode and the Long-distance Communications Mode are supported by the CompoBus/S.
Item
High-speed Communications Mode
Long-distance Communications Mode
Communications baud
rate
750 kbps
93.75 kbps
Communications cycle
time
0.5 ms or 0.8 ms (depending 4.0 ms or 6.0 ms (dependon maximum number of I/O ing on maximum number of
points)
I/O points)
The communications distance and the connection configuration vary with the
communications mode and communications cable.
Cable
High-speed Communications
Mode
Long-distance Communications Mode
2-conductor
VCTF cable
Length of main line: 100 m max.
Length of branch line: 3 m max.
Total length of branch lines:
50 m max.
Length of main line: 500 m max.
Length of branch line: 6 m max.
Total length of branch lines:
120 m max.
4-conductor
VCTF cable
Length of main line: 30 m max.
Length of branch line: 3 m max.
Total length of branch lines: 30 m
max.
Length of main line: 30 m max.
Length of branch line: 3 m max.
Total length of branch lines:
30 m max.
Flexible branching, provided that
the total length of cable is a maximum of 200 m.
Special Flat
Cable
Flexible branching, provided that
the total length of cable is a maximum of 200 m.
Note The I/O response time may be slower when using Long-distance Communications Mode compared with High-speed Communications Mode. Refer to 2-5 I/
O Response Time Characteristics.
5
Section 1-2
CompoBus/S System Configuration
1-2
CompoBus/S System Configuration
1-2-1
Basic System Configuration
Master Unit
Remote Input
Terminals
Photoelectric Sensors,
Proximity Sensors, or
Limit Switches
C200HW-SRM21-V1 for CS1,
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE (-ZE), and C200HS
CS1W-SRM21 for CS Series, CJ1W-SRM21 for CJ Series,
CQM1-SRM21-V1 for all CQM1 PLCs
SRM1 Master Control Unit
CPM2C-S Series
Remote Input
Terminals
(3-tier terminal
block)
Photoelectric Sensors, Proximity Sensors, Limit Switches
Fiber Amplifier
Communications
Units
Fiber
Amplifier
Units
Remote Output Terminals
Remote Output Terminals
(3-tier terminal block)
Remote I/O
Terminals
(3-tier terminal block)
Connector I/O
Terminals
Solenoids or
valves
Photoelectric Sensors or
Proximity Sensors with connectors
Solenoids or
valves
Remote I/O
Module
Sensor Terminals
Analog Input
Terminal
Analog Output
Terminal
CPM2A or
CPM1A
Terminal-block Terminator
I/O Link Unit for
CPM1A/CPM2A
PCB
Optical Fiber Sensors
1 to 5 V,
4 to 20 mA
Inverters or valves
Master Characteristics
CS-series, C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E, C200HS Master Units
• Multiple Masters (up to 16) can be connected to a single PLC.
• Up to 128 or 256 I/O points (DIP switch used to switch setting).
• Communications status stored in CPU Unit's I/O Area.
CS-series Master Units
• Multiple Masters (up to 96) can be connected to a single PLC.
• Up to 128 or 256 I/O points (DIP switch used to switch setting).
• Communications status stored in CPU Unit's I/O Area.
• Uses the Slave registration function to monitor which Slaves are joined to
the network.
• Communications can be stopped when a communications error occurs.
CJ-series Master Units
• Multiple Masters (up to 40) can be connected to a single PLC.
• Up to 128 or 256 I/O points (DIP switch used to switch setting).
• Communications status stored in CPU Unit's I/O Area.
6
CompoBus/S System Configuration
Section 1-2
• Uses the Slave registration function to monitor which Slaves are joined to
the network.
• Communications can be stopped when a communications error occurs.
CQM1 Master Units
• Only one Master can be connected to a single PLC.
• Up to 32, 64, or 128 I/O points (DIP switch used to switch setting).
• Alarm output terminal provided to detect errors.
SRM1 and CPM2C-S Master Units with Built-in CPU Units
• Compact CPU Unit with built-in CompoBus/S communications functions.
• Up to 256 I/O points for CompoBus/S functions.
• Communications status stored in CPU Unit's AR Area.
Slave Characteristics
Remote Terminals
• Input or Output Terminals for general-purpose use.
• 4-point, 8-point, and 16-point Transistor Remote Terminals.
• Remote Terminals with no-contact transistor I/O, connector transistor outputs, or relay contact outputs.
Remote Terminals (3-tier Terminal Blocks)
• Input or Output Terminals for general-purpose use.
• 16 points: 8 inputs and 8 outputs mixed.
• Wiring is simple because common terminals for I/O wiring are located at
each point on the 3-tier terminal block.
Connector Terminals
• All I/O wiring can be done using connectors, reducing the amount of labor
for wiring.
• Mounting brackets allow the direction of mounting to be changed.
Water-resistant Terminals
• Input or output terminals of IP67 construction.
• 4 or 8 inputs or outputs.
• Connecting to communications cable, I/O power supply, and I/O through
shielded connectors.
Remote I/O Modules
• Modular type that allows PCB mounting.
• 16-input model and 16-output model.
• User’s devices can be customized as CompoBus/S Slaves.
Sensor Terminals
• Easily connects to Photoelectric Sensor or Proximity Sensor with XS8
Connectors.
• 8-input/8-output model and 4-input/4-output model.
• Remote teaching and external diagnosis are possible by using output signals of the Sensor Terminal.
Fiber Amplifier Communications Units
• Reduced wiring with ON/OFF output and power supply wiring not
required.
• Connecting a Fiber Amplifier Unit allows connection of up to 14 Optical
Fiber Sensors.
7
Section 1-2
CompoBus/S System Configuration
• Mobile Console can be connected without the Head (Photoelectric Sensor setting, teaching, and adjustment can be executed on site.)
Analog Input Terminals
• Convert analog inputs to binary data.
• The number of analog input points can be switched between 4 points, 3
points, 2 points, and 1 point using a DIP switch.
• The following input ranges are supported:
0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, –10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
Analog Output Terminals
• Convert binary data to analog outputs.
• The number of analog output points can be switched between 2 points
and 1 point using a DIP switch.
• Supports the following output ranges:
1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, –10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
I/O Link Terminals for CPM1A/CPM2A
• Create I/O Links (8 inputs, 8 outputs) with CPM1A and CPM2A PLCs.
CPM2C I/O Link Unit
• Creating I/O Links (8 inputs, 8 outputs) with CPM2C-series PLCs.
1-2-2
CompoBus/S System Components
System with Distinct Main and Branch Lines
The diagram below shows a CompoBus/S System in which the main line must
be distinguished from the branch lines under either of the following conditions.
• The system operates in High-speed Communications Mode.
• The system operates in Long-distance Communications Mode with 2-conductor VCTF cable. (The maximum length of the main line varies with the
type of communications cable.)
Communications Cable
Terminator
Master
Communications Power
Supply
Slave
Slave Slave
Slave Slave
Slave
Main line
Branch line
T: T-branch connection
M: Multidrop connection
Power supply cable
Master
The Master administers the CompoBus/S System and manages the external
I/O of the Slaves. There is only 1 Master in a CompoBus/S System and the
Master must be connected at the end of the main line, as shown in the preceding diagram.
Slaves
The external I/O connected to the Slaves is processed by communicating with
the Master through the CompoBus/S System.
Main/Branch Lines
The main line is the main cable that connects the two most distant points of
the system. Cables branching from the main line are known as branch lines.
Cables
CompoBus/S communications are transmitted through 2-conductor VCTF, 4conductor VCTF, or Special Flat Cable. When 4-conductor VCTF or Special
8
Section 1-2
CompoBus/S System Configuration
Flat Cable is used, the communications power supply can be supplied through
the cable. The system shown in the preceding diagram uses 4-conductor
VCTF or Special Flat Cable. When 2-conductor VCTF cable is used, power
must be supplied to the Slaves through a separate cable.
Connection Methods
Two methods can be used to connect CompoBus/S Slaves: the T-branch
method and the multidrop method. With the T-branch method, the Slave is
connected to a branch line which branches off from the main line. With the
multidrop method, the Slave is connected directly to the main line.
These two connection methods can both be used in the same system,
although it is not possible to make a secondary branch from a branch line.
Use OMRON’s Branch Connector, a T-joint for a shielded connector, or a commercially available terminal block to create a branch from the main line.
Terminator
A terminator must be connected to the end of the main line opposite the Master in order to stabilize communications. There are three kinds of terminating
resistors available, a connector for use with Special Flat Cable, a terminal
block, and a shielded connector.
System with No Distinction between Main and Branch Lines
The diagram below shows a CompoBus/S System in which it is not necessary
to distinguish between the main line and branch lines. This applies to the following conditions.
• The system operates in Long-distance Communications Mode with 4-conductor VCTF cable.
• The system operates in Long-distance Communications Mode with Special Flat Cable.
(The maximum length of cable is 200 m regardless of the type of communications cable.)
Communications Power
Supply
Master
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Terminator
Slave
Slave
Communications cable
Power supply cable
Slave
Slave
T: T-branch connection
M: Multidrop connection
Master
The Master administers the CompoBus/S System and manages the external
I/O of the Slaves. There is only one Master in a CompoBus/S System and the
Master can be connected anywhere.
Slaves
The external I/O connected to the Slaves is processed by communicating with
the Master through the CompoBus/S System.
9
Section 1-3
Compatible Devices
Cables
CompoBus/S communications are transmitted through Special Flat Cable or
4-conductor VCTF cable. The communications power supply can be supplied
through either of the cables.
Connection Methods
Two methods can be used to connect the CompoBus/S Master and Slaves:
the T-branch method and the multidrop method. With the T-branch method,
the Slave is connected to a line that branches off from the communications
cable wherever desired. With the multidrop method, the Master or Slave is
connected directly to the communications cable. These two connection methods can both be used in the same system and it is possible to make a secondary branch from a branch line. Use OMRON’s Branch Connector for Special
Flat Cable, a T-joint for a shielded connector, or a commercially available terminal block to create a branch from the communications cable.
Terminator
A terminator must be connected to the end of the communications cable farthest from the Master in order to stabilize communications. There are three
kinds of terminating resistors available, a connector for use with Special Flat
Cable, a terminal block, and a shielded connector. In a system in which distinguishing between the main and branch lines is not necessary, only a single
terminator farthest from the Master is required regardless of the position the
Master is connected to the communications cable.
1-3
Compatible Devices
1-3-1
Compatible Masters
Masters with
Communications
Functions
PLC
C200HX-CPU3@(Z)E/ CPU4@-(Z)E,
C200HG-CPU3@(Z)E/CPU4@-(Z)E,
C200HE, C200HS
There are three types of Master Units which can be used in CompoBus/S
Systems. The model of the Master Unit which must be used depends on the
PLC being used.
C200HX-CPU5@(Z)E/ CPU6@-(Z)E/
CPU8@-(Z)E,
C200HG-CPU5@(Z)E/ CPU6@-(Z)E,
CS Series
CS Series
C200HW-SRM21-V1
Communications
mode
High-speed Communications Mode or Long-distance Communications Mode (switched using the DIP switch
on front panel)
Analog I/O
Terminal
connection
Max. number of Masters
Possible
10
CJ1W-SRM21
CQM1, CQM1H
Master
Unit
Master
Unit
mounting
location
CS1W-SRM21
CJ Series
10 Units (when
16 Units (when
96 Units (when
40 Units
using a single Spe- using a single Spe- using a single Special I/O Unit node
cial I/O Unit node
cial I/O Unit node
number (i.e., 10
number (i.e., 10
number (i.e., 10
words))
words))
words))
5 Units (when using 8 Units (when using 95 Units (when
two Special I/O Unit two Special I/O Unit using two Special
node number (i.e.,
node number (i.e.,
I/O Unit node num20 words))
20 words))
ber (i.e., 20 words))
Can be mounted on the CPU Backplane or Expansion I/O Back- Can be connected
plane. Can’t be mounted on a SYSMAC BUS Slave (RT) Rack. in the CPU Rack or
Expansion Rack.
CQM1-SRM21-V1
CQM1: 1 Unit
CQM1H: Up to the
number corresponding to the maximum
I/O points for the
CPU Unit.
No restrictions.
Section 1-3
Compatible Devices
PLC
C200HX-CPU3@(Z)E/ CPU4@-(Z)E,
C200HG-CPU3@(Z)E/CPU4@-(Z)E,
C200HE, C200HS
C200HX-CPU5@(Z)E/ CPU6@-(Z)E/
CPU8@-(Z)E,
C200HG-CPU5@(Z)E/ CPU6@-(Z)E,
CS Series
CS Series
CJ Series
CQM1, CQM1H
Max. num- 256 points (128 inputs/128 outputs) or 128 points (64 inputs/64 outputs)
ber of I/O
The max. number of I/O points depends on the DIP switch settings.
points per The area allocated to Special I/O Units is used for I/O.
Master
CQM1-CPU11-E/
21-E:
32 points (16 inputs/
16 outputs) or
64 points (32 inputs/
32 outputs)
CQM1-CPU41-EV1/
42-EV1/
43-EV1/44-EV1:
32 points (16
inputs/16 outputs)
or
64 points (32
inputs/32 outputs)
or
128 points
(64 inputs/
64 outputs)
The max. number of
I/O points depends
on the DIP switch
settings.
The IR area is used
for I/O.
Number of 8-point mode
points per
node number
8-point mode
8-point mode or 4point mode
Number of IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7 or IN0 to
usable
IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15
node numbers per
Master
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7 or IN0 to
IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15
Master
Not required. (Power is supplied from the
Unit power PLC.)
supply
Not required. (Power is supplied from the
PLC.)
When 8 points are
used per node:
IN0 to IN1/OUT0
to OUT1 or
IN0 to IN3/OUT0
to OUT3 or
IN0 to IN7/OUT0
to OUT7
When 4 points are
used per node:
IN0 to IN3/OUT0
to OUT3 or
IN0 to IN7/OUT0
to OUT7 or
IN0 to IN15/OUT0
to OUT15
Not required.
(Power is supplied
from the PLC.)
11
Section 1-3
Compatible Devices
PLC
C200HX-CPU3@(Z)E/ CPU4@-(Z)E,
C200HG-CPU3@(Z)E/CPU4@-(Z)E,
C200HE, C200HS
C200HX-CPU5@(Z)E/ CPU6@-(Z)E/
CPU8@-(Z)E,
C200HG-CPU5@(Z)E/ CPU6@-(Z)E,
CS Series
CS Series
Terminal
Not provided
for connecting
communications
power supply for
Slaves
CJ Series
Provided
CQM1, CQM1H
Not provided
Status indi- The PLC’s AR Area contains the active
The PLC’s Auxiliary Area contains the
There is an alarm
cators
node flags and communications error flags active node flags and communications
output terminal in
for each Slave.
error flags for each Slave. The DM Area
the terminal block.
contains an area for Slave registration and
setting communications stop mode.
Note
1. Previous Master Unit models (without -V1), which do not support the Longdistance Communications Mode, cannot be used when an Analog I/O Terminal is connected as a Slave. If used, incorrect data may be transmitted.
2. Refer to SECTION 4 Master Unit Specifications and Operations for more
details on the Master Units.
Master with Built-in CPU
The following Master Control Unit models, which have a built-in CPU Unit, are
used for distributed I/O control in CompoBus/S Systems. Refer to the SRM1
Master Control Unit Operation Manual (W318-E1-@) and the CPM2C-S PLC
Operation Manual (W377-E1-@) for details.
SRM1 Master Control Unit
Item
Master Control Unit
SRM1-CPU01-V2
SRM1-CPU02-V2
Peripheral port
RS-232C port
Yes
---
Yes
Yes
Program capacity
Max. number of I/O points
4K words
256 (128 inputs/128 outputs)
Communications mode
High-speed Communications Mode or Long-distance
Communications Mode (switched using PLC Setup)
Number of points per node
number
8-point mode
Number of usable node
numbers per Master
Status indicators
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7 or IN0 to IN15 and
OUT0 to OUT15
The PLC’s AR Area contains the active node flags and
communications error flags for each Slave.
CPM2C-S PLC
The CPM2C-S PLC has built-in CompoBus/S Master and DeviceNet Slave
functions. Models that support I/O links with host PLCs are available as well.
Item
12
Master Control Unit
CPM2C-S@@@C
CPM2C-S@@@C-DRT
Peripheral port
RS-232C port
The same connector is used.
Program capacity
Max. number of I/O points
4K words
256 (128 inputs/128 outputs)
Communications mode
High-speed Communications Mode or Long-distance
Communications Mode (switched using PLC Setup)
Section 1-3
Compatible Devices
Item
Master Control Unit
CPM2C-S@@@C
CPM2C-S@@@C-DRT
Number of points per node
number
Number of usable node
numbers per Master
Status indicators
DeviceNet Slave function
Master Units and
Corresponding
Communications Modes
8-point mode
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7 or IN0 to IN15 and OUT0
to OUT15
The PLC’s AR Area contains the active node flags and
communications error flags for each Slave.
Not provided
Provided
Master Units support only High-speed Communications Mode or both Highspeed Communications Mode and Long-distance Communications Mode.
Slave Analog Terminals can be connected to the Units that support both Highspeed and Long-distance Communications Modes. These Units are an
upgraded version and, by switching the communications mode, can be used
instead of the Units that support only the High-speed Communications Mode.
Item
Unit supporting
High-speed Communications only
Communications modes
High-speed Communica- Yes
tions Mode
Long-distance Communi- No
cations Mode
Analog I/O Terminal connections
No
Unit supporting
High-speed and
Long-distance
Communications
Yes
Yes
Yes
The following models are available.
PLC
Units supporting
High-speed Communications
C200HW-SRM21
Units supporting Highspeed and Long-distance
Communications
C200HW-SRM21-V1
---
CS1W-SRM21
CJ-series Master Units
CQM1 Master Units
--CQM1-SRM21
CJ1W-SRM21
CQM1-SRM21-V1
SRM1
SRM1-C0@
SRM1-C0@-V1
SRM1-C0@-V2
CPM2C-S
---
CPM2C-S@@@ (-DRT)
CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/
C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS
Master Units
CS-series Master Units
Note Master Units that do not support Long-distance Communications Mode cannot be used when connecting an Analog Terminal as a Slave. If used, incorrect data may be transmitted.
1-3-2
Slave Units
The SRT1/SRT2 Series provides Slaves that support only High-speed Communications Mode or both High-speed Communications Mode and Long-distance Communications Mode. The SRT2-series Slaves that support Highspeed and Long-distance Communications Modes are an upgraded version
13
Section 1-3
Compatible Devices
and, by switching the communications mode, can be used instead of the
Slaves that support only the High-speed Communications Mode.
Item
Slaves supporting
High-speed Communications
Slave Series
Communications modes
SRT1 Series
Slaves supporting
High-speed and
Long-distance
Communications
SRT2 Series
High-speed Communi- Yes
cations Mode
Yes
Long-distance Communications Mode
Yes
No
Available models are shown in the following table.
Type
Slave
Remote Terminals
with Transistors
14
Previous models
SRT1 Series
New models
SRT2 Series
I/O points
SRT1-ID04
SRT1-ID04-1
SRT2-ID04
SRT2-ID04-1
4 inputs (NPN)
4 inputs (PNP)
SRT1-ID08
SRT1-ID08-1
SRT2-ID08
SRT2-ID08-1
8 inputs (NPN)
8 inputs (PNP)
SRT1-ID16
SRT1-ID16-1
SRT2-ID16
SRT2-ID16-1
16 inputs (NPN)
16 inputs (PNP)
SRT1-ID16T
SRT2-ID16T
SRT1-ID16T-1
SRT2-ID16T-1
SRT1-OD04
SRT2-OD04
16 inputs
(NPN, 3-tier terminal block)
16 inputs
(PNP, 3-tier terminal block)
4 outputs (NPN)
SRT1-OD04-1
SRT1-OD08
SRT2-OD04-1
SRT2-OD08
4 outputs (PNP)
8 outputs (NPN)
SRT1-OD08-1
SRT1-OD16
SRT2-OD08-1
SRT2-OD16
8 outputs (PNP)
16 outputs (NPN)
SRT1-OD16-1
SRT1-OD16T
SRT2-OD16-1
SRT2-OD16T
SRT1-OD16T-1
SRT2-OD16T-1
SRT1-MD16T
SRT2-MD16T
16 outputs (PNP)
16 outputs
(NPN, 3-tier terminal block)
16 outputs
(PNP, 3-tier terminal block)
8 inputs, 8 outputs
(NPN, 3-tier terminal block)
SRT1-MD16T-1
SRT2-MD16T-1
8 inputs, 8 outputs
(PNP, 3-tier terminal block)
Power supply
Multiple supplies
Section 1-3
Compatible Devices
Type
Slave
Connector Terminals (8-point/16point Transistors)
Previous models
SRT1 Series
None
New models
SRT2 Series
SRT2-VID08S
SRT2-VID08S-1
SRT2-VID16ML
SRT2-VID16ML-1
8 outputs
(NPN, sensor connectors)
SRT2-VOD08S-1
8 outputs
(PNP, sensor connectors)
SRT2-VOD16ML
16 outputs
(NPN, MIL connectors)
16 outputs
(PNP, MIL connectors)
32 inputs
(NPN, MIL connectors)
32 inputs
(PNP, MIL connectors)
SRT2-ID32ML
SRT2-ID32ML-1
SRT2-OD32ML
32 outputs
(NPN, MIL connectors)
SRT2-OD32ML-1
32 outputs
(PNP, MIL connectors)
SRT2-MD32ML
Remote Terminals
with Power MOS
FETs
Remote I/O Modules
Multiple supplies
SRT1-ROC08
SRT2-ROC08
SRT1-ROC16
SRT1-ROF08
SRT2-ROC16
SRT2-ROF08
16 outputs
8 outputs
SRT1-ROF16
SRT2-ROF16
16 outputs
SRT2-ID04CL
SRT2-ID04CL-1
4 inputs (NPN)
4 inputs (PNP)
SRT2-ID08CL
SRT2-ID08CL-1
8 inputs (NPN)
8 inputs (PNP)
SRT2-OD04CL
SRT2-OD04CL-1
4 outputs (NPN)
4 outputs (PNP)
SRT2-OD08CL
SRT2-OD08CL-1
8 outputs (NPN)
8 outputs (PNP)
SRT1-ID08S
SRT1-ND08S
SRT2-ID08S
SRT2-ND08S
8 inputs
4 inputs, 4 outputs
Network
SRT1-OD08S
SRT2-OD08S
8 outputs
(NPN, connector outputs)
16 inputs (NPN, PCB attachment)
Local
Water-resistant Ter- None
minals (Transistors)
Sensor Terminals
Power supply
16 inputs, 16 outputs
(NPN, MIL connectors)
16 inputs, 16 outputs
(PNP, MIL connectors)
8 outputs
SRT2-MD32ML-1
Remote Terminals
with Relays
8 inputs
(NPN, sensor connectors)
8 inputs
(PNP, sensor connectors)
16 inputs
(NPN, MIL connectors)
16 inputs
(PNP, MIL connectors)
SRT2-VOD08S
SRT2-VOD16ML-1
Connector TermiNone
nals (32-point Transistors)
I/O points
SRT1-ID16P
SRT2-ID16P
SRT1-OD16P
SRT2-OD16P
Local
Multiple supplies
---
16 outputs (NPN, PCB attachment)
15
Section 1-3
Compatible Devices
Type
Slave
Fiber Amplifier
Communications
Unit
Previous models
SRT1 Series
New models
SRT2 Series
I/O points
Power supply
None
E3X-SRT21
8-point input or 16 point input (with Network
Fiber Amplifier Unit connected)
Analog Input Termi- None
nals
SRT2-AD04
Switchable between 4-point, 3point, 2-point, and 1-point analog
input
Analog Output Terminals
None
SRT2-DA02
Switchable between 2-point and 1point analog output
I/O Link Units
None
CPM1A-SRT21
8 inputs, 8 outputs
(For CPM1A/CPM2A)
---
CPM2C I/O Link
Units
None
CPM2C-SRT21
8 inputs, 8 outputs (For CPM2C)
---
Note
1. The power supply requirements are described below. Refer to 2-3 Supplying Power to the Slaves for details on these power supplies.
2. Refer to SECTION 5 Slave Specifications and Operations for details on
Slaves.
Network Power Supply
These Slaves use a single power supply and can be supplied with power from
the Special Flat Cable for CompoBus/S.
Multiple Power Supplies
These Slaves require two separate power supplies for communications and I/
O.
The communications power can be supplied from the Special Flat Cable for
CompoBus/S.
Local Power Supply
These Slaves require a single external power supply. The power cannot be
supplied from the Special Flat Cable for CompoBus/S.
1-3-3
Cables
Cables
The following table lists the cables that can be used in a CompoBus/S System.
Note
Cable
2-conductor VCTF cable
(sold commercially)
Specifications
Vinyl-clad VCTF JIS C 3306
Two 0.75 mm2 conductors (2 signal wires)
Resistance: 25.1 Ω/km at 20°C
Use only 2-conductor VCTF cable.
4-conductor VCTF cable
(sold commercially)
Vinyl-clad VCTF JIS C 3306
Four 0.75 mm2 conductors (2 signal wires and 2 power
supply wires)
Resistance: 25.1 Ω/km at 20°C.
Special Flat Cable
(OMRON SCA1-4F10,
100 m)
Four 0.75 mm2 conductors
(2 signal wires and 2 power supply wires)
Maximum ambient temperature: 60°C
1. Do not use cables other than those specified above.
2. For information on communications cables specified by overseas manufacturers, refer to Appendix Standard Models.
16
Section 1-3
Compatible Devices
The communications distance depends on the cable used, as follows:
Cable
2-conductor VCTF
cable
Mode
Main line
length
High-speed Commu- 100 m max. 3 m max.
nications Mode
Long-distance Communications Mode
4-conductor VCTF
cable
500 m max. 6 m max.
High-speed Commu- 30 m max.
nications Mode
(See note.)
Long-distance Communications Mode
Special Flat Cable
Branch
line length
120 m max.
30 m max.
(See note.)
Flexibly branched, provided that the
total length of cable is a maximum of
200 m.
High-speed Commu- 30 m max.
nications Mode
(See note.)
Long-distance Communications Mode
3 m max.
(See note.)
Total
branch
line length
50 m max.
3 m max.
(See note.)
30 m max.
(See note.)
Flexibly branched, provided that the
total length of cable is a maximum of
200 m.
Note When 4-conductor VCTF cable or Special Flat Cable is used to connect fewer
than 16 Slaves, the main line can be up to 100 m long and the total branch
line length can be up to 50 m in High-speed Communications Mode. (These
are the same conditions as when 2-conductor VCTF cable is used.)
1-3-4
Connectors/Terminal Blocks
The following table lists the connectors that can be used in a CompoBus/S
System.
Connector
Model
Comments
Branch Connector
SCN1-TH4
Use this connector to create a branch line
from the main line.
(Used with Special Flat Cable only.)
Use this connector to extend the Special Flat
Cable.
Extension Connector
SCN1-TH4E
Connector Terminator
SCN1-TH4T
This connector has a built-in terminator.
(Used with Special Flat Cable only.)
Connectors with Cable with a
socket and plug
XS2W-D42@-@81-@
Connector with Cable with a
female socket
XS2F-D42@-@80-@
Connectors with cable used to connect the
Water-resistant Terminal to a T-joint.
Can be used as a power supply cable (with
the female socket connected to the Waterresistant Terminal).
Can be used as an I/O cable for sensors that
have connectors (with the male plug connected to the Water-resistant Terminal, if the
product has a model number suffix “A”).
A connector with cable used to connect the
Water-resistant Terminal to a T-branch connector.
Can be used as a power supply cable (with
the female socket connected to the Waterresistant Terminal) and the other end wired to
a commercially available terminal block.
Connector with Cable with a
male plug
XS2H-D421-@80-A
A connector with a cable used to connect the
Water-resistant Terminal to an I/O device.
Can be used as an I/O cable (with the male
plug connected to the Water-resistant Terminal) and the other end wired to the I/O device.
17
Section 1-3
Compatible Devices
Connector
Connector Socket Assembly
(female for screw, crimp, solder terminals)
Model
XS2C-D4S7
XS2C-D4@@
Connector Plug Assembly
XS2G-D4S7
(male for screw, crimp, solder
terminals)
Comments
A connector used to connect to the communications connector or external power supply
connector of the Water-resistant Terminal or a
T-joint plug.
Applicable cable dia.: 6 to 8 mm
Applicable conductor size: 0.18 to 0.75 mm2
A connector used to connect to the external
power supply connector of the Water-resistant
Terminal or a T-joint plug.
Applicable cable dia.: 3 to 6 mm
Applicable conductor size: 0.18 to 0.3 or 0.5
to 0.75 mm2
A connector used to connect to the T-joint
socket.
Applicable cable dia.: 6 to 8 mm
Applicable conductor size: 0.18 to 0.75 mm2
XS2G-D4@@
T-joint
XS2R-D427-5
Communications Connector
(6 pins)
FK-MCP1.5/6-STF3.81
MC1.5/6-STF-3.81
Shielded Terminator Plug
(Male)
Terminal-block Terminator
Note
SRS2-1
SRS1-T
A connector used to connect to the I/O connector of the Water-resistant Terminal or a Tjoint socket.
Applicable cable dia.: 3 to 6 mm
Applicable conductor size: 0.18 to 0.3 or 0.5
to 0.75 mm2
A joint used to T-branch a VCTF cable (e.g., a
communications cable or power supply
cable).
A communications connector for connecting
CJ-series Master Units. The connector can be
connected simultaneously to the communications cable (BD H, BD L, BS+, BS–) and communications power supply (BS+, BS–).
This connector has screwless terminals for
signal lines and connector lock screws.
A communications connector for connecting
CJ-series Master Units. The connector can be
connected simultaneously to the communications cable (BD H, BD L, BS+, BS–) and communications power supply (BS+, BS–).
This connector has screw terminals for signal
lines and connector lock screws.
A shielded connector terminator model connected to a T-joint.
This terminal block has a built-in terminator.
(Can be used with VCTF cable and Special
Flat Cable.)
1. Connect a terminator (Connector Terminator, Shield Terminator, or Terminal-block Terminator) to the following point in the system.
• System with Distinction between Main and Branch Lines: The end of
the main line farthest from the Master.
• System with No Distinction Main and Branch Lines: The end of the
communications cable farthest from the Master.
2. Use a commercially available terminal block or T-joint to branch or extend
VCTF cable.
18
Section 1-3
Compatible Devices
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions (after assembly). All dimensions
are in mm.
SCN1-TH4 Branch Connector
18.5
15
20
17
SCN1-TH4E Extension Connector
18.5
15
20
17
SCN1-TH4T Connector Terminator
18.5
15
20
17
SCN1
1
Connectors with Cables
XS2W-D42(-(81-( (socket and plug)
Plug (male)
Socket (female)
XS2F-D42(-(80-( (socket on one end)
Socket (female)
XS2H-D421-(80-A (plug on one end)
Plug (male)
19
Section 1-4
Startup Procedure
Connector Assembly
Socket (Female)
(Crimp terminals/Solder terminals)
XS2C-D4S7 (Communications)
XS2C-D4(( (Power supply and I/O)
Plug (Male)
(Crimp terminals/Solder terminals)
XS2G-D4S7 (Communications)
XS2G-D4(( (Power supply and I/O)
Socket (female)
Plug (male)
XS2R-D427-5 T-joint
Socket (female)
Socket (female)
Plug (male)
SRS2-1 Shield Terminator Plug (male)
Plug (male)
21
SRS1-T Terminal-block Terminator
20
40
20
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
30±0.2
1-4
Startup Procedure
The standard procedure for starting up the CompoBus/S System is as follows:
Selecting Master and
Slave
Select the Master and Slaves according to the following items.
• PLC model being used (Refer to 1-3-1 Compatible Masters and SECTION
4 Master Unit Specifications and Operations.)
• Number of Slaves (Refer to 1-3-1 Compatible Masters)
• Maximum I/O points (Refer to 1-3-1 Compatible Masters)
• Slave I/O types (Refer to 1-3-2 Slave Units and SECTION 5 Slave Specifications and Operations)
Determining the
Communications Mode
Determine the communications mode according to the following items.
• Communications distance (Refer to 2-2-2 Maximum Cable Length)
• I/O response time (Refer to 2-5 I/O Response Time Characteristics)
Determining System
Configuration
20
Determine the CompoBus/S System configuration according to the following
items. Select the devices required for connection (such as connectors, terminal blocks, and terminators) according to the system configuration.
Section 1-4
Startup Procedure
• Arrangement of Master and Slaves (Refer to page 8 and page 25.)
• Cable types applicable for the communications distance and communications mode (Refer to page 16 and page 29.)
• Connection methods (Refer to page 8 and page 27.)
• Methods for supplying communications and I/O power supplies (Refer to
page 31.)
• Connectors and terminal block models (Refer to page 6 and page 27.)
Setting the Master Unit
Set the Master Unit according to the model used, referring to SECTION 4
Master Unit Specifications and Operations.
CS-series, C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Master Units (C200HWSRM21-V1)
• Special I/O Unit unit number
• Number of nodes that can be connected
• Communications mode
CS-series Master Units (CS1W-SRM21)
• Special I/O Unit unit number
• Number of nodes that can be connected
• Communications mode
• Slave registration function (Set in DM Area while connected to the PLC.)
• Communications stop mode setting function
CJ-series Master Units
• Special I/O Unit unit number
• Number of nodes that can be connected
• Communications mode
• Slave registration function (Set in DM Area while connected to the PLC.)
• Communications stop mode setting function
CQM1 Master Units
• Number of words allocated to the CPU
• Number of bits allocated for each node number
• Communications mode
Setting the Slaves
Set the Slave Units, referring to SECTION 5 Slave Specifications and Operations.
• Node number
• Communications mode
• Settings specific to each Slave (such as output holding/clearing when
communications errors occur)
Wiring
Wire and connect the communications cables, communications power supply,
I/O power supply, referring to the device specifications in SECTION 4 Master
Unit Specifications and Operations, SECTION 5 Slave Specifications and
Operations, and wiring information in SECTION 3 CompoBus/S System Wiring.
Starting and Checking
Operations
Start the CompoBus/S System and check the Master and Slave operations,
referring to SECTION 6 Starting Communications.
Starting Operations
Start operating the Master and Slaves.
21
SECTION 2
CompoBus/S System Specifications and Configuration
This section provides information on CompoBus/S System specifications, methods used to configure a CompoBus/S
System, and I/O response times.
2-1
2-2
2-3
Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
2-2-1
Main Line/Branch Line Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
2-2-2
Maximum Cable Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
2-2-3
Terminator Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
Supplying Power to the Slaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
2-3-1
Using 2-conductor VCTF Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
2-3-2
Using 4-conductor VCTF or Special Flat Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
2-3-3
Limitations of Communications Cable Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . .
35
2-4
System Configuration Using Water-resistant Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
2-5
I/O Response Time Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
2-5-1
Slaves Other Than Analog Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
2-5-2
Slave Analog Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
2-5-3
Slave I/O Delay Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
23
Section 2-1
Communications Specifications
2-1
Communications Specifications
This section provides specifications for the CompoBus/S System.
Item
Communications method
Communications baud rate
Specification
Special CompoBus/S protocol
Modulation method
High-speed Communications Mode: 750 kbps
Long-distance Communications Mode: 93.75 kbps
Baseband method
Coding method
Error control checks
Manchester coding method
Manchester code check, frame length check, and parity check
Cable
Communications
distance
VCTF cable
(JIS C 3306)
Two 0.75 mm2 conductors (2 signal wires)
Four 0.75 mm2 conductors (2 signal wires and 2 power supply wires)
Special Flat Cable Four 0.75 mm2 conductors (2 signal wires and 2 power supply wires)
2-conductor VCTF High-speed Communications Mode
cable
Main line length:
100 m max.
Branch line length:
3 m max.
Total branch line length: 50 m max.
Long-distance Communications Mode
Main line length:
500 m max.
Branch line length:
6 m max.
Total branch line length: 120 m max.
4-conductor VCTF High-speed Communications Mode
cable
Main line length:
30 m max.
Branch line length:
3 m max.
Total branch line length: 30 m max.
Long-distance Communications Mode: Flexibly branched, provided that the
total length of cable is a maximum of 200 m.
Special Flat Cable High-speed Communications Mode
Main line length:
30 m max.
Branch line length:
3 m max.
Total branch line length: 30 m max.
When 4-conductor VCTF cable or Special Flat Cable is used to connect fewer
than 16 Slaves, the main line can be up to 100 m long and the total branch line
length can be up to 50 m in High-speed Communications Mode.
Long-distance Communications Mode: Flexibly branched, provided that the
total length of cable is a maximum of 200 m.
24
Section 2-2
System Configuration
Item
Specification
I/O points, Slaves,
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit (used for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and
usable node
C200HS PLCs), CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit (used for CS-series PLCs), CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit
numbers, and
(used for CJ-series PLCs), SRM1 Master Control Unit, and CPM2C-S PLC.
communications
Max. number of I/O points: 64 inputs/64 outputs
cycle time
Usable node numbers:
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7
Communications cycle time:
High-speed Communications Mode:
0.5 ms
Long-distance Communications Mode:
4.0 ms
Max. number of I/O points: 128 inputs/128 outputs
Usable node numbers:
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15
Communications cycle time:
High-speed Communications Mode:
0.8 ms
Long-distance Communications Mode:
6.0 ms
CQM1-SRM21-V1 Master Unit (Used in CQM1 PLCs.)
Max. number of I/O points: 64 inputs/64 outputs
Usable node numbers:
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7 (8-point mode)
Communications cycle time:
High-speed Communications Mode:
0.5 ms
Long-distance Communications Mode:
4.0 ms
Usable node numbers:
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15 (4-point mode)
Communications cycle time:
High-speed Communications Mode:
0.8 ms
Long-distance Communications Mode:
6.0 ms
Max. number of I/O points: 32 inputs/32 outputs
Usable node numbers:
IN0 to IN3 and OUT0 to OUT3 (8-point mode)
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7 (4-point mode)
Communications cycle time:
High-speed Communications Mode:
0.5 ms
Long-distance Communications Mode:
4.0 ms
Max. number of I/O points: 16 inputs/16 outputs
Usable node numbers:
IN0 to IN1 and OUT0 to OUT1 (8-point mode)
IN0 to IN3 and OUT0 to OUT3 (4-point mode)
Communications cycle time:
High-speed Communications Mode:
0.5 ms
Long-distance Communications Mode:
4.0 ms
Note
1. Refer to the I/O allocations for each Master Unit in SECTION 4 Master Unit
Specifications and Operations for details. For details on the SRM1, refer to
the CompoBus/S SRM1 Master Control Units Operation Manual (W318).
For details on the CPM2C-S PLC, refer to the CPM2C-S PLC Operation
Manual (W377).
2. The 8-point mode and 4-point mode indicate the number of I/O points allocated to each node number. For details, refer to 4-4-3 I/O Allocations in
CQM1 PLCs.
2-2
2-2-1
System Configuration
Main Line/Branch Line Connections
This section describes the connections to the main line and branch lines in the
CompoBus/S System. When the system has a main line distinguished from
the branch lines, the CompoBus/S communications cable is made with the
main line and branch lines. The main line connects the Master and the terminator while the branch lines are branched from the main line. The main and
branch lines are different in usage but they are the same cable type. When the
system has no main line distinguished from the branch lines, the communications cable can be connected with no special restrictions.
25
Section 2-2
System Configuration
Restrictions on
Connections
The following restrictions apply to CompoBus/S connections:
System with Distinction between Main and Branch Lines
The following diagram shows a CompoBus/S System configuration in which
the main line must be distinguished from the branch lines under either of the
following conditions.
• The system operates in High-speed Communications Mode.
• The system operates in Long-distance Communications Mode with 2-conductor VCTF cable.
Communications Cable
Terminator
Master
Communications Power
Supply
Slave
Slave Slave
Slave Slave
Slave
Main line
Branch line
T: T-branch connection
M: Multidrop connection
Power supply cable
(Communications power is supplied to each Slave
separately when 2-conductor VCTF cable is used.)
• The main line is the cable that connects the ends of the system. The maximum length of the main line depends on the communications mode, the
type of cable, and the number of Slaves being used. Refer to 2-2-2 Maximum Cable Length for details.
• A branch line is any cable that branches off the main line. The maximum
length of a single branch line and the maximum total length of all branch
lines in a CompoBus/S system vary according to the communications
mode, the types of cables used, and the number of Slaves. Refer to 2-2-2
Maximum Cable Length for details.
• The Master must be connected at one end of the main cable and the terminator must be connected at the other end. The Master cannot be connected at a point along the main line or on a branch line.
• Only one Master can be connected in the CompoBus/S System. The
range of usable node numbers that can be connected depends on the
model of Master being used and its settings. Refer to 2-1 Communications Specifications for details.
• Only one Slave can be connected to each branch line. It is not possible to
branch again from a branch line.
• There are three types of cable that can be used (2-conductor VCTF cable,
4-conductor VCTF, and Special Flat Cable), but it is not possible to use
more than one type of cable in the same CompoBus/S System.
System with No Distinction between Main and Branch Lines
The following diagram shows a CompoBus/S System configuration in which
no distinction is required between the main line and the branch lines under
either of the following conditions.
• The system operates in Long-distance Communications Mode with 4-conductor VCTF cable
• The system operates in Long-distance Communications Mode with Special Flat Cable
26
Section 2-2
System Configuration
Communications Power
Supply
Master
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Terminator
Slave
Slave
Communications cable
Power supply cable
Slave
Slave
T: T-branch connection
M: Multidrop connection
• When the system operates in Long-distance Communications Mode with
Special Flat Cable or 4-conductor VCTF cable used, there will be no need
to distinguish main and branch lines for the system. It is not, however,
possible to use more than one type of cable in the same CompoBus/S
system.
• The maximum length of cable used for the CompoBus/S system is 200 m
regardless of the type of communications cable.
• Only a single terminator farthest from the Master is required regardless of
the position the Master is connected to the communications cable.
• More than a single Master cannot be connected to the CompoBus/S System. The possible range of node numbers varies with the type of Master
and settings in the Master. Refer to 2-1 Communications Specifications
Specifications for details.
Connection Methods
The Master and Slaves can be connected by either the T-branch method or
the multidrop method.
T-branch Method
In the T-branch method, a branch connector, a commercially available terminal block, or a T-joint is used to create a branch from the main line and connect a Slave when the main line is distinguished from branch lines. The
maximum length of the branch line varies according to the communications
mode and the type of cable used. For details, refer to 2-2-2 Maximum Cable
Length. A secondary branch cannot be connected to the branch line when the
main line is distinguished from branch lines.
System with Distinction between System with No Distinction between
Main and Branch Lines
Main and Branch Lines
Cable
Main line
Branch line
Slave
Cable
Node
The actual wiring for T-branch connections is given next.
27
Section 2-2
System Configuration
1,2,3...
1. Branch Connector
When using Special Flat Cable, connect a Branch Connector to the main
line to create a branch, as shown in the following diagram.
Main line cable
Branch line cable
Special CompoBus/S
Connector
2. Terminal Block Connector
A commercially available relay terminal block (a terminal block in which the
opposite terminals are connected) can be used to create a branch line, as
shown in the following diagram.
Main line cable
Main line cable
Communications cable
High side (BD H)
Communications cable
Low side (BD L)
Shorting bar
Shorting bar
Relay terminal block
Communications cable
High side (BD H)
Communications cable
Low side (BD L)
Branch line cable
3. T-joint
When 4-conductor VCTF cable is used, use a T-joint to branch the line as
shown below.
T-joint
Cable
Socket (female)
Cable
Plug (male)
Plug (male)
Cable
Multidrop Method
In the multidrop method, nodes are connected directly to the cable. It is not
necessary to create a new branch line or use special connectors with the mul-
28
Section 2-2
System Configuration
tidrop method. When the main line is distinguished from branch lines, Slaves
must be connected to the main line.
System with Distinction between System with No Distinction between
Main and Branch Lines
Main and Branch Lines
Cable
Main line
Slave
Node
The actual wiring for multidrop connections is shown in the following diagram.
The Slave is connected to the signal wires from the Master side of the system
as well as the signal wires from the terminator side of the system.
Connects to the
Connects to the
Slave's BD L terminal. Slave's BD H terminal.
Main line cable from the
Master or previous Slave
Main line cable to the
next Slave or terminator
Communications cable
Low side (BD L)
2-2-2
Communications cable
High side (BD H)
Maximum Cable Length
The main line length is the total length of the cable connecting the Master and
the terminator at the farthest end of the system. The branch line length is the
length of a cable connecting a Slave to the main line and the total branch line
length is the sum of lengths of all of the branch lines in the system.
When the system has no main line distinguished from the branch lines, the
communications cable can be connected with no particular restrictions, provided that the total length of communications cable is a maximum of 200 m.
Main line
Terminator
Master
Branch line length L1
L2
Slave
Slave Slave
Slave
L3
L4
Slave
Slave
Slave
L5
Slave
Total branch line length = L1 + L2 + L3 + L4 + L5
The maximum main line, branch line, total branch line, and total cable lengths
depend on the type of cable and number of Slaves being used, as shown in
the following table.
Communication
mode
Cable type
Main line
High-speed Com- 2-conductor VCTF cable
munications Mode 4-conductor VCTF cable
Flat
100 m max.
30 m max.
(See note.)
30 m max.
(See note.)
Cable length
Branch line
Total of branch lines
3 m max.
3 m max.
3 m max.
50 m max.
30 m max.
(See note.)
30 m max.
(See note.)
29
Section 2-2
System Configuration
Communication
mode
Cable type
Cable length
Branch line
Total of branch lines
Main line
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
2-conductor VCTF cable
4-conductor VCTF cable
500 m max. 6 m max.
120 m max.
Total length of communications cable: 200 m max.
(with no distinction between main and branch lines)
Flat
Total length of communications cable: 200 m max.
(with no distinction between main and branch lines)
Note If the number of connected Slaves does not exceed 16 when using the Highspeed Communications Mode, the main line length can be up to 100 m and
the total branch line length can be up to 50 m (i.e., the same as for the VCTF
cable). An example is given below.
Refer to the following examples.
• Example 1
Special Flat Cable
Main line length: 100 m max.
Terminator
Master
Branch
length:
3 m max.
L1
L2
Slave (8
outputs)
L5
Slave (8
outputs)
L6
Slave (8
outputs)
L7
Slave (8
inputs)
Slave (8 outputs) × 5 Units
L10
Slave (8
inputs)
L11
Slave (8
inputs)
L12
Slave (16
inputs)
L13
Slave (16
outputs)
L14
Slave (16
inputs)
Slave (16
outputs)
Total branch line length: 50 m max.
Slave (8 inputs) × 5 Units
No. of Slave
Units
8-input Slave × 5 Units + 8-output Slave × 5 Units + 16-input Slave
× 2 Units + 16-output Slave × 2 Units = 14 Slave Units
Number of I/O
points
72 inputs and 72 outputs
• Example 2
Special Flat Cable
Main line length: 100 m max.
Terminator
Master
Branch length: L1
3 m max.
L2
Slave (16
outputs)
L8
Slave (16
outputs)
Slave (16
outputs)
Slave (16 outputs) × 8 Units
No. of Slave
Units
Number of I/O
points
L9
L10
Slave (16
inputs)
L16
Slave (16
inputs)
Slave (16 inputs) × 8 Units
Slave (16
inputs)
Total branch line length:
50 m max.
16-input Slave × 8 Units + 16-output Slave × 8 Units = 16 Slave
Units
128 inputs and 128 outputs
Do not mix 2-conductor VCTF, 4-conductor VCTF, and Special Flat Cables in
the same system.
Refer to the Appendix Standard Models for details on compatible communications cables.
Note When 4-conductor VCTF or Special Flat Cable is used to supply the Slave’s
communications power, the length of the cable may be limited by current and
voltage drops in the cable and connectors. Refer to 2-3-3 Limitations of Communications Cable Power Supply on page 35 for details.
30
Section 2-3
Supplying Power to the Slaves
2-2-3
Terminator Connection
System with Distinction
between Main and Branch
Lines
A terminator must be connected to the end of the main line opposite the Master (the farthest end of the cable) in order to stabilize communications. When
the last Slave in the system is connected to the main line by a T-branch connector, make sure that the terminator is farther from that T-connection than
the Slave so that the terminator is farther from the Master.
The following diagram shows the connections in a typical CompoBus/S System with distinguished main and branch lines. The power supply system has
been omitted.
Master
Terminator
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Branches can't
be made from
branch lines.
Branch line L2 ≤ 3 m
L1 > L2
Slave
Main line
Branch line
System with No
Distinction between Main
and Branch Lines
2-3
T: T-branch connection
M: Multidrop connection
A terminator must be connected to the end of the communications cable farthest from the Master in order to stabilize communications. When the last
Slave in the system is connected to the communications cable by a T-branch
connector, extend the cable to connect the terminator or connect the terminator at the T-branching position. The cable distance to the terminator includes
the total cable length.
Supplying Power to the Slaves
The Slaves must be supplied with power for communications and some
Slaves must have a separate power supply for I/O. The methods for supplying
power to the Slaves depend on the type of communications cable being used.
Slave power
supply
Network
power supply
Usage
1
Multiple power 2
supply
1
4-conductor VCTF
cable
Special Flat Cable
For both communications and I/O
External power sup- Power supplied via 4ply (collective supply conductor VCTF
possible)
cable, Special Flat
Cable, or from external power source
For communications
External power sup- Power supplied via 4ply (collective supply conductor VCTF
possible)
cable, Special Flat
Cable, or from external power source
External power sup- External power
ply (collective supply source
impossible)
For I/O
Local power
supply
2-conductor VCTF
cable
For both communications and I/O
External power sup- External power
ply (collective supply source
impossible)
31
Section 2-3
Supplying Power to the Slaves
The following table groups the Slaves according to their power supply requirements.
Power supply
Network power
supply
Multiple power
supplies
Slave type
Sensor Terminals
Fiber Amplifier
Communications Unit
Analog I/O Terminals
Remote Terminals with Transistors
Model numbers
SRT1/SRT2-ID08S
SRT1/SRT2-ND08S
E3X-SRT21
SRT2-AD04
SRT2-DA02
SRT1/SRT2-ID04
SRT1/SRT2-ID04-1
SRT1/SRT2-ID08
SRT1/SRT2-ID08-1
SRT1/SRT2-ID16
SRT1/SRT2-ID16-1
SRT1/SRT2-OD04
SRT1/SRT2-OD04-1
SRT1/SRT2-OD08
SRT1/SRT2-OD08-1
SRT1/SRT2-OD16
SRT1/SRT2-OD16-1
Connector TerSRT2-VID08S
minals with Tran- SRT2-VID08S-1
sistors
SRT2-VID16ML
SRT2-VID16ML-1
SRT2-ID32ML
SRT2-ID32ML-1
SRT2-VOD08S
SRT2-VOD08S-1
SRT2-VOD16ML
SRT2-VOD16ML-1
Water-resistant
Terminals with
Transistors
Local power sup- Sensor Termiply
nals with Connector Outputs
SRT2-ID04CL
SRT2-ID04CL-1
SRT2-ID08CL
SRT2-ID08CL-1
SRT1/SRT2-ID16T
SRT1/SRT2-ID16T-1
SRT1/SRT2-OD16T
SRT1/SRT2-OD16T-1
SRT1/SRT2-MD16T
SRT1/SRT2-MD16T-1
SRT2-OD32ML
SRT2-OD32ML-1
SRT2-MD32ML
SRT2-MD32ML-1
SRT2-OD04CL
SRT2-OD04CL-1
SRT2-OD08CL
SRT2-OD08CL-1
SRT1/SRT2-OD08S
Remote TermiSRT1/SRT2-ROC08
nals with Relays SRT1/SRT2-ROC16
Remote Terminals with Power
MOS FETs
SRT1/SRT2-ROF08
SRT1/SRT2-ROF16
---
Remote I/O
Modules
SRT1/SRT2-ID16P
SRT1/SRT2-OD16P
---
CPM1A/CPM2A CPM1A-SRT21
I/O Link Unit
CPM2C I/O Link CPM2C-SRT21
Unit
---
Communications Power
Supply
OMRON’s S82-series Power Supplies are recommended for supplying power
to the Slaves for communications. Select a power supply with a current capacity greater than the total power consumed by all of the Slaves that will be connected.
Note Be sure to provide a power supply with a current capacity sufficient to handle
the surge current that flows at startup.
32
Section 2-3
Supplying Power to the Slaves
2-3-1
Using 2-conductor VCTF Cable
Power cannot be supplied to the Slaves through 2-conductor VCTF cable.
When a CompoBus/S System is being constructed with 2-conductor VCTF
cable, each Slave must be supplied with power along a route separated from
the VCTF cable. Furthermore, an I/O power supply must be provided for
Slaves that require an I/O power supply.
Independent Power Supplies
2-conductor VCTF cable
Master
Multidrop (See note.)
H
L
Terminator
Branch line
(See note.)
Branch line
H L
H L
–
Slave +
Slave
+ –
H L
For
Communications
For I/O
H L
–
Slave +
+ –
Branch line
For I/O
Slave
+ –
+ –
For Communications
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
+ –
Power
supply
Power
supply
Power
supply
Power
supply
Power
supply
Power
supply
Common power supply for
communications and I/O
Communications I/O power Communications I/O power
power supply
supply
power supply
supply
Multiple power supplies
Network power supply
Common power supply for
communications and I/O
Local power supply
Note Both T-branch connections and multidrop connections are possible with each
type of power supply.
Common Power Supply
When using a common power supply with long power lines, make sure that
there isn’t a significant decline in the supply voltage due to attenuation.
2-conductor VCTF cable
Master
Multidrop (See note.)
H
L
Terminator
Branch line
(See note.)
H L
H L
H L
–
Slave +
Slave
+ –
+ –
Branch line
For I/O
Common power supply for
communications and I/O
Network power supply
For I/O
Slave
+ –
+ –
For Communications
Note that voltage will
drop if the power supply
line is too long.
Power
supply
H L
–
Slave +
+ –
Branch line
For Communications
+ –
+ –
+ –
Power
supply
Power
supply
Power
supply
I/O power supply
I/O power supply Common power supply for
communications and I/O
Multiple power supplies
Local power supply
Note Both T-branch connections and multidrop connections are possible with each
type of power supply.
It is possible to supply all communications power collectively via a single line.
If the power supply line is too long, however, the conductor resistance of the
cable will cause voltage to drop. For information concerning the allowable
length of the collective power supply cable, refer to 4. Cable Length Limit Due
33
Section 2-3
Supplying Power to the Slaves
to Voltage Drop in 2-3-3 Limitations of Communications Cable Power Supply
on page 37. In this case, replace the figure stated for the cable’s resistance
with the conductor resistance of the collective communications power supply
cable in your calculations to verify the allowable cable length.
Note Depending on the loads connected, multiple power supplies for I/O may generate electrical noise. Even for a collective power supply, the I/O power supply
should be separated from the communications power supply so that it does
not affect other Slaves. Similarly, a local power supply used for both communications and I/O should also be kept separate from communications power
supplies.
2-3-2
Using 4-conductor VCTF or Special Flat Cable
Power can be supplied to the Slaves through 4-conductor VCTF or Special
Flat Cable. When a CompoBus/S System is being constructed with 4-conductor VCTF or Special Flat Cable, the method used to supply power to the
Slaves depends on the type of Slave being used.
The following diagram shows an example of a CompoBus/S System connected with Special Flat Cable that uses each type of Slave. There is no difference in configuration when 4-conductor VCTF cable is used.
Power lines
Master
signal
Signal lines
Branch
connector
Special Flat Cable
Connector with
terminator
H
L
Power
supply
+
–
+ –
+ –
+ –
Power Signal
Power Signal
Power Signal
For Communications
For Communications
For I/O
For I/O
Network power
supply
H: BD H terminal
L: BD L terminal
+: BS + terminal
–: BS – terminal
+ : Power supply + terminal V
– : Power supply – terminal G
Power
Power
+ –
+ –
+ –
– +
+ –
I/O
power
supply
Communications
power
supply
I/O
power
supply
Insulate
unused
wires.
Signal
Power
+ –
+ –
Common
power supply for communications
and I/O
Local power
supply
Multiple power supplies
Note
34
1. Be sure to insulate unused Special Flat Cable wiring when using a Slave
that requires a local power supply or using an external power supply for
communications in a Slave that requires multiple power supplies.
Section 2-3
Supplying Power to the Slaves
2. If multiple CompoBus/S Systems are used, provide a separate communications power supply for each CompoBus/S System to prevent unstable
operation due to unwanted noise paths in the power supplies of the CompoBus/S Systems.
Main line
Master
CompoBus/S
System 1
Slave
Main line
Master
CompoBus/S
System 2
Slave
Communications
power supply (See note.)
Slave
Slave
Communications
power supply (See note.)
Note: Use a separate communications power supply for each line.
3. When using CJ-series Master Units, use 6-pin communications connectors that allow simultaneous connection of communications and power
supply cables. Power can be supplied to the Slaves easily by connecting
the communications power supply to the Master Unit without preparing the
communications cables, as shown in the following diagram.
CJ-series
Master Unit
Communications
Power
supply
BS+
BDH
BDL
BS−
BS+
BS−
+
H
L
−
+
−
Special Flat Cable or
4-conductor VCTF
cable (Wiring Special
Flat Cable is easy as
it is connected to the
communications
connector in the
same order.)
Power
supply +
−
The BS+ and BS– terminals of the CJ-series Master Unit’s communications connector are connected internally. (The Master Unit does not use
the BS+ or BS– terminals.)
2-3-3
Limitations of Communications Cable Power Supply
Check the following points when using 4-conductor VCTF or Special Flat
Cable to supply power to Slaves.
• The 4-conductor VCTF or Special Flat Cable’s allowable current
• The Extension Connector’s allowable current
(when using an Extension Connector)
• The allowable current of the CJ-series Master Unit’s communications connector (when using CJ-series Master Units)
• Cable length limit due to voltage drop
1. 4-conductor VCTF or Special Flat Cable’s Allowable Current
The allowable current through the 4-conductor VCTF or Special Flat Cable
depends on the ambient temperature, as shown in the following tables.
35
Section 2-3
Supplying Power to the Slaves
• 4-conductor VCTF Cables
Ambient temperature (°C) 0
Allowable current (A)
7
5
7
10
7
15
7
20
7
25
7
30
7
35
6
40 45
5.5 4.5
5
12
10
11
15
10
20
8
25
7
30
6
35
5
40
4
• Special Flat Cables
Ambient temperature (°C) 0
Allowable current (A)
13
45
3
The total current supplied to the Slaves must be less than the allowable
current, regardless of whether the system has a main line distinguished
from the branch lines or not.
Terminator
Master
Power supply
(24 V DC)
Slave
Slave
Slave
Current: I1
Current: I2
Current: IN
For example, at 30°C the total current consumption of the Slaves must be
6 A or less when Special Flat Cable is used.
2. Extension Connector or T-joint’s Allowable Current
The allowable current through an Extension Connector is 4 A and that
through a T-joint is 3 A. Therefore, the total current supplied to the Slaves
beyond the Extension Connector or T-joint must be less than 4 A, regardless of whether the system has a main line distinguished from the branch
lines or not.
Extension Connector
I1+I2+ ... +IN ≤ 4 A
(I1, I2, IN: current consumption of each Slave after Extension Connector)
T-joint
I1+I2+ ... +IN ≤ 3 A
(I1, I2, IN: current consumption of each Slave after the T-joint.)
Example
Extension Connector used
Extension Connector
Terminator
Master
Power supply
(24 V DC)
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
Current: I1
Current: I2
Current: IN
Current consumption of Slaves beyond
the Extension Connector
Note When a commercially available terminal block is used, be sure the
current consumption is within the allowable current of the block.
36
Section 2-3
Supplying Power to the Slaves
3. Allowable Current for CJ-series Communications Connector
The allowable current for the communications connector of the CJ-series
Master Unit is 4 A. The total current consumption of Slaves must be no
more than 4 A when the CJ-series Master Unit communications connector
is connected to the communications power supply. (The same applies
when there is no distinction between main and branch lines.)
I1+I2+ ... +IN ≤ 4 A
(I1, I2, w..., IN represents the current consumption of each Slave being supplied with communications power supply.)
Terminator
Master
Power supply
(24 V DC)
Slave
Slave
Slave
Current: I 1
Current: I 2
Current: I N
Current consumption of Slaves being supplied
with communications power supply.
4. Cable Length Limit Due to Voltage Drop
The voltage drop can be calculated from the cable’s length, the cable’s resistance, and the Slave’s current consumption. (The cable’s length is multiplied by 2 because there are two wires carrying current, + and –.)
Voltage drop (V) = Current (A) × (Cable’s length × 2 × Cable’s resistance)
( Ω)
The allowable voltage range for the Slaves is 14 to 26.4 V DC, so the maximum voltage drop is 10 V DC when using a 24-V DC power supply.
The equation yielding the voltage drop for the following system is shown
below. This is an approximate equation allowing some margin for error.
L1
L2
LN
Terminator
Master
Power supply
(24 V DC)
Slave
Slave
Slave
Current: I1
Current: I2
Current: IN
10 ≥ (I1 + I2 + ... + IN) × L × 2 × R
10: Max. voltage drop (V)
R: Resistance of the Special Flat Cable (Ω/m)
4-conductor VCTF cable: 0.025
Special Flat Cable: 0.027
L1 + L2 + ... + LN: Length of cable between the Slaves
The maximum cable length (L) can be calculated from this equation as follows:
L ≤ 10 / { (I1 + I2 + ... + IN) × 2 × R}
↓
L ≤ 200 / (I1 + I2 + ... + IN) ... 4-conductor VCTF cable
185 / (I1 + I2 + ... + IN) ... Special Flat Cable
37
Section 2-3
Supplying Power to the Slaves
L is the length of cable to the last Slave (L1 + L2 + ... + LN).
I1 + I2 + ... + IN: Current consumption of each Slave (A)
Note
1. The allowable voltage range for a Sensor Terminal which has a 2-wired
method Proximity Switch connected is 20.4 to 26.4 V DC. If the Special Flat
Cable’s voltage is below 20.4 V DC, use an external power supply for the
Sensor Terminal.
2. When there is no distinction between main and branch lines, substitute the
cable length between the communications power supply and the farthest
end for L in the above formula. If the communications power supply is at
the midway point in the cable path, the cable length on the left-hand side
added with that on the right-hand side will be the maximum length of the
communications cable. If only some Slaves are located far from the Master,
the maximum cable length calculated from the cable length to the last
Slave may be very short. In such cases, calculate the voltage drop at each
branching position and Slave position and design the system with an appropriate margin so that the voltage applied to each Slave will be high
enough.
Example
Communications cable: Special Flat Cable
In this example a single power supply can’t provide power to all of the Slaves,
so the Slaves are divided into 2 groups and supplied by 2 power supplies.
Relay terminal
Group A
Cable length LA = 50 m
Extension Connector
Group B
Cable length LB = 45 m
Terminator
Master
Power supply
(24 V DC)
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
500 mA
500 mA
500 mA
500 mA
Slave
Slave
500 mA
500 mA
Slave
Slave
500 mA 500 mA
Total current consumption IA = 3.55 A
Power
supply
(24 V DC)
Slave
Slave
Slave
Slave
500 mA
500 mA
500 mA
500 mA
Slave
500 mA
Slave
Slave
Slave
500 mA
500 mA
500 mA
Total current consumption IB = 4 A
Total current consumption beyond the
Extension Connector IC = 1.5 A
Check that each group meets the current consumption conditions. In this case
the ambient temperature is 30°C.
• Group A
Special Flat Cable’s Allowable Current:6 A ≥ 3.55 A (IA)
Cable Length Limit due to Voltage Drop:185/3.55 = 52 m ≥ 50 m (LA)
• Group B
Special Flat Cable’s Allowable Current:6 A ≥ 4 A (IB)
Extension Connector’s Allowable Current:
4.5 A ≥ 1.5 A (IC)
Cable Length Limit due to Voltage Drop:185/4 = 46 m ≥ 45 m (LB)
38
Section 2-3
Supplying Power to the Slaves
When dividing the Slaves into groups to supply power, connect the groups
using a standard relay terminal like the one shown in the following diagram.
Insulate unused wires.
Relay terminal
Communications power + (BS +, brown)
Communications data high (BD H, black)
Communications data low (BD L, white)
Communications power – (BS –, blue)
Insulate
unused
wires.
Voltage Drops Due to
Wiring
Power supply B
(24 V DC)
When components such as circuit protectors, contactors, connectors, and
fuses are incorporated in the wiring, the internal resistance and contact resistance of these components can have an effect on voltage drops as well as the
conductor resistance of the cable itself. When designing the wiring, attention
must be paid to these resistance values as well.
CP (circuit protector,
breaker, etc.)
r0
Power supply
(24 V DC)
r1
Cable resistance
Slave
Slave
r2
r3
Contact resistance Connector
of relays, contactors,
contacts, etc.
r4
Wiring must be designed to
provide a stable operating
voltage to the terminal
Slave as well.
Note The resistance and allowable current varies according to the cross section,
material, and structure of the cable, as well as the ambient temperature.
When designing the wiring and selecting the cables to be used, refer to the
specifications stated by the cable manufacturer.
Arrangement of Power
Supplies
In systems in which the I/O power supply for the entire system is supplied, it is
necessary to take into account the power consumption of each device and
load. Cables selected for use with the terminal Slave or load should also keep
voltage fluctuations within the allowable range. Care must also be taken to
ensure that the total current on the lines is within the range of the permissible
current of the cable, and that the capacity of the power supply is adequate.
Slave
Slave
Load
Power supply
(24 V DC)
∆E 1
∆E 2
I1
I2
Slave
Load
∆E 3
I3
Load
Wiring must be designed to
provide a stable operating
voltage to the last load as
well.
Examine the following points when deciding whether to supply I/O power for
the entire system from a single source, or to install multiple power supplies.
39
Section 2-3
Supplying Power to the Slaves
1,2,3...
1. Supplying I/O Power for Slaves from Multiple Power Supplies
Supplying I/O power from several sources rather than from a single source
enables line current to be reduced, and reduces voltage drops.
...
...
Slave
Slave
Slave
CP
Slave
CP
Power supply
(24 V DC)
Power supply
(24 V DC)
2. Supplying Power from Single Unit
Use the following methods for keeping voltage drops within allowable
range when power is supplied from a single source.
• Increase cable thickness.
• Raise output voltage of power supply slightly.
• Shorten wiring distances.
3. Considerations Relating to Power Supply Malfunctions
It is necessary to examine system operation in the event of a power supply
malfunction.
Example:
a) Design the system to halt operation of all loads in the event of a single
power supply failure.
b) Design the system to prevent all loads stopping operation by installing
more than one power supply.
4. Cost Considerations
It is also necessary to examine the costs associated with I/O power supply
installation, such as the number of power supplies, cable thickness, cable
length, and the labor required.
40
Section 2-4
System Configuration Using Water-resistant Terminals
2-4
System Configuration Using Water-resistant Terminals
Use 4-conductor VCTF cable for communications when Water-resistant Terminals are used.
Wire the cables as shown below regardless of whether the system has a main
line distinguished from the branch lines or not.
T-joint
CompoBus/S Master Unit
T-joint
Connector
assembly
(male)
Connector
assembly
(female)
Insulated
4-conductor
power
VCTF cable
supply line
Connector
assembly
(male)
Communications
power supply
Insulated
communications line
Connector
assembly
(female)
Watertight
Terminals
Connector
assembly
(female)
Shield
terminator (male)
Connector assembly
(male)
(See
note.)
Connector
assembly
(female)
I/O device
(See
note.)
Connector (See note.)
assembly
(male) (See note.)
Connector
assembly
(female)
Connector
assembly
(male)
Connector
assembly
Connector (female)
T-joint
assembly
(male)
4-conductor VCTF cable (0.75 mm2 conductors)
VCTF cable
Connector
assembly
(female)
Connector
assembly
(male)
Connector
assembly
(female)
(See note.)
I/O power supply
Connector asT-joint
sembly (male)
Connector
assembly
(female)
T-joint
Note Use VCTF cable for the external power supply. OMRON’s Connectors with Cables can be used as well.
To connect Slaves other than the Water-resistant Terminals, use communications cable with no connectors and wire the cable with crimp terminals. If the
cable requires water resistance, use a commercially available terminal block
instead of T-joints.
Note When using 4-conductor VCTF Connector with Cable Assemblies, use one of
the following combinations of cable conductor colors and signals for stable
communications.
Conductor
color
2-5
Signal
White
Pattern 1
BD H
Pattern 2
BS +
Pattern 3
BS –
Pattern 4
BD L
Red
Green
BS +
BS –
BS –
BD L
BD L
BD H
BD H
BS +
Black
BD L
BD H
BS +
BS –
I/O Response Time Characteristics
This section explains the minimum and maximum I/O response times of the
CompoBus/S System. Use this section for reference when planning operations that require precise I/O timing.
The I/O response time is the time it takes from the reception of an input signal
at a CompoBus/S Input Slave to the output of the corresponding output signal
at a CompoBus/S Output Slave.
The information provided here, however, is only for when a Communications
Unit is used as the Master Unit. For details on using the SRM1 Master Control
Unit and CPM2C-S Series, refer to the CompoBus/S SRM1 Master Control
Units Operation Manual (W318) or CPM2C-S PLC Operation Manual (W377).
41
Section 2-5
I/O Response Time Characteristics
2-5-1
Slaves Other Than Analog Terminals
Minimum I/O Response
Time
The following timing chart shows the minimum I/O response time.
TI/O
TPLC
PLC cycle
TM-in-min
TM-out-min
Master Unit
processing
TS(IN)
TS(OUT)
Communications
cycle
Input
IN
Slave
processing
OUT
Output
Minimum I/O response time (TMIN)
The minimum I/O response time is the total of the following terms:
TMIN = IN + TS(IN) + TM-in-min + TI/O + TPLC + TM-out-min + TS(OUT) + OUT
TMIN:
TPLC:
IN:
OUT:
TS (IN):
Minimum I/O response time
PLC’s cycle time
Input delay in the Slave (Refer to 2-5-3 Slave I/O Delay Times on
page 51.)
Output delay in the Slave (Refer to 2-5-3 Slave I/O Delay Times on
page 51.)
Input data transmission time for one node.
High-speed Communications Mode: 20 µs
Long-distance Communications Mode: 160 µs
TM-in-min: Minimum input processing time in the Master
CS-series, C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E, C200HS, or CQM1 Master Unit:
TM-in-min = 0 µs
CS-series Master Units:
TM-in-min = 20 µs (allocated words for 1 unit number),
25 µs (allocated words for 2 unit numbers)
CJ-series Master Units:
TM-in-min = 25 µs
TM-out-min: Minimum output processing time in the Master
CS-series, C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E, C200HS, of CQM1 Master Unit:
TM-out-min = 0 µs
CS-series Master Units:
TM-out-min = 33 µs (allocated words for 1 unit number),
43.5 µs (allocated words for 2 unit numbers)
CJ-series Master Unit:
TM-out-min = 45 µs
TS (OUT):
Output data transmission time for one node.
High-speed Communications Mode: 15 µs
42
Section 2-5
I/O Response Time Characteristics
TI/O:
Long-distance Communications Mode: 110 µs
I/O refreshing time
CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Master
Units
PLC
Usable node number setting
IN0 to IN7 and
IN0 to IN15 and
OUT0 to OUT7
OUT0 to OUT15
CS Series, and C200HX/
C200HG/ C200HE-(Z)E
TI/O = 440 µs
TI/O = 880 µs
C200HS
TI/O = 1,000 µs
TI/O = 2,000 µs
CS-series Master Units
PLC
Usable node number setting
IN0 to IN7 and
OUT0 to OUT7
IN0 to IN15 and
OUT0 to OUT15
CS1 (without -H suffix)
TI/O = 160 µs
TI/O = 180 µs
CS1-H
TI/O = 120 µs
TI/O = 130 µs
Note
1. The values in the above table are applicable when connected to the CPU Rack. Add another 20 µs to the values shown in the table when connecting to an
Expansion Rack.
2. Add another 20 µs to the values shown in the table
when using the Slave registration function or communications stop mode.
CJ-series Master Units
PLC
Usable node number setting
IN0 to IN7 and
OUT0 to OUT7
IN0 to IN15 and
OUT0 to OUT15
CJ1 (without -H suffix)
TI/O = 160 µs
TI/O = 180 µs
CJ1-H
TI/O = 120 µs
TI/O = 130 µs
Note
1. The values in the above table are applicable when connected to the CPU Rack. Add another 20 µs to the values shown in the table when connecting to an
Expansion Rack.
2. Add another 20 µs to the values shown in the table
when using the Slave registration function or communications stop mode.
CQM1 Master Units
PLC
CQM1
PLC word allocation setting
2 words
TI/O = 15 µs
4 words
TI/O = 30 µs
8 words
TI/O = 60 µs
43
Section 2-5
I/O Response Time Characteristics
Maximum I/O Response
Time
The following timing chart shows the maximum I/O response time.
TPLC
TPLC
PLC cycle
TM-out-min
TM-in-max
Master Unit processing
Ts
Ts
Communications cycle
Input
IN
Slave
processing
OUT
Output
Maximum I/O response time (TMAX)
The maximum I/O response time is the total of the following terms:
TMAX = IN + TS + TM-in-max + TPLC × 2 + TM-out-max + TS + OUT
TMAX: Maximum I/O response time
TPLC: PLC’s cycle time
IN:
Input delay in the Slave (Refer to 2-5-3 Slave I/O Delay Times on
page 51.)
OUT: Output delay in the Slave (Refer to 2-5-3 Slave I/O Delay Times on
page 51.)
Communications cycle time
TS:
Master
CS-series, C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE(Z)E, and C200HS
Master Unit, CSseries Master Unit, or
CJ-series Master Unit
CQM1
Usable node
number setting
IN0 to IN7 and
OUT0 to OUT7
Communications cycle time
High-speed
Communications Mode
500 µs
Long-distance
Communications Mode
4,000 µs
IN0 to IN15 and 800 µs
OUT0 to OUT15
6,000 µs
500 µs
4,000 µs
IN0 to IN15 and 800 µs
OUT0 to OUT15
6,000 µs
IN0 to IN1 and
OUT0 to OUT1
IN0 to IN3 and
OUT0 to OUT3
IN0 to IN7 and
OUT0 to OUT7
44
Section 2-5
I/O Response Time Characteristics
TM-in-max:Maximum input processing time in the Master
CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Master
Units
Master
CS Series, C200HX/
C200HG/ C200HE-(Z)E,
and C200HS
Number of points/
node number
Max. input processing time
470 µs
---
CS-series Master Units
Master
Usable node number setting
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0
to OUT7
IN0 to IN15 and
OUT0 to OUT15
CS1 (without -H suffix)
TM-in-max = 270 µs
TM-in-max = 320 µs
CS1-H
TM-in-max = 220 µs
TM-in-max = 270 µs
Note Add another 15 µs to the values in the table when using the Slave
registration function or communications stop mode.
CJ-series Master Units
Master
CJ1 (without -H suffix)
Usable node number setting
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0
IN0 to IN15 and
to OUT7
OUT0 to OUT15
TM-in-max = 270 µs
TM-in-max = 320 µs
CJ1-H
TM-in-max = 220 µs
TM-in-max = 270 µs
Note Add another 15 µs to the values in the table when using the Slave
registration function or communications stop mode.
CQM1 Master Units
Master
CQM1
Number of points/
node number
8-point mode
Max. input processing time
300 µs
4-point mode
860 µs
TM-out-max:Maximum output processing time in the Master
CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Master
Units
Master
CS-series, C200HX/
C200HG/ C200HE-(Z)E,
and C200HS Masters
Number of points/
node number
---
Max. output processing time
650 µs
CS-series Master Units
Master
CS1
Usable node number setting
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0
IN0 to IN15 and
to OUT7
OUT0 to OUT15
TM-out-max = 130 µs
TM-out-max = 100 µs
Note Add another 15 µs to the values in the table when using the Slave
registration function or communications stop mode.
45
Section 2-5
I/O Response Time Characteristics
CJ-series Master Units
Master
Usable node number setting
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0
IN0 to IN15 and
to OUT7
OUT0 to OUT15
TM-out-max = 100 µs
CJ1
TM-out-max = 130 µs
Note Add another 15 µs to the values in the table when using the Slave
registration function or communications stop mode.
CQM1 Master Units
Master
CQM1
Recognition of Slave I/O
Status at Startup
Number of points/
node number
8-point mode
Max. output processing time
480 µs
4-point mode
1,040 µs
When the CompoBus/S System is turned ON, the I/O of Slaves connected to
CQM1 Masters may not become effective at the same time as the I/O of
Slaves connected to CS-series, CJ-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E,
and C200HS Masters.
CS-series, CJ-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS
Masters
The I/O of a Slave connected to a CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE(Z)E, C200HS, or CJ-series Master becomes effective when the Active Node
Flag for the Slave goes ON.
CQM1 Masters
The I/O of a Slave connected to a CQM1 Master becomes effective some time
after the Master’s PLC is turned ON.
In High-speed Communications Mode: (PLC cycle time) + 118 ms
In Long-distance Communications Mode: (PLC cycle time) + 720 ms.
2-5-2
Slave Analog Terminals
Minimum I/O Response
Time
The following timing chart shows the minimum I/O response time.
TI/O
TPLC
PLC cycle
TM-in-min
TM-out-min
Master Unit
processing
TS (IN)
Ts (OUT)
Communications
cycle
Input
IN
Slave
processing
OUT
Output
Minimum I/O response time (TMIN)
The minimum I/O response time is the total of the following terms:
46
Section 2-5
I/O Response Time Characteristics
TMIN = IN + TS(IN) + TM-in-min + TI/O + TPLC + TM-out-min + TS(OUT) + OUT
TMIN: Minimum I/O response time
TPLC: PLC’s cycle time
Ts (IN): Input data transmission time for one node
High-speed Communications Mode: 20 µs
Long-distance Communications Mode: 160 µs
TM-in-min:Input processing time in the Master
Master
CS Series, C200HX/C200HG/
C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS
CS Series
Input processing time
160 µs
CJ Series
20 µs (allocated words for 1 unit
number), 25 µs (allocated words for
2 unit numbers)
25 µs
CQM1
120 µs
TM-out-min: Minimum output processing time in the Master
Master
CS Series, C200HX/C200HG/
C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS
CS Series
Min. input processing time
35 µs
CJ Series
35 µs (allocated words for 1 unit
number), 45 µs (allocated words for
2 unit numbers)
45 µs
CQM1
40 µs
TS (OUT): Output data transmission time for one node
High-speed Communications Mode: 15 µs
Long-distance Communications Mode: 110 µs
IN:
OUT:
TI/O:
Input delay in the Slave (Minimum value is 0.)
Output delay in the Slave (Minimum value is 0.)
I/O refreshing time
CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Master
Units
Master
Usable node number setting
IN0 to IN7 and
OUT0 to OUT7
CS Series, C200HX/
C200HG/ C200HE-(Z)E
C200HS
IN0 to IN15 and
OUT0 to OUT15
TI/O = 440 µs
TI/O = 880 µs
TI/O = 1,000 µs
TI/O = 2,000 µs
CS-series Master Units
Master
Usable node number setting
CS1 (without -H suffix)
IN0 to IN7 and
OUT0 to OUT7
TI/O = 160 µs
IN0 to IN15 and
OUT0 to OUT15
TI/O = 180 µs
CS1-H
TI/O = 120 µs
TI/O = 130 µs
Note
1. The values in the above table are applicable when connected to the CPU Rack. Add another 20 µs to the values
shown in the table when connected to an Expansion
Rack.
47
Section 2-5
I/O Response Time Characteristics
2. Add another 20 µs to the values shown in the table when
using the Slave registration function or communications
stop mode.
CJ-series Master Units
Master
CJ1 (without -H suffix)
Usable node number setting
IN0 to IN7 and
IN0 to IN15 and
OUT0 to OUT7
OUT0 to OUT15
TI/O = 160 µs
TI/O = 180 µs
CJ1-H
TI/O = 120 µs
Note
TI/O = 130 µs
1. The values in the above table are applicable when connected to the CPU Rack. Add another 20 µs to the values
shown in the table when connected to an Expansion
Rack.
2. Add another 20 µs to the values shown in the table when
using the Slave registration function or communications
stop mode.
CQM1 Master Units
Master
PLC word allocation setting
2 words
4 words
8 words
TI/O = 15 µs
CQM1
Maximum I/O Response
Time
TI/O = 30 µs
TI/O = 60 µs
The following timing chart shows the maximum I/O response time.
TPLC
TPLC
PLC cycle
TM-out-max
TM-in
Master Unit processing
TS(IN-max)
TS
TS
TS(OUT-max)
Communications cycle
Input
IN
Slave
processing
OUT
Output
Maximum I/O response time (TMAX)
The maximum I/O response time is the total of the following terms:
TMAX = IN + TS × 3 + TM-in + TPLC × 2 + TM-out-max + OUT
(TS = TS (IN-max) + TS (OUT-max))
TMAX:
TPLC:
IN:
OUT:
TS:
48
Maximum I/O response time
PLC’s cycle time
Input delay in the Slave (Refer to 2-5-3 Slave I/O Delay Times.)
Output delay in the Slave (Refer to 2-5-3 Slave I/O Delay Times.)
Communications cycle time = Ts (IN-max) + Ts (OUT-max)
Section 2-5
I/O Response Time Characteristics
Ts (IN-max): Communications cycle input time
Ts (OUT-max): Communications cycle output time
Master
Usable node
number setting
Communications cycle time
High-speed
Communications Mode
CS-series, C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE(Z)E, and C200HS
Master Unit, CSseries Master Unit,
or CJ-series Master
Unit
IN0 to IN7 and
OUT0 to OUT7
IN0 to IN15 and
OUT0 to OUT15
500 µs
Long-distance Communications
Mode
4,000 µs
800 µs
6,000 µs
CQM1
IN0 to IN1 and
OUT0 to OUT1
500 µs
4,000 µs
IN0 to IN3 and
OUT0 to OUT3
IN0 to IN7 and
OUT0 to OUT7
TM-IN: Input processing time in the Master
Master
Input processing time
CS Series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE(Z)E, and C200HS
CQM1
160 µs
120 µs
CS-series Master Units
Usable node number setting
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7
TM-IN = 100 µs
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15
TM-IN = 130 µs
Note Add another 15 µs to the values shown in the table when using the
Slave registration function or communications stop mode.
CJ-series Master Units
Usable node number setting
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15
TM-IN = 100 µs
TM-IN = 130 µs
Note Add another 15 µs to the values shown in the table when using the
Slave registration function or communications stop mode.
TM-out-max: Maximum output processing time in the Master
Master
CS Series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE(Z)E, and C200HS
Max. input processing time
200 µs
CQM1
230 µs
CS-series Master Units
Usable node number setting
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7
TM-out-max = 130 µs
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15
TM-out-max = 140 µs
49
Section 2-5
I/O Response Time Characteristics
Note Add another 15 µs to the values shown in the table when using the
Slave registration function or communications stop mode.
CJ-series Master Units
Usable node number setting
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15
TM-out-max = 130 µs
TM-out-max = 140 µs
Note Add another 15 µs to the values shown in the table when using the
Slave registration function or communications stop mode.
Recognition of Slave I/O
Status at Startup
When the CompoBus/S System is turned ON, the I/O of Slaves connected to
CQM1 Masters may not become effective at the same time as the I/O of
Slaves connected to CS-series, CJ-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E,
and C200HS Masters.
CS-series, CJ-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS
Masters
The I/O of a Slave connected to a CS-series, CJ-series, C200HX/C200HG/
C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Master becomes effective when the Active Node
Flag for the Slave goes ON.
CQM1 Masters
The I/O of a Slave connected to a CQM1 Master becomes effective some time
after the Master’s PLC is turned ON.
In High-speed Communications Mode: (PLC cycle time) +118 ms
In Long-distance Communications Mode: (PLC cycle time) +720 ms.
50
Section 2-5
I/O Response Time Characteristics
2-5-3
Slave I/O Delay Times
Model
Specifications
Input specifications
ON delay time
OFF delay
time
Output specifications
ON delay
time (See
note 1.)
OFF delay
time (See
note 2.)
SRT1-ID04(-1)
SRT1-ID08(-1)
4-point input terminal block
8-point input terminal block
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
-----
-----
SRT1-ID16(-1)
SRT1-ID16T(-1)
16-point input terminal block
16-point input 3-tier terminal block
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
-----
-----
SRT1-OD04(-1)
SRT1-OD08(-1)
4-point output terminal block
8-point output terminal block
-----
-----
0.5 ms max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
SRT1-OD16(-1)
SRT1-OD16T(-1)
16-point output terminal block
--16-point output 3-tier terminal block ---
-----
0.5 ms max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
SRT1-MD16T(-1)
8-point output, 8-point input 3-tier
terminal block
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
SRT1-ROC08
SRT1-ROC16
8-point relay output
16-point relay output
-----
-----
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
SRT1-ROF08
SRT1-ROF16
8-point power MOSFET output
16-point power MOSFET output
-----
-----
6 ms max.
6 ms max.
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
SRT2-ID04(-1)
SRT2-ID08(-1)
4-point input terminal block
8-point input terminal block
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
-----
-----
SRT2-ID16(-1)
SRT2-ID16T(-1)
16-point input terminal block
16-point input 3-tier terminal block
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
-----
-----
SRT2-OD04(-1)
SRT2-OD08(-1)
4-point output terminal block
8-point output terminal block
-----
-----
0.5 ms max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
SRT2-OD16(-1)
SRT2-OD16T(-1)
16-point output terminal block
--16-point output 3-tier terminal block ---
-----
0.5 ms max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
SRT2-MD16T(-1)
8-point output, 8-point input 3-tier
terminal block
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
SRT2-ROC08
SRT2-ROC16
8-point relay output
16-point relay output
-----
-----
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
SRT2-ROF08
SRT2-ROF16
8-point power MOSFET output
16-point power MOSFET output
-----
-----
6 ms max.
6 ms max.
10 ms max.
10 ms max.
SRT2-VID08S(-1)
SRT2-VID16ML(-1)
8-point input sensor connector
16-point input MIL connector
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
-----
-----
SRT2-ID32ML(-1)
SRT2-MD32ML(-1)
32-point input MIL connector
16-point input, 16-point output MIL
connector
8-point output sensor connector
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
--0.5 ms max.
--1.5 ms max.
---
---
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
SRT2-VOD16ML(-1) 16-point output MIL connector
SRT2-OD32ML(-1) 32-point output MIL connector
-----
-----
0.5 ms max.
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
SRT1-ID16P
SRT1-OD16P
16-point input, PCB attachment
16-point output, PCB attachment
1.5 ms max.
---
1.5 ms max.
---
--0.5 ms max.
--1.5 ms max.
SRT2-ID16P
SRT2-OD16P
16-point input, PCB attachment
16-point output, PCB attachment
1.5 ms max.
---
1.5 ms max.
---
--0.5 ms max.
--1.5 ms max.
SRT2-AD04
SRT2-DA02
Analog 4-point input
Analog 2-point output
AD conversion time: 4 ms max. --DA conversion time: 2 ms max. ---
-----
SRT1-ID08S
SRT2-ID08S
8-point input sensor terminal
8-point input sensor terminal
1 ms max.
1 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
-----
-----
SRT1-ND08S
4-point input, 4-point output sensor
terminal
1 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
1.0 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
SRT2-VOD08S(-1)
51
Section 2-5
I/O Response Time Characteristics
Model
SRT2-ND08S
SRT1-OD08S
Specifications
4-point input, 4-point output sensor
terminal
8-point output sensor terminal
Input specifications
ON delay time
OFF delay
time
1 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Output specifications
ON delay
OFF delay
time (See
time (See
note 1.)
note 2.)
1.0 ms max. 1.5 ms max.
---
---
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
SRT2-OD08S
SRT2-ID04CL(-1)
8-point output sensor terminal
4-point input water-resistant terminal
--1.5 ms max.
--1.5 ms max.
0.5 ms max.
---
1.5 ms max.
---
SRT2-ID08CL(-1)
8-point input water-resistant terminal
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
---
---
SRT2-OD04CL(-1)
4-point output water-resistant termi- --nal
---
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
SRT2-OD08CL(-1)
8-point output water-resistant termi- --nal
8-point/16-point input Fiber Ampli- See below.
fier Communications Unit
---
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
---
---
E3X-SRT21
Note
1. This is the ON response time for the SRT@-ROC@@
2. This is the OFF response time for the SRT@-ROF@@
Maximum Input Delay
Time for Fiber Amplifier
Communications Unit
52
• For up to 8 sensors connected:
Maximum ON/OFF data input delay time for unit n = 0.1 × n +1.5 (ms)
• For 9 sensors or more connected:
Maximum ON/OFF data input delay time for unit n = 0.2 × n +1.5 (ms)
SECTION 3
CompoBus/S System Wiring
This section explains how to install Units in control panels, wire the signal and power lines, and make other connections
needed to assemble a CompoBus/S System.
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
3-1-1
Master Unit Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
3-1-2
Slave Unit Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
Connector Installation (Special Flat Cable Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
3-2-1
Branch Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
3-2-2
Extension Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
3-2-3
Connector Terminator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
VCTF Cable Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
3-3-1
Branching and Extending VCTF Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
3-3-2
Installing Terminators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
Master/Slave Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
3-4-1
Crimp Terminal Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
3-4-2
Master and Slave Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
3-4-3
Cable Connector Wiring and Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
Operations Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
53
Section 3-1
Mounting
3-1
Mounting
!Caution A label is stuck to some Masters and Slaves to prevent pieces of wire from
entering the Units. Install and wire the Units with the labels in place. Stray
strands of wire could cause malfunctions.
Always remove the label after installation and wiring to facilitate cooling. The
Units could overheat and malfunction if the labels are not removed.
3-1-1
Master Unit Mounting
The Master Unit mounts to the PLC itself, just like other Units. This section
explains only the precautions that should be taken during Master Unit installation. Refer to the PLC’s Installation Guide for details on mounting Units to the
PLC or installing the PLC in a control panel.
This section provides information on Communications Master Units. For the
SRM1 Master Control Unit and CPM2C-S Series, refer to the SRM1 Operation Manual and CPM2C-S Operation Manual.
3-1-2
Slave Unit Mounting
This section explains how to mount a Slave in a control panel.
Basically, there are two methods that can be used to mounted a Slave:
Screws or DIN Track. Some Slaves allow only one of these methods, while
other Slaves, such as the Remote I/O Modules, mounted directly to a board.
Others are mounted with special mounting brackets.
Required Parts
The following parts are required to attach a Slave to a DIN track. These parts
are not required when attaching a Slave to a control panel with screws.
Part
Model number
Comments
35-mm DIN
track
PFP-50N
PFP-100N
50 cm long
100 cm long
End Plate
PFP-100N2
PFP-M
100 cm long
Two are required for each Slave.
Direct Mounting with Screws
Refer to the Slave’s dimension diagram in SECTION 5 Slave Specifications
and Operations for a template showing the mounting hole placement. Drill the
specified holes in the control panel and install the Slave with the right screws
to the specified tightening torque as given below.
M4 screw: 0.6 to 0.98 N⋅m
M5 screw (Front mounting): 0.6 to 1.18 N⋅m
M5 screw (Rear mounting): 1.47 to 1.96 N⋅m
DIN Track Mounting
Clip the back of the Slave on to the DIN track by holding down the mounting
pins on the back of the Slave with a screwdriver, pushing the bottom of the
Slave onto the DIN track, and then rotating the Slave up and over the top of
54
Section 3-2
Connector Installation (Special Flat Cable Only)
the track. Attach End Plates at the sides of the Slave to prevent it from sliding
on the track.
End Plate
!Caution Always secure the Slave on the DIN track by installing End Plates on each
side.
Mounting Direction
Any of the following six mounting directions can be used, unless specified in
the Slave’s operation manual.
Vertical
PWR
10 11 12 13 14 15
IN
14
15
13
12
10
11
8
9
6
10 11 12 13 14 15
14
15
7
13
7
2
6
8
12
4
10
11
5
8
9
3
6
7
5
4
5
0
3
3
2
2
.oN
0
61DI-1TRS
1
LANIMRET ETOMER
CDV42
1
3
RRE
RWP
MMOC
0
1
2
COMM
PWR
9
IN
ERR
4
4
1
ERR
0
5
COMM
3
6
PWR
9
2
7
No.
8
5
REMOTE TERMINAL
24VDC
7
4
8
SRT1-ID16
6
7
3-2
6
10 11 12 13 14 15
9
9
9
8
8
7
11
6
01
5
21
4
31
3
51
2
41
1
51 41 31 21 11 01
0
NI
IN
5
14
0
15
12
1
13
10
4
11
8
3
9
6
2
7
4
1
5
2
0
3
0
ERR
No.
1
COMM
No.
SRT1-ID16
REMOTE TERMINAL
24VDC
REMOTE TERMINAL
24VDC
SRT1-ID16
Connector Installation (Special Flat Cable Only)
The cable connections can be made with simple connectors if Special Flat
Cable is used for the communications cable. There are three types of connectors: the Branch Connector (refer to 3-2-1 Branch Connector), Extension Connector (refer to 3-2-2 Extension Connector), and Connector Terminator (refer
to 3-2-3 Connector Terminator).
!Caution Connectors cannot be reused once they have been attached to a cable. Be
sure that the connectors are positioned correctly before attaching them.
!Caution Wire the communications cable separately from power lines and high-voltage
lines to prevent any noise.
!Caution If Special Flat Cables are used for multiple CompoBus/S Systems, install the
cables at least 5 mm apart from other Special Flat Cables to prevent unstable
operation due to mutual interference in the CompoBus/S Systems.
55
Section 3-2
Connector Installation (Special Flat Cable Only)
When Special Flat Cable cable is used, determine which wires are to be used,
as shown in the following diagram.
Communications power supply + (BS+) Brown
Communications data high (BD H) Black
Communications data low (BD L) White
Communications power supply – (BS–) Blue
3-2-1
Branch Connector
Branch Connectors are used to make branches from the main line. A commercially available terminal block can also be used to make branches.
Connector Components
The Branch Connector has three components: Cover 1, Cover 2, and the contact block. The following diagram shows Cover 1.
Hinge
Cover number
The following diagram shows Cover 2.
Hinge
Cover number
The following diagram shows the contact block.
Cable stop
Surface number
Contacts
Note Cover 1 and Cover 2 can be distinguished by the cover number.
Installation Procedure
Use the following procedure to attach a Branch Connector to the communications cable.
The following procedure is an example to branch the main cable. The same
procedure will apply even if the main line does not need to be distinguished
from the branch lines.
56
Section 3-2
Connector Installation (Special Flat Cable Only)
1,2,3...
1. Make a perpendicular cut in the cable that will be used as the branch line
(the branch cable). The cable will not fit in the connector properly if the cut
is not straight and perpendicular.
Correct
Incorrect
2. Snap Cover 1 onto the branch cable. Make sure that the hook locks into
place.
Cable
Hook
3. Line up the end of Cover 1 with the end of the branch cable.
0.5 mm max.
Cover number
4. Position Cover 1 onto Surface 1 of the contact block (the side with the cable
stop). The pattern of the contact block is different on Surface 2, so Cover
1 cannot be fitted on Surface 2.
Cover 1
Branch cable
Contact block
5. Snap Cover 2 onto the cable being used as the main line (the main cable).
Make sure that the hook locks into place. Cover 2 can still slide along the
cable when locked.
Cable
Hook
6. Slide Cover 2 to the point on the main cable where you want the branch
line.
57
Section 3-2
Connector Installation (Special Flat Cable Only)
7. Position Cover 2 onto Surface 2 of the contact block (the side without the
cable stop). Always align the cables so that the main cable’s colors match
the branch cable’s colors.
Cover 1
Contact block
Branch cable
Main cable
Cover 2
Make sure that the colors of the cables match.
Branch cable
Inser t until the end of the branch cable is visible.
Main cable
!Caution The Units could be damaged if the branch cable’s colors do not match the
main cable’s colors.
8. The branch cable must be inserted all the way to the contact block’s cable
stop.
9. Use a tool such as pliers to compress Cover 1 and Cover 2 together.
!Caution Always align the tool with the centers of the Covers to prevent any bending or
distortion when the connector is compressed. Uneven compression can prevent proper communications.
58
Section 3-2
Connector Installation (Special Flat Cable Only)
10. Check the assembled connector from the side and make sure that the
locks are completely engaged, as shown in the following diagram.
Before Compression
After Compression
Locks
3-2-2
Extension Connector
Extension Connectors can be connected to any point of the communications
cable regardless of whether it is a main or branch line or whether the main line
needs to be distinguished from the branch lines.
Connector Components
The Extension Connector has three components: Cover 1, Cover 2, and the
contact block. The following diagram shows Cover 1.
Hinge
Cover number
The following diagram shows Cover 2.
Hinge
Cover number
The following diagram shows the contact block.
Cable Stop
Surface number
Contacts
Note Cover 1 and Cover 2 can be distinguished by the cover number.
59
Section 3-2
Connector Installation (Special Flat Cable Only)
Installation Procedure
1,2,3...
Use the following procedure to attach a Extension Connector to the communications cable.
1. Make perpendicular cuts in the cables being connected. The cables will not
fit in the connector properly if the cuts are not straight and perpendicular.
Correct
Incorrect
2. Snap Cover 1 onto one of the cables. Make sure that the hook locks into
place.
Cable
Hook
3. Line up the end of Cover 1 with the end of the cable.
0.5 mm max.
Cover number
4. Position Cover 1 onto Surface 1 of the contact block.
Cover 1
Cable
Contact block
Note The patterns of the contact blocks are different, so Cover 1 cannot be
fitted on Surface 2.
5. Snap Cover 2 onto the other cable. Make sure that the hook locks into
place.
Cable
Hook
60
Section 3-2
Connector Installation (Special Flat Cable Only)
6. Line up the end of Cover 2 with the end of the cable.
0.5 mm max.
Cover number
7. Position Cover 2 onto Surface 2 of the contact block. Always align the cables so that their colors match.
Contact block
Cover 1
Cable
Main cable
Cover 2
Make sure that the colors of the cables match.
Cable
Insert until the end of the cable is visible.
Cable
!Caution The Units could be damaged if the cables’ colors do not match.
8. Make sure that each cable has been inserted all the way to the contact
block’s cable stop.
9. Use a tool such as pliers to compress Cover 1 and Cover 2 together.
!Caution Always align the tool with the centers of the Covers to prevent any bending or
distortion when the connector is compressed. Uneven compression can prevent proper communications.
61
Section 3-2
Connector Installation (Special Flat Cable Only)
10. Check the assembled connector from the side and make sure that the
locks are completely engaged, as shown in the following diagram.
Before Compression
After Compression
Locks
3-2-3
Connector Terminator
When the system has a main line that needs to be distinguished from the
branch lines, a Connector Terminator is connected at the end of main line
opposite the Master. If the main line does not need to be distinguished from
the branch lines, a Connector Terminator is connected the end of the communications cable farthest from the Master.
Connector Components
The Connector Terminator has two components: Cover 1 and the contact
block. The following diagram shows Cover 1.
Hinge
Cover number
The following diagram shows the contact block.
Cable stop
Surface number
Contacts
Installation Procedure
Use the following procedure to attach a Connector Terminator to the communications cable.
The following procedure is an example to connect a Connector Terminator to
the main cable. The same procedure will apply even if the main line does not
need to be distinguished from the branch lines.
62
Section 3-2
Connector Installation (Special Flat Cable Only)
1,2,3...
1. Make a perpendicular cut in the cable being used as the main line (the
main cable). The cable will not fit in the connector properly if the cut is not
straight and perpendicular.
Correct
Incorrect
2. Snap Cover 1 onto the main cable. Make sure that the hook locks into
place.
Cable
Hook
3. Line up the end of Cover 1 with the end of the main cable.
0.5 mm max.
Cover number
4. Position Cover 1 onto Surface 1 of the contact block (the side with the cable
stop).
Cover 1
Main cable
Contact block
5. Make sure that the cable has been inserted all the way to the contact
block’s cable stop.
6. Use a tool such as pliers to compress Cover 1 and the contact block together.
63
Section 3-3
VCTF Cable Assembly
!Caution Always align the tool with the centers of the Covers and contact block to prevent any bending or distortion when the connector is compressed. Uneven
compression can prevent proper communications.
7. Check the assembled connector from the side and make sure that the
locks are completely engaged, as shown in the following diagram.
Before Compression
After Compression
Locks
3-3
VCTF Cable Assembly
This section explains how to assemble VCTF cable components.
Commercially available 4-conductor VCTF cable and 2-conductor VCTF cable
can be used as communications cable in CompoBus/S Systems.
Note
1. Lay the communications cables separately from high-voltage lines and
power lines to prevent noise interference.
2. This section does not provide information on how to process shielded connectors (i.e., Round Water-resistant Connectors or Sensor I/O Connectors). Refer to the Sensor Catalog for information on how to process these
connectors.
3. When using commercially available VCTF cable, determine which signal
wires will be used for the BD H, BD L, BS+, and BS– signals.
4. When connecting 4-conductor VCTF cable to an assembly connector,
check that the conductors and signals are connected in the following patterns.
Conductor
color
3-3-1
Signal combination
White
Pattern 1
BD H
Pattern 2
BS+
Pattern 3
BS–
Pattern 4
BD L
Red
Green
BS+
BS–
BS–
BD L
BD L
BD H
BD H
BS+
Black
BD L
BD H
BS+
BS–
Branching and Extending VCTF Cable
Use one of the following methods to branch or extend the VCTF cable.
• Commercially available relay terminal block (4-conductor/2-conductor
VCTF cable branch or extension)
• T-joint or Combination Connector (4-conductor VCTF cable branch or
extension)
Branching or Extension
Using Relay Terminal
Block
Note
64
Install crimp terminals on each signal wire of the VCTF cable, and connect the
two-wire cable (for extension) or three-wire cable (for branching) to a commercially available relay terminal block. Use crimp terminals on the signal wires
that match the terminal block being used.
1. Check that the signal wires are connected correctly. The Slave may be
damaged if the signal wires, particularly those for the power supply, are
connected to signal wires other than those specified.
Section 3-3
VCTF Cable Assembly
2. Tighten the terminal block screws to a tightening torque that meets the terminal block specifications.
Example: Branching 2-Conductor VCTF Cable
Use a commercially available relay terminal block (a terminal block where the
terminals facing each other are connected internally), and branch the cables
as shown in the following diagram.
Main line cable
Main line cable
Communications cable
High side (BD H)
Communications cable
Low side (BD L)
Shorting bar
Shorting bar
Relay terminal block
Communications cable
High side (BD H)
Communications cable
Low side (BD L)
Branch line cable
Branching or Extension
Using T-joint Combination
Connectors
When 4-conductor VCTF cable is used in locations that require water resistance, use XS2R-D427-5 T-joint Connectors or XS2C-D4@ or XS2G-D4@@
Combination Connectors that are specially designed for CompoBus/S Systems.
Note
1. Connectors with cables specially for CompoBus/S Systems are also available.
2. For details on T-joint connectors, cable connectors, and connectors with
cables, refer to 1-3-4 Connectors/Terminal Blocks.
Example: Branching 4-Conductor VCTF Cable Using T-joint
T-joint
Cable
Socket (female)
Cable
Plug (male)
Plug (male)
Cable
3-3-2
Installing Terminators
Use a Terminal-block Terminator or Shield Terminator as the terminator on the
VCTF cable.
Note Refer to 1-3-4 Connectors/Terminal Blocks for details on Terminal-block terminators, T-joints, and Connectors.
65
Section 3-4
Master/Slave Connecting Cables
Terminal-block
Terminators
When the VCTF cable is connected to an SRS1-T Terminal-block Terminator,
use crimp terminals on each of the BD H and BD L signal wires, and connect
them to each terminal. The signal wires can be connected to any of the terminals.
Note
1. Do not connect both signal wires to a single terminal.
2. When connecting the communications power supply using Special Flat
Cable or 4-conductor VCTF cable, insulate the BD+ and BS– power supply
cables.
Tighten the terminal screws to the specified tightening torque (0.3 to
0.5 N⋅m).
3. When connecting Terminal-block Terminators to VCTF cables, use the
same crimp terminals as those used to connect the communications cables to the Slaves. (Refer to 3-4 Master/Slave Connecting Cables.)
Shield Terminators
When using 4-conductor VCTF cable, terminators can be connected by connecting an SRS2-1 Shield Terminator to the T-joint.
Note The SRS2-1 Shield Connector has a male plug. Connect it to the female
socket connector of the T-joint.
3-4
Master/Slave Connecting Cables
This section describes the methods used for connecting communications
cables to each device and installing connectors on the Connector Terminal
and Sensor Terminal cables.
3-4-1
Crimp Terminal Installation
Attach crimp terminals to the ends of the communications cable when connecting the cable to a Master, Slave, Terminal-block Terminator, or commercially available terminal block.
!Caution Do not connect bare signal wires to the terminals since the wires could short
and damage the Unit to which they are connected.
Note Do not strip too much insulation from the wires when preparing the cable for
the crimp terminals. Cover the shaft of the terminal connector and the end of
the wire with electrical tape or heat-shrinking tube.
Master or Slave
When connecting communications cable (VCTF cable or Special Flat Cable)
to a Master or Slave, attach an M3 crimp terminal like those shown below to
each signal wire.
M3 Terminals for the Master Unit (Except CJ Series)
6.2 mm max.
Recommended terminal
Nippon Crimp Terminal 1.25-N3A
Molex Y1.25-3.5L
6.2 mm max.
Comment
Forked terminal
Forked terminal
Note Refer to 4-3-3 Wiring and Installing Communications Cables for details on
crimp terminals used for connecting CJ-series Master Units.
66
Section 3-4
Master/Slave Connecting Cables
M3 Terminals for Slave Units
6.0 mm max.
6.0 mm max.
Recommended terminal (standard JIS part numbers)
RAV1.25-3
RAP1.25-3
3-4-2
Master and Slave Terminal Connections
When connecting the communications cable to the terminals of a Master node
or those of a Slave node, connect the BD H signal wire to the BD H terminal
and the BD L signal wire to the BD L terminal.
When supplying power to the Slave’s communications power supply, connect
the BS+ wire to the BS+ terminal and the BS– wire to the BS– terminal. The
following diagram shows the multi-drop connection method.
Connects to the
Connects to the
Slave's BD L terminal. Slave's BD H terminal.
Main line cable from the
Master or previous Slave
Communications cable
Low (BD L)
Main line cable to the
next Slave or terminator
Communications cable
High (BD H)
!Caution Do not mix up the wires when connecting the communications cable. In particular, the Slave might be damaged if the power wires are connected to the
wrong terminals.
When power is being supplied through Special Flat Cable but some Slaves
are being supplied from another source, always insulate the BS+ and BS–
wires.
Tighten the terminal screws to the specified tightening torque (0.3 to 0.5 N⋅m).
3-4-3
Cable Connector Wiring and Assembly
When using the Slaves shown in the following table, attach the special
OMRON cable connectors to the cables of the sensors and other external
devices.
Slave type
Connector Terminals with Transistor Inputs
Model
SRT2-VID08S (-1)
Connector Terminals with Transistor Outputs
Sensor Terminals with Connector Outputs
SRT2-VOD08S (-1)
SRT@-OD08S
Sensor Terminals
SRT@-ID08S
SRT@-ND08S
67
Section 3-4
Master/Slave Connecting Cables
Assembling the Cable
Connectors
Use the following procedure to install the sensor’s cable into the cable connector that plugs into the Sensor Terminal. The following diagram shows the
two parts of the cable connector: the connector plug and cover.
Cover
Connector plug
Cable Connector Model Numbers
There are two models of cable connectors available for different sized cable
wires, as shown in the following table.
Model
Marking
Compatible cable wire size
(cross-sectional area)
XS8A-0441
XS8-1
0.3 to 0.5 mm2
XS8A-0442
XS8-2
0.14 to 0.2 mm2
Make sure that the sensor cable’s wire size is compatible the cable connector
being used. The cable connector’s marking is found on the connector plug, as
shown in the following diagram.
Marking
Sensor Cable Preparation
Sensor cables are usually stripped to semi-strip or strip specifications, but
OMRON cable connectors cannot be attached when the cable is stripped in
these ways.
Semi-stripped
Stripped
To prepare the cable for an OMRON cable connector, cut the tip and strip the
cable insulation but not the wire insulation, as shown in the following diagram.
20 mm min.
Inserting Wires into the Cover
When connecting the Sensor, match the terminal numbers marked on the
connector cover with the colors of the sensor wires as shown in the following
table.
Sensor terminal
SRT2-VID08S
68
Sensor type
3-wire sensor
(without self-diagnostic output function)
2-wire sensor
(without self-diagnostic output function)
Terminal number
1
2
3
Black (white)
Brown
(Connect to 1 or (red)
2)
Brown (white)
--(Connect to 1 or
2)
4
Blue
(black)
Blue
(black)
Section 3-4
Master/Slave Connecting Cables
Sensor terminal
Sensor type
1
SRT2-VID08S-1
SRT@-ND08S
4
3-wire sensor
(without self-diagnostic output function)
Black (white)
Brown
(Connect to 1 or (red)
2)
2-wire sensor
(without self-diagnostic output function)
Blue (black)
Brown --(Connect to 1 or (white)
2)
Sensor terminal
SRT@-ID08S
Terminal number
2
3
Sensor type
Blue
(black)
Terminal number
1
2
Black
--(white)
3
Brown
(red)
4
Blue
(black)
Brown --(white)
---
Blue
(black)
Sensor with teaching function or external diagnostic
function
Black
Pink
(white) (gray)
Brown
(red)
Blue
(black)
Sensor with bank switching
function
Black
Brown
Blue
3-wire sensor
(without self-diagnostic output function)
2-wire sensor
(without self-diagnostic output function)
Purple
Note In accordance with the changes in the standards for photoelectric sensors
and proximity sensors, wire colors have been changed. Colors in parentheses
are the old wire colors.
When connecting an output device, match the terminal numbers marked on
the connector cover with the signal wires of the output device as shown in the
following table.
Sensor terminal
Terminal number
2
3
1
4
SRT2-VOD08S
SRT2-VOID08S-1
Yes (Connect to 1 or 2)
Yes (Connect to 1 or 2)
Yes
---
SRT@-OD08S
Yes
Yes (Connect to 3 or 4)
---
--Yes
Insert the wire all the way into the cover’s hole until it touches.
Connector Assembly
Use the following procedure to assemble the cable connector.
1,2,3...
1. Check the wire colors and make sure that the sensor’s wires are aligned
with the correct terminal numbers. (The cover is semi-transparent, so the
wire colors will be visible through the cover.)
2. Fit the cover (with wires inserted) into the connector plug, as shown in the
following diagram.
3. Use a tool such as pliers to press the cover all the way into the connector
plug. Always align the tool with the center of the cover so it does not tilt,
69
Section 3-5
Operations Checklist
and press the cover straight into the connector plug. There should not be
any gap between the cover and plug.
Inserting and Removing
Cable Connectors
The sensor cable can be inserted into the Sensor Terminal once the cable
connector has been attached.
Inserting the Cable Connector
Position the cable connector so that Terminal 1 faces you and push the connector into the Sensor Terminal until it clicks into place.
Removing the Cable Connector
To remove the cable connector, first pull out the lock lever and then remove
the cable connector, as shown in the following diagram.
Lock lever
3-5
Operations Checklist
Go through the items in the following checklist before turning ON the Units in
the CompoBus/S System. All of the checks should be answered “Yes.”
Item
CS-series,
Switch settings
C200HX/C200HG/
C200HE-(Z)E, and
C200HS Master
Units
70
Check
Has the Master’s Special I/O Unit unit number been set?
(Refer to 4-1-2 Switch Settings for details.)
Has the node number been set with pin 1 of the DIP switch?
(Refer to 4-1-2 Switch Settings for details.)
Has the communications mode been set with pin 2 of the DIP switch?
(Refer to 4-1-2 Switch Settings for details.)
Answer
Yes No
Are pins 3 and 4 of the DIP switch all set to OFF?
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Section 3-5
Operations Checklist
Item
CS-series Master Switch settings
Units
Check
Has the Master’s Special I/O Unit number been set?
(Refer to 4-2-2 Switch Settings for details.)
Answer
Yes No
Has the node number been set with pin 1 of the DIP switch?
(Refer to 4-2-2 Switch Settings for details.)
Yes No
Has the communications mode been set with pin 2 of the DIP switch? Yes No
(Refer to 4-2-2 Switch Settings for details.)
Has the communications stop mode been set with pin 3 of the DIP
switch?
(Refer to 4-2-2 Switch Settings for details.)
CJ-series Master
Units
Switch settings
Yes No
Has the Slave registration function been set with pin 4 of the DIP
Yes No
switch? (If the Slave registration function is used, the CPU Unit’s DM
Area must also be set.)
(Refer to 4-2-2 Switch Settings for details.)
Has the Master’s Special I/O Unit number been set?
Yes No
(Refer to 4-3-2 Switch Settings for details.)
Has the node number been set with pin 1 of the DIP switch?
Yes No
(Refer to 4-3-2 Switch Settings for details.)
Has the communications mode been set with pin 2 of the DIP switch? Yes No
(Refer to 4-3-2 Switch Settings for details.)
CQM1 Master
Units
Slaves
Switch settings
Switch settings
Has the communications stop mode been set with pin 3 of the DIP
switch?
(Refer to 4-3-2 Switch Settings for details.)
Yes No
Has the Slave registration function been set with pin 4 of the DIP
switch? (If the Slave registration function is used, the CPU Unit’s DM
Area must also be set.)
(Refer to 4-3-2 Switch Settings for details.)
Has the PLC word allocation (DIP switch pins 1 and 2) been set?
(Refer to 4-4-2 Switch Settings for details.)
Has the number of points/node number setting (DIP switch pin 3)
been set? (Refer to 4-4-2 Switch Settings for details.)
Has the communications mode been set with pin 4 of the DIP switch?
(Refer to 4-4-2 Switch Settings for details.)
Are pins 5 and 6 of the DIP switch all set to OFF?
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Has the node number been set?
(Refer to SECTION 5 Slave Specifications and Operations for
details.)
Yes No
Has the communications mode been set?
(Refer to SECTION 5 Slave Specifications and Operations for
details.)
Yes No
Is the Slave’s node number unique (not allocated to another Slave)?
Have other settings besides the CompoBus/S settings, such as the
“hold/clear outputs for communications error” setting, been set?
(Refer to SECTION 5 Slave Specifications and Operations for
details.)
Yes No
Yes No
71
Section 3-5
Operations Checklist
Wiring
Item
Master
Slave
Check
Is the Master Unit connected at the end of the main line when the
main line needs to be distinguished from the branch lines.?
Answer
Yes No
Is the cable connected to the Master correctly?
(Refer to 3-4 Master/Slave Connecting Cables for details.)
Yes No
With CQM1 Masters, has the alarm output terminal been wired?
(Refer to 6-4-2 Error Detection with the Alarm Output (CQM1 Only)
for details.)
Yes No
Are the cables connected to the Slaves correctly?
(Refer to 3-4 Master/Slave Connecting Cables for details.)
Yes No
Is there just one Slave connected to each branch line when the main Yes No
line needs to be distinguished from the branch lines?
(Refer to 2-2-1 Main Line/Branch Line Connections for details.)
Terminator
Has just one terminator been connected at the end of the main line
opposite the Master?
(Refer to 2-2-3 Terminator Connection for details.)
When the main line needs to be distinguished from the branch lines,
is the length of the main line within specifications?
(Refer to 2-2-2 Maximum Cable Length for details.)
When the main line needs to be distinguished from the branch lines,
is the length of the each branch line within specifications?
(Refer to 2-2-2 Maximum Cable Length for details.)
When the main line needs to be distinguished from the branch lines,
is the total length of the branch lines within specifications?
(Refer to 2-2-2 Maximum Cable Length for details.)
Yes No
Is the number of Slaves within the limit set on the Master?
(Refer to SECTION 4 Master Unit Specifications and Operations for
details.)
Yes No
When using 4-conductor VCTF cable or Special Flat Cable, are the
main line length and total branch line length of the system with a
maximum of 16 Slaves within specifications?
(Refer to 2-2-2 Maximum Cable Length for details.)
Has just one kind of cable (Special Flat Cable or VCTF cable) been
used in the CompoBus/S System?
If Special Flat Cables are used for multiple CompoBus/S Systems,
install the cables at least 5 mm apart from other Special Flat Cables.
Is the wiring separated from any power/high-voltage lines?
Yes No
2-conductor VCTF Has 2-conductor (0.75 mm ) cable been used?
cable
4-conductor VCTF Has 4-conductor (0.75mm2) cable been used?
cable
Has the 4-conductor cable power supply been used to supply power
to the Slaves only (not for other purposes, such as I/O power supply)?
Special Flat Cable Has the Special Flat Cable power supply been used to supply power
to the Slaves only (not for other purposes, such as I/O power supply)?
4-conductor VCTF Does the power supply configuration match the plan?
Cable, Special Flat (Refer to 2-3 Supplying Power to the Slaves for details.)
Cable
With local and dual power supply Slaves, is there a separate power
supply for the I/O?
(Refer to 2-3 Supplying Power to the Slaves for details.)
2-conductor VCFF Have the Slaves been wired correctly? (The Units can be damaged if
cable
the power supply is connected to the communications terminals.)
(Refer to 2-3 Supplying Power to the Slaves for details.)
Yes No
Main line length
Branch line
lengths
Total branch line
length
Number of Slaves
Cable
Noise
Cable
Power supply
72
2
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
SECTION 4
Master Unit Specifications and Operations
This section provides information on the specifications and functions of each Master Unit, including details on switch
settings and allocation of Slave I/O.
4-1
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS-series,
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
4-1-1
Specifications and Part Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
4-1-2
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
76
4-1-3
I/O Allocations in CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E,
and C200HS PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
Data Areas in the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
4-1-4
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
4-2-1
Specifications and Part Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
4-2-2
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
90
4-2-3
I/O Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
4-2-4
Slave Registration Function and Communications Stop Mode . . . .
98
4-2-5
Allocations for Master Unit in PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
103
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
4-3-1
Specifications and Part Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
4-3-2
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
107
4-3-3
Wiring and Installing Communications Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
4-3-4
I/O Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
4-3-5
Slave Registration Function and Communications Stop Mode . . . .
120
4-3-6
Allocations for Master Unit in PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
CQM1-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CQM1 PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
4-4-1
Specifications and Part Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
4-4-2
Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
4-4-3
I/O Allocations in CQM1 PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
SRM1-C0@-V2 Master Control Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
4-5-1
Specifications and Part Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
4-5-2
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
CPM2C-S Series CPM2C-S@@@C (-DRT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
4-6-1
Specifications and Part Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
4-6-2
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144
73
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs Section
4-1
4-1-1
4-1
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS-series,
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs
Specifications and Part Names
CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs use the
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit.
Specifications
General Specifications
General specifications conform to those of the CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/
C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs.
Performance Specifications
Item
Specifications
Model
Unit classification
C200HW-SRM21-V1
Special I/O Unit
Internal current consumption
Weight
5 V DC, 150 mA max.
Max. number of
Masters
10 or 16 Units (See note.)
Master Unit mounting location
Can be mounted on the CPU Backplane or Expansion I/O
Backplane. Can’t be mounted on a SYSMAC BUS Slave (RT).
Max. number of I/O
points per Master
Number of points per
node number
Number of usable
node numbers per
Master
128 points (64 inputs/64 outputs)
8-point mode
200 g max.
5 or 8 Units (See note.)
256 points (128 inputs/128
outputs)
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7 IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to
(up to 16 Units can be conOUT15 (up to 32 Units can be
nected)
connected)
Note The following table shows the maximum number of Master Units that can be
connected and the node number settings for each Master according to the
CPU Unit to which it is mounted.
CPU Unit
Number of connectable Master Units
IN0 to IN7, OUT0 to
IN0 to IN15, OUT0 to
OUT7
OUT15
10 Units
5 Units
C200HX-CPU3@/4@-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU3@/4@-(Z)E
C200HE, and C200HS
C200HX-CPU5@/6@/8@-(Z)E 16 Units
C200HG-CPU5@/6@-(Z)E,
and CS
74
8 Units
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs Section
Dimensions
4-1
The following diagram shows the dimensions of the C200HW-SRM21-V1
Master Unit. All dimensions are in mm.
Note Refer to the CS-series Operation Manual, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E
Operation Manual, or C200HS Operation Manual for details on the dimensions when the Master Unit is installed on the PLC’s Backplane.
Master Unit Components
The following diagram shows the main components of the C200HW-SRM21V1 Master Unit. The functions of these components are described below.
Indicators
Indicates the operating status of the
Master Unit and the status of communications with the Slaves.
Rotary Switch
This switch sets the Master's one-digit
hexadecimal unit number.
DIP Switch
These pins have the following functions:
Pin 1: Usable node number setting
Pin 2: Communications mode
Pins 3 and 4: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Communications Terminals
Connect the Slaves' transmission cable
to these terminals.
75
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs Section
4-1
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
RUN (green)
Status
ON
Meaning
The Unit is operating normally.
OFF
SD (yellow)
ON
Indicates one of the following conditions:
The power is OFF, there is an I/O setting error, the CPU
Unit is in standby status, or there is a unit number setting
error.
Data is being transmitted.
RD (yellow)
OFF
ON
Data is not being transmitted.
Data is being received.
ERC (red)
OFF
ON
Data is not being received.
A Slave has been withdrawn from communications.
(Communications error)
The Slaves are communicating normally.
OFF
4-1-2
IN/OUT (red)
ON
OFF
8421 (red)
ON/OFF
An error has occurred with an Output Slave.
An error has occurred with an Input Slave or all Slaves
are operating normally.
These indicators represent the four-digit binary slave
number of the Slave in which the error occurred.
Switch Settings
Rotary Switch
The Master Unit’s unit number (Special I/O Unit’s unit number) is set with the
rotary switch on the front of the Unit.
MACHINE
No.
The highest possible unit number depends on the PLC model and the usable
node number setting set with pin 1 of the DIP switch.
CPU Unit
CS1
C200HX-CPU3@-(Z)E
/-CPU4@-(Z)E, C200HGCPU3@-(Z)E
/-CPU4@-(Z)E, All
C200HE/HS PLCs
C200HX/HG-CPU5@-(Z)E/
CPU6@-(Z)E/CPU8@-(Z)E
Number of usable Master Units
Usable node number setting
(with DIP switch)
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7
Unit number
setting range
0 to F
8
(allocated words for 2 Special I/O
Units (i.e., 20 words))
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15
0 to E
10
(allocated words for 1 Special I/O
Unit (i.e., 10 words))
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7
0 to 9
5
(allocated words for 2 Special I/O
Units (i.e., 20 words))
16
(allocated words for 1 Special I/O
Unit (i.e., 10 words))
8
(allocated words for 2 Special I/O
Units (i.e., 20 words))
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15
0 to 8
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7
0 to 9, A to F
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15
0 to 8, A to E
16
(allocated words for 1 Special I/O
Unit (i.e., 10 words))
Any unit number in the ranges above can be set, as long as the same unit
number has not been set on another Special I/O Unit mounted in the PLC. Set
the unit number with a small flat-blade screwdriver, being careful not to damage the switch.
76
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs Section
4-1
!Caution Always turn OFF the PLC before changing the unit number setting.
• The Master Unit is shipped with the unit number set to 0.
• The unit number setting determines which words in the PLC’s Special I/O
Unit Area are allocated to the Master Unit. Refer to 4-1-3 I/O Allocations
in CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs for
details.
• The Master Unit is allocated twice as many words in the PLC’s Special I/O
Unit Area (the words for unit number set on the Master and the next unit
number) when the usable node number setting is set to IN0 through IN15
and OUT0 through OUT15. In this case, neither the Master’s unit number
nor the next unit number can be used on another Special I/O Unit
mounted in the PLC.
• If the same unit number is used for the Master and another Special I/O
Unit, an I/O UNIT OVER error will occur in the PLC and it will not be possible to start up the CompoBus/S System.
• For the following PLCs, unit numbers A to F cannot be set:
C200HE, C200HS, C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E, C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E,
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E, and C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
DIP Switch
The DIP switch is used to set the range of usable node numbers of Slaves and
the communications mode.
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Communications mode
Usable node numbers
Note
1. Always turn the PLC OFF before changing the settings.
2. Leave pins 3 and 4 set to OFF.
Set pin 1 of the DIP switch as shown in the following table.
Pin 1 setting
OFF
Usable node number setting
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7
ON
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15
Set pin 2 of the DIP switch as shown in the following table.
Pin 2
setting
Communications
mode setting
Communications
distance
Communications
baud rate
Communications
cycle time
OFF
High-speed Communications Mode
100 m max.
750 kbps
0.5 ms or 0.8 ms
ON
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
500 m max.
93.75 kbps
4.0 ms or 6.0 ms
Note
1. Make sure that the communications mode of the Master Unit matches that
of all Slaves. If the CompoBus/S System contains a Slave whose communications mode does not agree with that of the Master Unit, the COMM indicator on that Slave will not light, and normal communications with that
Slave will not be possible. Other Slaves will not be adversely affected. (In
such cases, the COMM indicator on the Master Unit will light normally.) For
information relating to the states of the Master Unit indicator, refer to 6-51 Indicators.
2. When using an existing Master Unit model without V1, pin 2 must be set to
OFF. Otherwise, normal communications may not be possible.
77
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs Section
4-1
• The Master Unit is factory-set to OFF (for IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7).
• The maximum number of Slaves setting affects both the total number of
words allocated and the Slaves’ communication cycle. Refer to 4-1-3 I/O
Allocations in CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS
PLCs for details.
• The Master Unit is allocated twice as many words in the PLC’s Special I/O
Unit Area (the words for unit number set on the Master and the next unit
number) when the usable node number setting is set to IN0 to IN15 and
OUT0 to OUT15. In this case, neither the Master’s unit number nor the
next unit number can be used on another Special I/O Unit mounted in the
PLC.
• Pin 2 is factory-set to OFF (High-speed Communications Mode).
• The setting of pin 2 determines the communications distance, baud rate,
and cycle time as shown in the above table.
4-1-3
I/O Allocations in CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and
C200HS PLCs
In CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs, the Master Unit is treated as a Special I/O Unit, so the Slave’s I/O data and status
information are stored in the sections of the PLC’s data areas which are allocated to Special I/O Units.
Allocations and Master
Unit Settings
The following settings affect I/O allocations to Slaves in the Master Units used
with CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs.
Setting at Master Status
Unit
Usable node num- OFF
ber settings (DIP
switch pin 1)
ON
Unit number setn
ting (rotary switch)
Slave Allocations
Affect on allocation
Uses 10 words (for one unit number) from the Special
I/O Unit Area as follows:
Output: 4 words, input: 4 words, status: 2 words.
Uses 20 words (for two unit numbers) from the Special
I/O Unit Area as follows:
Output: 8 words, input: 8 words, status: 4 words.
First word of the area used in the Special I/O Unit Area
CS Series
2000 + n × 10
C200HX/HG/HE/HS
For 0 ≤ n ≤ 9: 100 + n × 10
For 10 ≤ n ≤ 15 (A to F): 400 + (n − 10) × 10
Slaves are allocated words in the Special I/O Unit Area as described next. In
CompoBus/S Systems, node numbers of Input Slaves and Output Slaves are
treated separately so the same node number can be allocated.
I/O Allocations when Pin 1 Is OFF
When pin 1 is OFF and node addresses IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7 (up to
64 inputs/64 outputs) are used, words are allocated to the Slaves for each
node number as shown in the following diagrams.
78
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs Section
4-1
CS-series PLCs
First word
CIO 2000
CIO 2010
CIO 2020
CIO 2030
CIO 2040
CIO 2050
CIO 2060
CIO 2070
CIO 2080
CIO 2090
CIO 2100
CIO 2110
CIO 2120
CIO 2130
CIO 2140
CIO 2150
Unit number 0
Unit number 1
Unit number 2
Unit number 3
Unit number 4
Unit number 5
Unit number 6
Unit number 7
Unit number 8
Unit number 9
Unit number A
Unit number B
Unit number C
Unit number D
Unit number E
Unit number F
Slave allocations in Special I/O Unit Area
15 14
13 12
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
First word
Output Slave 1
Output Slave 0
First word + 1
Output Slave 3
Output Slave 2
First word + 2
Output Slave 5
Output Slave 4
First word + 3
Output Slave 7
Input Slave 1
Output Slave 6
Input Slave 0
First word + 6
Input Slave 3
Input Slave 5
Input Slave 2
Input Slave 4
First word + 7
Input Slave 7
Input Slave 6
First word + 4
First word + 5
First word + 8
First word + 9
Output Slave Error Flags
#7
#7
Input Slave Error Flags
02
1
Bits
Outputs
Inputs
Active Output Slave Flags
#0
#7
#0
#7
#0
Active Input Slave Flags
Status
#0
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs
First word
IR 100
IR 110
IR 120
IR 130
IR 140
IR 150
IR 160
IR 170
IR 180
IR 190
C200HXCPU5@/CPU6@/CPU8@-(Z)E,
C200HGCPU5@/CPU6@-(Z)E
IR 400
IR 410
IR 420
IR 430
IR 440
IR 450
Unit number 0
Unit number 1
Unit number 2
Unit number 3
Unit number 4
Unit number 5
Unit number 6
Unit number 7
Unit number 8
Unit number 9
Unit number A
Unit number B
Unit number C
Unit number D
Slave allocations in Special I/O Unit Area
Bits
First w ord
Output Slave 1
Output Slave 0
First word + 1
Output Slave 3
Output Slave 2
First word + 2
Output Slave 5
Output Slave 4
First word + 3
Output Slave 7
Output Slave 6
First word + 4
Input Slave 1
Input Slave 0
First word + 5
Input Slave 3
Input Slave 2
First word + 6
Input Slave 5
Input Slave 4
First word + 7
Input Slave 7
Output Slave Error Flags
Input Slave 6
Active Output Slave Flags
First word + 8
#7
#0
#7
#0
#7
Input Slave Error Flags
First word + 9
#7
Outputs
Inputs
#0
Active Input Slave Flags
Status
#0
Unit number E
Unit number F
I/O Allocations when Pin 1 is ON
When pin 1 is ON and node addresses IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15 (128
inputs/128 outputs max) are used, words are allocated to the Slaves for each
node number as shown in the following diagrams.
79
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs Section
CS-series PLCs
First word
CIO 2000
CIO 2010
CIO 2020
CIO 2030
CIO 2040
CIO 2050
CIO 2060
CIO 2070
CIO 2080
CIO 2090
CIO 2100
CIO 2110
CIO 2120
CIO 2130
CIO 2140
Slave allocations in Special I/O Unit Area
Unit #0
Unit #1
15 14
Unit #2
Unit #3
Unit #4
Unit #5
Unit #6
Unit #7
Unit #8
Unit #9
Unit #10
Unit #13
Unit #14
CIO 2900
CIO 2910 Unit #90
CIO 2920
Unit #91
CIO 2930 Unit #92
Unit #93
CIO 2940
Unit #94
Can not use
Unit #95
80
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
First word
Output Slave 1
Output Slave 0
First word + 1
Output Slave 3
Output Slave 2
First word + 2
Output Slave 5
Output Slave 4
First word + 3
Output Slave 7
Output Slave 6
First word + 4
Output Slave 9
Output Slave 8
First word + 5
Output Slave 11
Output Slave 10
First word + 6
Output Slave 13
Output Slave 12
First word + 7
Output Slave 15
Output Slave 14
First word + 8
Input Slave 1
Input Slave 0
First word + 9
Input Slave 3
Input Slave 2
First word + 10
Input Slave 5
Input Slave 4
First word + 11
Input Slave 7
Input Slave 6
First word + 12
Input Slave 9
Input Slave 8
First word + 13
Input Slave 11
Input Slave 10
First word + 14
Input Slave 13
Input Slave 12
First word + 15
First word + 16
Input Slave 14
Input Slave 15
Output Slave Error Flags Active Output Slave Flags
First word + 17
Input Slave Error Flags
First word + 18
Output Slave Error Flags Active Output Slave Flags
First word + 19
Input Slave Error Flags
Unit #11
Unit #12
13 12
#7
#7
#15
#15
#0
#0
#8
#8
#7
0
Bits
Outputs
Inputs
#0
Active Input Slave Flags
#7
#15
#0
#8
Active Input Slave Flags
#15
#8
Status
4-1
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs Section
4-1
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs
First word
IR 100
IR 110
IR 120
IR 130
IR 140
IR 150
IR 160
IR 170
IR 180
Slave allocations in Special I/O Unit Area
Unit #0
Unit #1
Output Slave 1
Output Slave 0
First word + 1
Output Slave 3
Output Slave 2
First word + 2
Output Slave 5
Output Slave 4
First word + 3
Output Slave 7
Output Slave 6
First word + 4
Output Slave 9
Output Slave 8
First word + 5
Output Slave 11
Output Slave 10
First word + 6
Output Slave 13
Output Slave 12
First word + 7
Output Slave 15
Output Slave 14
Unit #B
First word + 8
Input Slave 1
Input Slave 0
First word + 9
Input Slave 3
Input Slave 2
Unit #D
First word + 10
Input Slave 5
Input Slave 4
First word + 11
Input Slave 7
Input Slave 6
First word + 12
Input Slave 9
Input Slave 8
First word + 13
Input Slave 11
Input Slave 10
First word + 14
Input Slave 13
Input Slave 12
First word + 15
Input Slave 15
Input Slave 14
Unit #3
Unit #4
Unit #5
Unit #6
Unit #7
Unit #8
IR 400
C200HX-CPU5@/CPU6@/CPU8@-(Z)E,
C200HG-CPU5@/CPU6@-(Z)E
IR 410
IR 420
IR 430
IR 440
Bits
Unit #2
Unit #A
Unit #C
Unit #E
First word
Outputs
Inputs
First word + 16
Output Slave Error Flags Active Output Slave Flags
First word + 17
Input Slave Error Flags
First word + 18
Output Slave Error Flags Active Output Slave Flags
First word + 19
Input Slave Error Flags
#7
#0
#7
#0
#15
#8
#15
#7
#0
Active Input Slave Flags
#7
#0
#15
Status
#8
Active Input Slave Flags
#8
#15
#8
Slave I/O and Corresponding Allocations
Slave with 8 Inputs or 8 Outputs
The Slave is treated as one node number for output or input.
Bits
First word + 2
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Output Slave 5
Bits 7
8
7
6
5 4 3 2 1
Output Slave 4
0 Bits 7
0
0
Set to Node No. 5
8-point Output Slave
8 outputs
Slave with 16 Inputs or 16 Outputs
The Slave is treated as two node numbers for output or input, and allocated in
the same words as follows:
• When an odd node number has been set:
Uses node number setting – 1 and node number setting
• When an even node number has been set:
Uses node number setting and node number setting + 1.
81
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs Section
4-1
Example: When a 16-point Output Slave set as node number 5, the areas for
Output Slaves 4 and 5 are used. Other Output Slaves cannot use the area
allocated for Output Slave 4.
Bits
First word + 2
15 14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
Output Slave 5
Bit 7
4
3
2
1
0
Output Slave 4
0
Bit 7
0
Set to node No. 5
16-point Output Slave
16 outputs
Slave with Mixed I/O (8 Inputs and 8 Outputs)
Slaves that have both outputs and inputs are also assigned a single node
number, so the same node number is used for both outputs and inputs.
Example: When a Slave with 8 inputs and 8 outputs set as node number 2,
the area for node number 2 outputs and inputs is used.
Bits
First word +
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1
Output Slave 3
Bit 7
First word + 5
(IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7)
First word + 9
(IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15)
8
7
6
0 Bit 7
Input Slave 3
4 3 2 1
Output Slave 2
0
0
Input Slave 2
0 Bit 7
Bit 7
16-input/output Slave
5
0
Set to node number 2
8 outputs
8 inputs
Slave with 4 Outputs or 4 Inputs
The Slave is treated as one node number for output or input. The Slave uses
the rightmost 4 bits only, however, of the area allocated for one node number.
(The leftmost 4 bits cannot be used by another Slave.)
• When an odd node number has been set:
Bits 8 to 11 are used and bits 12 to 15 are not used.
• When an even node number has been set:
Bits 0 to 3 are used and bits 4 to 7 are not used.
Example: When a Slave with 4 inputs is set as node number 7, the Slave is
allocated the rightmost 4 bits (bits 8 to 11) in the area assigned for input node
number 7.
Bits
First word + 7
(IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7)
First word + 11
(IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Input Slave 7
Reserved
Bit 7
8
7
6
0 Bit 7
5 4 3 2
Input Slave 6
1
0
0
Set to node number 7.
4-point input Slave
4 inputs
Slave with Mixed I/O (4 Outputs and 4 Inputs)
Slaves that have both outputs and inputs are also assigned a single node
number, so the same node number is used for both outputs and inputs. The
Slave uses the rightmost 4 bits only, however, of the area allocated for one
node number. (The leftmost 4 bits cannot be used by another Slave.)
• When an odd node number has been set:
Bits 8 to 11 are used and bits 12 to 15 are not used.
82
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs Section
4-1
• When an even node number has been set:
Bits 0 to 3 are used and bits 4 to 7 are not used.
Example: When a Slave with 4 outputs and 4 inputs is set to node number 2,
the rightmost 4 bits (bits 0 to 3) of the area for node number 2 for both output
and input are used.
Bits
First word + 1
First word + 5
(IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7)
First word + 9
(IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Output Slave 3
Bit 7
Bit 7
8-point I/O Slave
4 outputs
4 inputs
Input Slave 3
8
7
6
5
0
4 3 2 1 0
Output Slave 2
Bit 3
0
Reserved
0
Reserved
Input Slave 2
Bit 3
0
Set to node number 2.
Slave with 32 Outputs or 32 Inputs
The Slave is treated as four node numbers for output or input and is allocated
2 consecutive words, as follows:
• When an odd node number has been set:
Uses (node number setting – 1) to (node number setting + 2)
• When an even node number has been set:
Uses (node number setting) to (node number setting + 3).
Example: When a Slave with 32 outputs is set to node number 1, it uses the
area assigned for Output Slave 0 to Output Slave 3. The area for Output Slave
0, 2, and 3 cannot be used for another Output Slave.
Bits
First word + 0
First word + 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Output Slave 1
Bit 7
Output Slave 3
Bit 7
8
7
6
0 Bit 7
0 Bit 7
5
4 3 2 1
Output Slave 0
0
0
Output Slave 2
0
Set to node number 1
32-output Slave
32 outputs
Slave with Mixed I/O (16 Outputs and 16 Inputs)
Slaves that have both outputs and inputs are also assigned a single node
number, so the same node number is used for both outputs and inputs, and
each is regarded as two node numbers. Outputs and inputs are allocated to
the same words, as follows:
• When an odd node number has been set:
Uses (node number setting – 1) and (node number setting)
• When an even node number has been set:
Uses (node number setting) and (node number setting + 1).
83
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs Section
4-1
• Example: When a Slave with 16 inputs and 16 outputs is set to node number 3, it uses Output Slave 2 and 3, and Input Slave 2 and 3. Output Slave
2 and Input Slave 2 cannot be used by other Slaves.
Bits
First word + 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Output Slave 3
Bit 7
First word + 5
Input Slave 3
Bit 7
(IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7)
First word + 9
Set to node
(IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT 15) number 3
8
7
6
0
Bit 7
0
Bit 7
5
4 3 2 1
Output Slave 2
0
0
Input Slave 2
0
32 I/O Slave
16 outputs
16 inputs
An Analog Terminal uses 64, 48, 32, or 16 points. I/O allocations are shown in
the following table.
Number of points
allocated
64 points
SRT2-AD04: 4 inputs
Node number setting
Odd number
Even number
48 points
SRT2-AD04: 3 inputs
Odd number
Even number
Node numbers used
Node number setting – 1 to
node number setting + 6
Node number setting to
node number setting + 7
Node number setting – 1 to
node number setting + 4
Node number setting to
node number setting + 5
32 points
SRT2-AD04: 2 inputs
SRT2-DA02: 2 outputs
Odd number
Node number setting – 1 to
node number setting + 2
Even number
Node number setting to
node number setting + 3
16 points
SRT2-AD04: 1 input
SRT2-DA02: 1 output
Odd number
Node number setting – 1 to
node number setting
Node number setting to
node number setting + 1
Even number
Do not allow allocations for the node numbers that are actually used to extend
beyond the words allocated to the Master Unit. Participation in communications will not be possible and the COMM indicator will turn OFF if the words
allocated to the Master are exceeded for either inputs or outputs.
Status Flag Functions
The functions of the flags in the status area are described below.
• Active Output Slave Flags
These flags indicate which Output Slaves (0 to 15) are active nodes in the
system. When the corresponding flag is ON, the Slave is an active node.
All of these flags are reset when the power is turned ON or operation is
restarted.
0 (OFF): No communications participation
The node hasn’t participated in communications even once.
1 (ON): Communications participation
The flag won’t change even if the node is withdrawn from the system.
• Active Input Slave Flags
These flags indicate which Input Slaves (0 to 15) are active nodes in the
system. When the corresponding flag is ON, the Slave is an active node.
All of these flags are reset when the power is turned ON or operation is
restarted.
0 (OFF): No communications participation
The node hasn’t participated in communications even once.
84
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs Section
4-1
1 (ON): Communications participation
The flag won’t change even if the node is withdrawn from the system.
• Output Slave Error Flags
These flags indicate the communications status of the Output Slaves (0 to
15). All of these flags are reset when the power is turned ON or operation
is restarted.
0 (OFF): Communications normal or inactive node
1 (ON): Withdrawn from communications (communications error)
• Input Slave Error Flags
These flags indicate the communications status of the Input Slaves (0 to
15). All of these flags are reset when the power is turned ON or operation
is restarted.
0 (OFF): Communications normal or inactive node
1 (ON): Withdrawn from communications (communications error)
Note When the CompoBus/S System starts up, inputs from Input Slaves and outputs to Output Slaves become effective when the Active Slave Flag for the
Slave is turned ON. It is recommended to write a ladder program that verifies
that the Slave’s Active Slave Flag is ON and its Error Flag is OFF before transmitting or receiving I/O data.
4-1-4
Data Areas in the PLC
The following table shows the data areas in the CPU that are used by the
Master Unit.
85
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs Section
4-1
CS-series PLCs
Data Area
Bit(s)
Auxiliary
A33000 to
Area (A)
A33015
PLC Setup
Name
Special I/O Unit Restarting
Flags
Function
These flags are turned ON while a Special I/O Unit is
restarting. Each bit corresponds to the Unit with the same
unit number.
This flag is turned ON in the following situations:
When the same unit number has been set on more than
one CS1 CPU Bus Unit.
When the same unit number has been set on more than
one Special I/O Unit.
When the same word is allocated more than once for Basic
I/O Units.
A40113
Dual Number Use Error Flag
(Fatal Error)
A40206
Special I/O Unit Error Flag
This flag is turned ON when the same unit number has
been set on more than one Special I/O Unit, or when an
error has occurred during data transfer between the PLC
and the Special I/O Unit. The unit number of the Unit is written to word A418.
A41100 to
A41115
Special I/O Unit Number
Duplication Flags
A41800 to
A41815
Special I/O Unit Error Flags
These flags are turned ON when the same unit number has
been set on more than one Special I/O Unit (i.e., when
A40113 is ON). Each bit corresponds to the Unit with the
same unit number.
These flags are turned ON when the same unit number has
been set on more than one Special I/O Unit, or when an
error has occurred during data transfer between the PLC
and the Special I/O Unit. Each bit corresponds to the Unit
with the same unit number.
A50200 to
A50215
Special I/O Unit Restart Bits
22600 to
22615
Special I/O Unit Refresh Disable Bits
Turn the corresponding bit ON and then OFF to restart a
Special I/O Unit. Each bit corresponds to the Unit with the
same unit number.
Turn the corresponding bit ON to disable refreshing of the
corresponding Special I/O Unit (except those on Slave
Racks).
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E PLCs
Data area
SR Area
86
Bit(s)
SR 25415
Name
Special I/O Unit Error Flag
SR 27400 to
SR 27415
Special I/O Unit Restarting
Flags
SR 28100 to
SR 28115
Special I/O Unit Restart Bits
SR 28200 to
SR 28215
Special I/O Unit Error Flags
Function
This flag is turned ON when there is an error in data transfers between the PLC and a Special I/O Unit or the same
unit number has been set on more than one Special I/O
Unit.
The unit number of the affected Unit is written to AR 00 and
SR 282.
These flags are turned ON while a Special I/O Unit is
restarting. Each bit corresponds to the Unit with the same
unit number.
Turn the corresponding bit OFF→ON→OFF to restart a
Special I/O Unit. Each bit corresponds to the Unit with the
same unit number.
(Bits AR 0100 to AR 0109 can also be used to restart Special I/O Units 0 to 9.)
These flags are turned ON when there is an error in data
transfers between the PLC and the corresponding Special
I/O Unit or the same unit number has been set on more
than one Special I/O Unit. Each bit corresponds to the Unit
with the same unit number.
(Bits AR 0000 to AR 0009 show the same information for
Special I/O Units 0 to 9.)
C200HW-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs Section
Data area
AR Area
DM Area
(PLC
Setup)
4-1
Bit(s)
AR 0000 to
AR 0009
Name
Special I/O Unit Error Flags
Function
These flags are turned ON when there is an error in data
transfers between the PLC and the corresponding Special
I/O Unit or the same unit number has been set on more
than one Special I/O Unit. Each bit corresponds to the Unit
with the same unit number.
(Bits SR 28200 to SR 28209 show the same information for
Special I/O Units 0 to 9.)
AR 0100 to
AR 0109
Special I/O Unit Restart Bits
Turn the corresponding bit OFF→ON→OFF to restart a
Special I/O Unit. Each bit corresponds to the Unit with the
same unit number.
(Bits SR 28100 to SR 28109 can also be used to restart
Special I/O Units 0 to 9.)
Turn the corresponding bit ON to disable refreshing of the
corresponding Special I/O Unit (except Remote I/O Racks).
Each bit corresponds to the Unit with the same unit number.
(Bits 00 to 09 of DM 6623 can also be used to disable
refreshing of Special I/O Units 0 to 9.)
DM 6620 (bits Special I/O Unit Refresh Dis00 to 09)
able Bits
DM 6623 (bits Special I/O Unit Refresh Dis00 to 15)
able Bits
Turn the corresponding bit ON to disable refreshing of the
corresponding Special I/O Unit (except Remote I/O Racks).
Each bit corresponds to the Unit with the same unit number.
(Bits 00 to 09 of DM 6620 can also be used to disable
refreshing of Special I/O Units 0 to 9.)
C200HS PLCs
Data area
SR Area
AR Area
DM Area
(PLC
Setup)
Bit(s)
Name
Function
SR 25415
Special I/O Unit Error Flag
This flag is turned ON when there is an error in data transfers between the PLC and a Special I/O Unit or the same
unit number has been set on more than one Special I/O
Unit.
The unit number of the affected Unit is written to AR 00.
SR 27400 to
SR 27409
Special I/O Unit Restarting
Flags
These flags are turned ON while a Special I/O Unit is
restarting. Each bit corresponds to the Unit with the same
unit number.
AR 0000 to
AR 0009
Special I/O Unit Error Flags
These flags are turned ON when there is an error in data
transfers between the PLC and the corresponding Special
I/O Unit or the same unit number has been set on more
than one Special I/O Unit. Each bit corresponds to the Unit
with the same unit number.
AR 0100 to
AR 0109
Special I/O Unit Restart Bits
Turn the corresponding bit OFF→ON→OFF to restart a
Special I/O Unit. Each bit corresponds to the Unit with the
same unit number.
DM 6620
(bits 00 to 09)
Special I/O Unit Refresh Disable Bits
Turn the corresponding bit ON to disable refreshing of the
corresponding Special I/O Unit (except Remote I/O Racks).
Each bit corresponds to the Unit with the same unit number.
87
Section 4-2
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs
4-2
4-2-1
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs
Specifications and Part Names
Specifications
General Specifications
General specifications conform to those of the CS-series PLCs.
Performance Specifications
Item
Specifications
Model
Unit classification
CS1W-SRM21
Special I/O Unit
Internal current consumption
Weight
5 V DC, 150 mA max.
Max. number of
Masters
95 Units
Master Unit mounting location
Can be mounted on the CPU Backplane or an Expansion I/O
Backplane. Can't be mounted on a SYSMAC BUS Slave (RT)
Rack.
Max. number of I/O
points per Master
256 points (128 inputs/128
outputs)
167 g max.
96 Units
128 points (64 inputs/64 outputs)
Number of points per 8-point mode
node number
Number of usable
node numbers per
Master
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7
(up to 16 nodes can be connected)
The following diagram shows the dimensions of the CS1W-SRM21 Master
Unit. All dimensions are in mm.
130
Dimensions
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to
OUT15 (up to 32 nodes can
be connected)
35
101
Refer to the CS-series PLC Operation Manual for installation dimensions of
the CS1W-SRM21 when it is mounted on a Backplane.
88
Section 4-2
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs
Part Names and Functions
Indicators
Indicates the operating status of the Master Unit
and the status of communications with the Slaves.
Rotary Switches
Used to set the Master Unit’s Special I/O Unit
number at the CPU Unit as a 2-digit decimal
number. The top switch is used to set the ten’s digit
and the bottom switch is used to set the one’s digit.
DIP Switch
These pins have the following functions:
Pin 1: Usable node number setting
Pin 2: Communications mode
Pin 3: Communications stop mode
Pin 4: Slave registration function
Communications Connector
Used to connect the Slave’s communications power
supply and communications cables. When the
communications power supply is not supplied to the
Slaves from communications cable, connect the
communications cable BD H and BD L signal lines
only.
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
RUN (green)
ERH (red)
Status
ON
Meaning
The Unit is operating normally.
OFF
Indicates one of the following conditions (the ERH and
ERC indicators light when errors other than the following
errors occur):
Power is not turned ON, watchdog timer error, etc.
Indicates one of the following conditions:
Errors occurring at the CPU Unit, such as Special I/O Unit
number setting error.
The Unit is exchanging data with the CPU Unit normally.
ON
OFF
ERC (red)
ON
OFF
Indicates one of the following conditions:
Master Unit internal error, communications error, or verification error
The Slaves are communicating normally.
SD (yellow)
ON
OFF
Data is being transmitted.
Data is not being transmitted.
RD (yellow)
ON
OFF
Data is being received.
Data is not being received.
89
Section 4-2
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs
4-2-2
Switch Settings
Rotary Switches
The rotary switches are used to set the Master Unit’s Special I/O Unit number
as a decimal number.
The range of usable node number settings (set using pin 1 of the DIP switch)
are listed in the following table.
DIP switch
pin 1 (NODE)
Usable node number setting
Unit number
setting range
OFF
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7
(When using the words for one Special I/O Unit (10
words))
0 to 95
ON
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15
(When using the words for two Special I/O Units (20
words))
0 to 94
Any unit number in the ranges above can be set, as long as the same unit
number has not been set on another Special I/O Unit mounted in the PLC. Set
the unit number with a small standard screwdriver; be careful not to damage
the switch.
!Caution Always turn the PLC OFF before changing the unit number setting.
• The Master Unit is shipped with the unit number set to 00.
• The unit number setting determines which words in the PLC’s Special I/O
Unit Area and DM Area are allocated to the Master Unit. Refer to 4-2-3
I/O Allocations for details.
• When the usable node number setting is set to IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to
OUT15, the CompoBus/S Master Unit is allocated twice as many words in
the PLC’s Special I/O Unit Area (the words for unit number set on the
Master and the next unit number). The Master’s unit number and the next
unit number cannot be used by another Special I/O Unit mounted to the
PLC.
• If the same unit number is used for the Master and another Special I/O
Unit, an I/O UNIT OVER error will occur in the PLC and it will not be possible to start up the CompoBus/S System.
DIP Switch
The DIP switch is used to set the range of usable node numbers of Slaves, the
communications mode, communications stop mode, and Slave registration
function.
Usable node numbers
Communications mode
Communications stop mode
Slave registration function
Note
1. Always turn the PLC OFF before changing the settings.
2. DIP switch pins 1 to 4 are all set to OFF at the factory.
90
Section 4-2
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs
Set pin 1 (NODE) of the DIP switch as shown in the following table.
Pin 1 setting
Note
Usable node number
setting
Maximum
I/O points
Words allocated in the
Special I/O Unit Area
OFF
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to
OUT7 (up to 16 nodes
can be connected)
128 points
(64 inputs,
64 outputs)
10 words (words for one
unit)
Input/output data: 4 input
words and 4 output words
Status information: 2
words
ON
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to
OUT15 (up to 32 nodes
can be connected)
256 points
(128 inputs,
128 outputs)
20 words (words for two
units)
Input/output data: 8 input
words and 8 output words
Status information: 4
words
1. The usable node number setting determines the total number of words allocated, and combined with the DIP switch pin 2 setting, determines the
Slaves’ communication cycle. Refer to 4-2-3 I/O Allocations for details.
2. When the usable node number setting is set to IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to
OUT15, the CompoBus/S Master Unit is allocated twice as many words in
the PLC’s Special I/O Unit Area (the words for unit number set on the Master and the next unit number). The Master’s unit number and the next unit
number cannot be used by another Special I/O Unit mounted to the PLC.
Set pin 2 (DR) of the DIP switch as shown in the following table.
Pin 2
setting
OFF
Communications Communications Communications Communications
mode setting
distance
baud rate
cycle time
High-speed Com- 100 m max.
750 kbps
0.5 ms (pin 1 OFF)
munications Mode
or
0.8 ms (pin 1 ON)
ON
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
Note
500 m max.
93.75 kbps
4.0 ms (pin 1 OFF)
or
6.0 ms (pin 1 ON)
1. The communications mode of the Master Unit must match that of all
Slaves. If the CompoBus/S System contains a Slave whose communications mode does not agree with that of the Master Unit, the COMM indicator on that Slave will not light, and normal communications with that Slave
will not be possible. Other Slaves will not be adversely affected. (In such
cases, the COMM indicator on the Master Unit will light normally.) For information on the Master Unit indicator statuses, refer to 6-3 Checking Operations of CS-series and CJ-series Master Units.
2. The setting of pin 2 determines the communications distance, baud rate,
and cycle time as shown in the above table.
Set pin 3 of the DIP switch as shown in the following table.
Pin 3 setting
OFF
ON
Communications stop mode setting
Communications mode
Continues remote I/O communications when a communications error occurs.
Communications stop mode
Stops remote I/O communications when a communications
error occurs.
If communications stop mode is set, communications automatically stop when
a remote I/O communications error occurs, thereby preventing system malfunctions.
91
Section 4-2
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs
Note If the communications stop mode causes remote I/O communications to stop,
communications will not restart when the cause of the error is removed. Turn
ON the power again or restart the Unit to resume communications. Refer to 42-4 Slave Registration Function and Communications Stop Mode.
Set pin 4 (REGS) of the DIP switch as shown in the following table.
Pin 4 setting
OFF
ON
Slave registration function setting
Slave registration function setting disabled
Slave registration function setting enabled
The Slave registration function monitors Slaves that are joined in the network,
and those unregistered Slaves that are illegally joined to the network, based
on Slave information registered in the Slave registration tables (Special I/O
Unit DM Area). Refer to 4-2-4 Slave Registration Function and Communications Stop Mode.
Note Set the Slave registration tables in the Special I/O Unit DM Area when using
the Slave registration function. Refer to 4-2-4 Slave Registration Function and
Communications Stop Mode.
4-2-3
I/O Allocations
CS-series Master Units are allocated words for Slave I/O data and status flags
in the Special I/O Unit Area of the Master. Words in the Special I/O Unit DM
Area is allocated for the Slave registration function and communications stop
mode.
Allocations and Master
Unit Settings
The areas used by the Master Unit depend on the Master Unit settings, as
shown in the following table.
Setting at Master
Unit
Usable node number
settings (DIP switch
pin 1)
Status
OFF
ON
Special I/O Unit number setting (rotary
switch)
Slave Allocations
92
n
Affect on allocation
Uses 10 words (words for one unit) from the Special I/O Unit Area as follows:
Output: 4 words, input: 4 words, status: 2 words.
(100 words are allocated in the Special I/O Unit
DM Area)
Uses 20 words (words for two units) from the
Special I/O Unit Area as follows:
Output: 8 words, input: 8 words, status: 4 words.
(100 words are allocated in the Special I/O Unit
DM Area)
First word of the area used in the Special I/O Unit
Area is CIO 2000 + (n ×10) words
First word of the area used in the Special I/O Unit
DM Area is D20000 + (n×100) words
Slaves are allocated in the Special I/O Unit Area as shown in the following diagram. In CompoBus/S Systems, node numbers of Input Slaves and Output
Slaves are treated separately so the same number can be allocated.
Section 4-2
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs
I/O Allocations when Pin 1 Is OFF
When pin 1 is OFF and node addresses IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7 (64
inputs/64 outputs max) are used, words are allocated to the Slaves for each
node number as shown in the following diagram.
Special I/O Unit Area in Master PLC
First word
CIO 2000
Unit number 0
CIO 2010
Unit number 1
CIO 2020
Unit number 2
CIO 2030
Unit number 3
CIO 2040
Unit number 4
CIO 2050
Unit number 5
CIO 2060
Unit number 6
CIO 2070
Unit number 7
CIO 2920
Unit number 92
CIO 2930
Unit number 93
CIO 2940
Unit number 94
CIO 2950
Unit number 95
Slave allocations in Special I/O Unit Area
Bits
First word
First word
+1
First word
+2
First word
+3
First word
+4
First word
+5
First word
+6
First word
+7
First word
+8
First word
+9
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Output Slave 1
0
Bit 7
Output Slave 3
0
Bit 7
Output Slave 5
0
Bit 7
Output Slave 7
Bit 7
0
Input Slave 1
0
Bit 7
Input Slave 3
0
Bit 7
Input Slave 5
0
Bit 7
Input Slave 7
0
Bit 7
Output Slave Error Flags
0
Bit 7
Input Slave Error Flags
0
Bit 7
7
6
Bit 7
Bit 7
Bit 7
Bit 7
Bit 7
Bit 7
Bit 7
5
4 3 2 1
Output Slave 0
Output Slave 2
Output Slave 4
Output Slave 6
Input Slave 0
Input Slave 2
Input Slave 4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bit 7
Inputs
0
Input Slave 6
0
Active output Slave Flags
0
Active Input Slave Flags
0
Bit 7
Bit 7
Outputs
Status
93
Section 4-2
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs
I/O Allocations when Pin 1 is ON
When pin 1 is ON and node addresses IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15 (up
to 128 inputs/128 outputs) are used, words are allocated to the Slaves for
each node number as shown in the following diagram.
Special I/O Unit Area in Master PLC
First word
CIO 2000
CIO 2010
CIO 2020
CIO 2030
CIO 2040
CIO 2050
CIO 2060
CIO 2070
CIO 2080
CIO 2090
CIO 2100
CIO 2110
CIO 2120
CIO 2130
CIO 2140
Slave allocations in Special I/O Unit Area
Unit #0
Unit #1
15 14
Unit #2
Unit #3
Unit #4
Unit #5
Unit #6
Unit #7
Unit #8
Unit #9
Unit #10
Unit #13
Unit #14
CIO 2900
CIO 2910 Unit #90
CIO 2920
Unit #91
CIO 2930 Unit #92
Unit #93
CIO 2940
Unit #94
Can not use
Unit #95
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Output Slave 1
Output Slave 0
First word + 1
Output Slave 3
Output Slave 2
First word + 2
Output Slave 5
Output Slave 4
First word + 3
Output Slave 7
Output Slave 6
First word + 4
Output Slave 9
Output Slave 8
First word + 5
Output Slave 11
Output Slave 10
First word + 6
Output Slave 13
Output Slave 12
First word + 7
Output Slave 15
Output Slave 14
First word + 8
Input Slave 1
Input Slave 0
First word + 9
Input Slave 3
Input Slave 2
First word + 10
Input Slave 5
Input Slave 4
First word + 11
Input Slave 7
Input Slave 6
First word + 12
Input Slave 9
Input Slave 8
First word + 13
Input Slave 11
Input Slave 10
First word + 14
Input Slave 13
Input Slave 12
First word + 15
First word + 16
Input Slave 14
Input Slave 15
Output Slave Error Flags Active Output Slave Flags
First word + 17
Input Slave Error Flags
First word + 18
Output Slave Error Flags Active Output Slave Flags
First word + 19
Input Slave Error Flags
Unit #11
Unit #12
13 12
First word
#7
#0
#7
#0
#15
#8
#15
#8
#7
0
Bits
Outputs
Inputs
#0
Active Input Slave Flags
#7
#0
#15
Status
#8
Active Input Slave Flags
#15
#8
Slave I/O and Corresponding Areas
Slave with 8 Inputs or 8 Outputs
The Slave is treated as one node number for output or input.
Bits
First word + 2
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Output Slave 5
Bits 7
8
7
6
5 4 3 2 1
Output Slave 4
0 Bits 7
0
0
Set to Node No. 5
8-point Output Slave
8 outputs
Slave with 16 Inputs or 16 Outputs
The Slave is treated as two node numbers for output or input, and allocated in
the same words as follows:
• When an odd node number has been set:
Uses node number setting – 1 and node number setting
• When an even node number has been set:
Uses node number setting and node number setting + 1.
94
Section 4-2
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs
Example: When a 16-point Output Slave set as node number 5, the areas for
Output Slaves 4 and 5 are used. Other Output Slaves cannot use the area
allocated for Output Slave 4.
Bits
First word + 2
15 14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
Output Slave 5
Bit 7
5
4
3
2
1
0
Output Slave 4
0 Bit 7
0
Set to node No. 5
16-point Output Slave
16 outputs
Slave with Mixed I/O (8 Inputs and 8 Outputs)
Slaves that have both outputs and inputs are also assigned a single node
number, so the same node number is used for both outputs and inputs.
Example: When a Slave with 8 inputs and 8 outputs set as node number 2,
the area for node number 2 outputs and inputs is used.
Bits
First word +
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1
Output Slave 3
Bit 7
First word + 5
(IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7)
First word + 9
(IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15)
8
7
6
0
Bit 7
0
Bit 7
5
0
0
Input Slave 3
Input Slave 2
Bit 7
16-input/output Slave
4 3 2 1
Output Slave 2
0
Set to node number 2
8 outputs
8 inputs
Slave with 4 Outputs or 4 Inputs
The Slave is treated as one node number for output or input. The Slave uses
the rightmost 4 bits only, however, of the area allocated for one node number.
(The leftmost 4 bits cannot be used by another Slave.)
• When an odd node number has been set:
Bits 8 to 11 are used and bits 12 to 15 are not used.
• When an even node number has been set:
Bits 0 to 3 are used and bits 4 to 7 are not used.
Example: When a Slave with 4 inputs is set as node number 7, the Slave is
allocated the rightmost 4 bits (bits 8 to 11) in the area assigned for input node
number 7.
Bits
First word + 7
(IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7)
First word + 11
(IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Input Slave 7
Bit 3
Reserved
8
7
6
0
Bit 7
5
4 3 2 1
Input Slave 6
0
0
Set to node number 7.
4-point input Slave
4 inputs
Slave with Mixed I/O (4 Outputs and 4 Inputs)
Slaves that have both outputs and inputs are also assigned a single node
number, so the same node number is used for both outputs and inputs. The
Slave uses the rightmost 4 bits only, however, of the area allocated for one
node number. (The leftmost 4 bits cannot be used by another Slave.)
• When an odd node number has been set:
Bits 8 to 11 are used and bits 12 to 15 are not used.
95
Section 4-2
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs
• When an even node number has been set:
Bits 0 to 3 are used and bits 4 to 7 are not used.
Example: When a Slave with 4 outputs and 4 inputs is set to node number 2,
the rightmost 4 bits (bits 0 to 3) of the area for node number 2 for both output
and input are used.
Bits
First word + 1
First word + 5
(IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7)
First word + 9
(IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Output Slave 3
Bit 7
Bit 7
8-point I/O Slave
4 outputs
4 inputs
Input Slave 3
8
7
6
5
0
4 3 2 1 0
Output Slave 2
0
Reserved
Bit 3
0
Reserved
Input Slave 2
Bit 3
0
Set to node number 2.
Slave with 32 Outputs or 32 Inputs
The Slave is treated as four node numbers for output or input and is allocated
2 consecutive words, as follows:
• When an odd node number has been set:
Uses (node number setting – 1) to (node number setting + 2)
• When an even node number has been set:
Uses (node number setting) to (node number setting + 3).
Example: When a Slave with 32 outputs is set to node number 1, it uses the
area assigned for Output Slave 0 to Output Slave 3. The area for Output Slave
0, 2, and 3 cannot be used for another Output Slave.
Bits
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
First word + 0
Output Slave 1
Bit 7
Output Slave 3
First word + 1
Bit 7
8
7
0 Bit 7
6
5 4 3 2 1
Output Slave 0
0
0
Output Slave 2
0 Bit 7
0
Set to node number 1
32-output Slave
32 outputs
Slave with Mixed I/O (16 Outputs and 16 Inputs)
Slaves that have both outputs and inputs are also assigned a single node
number, so the same node number is used for both outputs and inputs, and
each is regarded as two node numbers. Outputs and inputs are allocated to
the same words, as follows:
• When an odd node number has been set:
Uses (node number setting – 1) and (node number setting)
• When an even node number has been set:
Uses (node number setting) and (node number setting + 1).
• Example: When a Slave with 16 inputs and 16 outputs is set to node number 3, it uses Output Slave 2 and 3, and Input Slave 2 and 3. Output Slave
2 and Input Slave 2 cannot be used by other Slaves.
96
Section 4-2
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs
Bits
First word + 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Output Slave 3
Bit 7
First word + 5
Input Slave 3
Bit 7
(IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7)
First word + 9
Set to node
(IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT 15) number 3
8
7
6
0 Bit 7
0 Bit 7
5 4 3 2 1
output Slave 2
Input Slave 2
0
0
0
32 I/O Slave
16 outputs
16 inputs
Using an Analog Terminal
An Analog Terminal uses 16, 32, 48, or 64 points. I/O allocations are shown in
the following table.
Number of points
allocated
64 points
SRT2-AD04: 4 inputs
Node number setting
Odd number
Even number
48 points
SRT2-AD04: 3 inputs
Node numbers used
Node number setting – 1 to
node number setting + 6
Node number setting to
node number setting + 7
Odd number
Node number setting – 1 to
node number setting + 4
Even number
Node number setting to
node number setting + 5
32 points
SRT2-AD04: 2 inputs
SRT2-DA02: 2 outputs
Odd number
Node number setting – 1 to
node number setting + 2
Even number
16 points
SRT2-AD04: 1 input
SRT2-DA02: 1 output
Odd number
Node number setting to
node number setting + 3
Node number setting – 1 to
node number setting
Node number setting to
node number setting + 1
Even number
Do not use words for the node number outside the words allocated in the
Master Unit. If words outside the specified output or input areas are used, the
Unit cannot participate in communications and the COMM indicator will not
turn ON.
Status Flag Functions
The functions of the flags in the status area are described below.
• Active Output Slave Flags
These flags indicate which Output Slaves (0 to 15) are active nodes in the
system. When the corresponding flag is ON, the Slave is an active node.
All of these flags are reset when the power is turned ON or operation is
restarted.
0 (OFF): No communications participation
The node hasn’t participated in communications even once.
1 (ON): Communications participation
The flag won’t change even if the node is withdrawn from the system.
• Active Input Slave Flags
These flags indicate which Input Slaves (0 to 15) are active nodes in the
system. When the corresponding flag is ON, the Slave is an active node.
All of these flags are reset when the power is turned ON or operation is
restarted.
0 (OFF): No communications participation
The node hasn’t participated in communications even once.
97
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs
Section 4-2
1 (ON): Communications participation
The flag won’t change even if the node is withdrawn from the system.
• Output Slave Error Flags
These flags indicate the communications status of the Output Slaves (0 to
15). All of these flags are reset when the power is turned ON or operation
is restarted.
0 (OFF): Communications normal or inactive node
1 (ON): Withdrawn from communications (communications error)
• Input Slave Error Flags
These flags indicate the communications status of the Input Slaves (0 to
15). All of these flags are reset when the power is turned ON or operation
is restarted.
0 (OFF): Communications normal or inactive node
1 (ON): Withdrawn from communications (communications error)
Note
1. When the CompoBus/S System starts up, inputs from Input Slaves and
outputs to Output Slaves become effective when the Active Slave Flag for
the Slave is turned ON. It is recommended to write a ladder program that
verifies that the Slave’s Active Slave Flag is ON and its Error Flag is OFF
before transmitting or receiving I/O data.
2. When CS-series Master Units are set to communications stop mode, communications will stop when the Output Slave Error Flag or Input Slave Error
Flag will turn ON. (Refer to 4-2-4 Slave Registration Function and Communications Stop Mode.)
4-2-4
Slave Registration Function and Communications Stop Mode
The CS-series Master Units now support a Slave registration function and
communications stop mode. This new capability enables the CompoBus/S
System to deliver increased reliability.
Slave Registration Function
The words allocated in the DM Area to the Master Unit as a Special I/O Unit
contains a Slave registration table. By registering the Slaves that are normally
participating in communications, the Slaves that are not joined to the network
or are slow to join, or unregistered Slaves that are illegally joined can be monitored.
This function prevents system malfunctions due to incorrect wiring on site.
The Slave registration function is enabled by turning ON pin 4 of the DIP
switch on the Master Unit.
Communications Stop Mode
By setting communications stop mode, remote I/O communications will stop
when a communications error occurs, and information on the Slave with the
communications error is stored in the Special I/O Unit DM Area.
This function prevents the System from running on incorrect I/O data without
having to disconnect a Slave with a communications error, and enables quick
troubleshooting of the communications error.
When remote I/O communications are stopped in communications stop mode,
they will not resume when the cause of the error is removed. To restart remote
I/O communications, turn ON the power again, or restart the Unit. When the
Unit is set to standard communications mode, even if a communications error
occurs, the remote I/O communications will continue with the Slave with the
error disconnected. Also, the Slave with the communications error is not
98
Section 4-2
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs
recorded in the Special I/O Unit DM Area, so a standard status area check
using the program is required.
If a verification error occurs while using the Slave registration function, as it is
not a communications error, remote I/O communications will continue even if
communications stop mode is enabled.
Communications stop mode is set using pin 3 of the DIP switch on the Master
Unit. (pin 3 ON: communications stop mode, pin 3 OFF: normal communications mode)
Words Allocated for Slave
Registration and
Communications Stop
Mode
The words used for the Slave registration function and communications stop
mode are allocated in the Special I/O Unit DM Area according to the Master
Unit’s Special I/O Unit number, as shown below.
First word = D20000 + (unit number ×100)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
First word
Output Slave Registration Table
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 1
Input Slave Registration Table
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 2
Registered Slave Participation Monitoring Time
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
0 Bit
Reserved for system use (Cannot be used.)
First word + 3
First word + 5
Status Flags
(Used when Slave registration or communications stop
mode are enabled.)
Communications Stopped Node Number and Slave Type
(Used only when communications stop mode is enabled.)
First word + 6
Output Slave Verification Error: Slave Missing
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 7
Input Slave Verification Error: Slave Missing
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 8
Output Slave Verification Error: Unregistered Slave in Network
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 9
Input Slave Verification Error: Unregistered Slave in Network
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 4
CPU Unit-to-Master
Unit
(The contents of this
area is transferred to
the Master Unit from
the CPU Unit when
the power is turned
ON. When the
contents has
changed, turn ON
the power again.)
Master Unit-to-CPU
Unit
First word + 10
to
Not used. (Can be used as work bits/words.)
First word + 99
The contents from the first word to the first word +9 cannot be used for any
other purpose. They can be used, however, if the Slave registration function
and communications stop mode are not enabled.
99
Section 4-2
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs
The functions of each area are given in the following table.
Word
Bit
+0
00
01
02
+1
OUT0
OUT1
OUT2
to
13
to
OUT13
14
15
OUT14
OUT15
00
01
02
to
13
14
15
+2
00 to 15
+3
00 to 15
100
Name
Output Slave Registration Table
Input Slave Registration table
IN0
IN1
Function
Registers a list of the Output
Slaves that are normally operating in the network. This list is
used for checking the Slaves
with the Slave registration function. Bits 00 to 15 correspond
to Slave node numbers 0 to 15.
The Output Slave is registered
by turning ON its corresponding bit.
The bits in the Special I/O Unit
Area must be registered to correspond to the node numbers
actually used by the Slaves.
Therefore, for Slaves with 16
points or higher, turn ON the
bits for the other node numbers
too. For example, the two consecutive bits used by a 16-point
Slave or the four consecutive
bits used by a 32-point Slave
must be set.
Registers a list of the Input
Slaves that are normally operating in the network. This list is
IN2
used to check the Slaves with
the Slave registration function.
to
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
IN13
Slave node numbers 0 to 15.
IN14
The Input Slave is registered by
turning ON its corresponding
IN15
bit.
Registered Slave Par- The waiting time between when the Master Unit is started until the Slaves
ticipation Monitoring
start to be checked using the Slave registration function. The time is set in
Time
increments of 1 ms as a hexadecimal.
The setting range is 0000 (default is 2000 ms) or 0001 to FFDC (1 to 65500
ms). If the monitoring time lapses and there are still registered Slaves not
joined in the network, a verification error (Slave missing) will occur.
Reserved for system
use.
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs
Word
Bit
+4
00
00 to 07
08
+5
Name
Registration Completed Flag
Reserved for system
use.
Verification Error
Flag: Slave Missing
Section 4-2
Function
This flag is turned ON when all registered Slaves have joined the network. If
all the registered Slaves have joined the network within the registered Slave
participation monitoring time this flag will turn ON even if unregistered Slaves
have also joined. The flag will not turn ON, however, if there are no Slaves
set in the Slave registration table. The flag will remain ON until the power is
turned OFF and ON again or the Unit is restarted.
This flag is turned ON under the following conditions.
Registered Slaves do not join the network within the registered Slave participation monitoring time. When the Slave that caused the verification error is
joined in the network, the flag will automatically be turned OFF.
Check which Slave caused the error in the bit for verification error (Slave
missing) in Output Slave (first word + 6) or verification error (Slave missing)
in Input Slave (first word + 7).
09
Verification Error
Flag: Unregistered
Slave in Network
10
Communications
Stopped Flag
11 to 14
Reserved for system
use.
15
Error Flag
This flag is turned ON when any of the bits 08 to 10 are set to1(ON).
The flag is automatically turned OFF when all the bits 08 to 10 are turned
OFF.
00 to 07
Communications
Stopped Node Number
When the Master Unit is set to communications stop mode and remote I/O
communications stop due to a communications error, the node number of the
Slave that caused the error is stored as a 2-digit hexadecimal (00 to 0F: 1 to
15).
Check the Slave type (Output or Input) in the word for communications
stopped Slave type (bit 15 of first word + 5).
The node address stored will be held until the power is turned OFF and ON
again or the Unit is restarted.
08 to 14
Reserved for system
use.
Communications
Stopped Slave type
15
This flag is turned ON when an unregistered Slave has joined the network.
The flag will remain ON until the power is turned OFF and ON again or the
Unit is restarted, even if the Slave that caused the verification error is
removed from the network.
Check which Slave caused the error in the bit for Output Slave verification
error (unregistered Slave in network) (first word + 8) or Input Slave verification error (unregistered Slave in network) (first word + 9).
This flag is turned ON when the Master Unit is set to communications stop
mode and remote I/O communications stop due to a communications error,.
Once the flag has turned ON, the status remains until the power is turned
OFF and ON again or the Unit is restarted.
Check which Slave caused the error in the bits for communications stopped
node number (bits 00 to 07 of first word + 5) and communications stopped
Slave type (bit 15 of first word + 5).
When the Master Unit is set to communications stop mode and remote I/O
communications stop due to a communications error, the Slave type of the
Slave that caused the error is stored as follows:
0 (OFF): Output Slave
1 (ON): Input Slave
Check which Slave caused the error in the bits for communications stopped
node number (bits 00 to 07 of first word + 5)
When communications have stopped, the bit status is held until the power is
turned OFF and ON again or the Unit is restarted.
101
Section 4-2
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs
Word
Bit
+6
00
01
02
+7
to
13
to
OUT13
14
15
OUT14
OUT15
00
01
02
+8
Input Slave VerificaIN0
tion Error: Slave Miss- IN1
ing
IN2
to
13
to
IN13
14
15
IN14
IN15
00
to
13
Output Slave Verifica- OUT0
tion Error: UnregisOUT1
tered Slave in
OUT2
Network
to
OUT13
14
OUT14
15
OUT15
01
02
+9
Name
Output Slave Verifica- OUT0
tion Error: Slave Miss- OUT1
ing
OUT2
00
01
02
Input Slave Verification Error: Unregistered Slave in
Network
IN0
IN1
IN2
to
13
to
IN13
14
15
IN14
IN15
Slave Registration
Function Procedure
Function
When the Slave registration
function is enabled, the bit corresponding to the node number
of the Output Slave that caused
the verification error (Slave
missing) will be turned ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
Output Slave node numbers 1
to 15. When the Slave that
caused the verification error
joins the network, the bit will
automatically turned OFF.
When the Slave registration
function is enabled, the bit corresponding to the node number
of the Input Slave that caused
the verification error (Slave
missing) will be turned ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
Input Slave node numbers 1 to
15. When the Slave that
caused the verification error
joins the network, the bit will
automatically turned OFF.
When the Slave registration
function is enabled, the bit corresponding to the node number
of the Output Slave where a
verification error (unregistered
Slave in network) will be turned
ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
Output Slave node numbers 1
to 15.
Once a bit has been turned ON
the status will be held until the
power is turned OFF and ON
again or the Unit is restarted.
When the Slave registration
function is enabled, the bit corresponding to the node number
of the Input Slave where a verification error (unregistered
Slave in network) will be turned
ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
Input Slave node numbers 1 to
15.
Once a bit has been turned ON
the status will be held until the
power is turned OFF and ON
again or the Unit is restarted.
The bits in the Special I/O Unit
Area correspond to the node
numbers actually used by the
Slaves. Therefore, for Slaves
with 16 points or higher, the bits
other than those set for the
node number may also be
turned ON. For example, the
two consecutive bits used by a
16-point Slave or the four consecutive bits used by a 32-point
Slave may be turned ON at the
same time.
When the Slave registration function is used, the Output/Input Slave registration table and registered Slave participation monitoring time must be set in the
Special I/O Unit DM Area, but the power must be turned OFF and ON again or
the Unit restarted to enable the settings.
The following example shows the procedure for using the Slave registration
function. (Information on other Slave registration function settings and connections are omitted here.)
102
Section 4-2
CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs
1,2,3...
1. Turn OFF pin 4 of the DIP switch on the Master Unit to disable the Slave
registration function.
2. Turn ON the power to the CPU Unit to which the Master Unit is mounted.
3. Use a Programming Device for the CPU Unit to set the following information in the Special I/O Unit DM Area words used by the Master Unit.
• Output Slave registration table
• Input Slave registration table
• Registration Slave participation monitoring time
4. Turn OFF the power to the CPU Unit to which the Master Unit is mounted.
5. Turn ON pin 4 of the DIP switch on the Master Unit to enable the Slave registration function
6. Turn ON the power to the CPU Unit to which the Master Unit is mounted or
restart the Master Unit.
The settings in the Special I/O Unit DM Area can be set while pin 4 of the DIP
switch on the Master Unit is set to ON, but a verification error may occur due
to the incorrectly set Slave registration table.
4-2-5
Allocations for Master Unit in PLC
The following table shows the words in the CPU Unit that are related to the
Master Unit.
Data area
Auxiliary
Area (A)
PLC Setup
Bit(s)
A33000 to
A33515
Name
Special I/O Unit Restarting
Flags
Function
These flags are turned ON while a Special I/O Unit is
restarting. Each bit corresponds to the Unit with the same
unit number.
This flag is turned ON in the following situations:
When the same unit number has been set on more than
one CS1 CPU Bus Unit.
When the same unit number has been set on more than
one Special I/O Unit.
When the same word is allocated more than once for Basic
I/O Units.
A40113
Dual Number Use Error Flag
(Fatal Error)
A40206
Special I/O Unit Error Flag
This flag is turned ON when the same unit number has
been set on more than one Special I/O Unit, or when an
error has occurred during data transfer between the PLC
and the Special I/O Unit. The unit number of the Unit is written to word A418.
A41100 to
A41615
Special I/O Unit Number
Duplication Flags
A41800 to
A42315
Special I/O Unit Error Flags
These flags are turned ON when the same unit number has
been set on more than one Special I/O Unit (i.e., when
A40113 is ON). Each bit corresponds to the Unit with the
same unit number.
These flags are turned ON when the same unit number has
been set on more than one Special I/O Unit, or when an
error has occurred during data transfer between the PLC
and the Special I/O Unit. Each bit corresponds to the Unit
with the same unit number.
A50200 to
A50715
Special I/O Unit Restart Bits
22600 to
23115
Special I/O Unit Refresh Disable Bits
Turn the corresponding bit ON and then OFF to restart a
Special I/O Unit. Each bit corresponds to the Unit with the
same unit number.
Turn the corresponding bit ON to disable refreshing of the
corresponding Special I/O Unit (except those on Slave
Racks).
103
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
4-3
4-3-1
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
Specifications and Part Names
Specifications
General Specifications
General specifications conform to those of the CJ-series PLCs.
Performance Specifications
Item
104
Specifications
Model
Unit classification
CJ1W-SRM21
Special I/O Unit
Internal current consumption
Allowable current
from the Slave communications power
supply connection
terminals
Weight
5 V DC, 150 mA max.
4 A (14 to 26.4 V DC)
66 g max. (including provided connector)
Max. number of
Masters
40 Units
Master Unit mounting location
Max. number of I/O
points per Master
Number of points per
node number
Number of usable
node numbers per
Master
Can be connected in the CJ-series CPU Rack or Expansion
I/O Rack.
256 points (128 inputs/128
128 points (64 inputs/64 outoutputs)
puts)
8-point mode
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to
OUT15 (up to 32 nodes can
be connected)
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7
(up to 16 nodes can be connected)
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions of the CJ1W-SRM21-V1 Master
Unit. All dimensions are in mm.
80
(When provided connector is connected.)
65
2.7
20
SRM21
RUN
ERH
ERC
SD
RD
901
456
23
MACH
No. 1
x10
78
901
456
23
1 2 3 4
78
90
x100
REGS
ESTP
DR
NODE
ON
BS+
BDH
BDL
BS−
BS+
2.7
BS−
Refer to the CJ-series Operation Manual for details on installing the CJ1WSRM21 when it is connected in a CJ-series CPU Rack or Expansion Rack.
105
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
Part Names and Functions
SRM21
RUN
ERH
ERC
SD
RD
456
901
23
MACH
No. 1
x10
78
456
901
23
78
1 2 3 4
x100
REGS
ESTP
DR
NODE
ON
Indicators
Indicates the operating status of the Master Unit
and the status of communications with the Slaves.
Rotary Switches
Used to set the Master Unit’s Special I/O Unit
number at the CPU Unit as a 2-digit decimal
number. The top switch is used to set the ten’s digit
and the bottom switch is used to set the one’s digit.
DIP Switch
These pins have the following functions:
Pin 1: Usable node number setting
Pin 2: Communications mode
Pin 3: Communications stop mode
Pin 4: Slave registration function
BS+
BDH
BDL
Communications Connector
Used to connect the Slave’s communications power
supply and communications cables. When the
communications power supply is not supplied to the
Slaves from communications cable, connect the
communications cable BD H and BD L signal lines
only.
BS−
BS+
BS−
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
106
Status
Meaning
RUN (green)
ON
OFF
The Unit is operating normally.
Indicates one of the following conditions (the ERH and
ERC indicators light when errors other than the following
errors occur):
Power is not turned ON, watchdog timer error, etc.
ERH (red)
ON
Indicates one of the following conditions:
Errors occurring at the CPU Unit, such as Special I/O Unit
number setting error.
ERC (red)
OFF
ON
OFF
The Unit is exchanging data with the CPU Unit normally.
Indicates one of the following conditions:
Master Unit internal error, communications error, or verification error
The Slaves are communicating normally.
SD (yellow)
ON
Data is being transmitted.
RD (yellow)
OFF
ON
Data is not being transmitted.
Data is being received.
OFF
Data is not being received.
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
4-3-2
Switch Settings
Rotary Switches
The rotary switches are used to set the Master Unit’s Special I/O Unit number
as a decimal number.
901
456
23
MACH
No. 1
x10
78
901
456
23
x100
78
The range of usable node number settings (set using pin 1 of the DIP switch)
are listed in the following table.
DIP switch
pin 1 (NODE)
Usable node number setting
Unit number
setting range
OFF
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7
(When using the words for one Special I/O Unit (10
words))
0 to 95
ON
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15
(When using the words for two Special I/O Units (20
words))
0 to 94
Any unit number in the ranges above can be set, as long as the same unit
number has not been set on another Special I/O Unit mounted in the PLC. Set
the unit number with a small standard screwdriver; be careful not to damage
the switch.
!Caution Always turn the PLC OFF before changing the unit number setting.
• The Master Unit is shipped with the unit number set to 00.
• The unit number setting determines which words in the PLC’s Special I/O
Unit Area and DM Area are allocated to the Master Unit. Refer to 4-1-3
I/O Allocations in CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and
C200HS PLCs for details.
• When the usable node number setting is set to IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to
OUT15, the CompoBus/S Master Unit is allocated twice as many words in
the PLC’s Special I/O Unit Area (the words for unit number set on the
Master and the next unit number). The Master’s unit number and the next
unit number cannot be used by another Special I/O Unit mounted to the
PLC.
• If the same unit number is used for the Master and another Special I/O
Unit, an I/O UNIT OVER error will occur in the PLC and it will not be possible to start up the CompoBus/S System.
The DIP switch is used to set the range of usable node numbers of Slaves, the
communications mode, communications stop mode, and Slave registration
function.
1 2 3 4
DIP Switch
Slave registration function
Communications stop mode
Communications mode
Usable node numbers
ON
Note
1. Always turn the PLC OFF before changing the settings.
2. DIP switch pins 1 to 4 are all set to OFF at the factory.
107
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
Set pin 1 (NODE) of the DIP switch as shown in the following table.
Pin 1 setting
Note
Usable node number
setting
Maximum
I/O points
Words allocated in the
Special I/O Unit Area
OFF
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to
OUT7 (up to 16 nodes
can be connected)
128 points
(64 inputs,
64 outputs)
10 words (words for one
unit)
Input/output data: 4 input
words and 4 output words
Status information: 2
words
ON
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to
OUT15 (up to 32 nodes
can be connected)
256 points
(128 inputs,
128 outputs)
20 words (words for two
units)
Input/output data: 8 input
words and 8 output words
Status information: 4
words
1. The usable node number setting determines the total number of words allocated, and combined with the DIP switch pin 2 setting, determines the
Slaves’ communication cycle. Refer to 4-1-3 I/O Allocations in CS-series,
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs for details.
2. When the usable node number setting is set to IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to
OUT15, the CompoBus/S Master Unit is allocated twice as many words in
the PLC’s Special I/O Unit Area (the words for unit number set on the Master and the next unit number). The Master’s unit number and the next unit
number cannot be used by another Special I/O Unit mounted to the PLC.
Set pin 2 (DR) of the DIP switch as shown in the following table.
Pin 2
setting
Communications
mode setting
Communications
distance
Communications
baud rate
Communications
cycle time
OFF
High-speed Communications Mode
100 m max.
750 kbps
ON
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
500 m max.
93.75 kbps
0.5 ms (pin 1 OFF)
or
0.8 ms (pin 1 ON)
4.0 ms (pin 1 OFF)
or
6.0 ms (pin 1 ON)
Note
1. The communications mode of the Master Unit must match that of all
Slaves. If the CompoBus/S System contains a Slave whose communications mode does not agree with that of the Master Unit, the COMM indicator on that Slave will not light, and normal communications with that Slave
will not be possible. Other Slaves will not be adversely affected. (In such
cases, the COMM indicator on the Master Unit will light normally.) For information on the Master Unit indicator statuses, refer to 6-3 Checking Operations of CS-series and CJ-series Master Units.
2. The setting of pin 2 determines the communications distance, baud rate,
and cycle time as shown in the above table.
Set pin 3 of the DIP switch as shown in the following table.
Pin 3 setting
OFF
ON
Communications stop mode setting
Communications mode
Continues remote I/O communications when a communications error occurs.
Communications stop mode
Stops remote I/O communications when a communications
error occurs.
If communications stop mode is set, communications automatically stop when
a remote I/O communications error occurs, thereby preventing system malfunctions.
108
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
Note If the communications stop mode causes remote I/O communications to stop,
communications will not restart when the cause of the error is removed. Turn
ON the power again or restart the Unit to resume communications. Refer to 43-5 Slave Registration Function and Communications Stop Mode.
Set pin 4 (REGS) of the DIP switch as shown in the following table.
Pin 4 setting
OFF
ON
Slave registration function setting
Slave registration function setting disabled
Slave registration function setting enabled
The Slave registration function monitors Slaves that are joined in the network,
and those unregistered Slaves that are illegally joined to the network, based
on Slave information registered in the Slave registration tables (Special I/O
Unit DM Area). Refer to 4-3-5 Slave Registration Function and Communications Stop Mode.
Note Set the Slave registration tables in the Special I/O Unit DM Area when using
the Slave registration function. Refer to 4-3-5 Slave Registration Function and
Communications Stop Mode.
4-3-3
Wiring and Installing Communications Cables
Communications Connector Wiring
Applicable Connectors
Use either of the following connectors when connecting CompoBus/S communications cable to a CJ-series Master Unit
Manufacturer/Model
Phoenix Contact
FK-MCP1.5/6-STF-3.81
Phoenix Contact
MC1.5/6-STF-3.81
Appearance
Remarks
Screwless terminals (provided with the CJ-series
Master Unit)
Screw terminals
109
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
Communications Connector Pin Arrangement
Screwless Terminals
FK-MCP1.5/6-STF-3.81
Screw Terminals
MC1.5/6-STF-3.81
BS+
BS+
BDH
BDL
BDH
CompoBus/S
communications
cable
BDL
BS−
BS−
BS+
BS+
BS−
BS−
24-VDC communications
power supply
CompoBus/S
communications
cable
24-VDC communications
power supply
The BS+ and BS– terminals are internally connected.
The BS+ and BS– terminals are used to supply communications power supply
to the Slaves (they are not used for the Master Unit). When supplying communications power at the Slave, such as by using 2-conductor VCTF cable, connect the BD H and BD L terminals.
Note The signal wires for Special Flat Cable are shown in the following diagram.
Special Flat Cable can be easily connected to CJ-series Master Units
because the upper four pins of the communications connector have the same
pin arrangement (Special Flat Cable signal wires are connected in order, with
the communications power supply connected to the lower two pins.)
Communications power supply + (BS+) Brown
Communications data high (BD H) Black
Communications data low (BD L) White
Communications power supply – (BS–) Blue
Communications Cable Crimp Terminals
The following table shows the recommended crimp terminals for the signal
wires connected to the communications connector. Use either of the following
cable crimp terminals.
Model
Manufacturer
AI-series AI0.75-8GY
(product code 3200519)
Phoenix Contact
H0.75/14
(product code 046290)
Weidmuller Co., Ltd.
Insert the cable into the crimp terminal and crimp the end section.
Sleeve
Crimp terminal Cable
110
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
Use the following crimping tools.
Model
UD6 (product code 1204436)
or ZA3 Series
Manufacturer
Phoenix Contact
PZ1.5 Crimper
(product code 900599)
Weidmuller
Preparing and Connecting Communications Cables
Use the following procedure to connect the communications data/communications power supply to the connector.
Note
1. Always turn OFF the Master’s power supply and communications power
supply before connecting or disconnecting the communications data/communications power supply
2. Use a dedicated communications connector.
Screwless Connector
Install the screwless communications connector in the Master Unit and then
prepare as follows:
1,2,3...
1. Remove sufficient (approx. 10 mm) insulation from the signal wires for a
crimp terminal, and twist the exposed wire strands together tightly.
Approx. 10 mm
Note If using VCTF cable, cover the severed end of the insulation with vinyl tape or
heat-shrinking tube.
Apply vinyl tape or heatshrinking tube
2. After installing the crimp terminal to the stripped end of the signal wires,
apply vinyl tape or heat-shrinking tube. The signal wires of the CJ-series
Master Unit’s communications connector can be connected without using
crimp terminals.
Note Always use the specified crimping tool to install crimp terminals. When a
crimping tool is not used, the terminal cannot be correctly crimped and may
cause the cables to be disconnected.
3. Check the direction of the connector and insert each of the signal wires securely into the back of the connector holes. (The signal wires are fixed, so
a tool is not required to secure them.)
If crimp terminals are not installed on the signal wires, use a small flat-
111
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
blade screwdriver to push down the orange tab on the connector and push
in the signal wire.
CompoBus/S
communications power
supply (supplying Slaves)
+ (BS+)
– (BS–)
BS+
BDH
BDL
High (BD H)
BS−
BS+
Low (BD L)
CompoBus/S
communications data
BS−
+ (BS+)
– (BS–)
Communications cable
Communications power supply
(connected to power supply.)
Note To disconnect the signal wires from a screwless connector, push down on the
orange tab and at the same time pull out the signal wire. (The signal wires can
be easily removed while leaving the communications connector installed in
the Master Unit.)
BS+
BDH
BDL
BS−
2
BS+
BS−
Small flat-blade
screwdriver
1
Check that the communications connector is securely fixed to the Master Unit.
Tighten the communications connector to the specified tightening torque (0.25
to 0.3 N⋅m).
Connector with Screws
When using connectors with screws, remove the communications connector
from the Master Unit and assemble the connector and cable according to the
following procedure, as required. (If the Master Unit has sufficient space
around it, the procedure can be followed while leaving the communications
connector installed in the Master Unit.)
1,2,3...
1. Remove sufficient (approx. 10 mm) insulation from the signal wires for a
crimp terminal, and twist the exposed wire strands together tightly.
Approx. 10 mm
Note If using VCTF cable, cover the severed end of the insulation with vinyl tape or
heat-shrinking tube.
112
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
Apply vinyl tape or heatshrinking tube
2. After installing the crimp terminal to the stripped end of the signal wires,
apply vinyl tape or heat-shrinking tube.
Note Always use the specified crimping tool to install crimp terminals. When a
crimping tool is not used, the terminal cannot be correctly crimped and may
cause the cables to be disconnected.
3. Check the direction of the connector and insert each of the signal wires securely into the back of the connector holes.
CompoBus/S communications
power supply (supplying
Slaves)
+ (BS+)
– (BS–)
High (BD H)
Low (BD L)
+ (BS+)
– (BS–)
CompoBus/S
communications
data
Communications cable
Communications power supply
(connected to Power Supply Unit.)
Note Before inserting the signal wires, check that the connector’s lock screws are
sufficiently loose. If the screws are not loose when the signal wires are
inserted, the signal wires will enter the gap at the back of the connector rather
than the side to be tightened and may not be secured.
4. Tighten the signal wires securely using the connector’s signal wire lock
screws. A standard screwdriver that is only slim at the end cannot be inserted into the back of the screw hole, so use a small flat-blade screwdriver
that is of uniform thickness. The tightening torque is 0.22 to 0.25 N⋅m.
Small flat-blade
screwdriver of
uniform thickness
Note Use a precision flat-blade screwdriver and M2 size terminal screws for the
communications connector.
113
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
5. Connect the communications cable connector to the Master Unit, as
shown in the following diagram.
BS+
BDH
BDL
BS−
BS+
BS−
6. Tighten the connector screws and secure the connector to the Master Unit.
The tightening torque is 0.25 to 0.3 N⋅m.
4-3-4
I/O Allocations
CJ-series Master Units are allocated words for Slave I/O data and status flags
in the Special I/O Unit Area of the Master. Words in the Special I/O Unit DM
Area is allocated for the Slave registration function and communications stop
mode.
Allocations and Master
Unit Settings
The areas used by the Master Unit depend on the Master Unit settings, as
shown in the following table.
Setting at Master
Unit
Usable node number
settings (DIP switch
pin 1)
Special I/O Unit number setting (rotary
switch)
Slave Allocations
114
Status
Affect on allocation
OFF
Uses 10 words (words for one unit) from the Special I/O Unit Area as follows:
Output: 4 words, input: 4 words, status: 2 words.
(100 words are allocated in the Special I/O Unit
DM Area)
ON
Uses 20 words (words for two units) from the
Special I/O Unit Area as follows:
Output: 8 words, input: 8 words, status: 4 words.
(100 words are allocated in the Special I/O Unit
DM Area)
First word of the area used in the Special I/O Unit
Area is CIO 2000 + (n ×10) words
n
First word of the area used in the Special I/O Unit
DM Area is D20000 + (n×100) words
Slaves are allocated in the Special I/O Unit Area as shown in the following diagram. In CompoBus/S Systems, node numbers of Input Slaves and Output
Slaves are treated separately so the same number can be allocated.
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
I/O Allocations when Pin 1 Is OFF
When pin 1 is OFF and node addresses IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7 (64
inputs/64 outputs max) are used, words are allocated to the Slaves for each
node number as shown in the following diagram.
Special I/O Unit Area in Master PLC
First word
CIO 2000
Unit number 0
CIO 2010
Unit number 1
Unit number 2
Unit number 3
CIO 2020
CIO 2030
CIO 2040
CIO 2050
CIO 2060
CIO 2070
Unit number 4
Unit number 5
Unit number 6
Unit number 7
CIO 2940
Unit number 92
Unit number 93
Unit number 94
CIO 2950
Unit number 95
CIO 2920
CIO 2930
Slave allocations in Special I/O Unit Area
Bits
First word
First word
+1
First word
+2
First word
+3
First word
+4
First word
+5
First word
+6
First word
+7
First word
+8
First word
+9
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Output Slave 1
Bit 7
0
Output Slave 3
Bit 7
0
Output Slave 5
Bit 7
0
Output Slave 7
Bit 7
0
Input Slave 1
Bit 7
0
Input Slave 3
Bit 7
0
Input Slave 5
Bit 7
0
Input Slave 7
Bit 7
0
Output Slave Error Flags
0
Bit 7
Input Slave Error Flags
0
Bit 7
7
Bit 7
Bit 7
Bit 7
Bit 7
6
5 4 3 2 1
Output Slave 0
0
0
Output Slave 2
0
Output Slave 4
Outputs
0
Output Slave 6
0
Input Slave 0
Bit 7
0
Input Slave 2
Bit 7
Bit 7
Bit 7
0
Input
Input Slave 4
0
Input Slave 6
0
Active output Slave Flags
Bit 7
0
Active Input Slave Flags
0
Bit 7
Status
115
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
I/O Allocations when Pin 1 is ON
When pin 1 is ON and node addresses IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15 (up
to 128 inputs/128 outputs) are used, words are allocated to the Slaves for
each node number as shown in the following diagram.
Special I/O Unit Area in Master PLC
First word
CIO 2000
CIO 2010
CIO 2020
CIO 2030
CIO 2040
CIO 2050
CIO 2060
CIO 2070
CIO 2080
CIO 2090
CIO 2100
CIO 2110
CIO 2120
CIO 2130
CIO 2140
Slave allocations in Special I/O Unit Area
Unit #0
Unit #1
15 14
Unit #2
Unit #3
Unit #4
Unit #5
Unit #6
Unit #7
Unit #8
Unit #9
Unit #10
Unit #13
Unit #14
CIO 2900
CIO 2910 Unit #90
CIO 2920
Unit #91
CIO 2930 Unit #92
Unit #93
CIO 2940
Unit #94
Can not use
Unit #95
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Output Slave 1
Output Slave 0
First word + 1
Output Slave 3
Output Slave 2
First word + 2
Output Slave 5
Output Slave 4
First word + 3
Output Slave 7
Output Slave 6
First word + 4
Output Slave 9
Output Slave 8
First word + 5
Output Slave 11
Output Slave 10
First word + 6
Output Slave 13
Output Slave 12
First word + 7
Output Slave 15
Output Slave 14
First word + 8
Input Slave 1
Input Slave 0
First word + 9
Input Slave 3
Input Slave 2
First word + 10
Input Slave 5
Input Slave 4
First word + 11
Input Slave 7
Input Slave 6
First word + 12
Input Slave 9
Input Slave 8
First word + 13
Input Slave 11
Input Slave 10
First word + 14
Input Slave 13
Input Slave 12
First word + 15
First word + 16
Input Slave 14
Input Slave 15
Output Slave Error Flags Active Output Slave Flags
First word + 17
Input Slave Error Flags
First word + 18
Output Slave Error Flags Active Output Slave Flags
First word + 19
Input Slave Error Flags
Unit #11
Unit #12
13 12
First word
#7
#0
#7
#0
#15
#8
#15
#8
#7
0
Bits
Outputs
Inputs
#0
Active Input Slave Flags
#7
#0
#15
Status
#8
Active Input Slave Flags
#15
#8
Slave I/O and Corresponding Areas
Slave with 8 Inputs or 8 Outputs
The Slave is treated as one node number for output or input.
Bits
First word + 2
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Output Slave 5
Bits 7
8
7
6
5 4 3 2 1
Output Slave 4
0 Bits 7
0
0
Set to Node No. 5
8-point Output Slave
8 outputs
Slave with 16 Inputs or 16 Outputs
The Slave is treated as two node numbers for output or input, and allocated in
the same words as follows:
• When an odd node number has been set:
Uses node number setting – 1 and node number setting
• When an even node number has been set:
Uses node number setting and node number setting + 1.
116
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
Example: When a 16-point Output Slave set as node number 5, the areas for
Output Slaves 4 and 5 are used. Other Output Slaves cannot use the area
allocated for Output Slave 4.
Bits
First word + 2
15 14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
Output Slave 5
Bit 7
4
3
2
1
0
Output Slave 4
0
Bit 7
0
Set to node No. 5
16-point Output Slave
16 outputs
Slave with Mixed I/O (8 Inputs and 8 Outputs)
Slaves that have both outputs and inputs are also assigned a single node
number, so the same node number is used for both outputs and inputs.
Example: When a Slave with 8 inputs and 8 outputs set as node number 2,
the area for node number 2 outputs and inputs is used.
Bits
First word +
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1
Output Slave 3
Bit 7
First word + 5
(IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7)
First word + 9
(IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15)
8
7
6
4 3 2 1
Output Slave 2
0
0
0 Bit 7
Input Slave 3
Input Slave 2
0 Bit 7
Bit 7
16-input/output Slave
5
0
Set to node number 2
8 outputs
8 inputs
Slave with 4 Outputs or 4 Inputs
The Slave is treated as one node number for output or input. The Slave uses
the rightmost 4 bits only, however, of the area allocated for one node number.
(The leftmost 4 bits cannot be used by another Slave.)
• When an odd node number has been set:
Bits 8 to 11 are used and bits 12 to 15 are not used.
• When an even node number has been set:
Bits 0 to 3 are used and bits 4 to 7 are not used.
Example: When a Slave with 4 inputs is set as node number 7, the Slave is
allocated the rightmost 4 bits (bits 8 to 11) in the area assigned for input node
number 7.
Bits
15
First word + 7
(IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7)
First word + 11
(IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15)
14 13 12 11 10 9
Input Slave 7
Reserved
Bit 3
8
7
6
5 4 3 2
Input Slave 6
0 Bit 7
1
0
0
Set to node number 7.
4-point input Slave
4 inputs
Slave with Mixed I/O (4 Outputs and 4 Inputs)
Slaves that have both outputs and inputs are also assigned a single node
number, so the same node number is used for both outputs and inputs. The
Slave uses the rightmost 4 bits only, however, of the area allocated for one
node number. (The leftmost 4 bits cannot be used by another Slave.)
• When an odd node number has been set:
Bits 8 to 11 are used and bits 12 to 15 are not used.
117
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
• When an even node number has been set:
Bits 0 to 3 are used and bits 4 to 7 are not used.
Example: When a Slave with 4 outputs and 4 inputs is set to node number 2,
the rightmost 4 bits (bits 0 to 3) of the area for node number 2 for both output
and input are used.
Bits
First word +
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1
Output Slave 3
Bit 7
First word + 5
(IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7)
First word + 9
(IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15)
Bit 7
Input Slave 3
8-point I/O Slave
4 outputs
4 inputs
8
7
6
5
0
4 3 2 1 0
Slave 2
Reserved Output
Bit 3
0
0
Reserved
Input Slave 2
Bit 3
0
Set to node number 2.
Slave with 32 Outputs or 32 Inputs
The Slave is treated as four node numbers for output or input and is allocated
2 consecutive words, as follows:
• When an odd node number has been set:
Uses (node number setting – 1) to (node number setting + 2)
• When an even node number has been set:
Uses (node number setting) to (node number setting + 3).
Example: When a Slave with 32 outputs is set to node number 1, it uses the
area assigned for Output Slave 0 to Output Slave 3. The area for Output Slave
0, 2, and 3 cannot be used for another Output Slave.
Bits
First word +
First word +
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0
Output Slave 1
Bit 7
Output Slave 3
1
Bit 7
8
7
0
Bit 7
0
Bit 7
6
5
4 3 2 1
Output Slave 0
0
0
Output Slave 2
0
Set to node number 1
32-output Slave
32 outputs
Slave with Mixed I/O (16 Outputs and 16 Inputs)
Slaves that have both outputs and inputs are also assigned a single node
number, so the same node number is used for both outputs and inputs, and
each is regarded as two node numbers. Outputs and inputs are allocated to
the same words, as follows:
• When an odd node number has been set:
Uses (node number setting – 1) and (node number setting)
• When an even node number has been set:
Uses (node number setting) and (node number setting + 1).
• Example: When a Slave with 16 inputs and 16 outputs is set to node number 3, it uses Output Slave 2 and 3, and Input Slave 2 and 3. Output Slave
2 and Input Slave 2 cannot be used by other Slaves.
118
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
Bits
First word +
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1
Output Slave 3
Bit 7
First word + 5
Input Slave 3
(IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7)
Bit 7
First word + 9
Set to node
(IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT 15) number 3
8
0
7
Bit 7
0 Bit 7
6
5
4 3 2 1
output Slave 2
0
0
Input Slave 2
0
32 I/O Slave
16 outputs
16 inputs
Using an Analog Terminal
An Analog Terminal uses 16, 32, 48, or 64 points. I/O allocations are shown in
the following table.
Number of points
allocated
64 points
SRT2-AD04: 4 inputs
Node number setting
Odd number
Even number
48 points
SRT2-AD04: 3 inputs
Node numbers used
Node number setting – 1 to
node number setting + 6
Node number setting to
node number setting + 7
Odd number
Node number setting – 1 to
node number setting + 4
Even number
Node number setting to
node number setting + 5
32 points
SRT2-AD04: 2 inputs
SRT2-DA02: 2 outputs
Odd number
Node number setting – 1 to
node number setting + 2
Even number
16 points
SRT2-AD04: 1 input
SRT2-DA02: 1 output
Odd number
Node number setting to
node number setting + 3
Node number setting – 1 to
node number setting
Node number setting to
node number setting + 1
Even number
Do not use words for the node number outside the words allocated in the
Master Unit. If words outside the specified output or input areas are used, the
Unit cannot participate in communications and the COMM indicator will not
turn ON.
Status Flag Functions
The functions of the flags in the status area are described below.
• Active Output Slave Flags
These flags indicate which Output Slaves (0 to 15) are active nodes in the
system. When the corresponding flag is ON, the Slave is an active node.
All of these flags are reset when the power is turned ON or operation is
restarted.
0 (OFF): No communications participation
The node hasn’t participated in communications even once.
1 (ON): Communications participation
The flag won’t change even if the node is withdrawn from the system.
• Active Input Slave Flags
These flags indicate which Input Slaves (0 to 15) are active nodes in the
system. When the corresponding flag is ON, the Slave is an active node.
All of these flags are reset when the power is turned ON or operation is
restarted.
0 (OFF): No communications participation
The node hasn’t participated in communications even once.
119
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
Section 4-3
1 (ON): Communications participation
The flag won’t change even if the node is withdrawn from the system.
• Output Slave Error Flags
These flags indicate the communications status of the Output Slaves (0 to
15). All of these flags are reset when the power is turned ON or operation
is restarted.
0 (OFF): Communications normal or inactive node
1 (ON): Withdrawn from communications (communications error)
• Input Slave Error Flags
These flags indicate the communications status of the Input Slaves (0 to
15). All of these flags are reset when the power is turned ON or operation
is restarted.
0 (OFF): Communications normal or inactive node
1 (ON): Withdrawn from communications (communications error)
Note
1. When the CompoBus/S System starts up, inputs from Input Slaves and
outputs to Output Slaves become effective when the Active Slave Flag for
the Slave is turned ON. It is recommended to write a ladder program that
verifies that the Slave’s Active Slave Flag is ON and its Error Flag is OFF
before transmitting or receiving I/O data.
2. When CJ-series Master Units are set to communications stop mode, communications will stop when the Output Slave Error Flag or Input Slave Error
Flag will turn ON. (Refer to 4-3-5 Slave Registration Function and Communications Stop Mode.)
4-3-5
Slave Registration Function and Communications Stop Mode
The CJ-series Master Units now support a Slave registration function and
communications stop mode. This new capability enables the CompoBus/S
System to deliver increased reliability.
Slave Registration Function
The words allocated in the DM Area to the Master Unit as a Special I/O Unit
contains a Slave registration table. By registering the Slaves that are normally
participating in communications, the Slaves that are not joined to the network
or are slow to join, or unregistered Slaves that are illegally joined can be monitored.
This function prevents system malfunctions due to incorrect wiring on site.
The Slave registration function is enabled by turning ON pin 4 of the DIP
switch on the Master Unit.
Communications Stop Mode
By setting communications stop mode, remote I/O communications will stop
when a communications error occurs, and information on the Slave with the
communications error is stored in the Special I/O Unit DM Area.
This function prevents the System from running on incorrect I/O data without
having to disconnect a Slave with a communications error, and enables quick
troubleshooting of the communications error.
When remote I/O communications are stopped in communications stop mode,
they will not resume when the cause of the error is removed. To restart remote
I/O communications, turn ON the power again, or restart the Unit. When the
Unit is set to standard communications mode, even if a communications error
occurs, the remote I/O communications will continue with the Slave with the
error disconnected. Also, the Slave with the communications error is not
120
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
recorded in the Special I/O Unit DM Area, so a standard status area check
using the program is required.
If a verification error occurs while using the Slave registration function, as it is
not a communications error, remote I/O communications will continue even if
communications stop mode is enabled.
Communications stop mode is set using pin 3 of the DIP switch on the Master
Unit. (pin 3 ON: communications stop mode, pin 3 OFF: normal communications mode)
Words Allocated for Slave
Registration and
Communications Stop
Mode
The words used for the Slave registration function and communications stop
mode are allocated in the Special I/O Unit DM Area according to the Master
Unit’s Special I/O Unit number, as shown below.
First word = D20000 + (unit number ×100)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
First word
Output Slave Registration Table
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 1
Input Slave Registration Table
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 2
Registered Slave Participation Monitoring Time
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
0 Bit
Reserved for system use (Cannot be used.)
First word + 3
First word + 5
Status Flags
(Used when Slave registration or communications stop
mode are enabled.)
Communications Stopped Node Number and Slave Type
(Used only when communications stop mode is enabled.)
First word + 6
Output Slave Verification Error: Slave Missing
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 7
Input Slave Verification Error: Slave Missing
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 8
Output Slave Verification Error: Unregistered Slave in Network
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 9
Input Slave Verification Error: Unregistered Slave in Network
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 4
CPU Unit-to-Master
Unit
(The contents of this
area is transferred to
the Master Unit from
the CPU Unit when
the power is turned
ON. When the
contents has
changed, turn ON
the power again.)
Master Unit-to-CPU
Unit
First word + 10
to
Not used. (Can be used as work bits/words.)
First word + 99
The contents from the first word to the first word +9 cannot be used for any
other purpose. They can be used, however, if the Slave registration function
and communications stop mode are not enabled.
121
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
The functions of each area are given in the following table.
Word
Bit
+0
00
01
02
+1
OUT0
OUT1
OUT2
to
13
to
OUT13
14
15
OUT14
OUT15
00
01
02
to
13
14
15
+2
00 to 15
+3
00 to 15
122
Name
Output Slave Registration Table
Input Slave Registration table
IN0
IN1
Function
Registers a list of the Output
Slaves that are normally operating in the network. This list is
used for checking the Slaves
with the Slave registration function. Bits 00 to 15 correspond
to Slave node numbers 0 to 15.
The Output Slave is registered
by turning ON its corresponding bit.
The bits in the Special I/O Unit
Area must be registered to correspond to the node numbers
actually used by the Slaves.
Therefore, for Slaves with 16
points or higher, turn ON the
bits for the other node numbers
too. For example, the two consecutive bits used by a 16-point
Slave or the four consecutive
bits used by a 32-point Slave
must be set.
Registers a list of the Input
Slaves that are normally operating in the network. This list is
IN2
used to check the Slaves with
the Slave registration function.
to
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
IN13
Slave node numbers 0 to 15.
IN14
The Input Slave is registered by
turning ON its corresponding
IN15
bit.
Registered Slave Par- The waiting time between when the Master Unit is started until the Slaves
ticipation Monitoring
start to be checked using the Slave registration function. The time is set in
Time
increments of 1 ms as a hexadecimal.
The setting range is 0000 (default is 2000 ms) or 0001 to FFDC (1 to 65500
ms). If the monitoring time lapses and there are still registered Slaves not
joined in the network, a verification error (Slave missing) will occur.
Reserved for system
use.
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
Word
Bit
+4
00
00 to 07
08
+5
Name
Registration Completed Flag
Reserved for system
use.
Verification Error
Flag: Slave Missing
Section 4-3
Function
This flag is turned ON when all registered Slaves have joined the network. If
all the registered Slaves have joined the network within the registered Slave
participation monitoring time this flag will turn ON even if unregistered Slaves
have also joined. The flag will not turn ON, however, if there are no Slaves
set in the Slave registration table. The flag will remain ON until the power is
turned OFF and ON again or the Unit is restarted.
This flag is turned ON under the following conditions.
Registered Slaves do not join the network within the registered Slave participation monitoring time. When the Slave that caused the verification error is
joined in the network, the flag will automatically be turned OFF.
Check which Slave caused the error in the bit for verification error (Slave
missing) in Output Slave (first word + 6) or verification error (Slave missing)
in Input Slave (first word + 7).
09
Verification Error
Flag: Unregistered
Slave in Network
10
Communications
Stopped Flag
11 to 14
Reserved for system
use.
15
Error Flag
This flag is turned ON when any of the bits 08 to 10 are set to1(ON).
The flag is automatically turned OFF when all the bits 08 to 10 are turned
OFF.
00 to 07
Communications
Stopped Node Number
When the Master Unit is set to communications stop mode and remote I/O
communications stop due to a communications error, the node number of the
Slave that caused the error is stored as a 2-digit hexadecimal (00 to 0F: 1 to
15).
Check the Slave type (Output or Input) in the word for communications
stopped Slave type (bit 15 of first word + 5).
The node address stored will be held until the power is turned OFF and ON
again or the Unit is restarted.
08 to 14
Reserved for system
use.
Communications
Stopped Slave type
15
This flag is turned ON when an unregistered Slave has joined the network.
The flag will remain ON until the power is turned OFF and ON again or the
Unit is restarted, even if the Slave that caused the verification error is
removed from the network.
Check which Slave caused the error in the bit for Output Slave verification
error (unregistered Slave in network) (first word + 8) or Input Slave verification error (unregistered Slave in network) (first word + 9).
This flag is turned ON when the Master Unit is set to communications stop
mode and remote I/O communications stop due to a communications error,.
Once the flag has turned ON, the status remains until the power is turned
OFF and ON again or the Unit is restarted.
Check which Slave caused the error in the bits for communications stopped
node number (bits 00 to 07 of first word + 5) and communications stopped
Slave type (bit 15 of first word + 5).
When the Master Unit is set to communications stop mode and remote I/O
communications stop due to a communications error, the Slave type of the
Slave that caused the error is stored as follows:
0 (OFF): Output Slave
1 (ON): Input Slave
Check which Slave caused the error in the bits for communications stopped
node number (bits 00 to 07 of first word + 5)
When communications have stopped, the bit status is held until the power is
turned OFF and ON again or the Unit is restarted.
123
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
Word
Bit
+6
00
01
02
+7
to
13
to
OUT13
14
15
OUT14
OUT15
00
01
02
+8
Input Slave VerificaIN0
tion Error: Slave Miss- IN1
ing
IN2
to
13
to
IN13
14
15
IN14
IN15
00
to
13
Output Slave Verifica- OUT0
tion Error: UnregisOUT1
tered Slave in
OUT2
Network
to
OUT13
14
OUT14
15
OUT15
01
02
+9
Name
Output Slave Verifica- OUT0
tion Error: Slave Miss- OUT1
ing
OUT2
00
01
02
Input Slave Verification Error: Unregistered Slave in
Network
IN0
IN1
IN2
to
13
to
IN13
14
15
IN14
IN15
Slave Registration
Function Procedure
Function
When the Slave registration
function is enabled, the bit corresponding to the node number
of the Output Slave that caused
the verification error (Slave
missing) will be turned ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
Output Slave node numbers 1
to 15. When the Slave that
caused the verification error
joins the network, the bit will
automatically turned OFF.
When the Slave registration
function is enabled, the bit corresponding to the node number
of the Input Slave that caused
the verification error (Slave
missing) will be turned ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
Input Slave node numbers 1 to
15. When the Slave that
caused the verification error
joins the network, the bit will
automatically turned OFF.
When the Slave registration
function is enabled, the bit corresponding to the node number
of the Output Slave where a
verification error (unregistered
Slave in network) will be turned
ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
Output Slave node numbers 1
to 15.
Once a bit has been turned ON
the status will be held until the
power is turned OFF and ON
again or the Unit is restarted.
When the Slave registration
function is enabled, the bit corresponding to the node number
of the Input Slave where a verification error (unregistered
Slave in network) will be turned
ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
Input Slave node numbers 1 to
15.
Once a bit has been turned ON
the status will be held until the
power is turned OFF and ON
again or the Unit is restarted.
The bits in the Special I/O Unit
Area correspond to the node
numbers actually used by the
Slaves. Therefore, for Slaves
with 16 points or higher, the bits
other than those set for the
node number may also be
turned ON. For example, the
two consecutive bits used by a
16-point Slave or the four consecutive bits used by a 32-point
Slave may be turned ON at the
same time.
When the Slave registration function is used, the Output/Input Slave registration table and registered Slave participation monitoring time must be set in the
Special I/O Unit DM Area, but the power must be turned OFF and ON again or
the Unit restarted to enable the settings.
The following example shows the procedure for using the Slave registration
function. (Information on other Slave registration function settings and connections are omitted here.)
124
Section 4-3
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CJ-series PLCs
1,2,3...
1. Turn OFF pin 4 of the DIP switch on the Master Unit to disable the Slave
registration function.
2. Turn ON the power to the CPU Unit to which the Master Unit is mounted.
3. Use a Programming Device for the CPU Unit to set the following information in the Special I/O Unit DM Area words used by the Master Unit.
• Output Slave registration table
• Input Slave registration table
• Registration Slave participation monitoring time
4. Turn OFF the power to the CPU Unit to which the Master Unit is mounted.
5. Turn ON pin 4 of the DIP switch on the Master Unit to enable the Slave registration function
6. Turn ON the power to the CPU Unit to which the Master Unit is mounted or
restart the Master Unit.
The settings in the Special I/O Unit DM Area can be set while pin 4 of the DIP
switch on the Master Unit is set to ON, but a verification error may occur due
to the incorrectly set Slave registration table.
4-3-6
Allocations for Master Unit in PLC
The following table shows the words in the CPU Unit that are related to the
Master Unit.
Data area
Auxiliary
Area (A)
PLC Setup
Bit(s)
A33000 to
A33015
Name
Special I/O Unit Restarting
Flags
Function
These flags are turned ON while a Special I/O Unit is
restarting. Each bit corresponds to the Unit with the same
unit number.
This flag is turned ON in the following situations:
When the same unit number has been set on more than
one CS1 CPU Bus Unit.
When the same unit number has been set on more than
one Special I/O Unit.
When the same word is allocated more than once for Basic
I/O Units.
A40113
Dual Number Use Error Flag
(Fatal Error)
A40206
Special I/O Unit Error Flag
This flag is turned ON when the same unit number has
been set on more than one Special I/O Unit, or when an
error has occurred during data transfer between the PLC
and the Special I/O Unit. The unit number of the Unit is written to word A418.
A41100 to
A41115
Special I/O Unit Number
Duplication Flags
A41800 to
A41815
Special I/O Unit Error Flags
These flags are turned ON when the same unit number has
been set on more than one Special I/O Unit (i.e., when
A40113 is ON). Each bit corresponds to the Unit with the
same unit number.
These flags are turned ON when the same unit number has
been set on more than one Special I/O Unit, or when an
error has occurred during data transfer between the PLC
and the Special I/O Unit. Each bit corresponds to the Unit
with the same unit number.
A50200 to
A50215
Special I/O Unit Restart Bits
22600 to
22615
Special I/O Unit Refresh Disable Bits
Turn the corresponding bit ON and then OFF to restart a
Special I/O Unit. Each bit corresponds to the Unit with the
same unit number.
Turn the corresponding bit ON to disable refreshing of the
corresponding Special I/O Unit (except those on Slave
Racks).
125
Section 4-4
CQM1-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CQM1 PLCs
4-4
4-4-1
CQM1-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CQM1 PLCs
Specifications and Part Names
Specifications
General Specifications
General specifications conform to those of the SYSMAC CQM1 and CQM1H
PLCs.
Performance Specifications
Item
Specifications
Model
Unit classification
CQM1-SRM21-V1
Special I/O Unit
Internal current consumption
Weight
5 V DC, 180 mA max.
Max. number of
Masters
CQM1 PLC: 1 Master Unit
CQM1H PLC: Up to the maximum number of I/O points that
can be connected to the CPU Unit.
No restrictions.
Master Unit mounting location
200 g max.
Max. number of I/O
points per Master
CQM1-CPU11/21:
32 points (16 inputs/16 outputs) or
64 points (32 inputs/32 outputs)
CQM1-CPU41/42/43/44-V1 or CQM1H:
32 points (16 inputs/16 outputs), or
64 points (32 inputs/32 outputs), or
128 points (64 inputs/64 outputs)
(Switch using DIP switch setting)
Uses the I/O Area in the CPU Unit.
Number of points per 8 or 4 points
node number
Number of usable
node numbers per
Master
126
8 points per node number:
IN0 to IN1 and OUT0 to OUT1, or
IN0 to IN3 and OUT0 to OUT 3, or
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7
4 points per node number:
IN0 to IN3 and OUT0 to OUT 3, or
IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7, or
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15
Section 4-4
CQM1-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CQM1 PLCs
Alarm Output Specifications
Item
Maximum switching capacity
2 A (24 V DC)
Specification
Minimum switching capacity
Relay type
10 mA (5 V DC)
G6D-1A
Minimum ON time
Circuit configuration
100 ms (Outputs are ON at least 100 ms.)
CQM1-SRM21-V1
Internal
circuitry
2 A, 24 V DC max.
!Caution For conformance to the EC Directives (Low-voltage Directives), provide reinforced insulation or double insulation for the power source that is used for the
alarm output.
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions of the CQM1-SRM21-V1 Master
Unit. All dimensions are in mm.
110
SGM21-V1
32
107
(When the cover is removed)
Note Refer to the CQM1 Operation Manual (W226) for details on the dimensions
when the Master Unit is installed.
127
Section 4-4
CQM1-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CQM1 PLCs
Master Unit Components
The following diagram shows the main components of the CQM1-SRM21-V1
Master Unit. The functions of these components are described below.
SRM21-V1
Indicators
Indicates the operating status of the Master Unit
and the status of communications with the Slaves.
DIP Switch
These pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 and 2: PLC word allocation setting
Pin 3: Number of points/unit number setting
Pin 4: Communications mode
Pins 5 to 6: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Alarm Output Terminals
These terminals are shorted when an error occurs.
Connect to a warning device.
Terminal block screws
These screws attach the terminal
block. The terminal block can be
removed when these screws are
loosened.
Communications Terminals
Connect the Slaves' transmission cable to these
terminals.
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
RUN (green)
Status
ON
OFF
SD (yellow)
ON
RD (yellow)
OFF
ON
Data is not being transmitted.
Data is being received.
ERC (red)
OFF
ON
Data is not being received.
A Slave has been withdrawn from communications.
(Communications error)
The Slaves are communicating normally.
OFF
ERS (red)
128
Meaning
The Unit is operating normally.
Indicates one of the following conditions:
The power is OFF, there is an I/O UNIT OVER error, or
there is an I/O Bus error.
Data is being transmitted.
ON
The data areas between the Slaves overlaps when the
number of points/unit number setting is set to 4-point
mode.
Flashing
A node number is out-of-range, as follows:
(The Unit doesn’t check for node numbers 8 or higher.)
The PLC is allocated 2 words and the number of
points/unit number is set to 8-point mode, but the node
number is 2 to 7.
The PLC is allocated 4 words and the number of
points/unit number is set to 8-point mode, but the node
number is 4 to 7.
The PLC is allocated 2 words and the number of
points/unit number is set to 4-point mode, but the node
number is 4 to 7.
OFF
The data area and address settings are correct.
Section 4-4
CQM1-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CQM1 PLCs
Indicator
IN/OUT (red)
8421 (red)
4-4-2
Status
ON
Meaning
An error has occurred with an Output Slave.
OFF
An error has occurred with an Input Slave or all Slaves
are operating normally.
These indicators represent the four-digit binary slave
number of the Slave in which the error occurred.
ON/OFF
Switch Settings
DIP Switch
The DIP switch is used to make the PLC word allocation setting and the number of points/unit number setting.
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Communications mode
Number of points/unit number setting
PLC word allocation setting
Set the PLC word allocations with pins 1 and 2, as shown in the following
table. This is the total number of words allocated to Slaves in the PLC.
Pin 1
Pin 2
Max. number of Slaves setting
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
2 words (1 input word, 1 output word)
4 words (2 input words, 2 output words)
OFF
ON
8 words (4 input words, 4 output words)
ON
ON
• The Master Unit is shipped with pins 1 and 2 set to OFF (2 words).
• Word addresses are allocated separately for inputs and outputs. The
words are allocated in order from the left of the PLC to the right, just like
regular I/O Units.
Note Always turn OFF the PLC’s Power Supply before changing the setting.
!Caution Always set pin numbers 5 to 6 of the DIP switch to OFF.
Set the number of points/unit number with pin 3, as shown in the following
table.
Pin 3
OFF
ON
Number of I/O points/Unit number
8 points (8-point mode)
4 points (4-point mode)
129
Section 4-4
CQM1-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CQM1 PLCs
The following table shows all of the possible combinations of DIP switch settings.
Setting
PLC word
allocation
2 words
(1 IN/1 OUT)
4 words
(2 IN/2 OUT)
Max. number of Points/n Usable node Communications cycle
I/O points
ode
numbers
time
number
HighLong-disspeed
tance
Communi- Communications
cations
Mode
Mode
16 input points, 8 points IN: 0 and 1
0.5 ms
4.0 ms
16 output points
OUT: 0 and 1
32 input points, 8 points IN: 0 to 3
0.5 ms
4.0 ms
32 output points
OUT: 0 to 3
8 words
(4 IN/4 OUT)
64 input points, 8 points
64 output points
IN: 0 to 7
OUT: 0 to 7
0.5 ms
4.0 ms
ON
2 words
(1 IN/1 OUT)
16 input points, 4 points
16 output points
IN: 0 to 3
OUT: 0 to 3
0.5 ms
4.0 ms
OFF
ON
4 words
(2 IN/2 OUT)
32 input points, 4 points
32 output points
IN: 0 to 7
OUT: 0 to 7
0.5 ms
4.0 ms
ON
ON
ON
ON
8 words
(4 IN/4 OUT)
64 input points, 4 points
64 output points
IN: 0 to 15
OUT: 0 to 15
0.8 ms
6.0 ms
Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Use of Analog Terminals
Possible
(Only for
Master Unit
models withV1. Not possible for
models without V1.)
Not possible
Note When the CQM1 Master Unit is used in 4-point mode, Slaves with 16 points or
more cannot be used. If Slaves with 16 points or more are used, a data area
overlap error (ERS indicator lit) will occur.
Set the communications mode with DIP switch pin 4 (DR), as shown in the following table.
Pin 4
OFF
ON
Note
Communications
mode setting
High-speed Communications Mode
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
Communications
distance
100 m max.
Communications
baud rate
750 kbps
Communications
cycle time
0.5 or 0.8 ms
500 m max.
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
1. Make sure that the communications mode of the Master Unit is the same
as that of all the Slaves. If the CompoBus/S System contains a Slave with
a different communications mode, the COMM indicator on that Slave will
not light, and normal communications with that Slave will not be possible.
Other Slaves will not be adversely affected, and the COMM indicator on the
Master Unit will light normally. For information relating to the states of the
Master Unit indicator, refer to 6-5-1 Indicators.
2. When using a previous Master Unit model (without V1), pin 4 must be set
to OFF. Otherwise, normal communications may not be possible.
3. Pin 4 is factory-set to OFF (High-speed Communications Mode).
4. The settings for the communications distance, baud rate, and communications cycle time vary according to the setting of pin 4, as shown in the
above table.
4-4-3
I/O Allocations in CQM1 PLCs
In CQM1 PLCs, the Master Unit is treated just like an I/O Unit that has both
inputs and outputs, so the Slave’s I/O data is stored in the words allocated to
those inputs and outputs.
130
Section 4-4
CQM1-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CQM1 PLCs
The group of words allocated to the Master is determined by the mounting
position of the Master Unit, and the specific bits used by each Slave are determined by the node number set on the Slave.
• Master Units for CQM1 PLCs don’t have the status area information that
is provided with the Master Units for CS-series,
C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs.
• The following equation shows the maximum time required for inputs from
the Input Slaves and outputs to the Output Slaves to become effective
after the CompoBus/S System is turned ON.
In High-speed Communications Mode: (PLC cycle time) + 118 ms
In Long-distance Communications Mode: (PLC cycle time) + 720 ms.
This delay must be taken into account when writing ladder programs for the
PLC. It is recommended to write a routine in the ladder program that checks
whether the alarm output terminal is OFF before processing I/O with the
Slaves.
Master Unit Settings
The following settings affect I/O allocations to Slaves of the Master Units used
with CQM1 PLCs.
PLC Word Allocation
In order for the Master Unit to allocate words to Slaves, the total number of
words allocated to the Master Unit must be set in the PLC. The following three
settings can be made:
2 words (1 input word, 1 output word)
4 words (2 input words, 2 output words)
8 words (4 input words, 4 output words)
Number of Points/Node Number
This setting determines the amount of memory (number of bits) allocated to
each node number. The following two settings can be made:
8 points (8-point mode)
4 points (4-point mode)
Refer to the table on page 129 for details on the possible combinations of DIP
switch settings.
Slave Allocations
The Slaves are allocated input and output words as shown below. In CompoBus/S Systems, the node numbers of Input Slaves and Output Slaves are
handled separately so the same node numbers can be set for both one Input
and one Output Slave.
I/O Allocations in 8-point Mode
PLC Word Allocation: 2 Words
The following diagram shows the I/O allocations when the DIP switch is set as
shown below.
Pin 1: OFF
Pin 2: OFF
Pin 3: OFF
Bits
Inputs: First word
Outputs: First word
Input Slave 1
Input Slave 0
Output Slave 1
Output Slave 0
PLC Word Allocation: 4 Words
The following diagram shows the I/O allocations when the DIP switch is set as
shown below.
131
Section 4-4
CQM1-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CQM1 PLCs
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: OFF
Pin 3: OFF
Bits
Inputs: First word
Input Slave 1
Input Slave 0
Inputs: First word + 1
Input Slave 3
Input Slave 2
Outputs: First word
Output Slave 1
Output Slave 0
Outputs: First word + 1
Output Slave 3
Output Slave 2
PLC Word Allocation: 8 Words
The following diagram shows the I/O allocations when the DIP switch is set as
shown below.
Pin 1: OFF
or
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
Pin 3: OFF
Pin 2: ON
Pin 3: OFF
Bits
Inputs: First word
Input Slave 1
Input Slave 0
Inputs: First word + 1
Input Slave 3
Input Slave 2
Inputs: First word + 2
Input Slave 5
Input Slave 4
Inputs: First word + 3
Input Slave 7
Input Slave 6
Outputs: First word
Output Slave 1
Output Slave 0
Outputs: First word + 1
Output Slave 3
Output Slave 2
Outputs: First word + 2
Output Slave 5
Output Slave 4
Outputs: First word + 3
Output Slave 7
Output Slave 6
Note When the number of points/node number is set to 8-point mode, each 16point Slave (input or output) is treated as 2 node numbers and those bits are
allocated so that all 16 bits are in the same word, as described below.
When an odd node number has been set, the previous node number’s allocated memory is also used.
When an even node number has been set, the next node number’s allocated memory is also used.
For example, when a 16-output Slave’s node number is set to 3, the Slave
uses the bits for Output Slave 2 and Output Slave 3. When the node number is set to 0, the Slave uses the bits for Output Slave 0 and Output Slave
1.
The Slave with 4 inputs or 4 outputs is regarded as one Slave Unit.
When an odd node number has been set:
Bits 8 to 11 are used and bits 12 to 15 are not used.
When an even node number has been set:
Bits 0 to 3 are used and bits 4 to 7 are not used.
132
Section 4-4
CQM1-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CQM1 PLCs
An Analog Terminal uses 64, 48, 32, or 16 points. For this reason, in 8-point
mode, I/O allocations are as shown in the following table.
Number of points
allocated
64 points
SRT2-AD04: 4 inputs
48 points
SRT2-AD04: 3 inputs
Node number
setting
Node numbers used
Odd number
Node number setting − 1 to node
number setting + 6
Even number
Node number setting to node number setting + 7
Odd number
Even number
Not possible
Not possible
0 to 1
Node number setting − 1 to node
number setting + 4
Node number setting to node number setting + 5
Node number setting − 1 to node
number setting + 2
Node number setting to node number setting + 3
Not possible
Not possible
0 to 3
Not possible
0 to 1
0 to 5
0 to 1
0 to 3
0 to 7
32 points
SRT2-AD04: 2 inputs
SRT2-DA02: 2 outputs
Odd number
16 points
SRT2-AD04: 1-input
SRT2-DA02: 1-output
Odd number
Node number setting − 1 to node
number setting
Even number
Node number setting to node number setting + 1
Even number
Valid setting range
2 words
4 words
8 words
allocated
allocated
allocated
If a node number is outside the setting range, the words allocated to the Slave
will extend beyond the input or output area, which will prevent the Slave participating in communications. If this happens, the COMM indicator will not
light.
Connector Terminals with 32 inputs or 32 outputs are allocated the words for
four 8-point nodes, i.e., they are allocated two I/O words. Therefore, the following nodes will be used in addition to the set nodes. Connector Terminals
with 16 inputs or 16 outputs will be allocated I/O as Slaves with 16 inputs or
Slaves with 16 outputs for the node number setting.
Node number setting
Node numbers used
Valid setting range
2 words
allocated
Odd number
Node number setting
– 1 to node number
setting + 2
Even number
Node number setting
to node number setting + 3
Not possible
4 words
allocated
0 to 1
8 words
allocated
0 to 5
If a node number is not within the setting range, the words allocated to the
Slave will extend beyond the input or output area, which will prevent the Slave
from participating in communications. If this happens, the COMM indicator will
not light.
133
Section 4-4
CQM1-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CQM1 PLCs
I/O Allocation Example (4 Words)
In this example the number of points/node number is set to 8, the PLC word
allocations are set to 4 words, and the system has the configuration shown in
the following diagram. (The node numbers are indicated by #0, #1, and #2.)
CQM1-SRM21-V1
OUT 16
OUT 16
SRM
IN 16
CPU
IN 16
PS
CQM1
PS: Power Supply Unit
CPU: CPU Unit
IN: Input Unit or CPU Unit inputs
OUT: Output Unit
SRM: Master Unit
Terminator
#1
#2
#2
#1
SRT1ID04
SRT1ID08
SRT1ROC16
SRT1OD08
4 inputs
8 inputs
16 outputs
8 outputs
#0
SRT1ND08S
4 inputs, 4
outputs
The I/O allocations for this system are shown below.
Inputs
Bits
Built-in CPU inputs
IR 000
SRT1ID04
IR 001
SRT1ND08S
SRT1-ID08
IR 002
Input Unit
IR 003
Unused bits
Outputs
IR 100
SRT1ND08S
SRT1-OD08
IR 101
SRT1-ROC16
IR 102
Output Unit
IR 103
Output Unit
Bits
Unused bits
I/O Allocations in 4-point Mode
PLC Word Allocation: 2 Words
The following diagram shows the I/O allocations when the DIP switch is set as
shown below.
Pin 1: OFF
Pin 2: OFF
Pin 3: ON
Bits
Inputs:
First word
Input Slave 3
Input Slave 2
Input Slave 1
Input Slave 0
Outputs:
First word
Output Slave 3
Output Slave 2
Output Slave 1
Output Slave 0
PLC Word Allocation: 4 Words
The following diagram shows the I/O allocations when the DIP switch is set as
shown below.
134
Section 4-4
CQM1-SRM21-V1 Master Unit for CQM1 PLCs
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: OFF
Pin 3: ON
Bits
Inputs: First word
Input Slave 3
Input Slave 2
Input Slave 1
Input Slave 0
Inputs: First word + 1
Input Slave 7
Input Slave 6
Input Slave 5
Input Slave 4
Outputs: First word Output Slave 3 Output Slave 2 Output Slave 1 Output Slave 0
Outputs: First word + 1 Output Slave 7 Output Slave 6 Output Slave 5 Output Slave 4
PLC Word Allocation: 8 Words
The following diagram shows the I/O allocations when the DIP switch is set as
shown below.
Pin 1: OFF
or
Pin 1: ON
Pin 2: ON
Pin 3: ON
Pin 2: ON
Pin 3: ON
Bits
Inputs: First word Input Slave 3
Input Slave 2
Input Slave 1
Input Slave 0
Inputs: First word + 1 Input Slave 7
Input Slave 6
Input Slave 5
Input Slave 4
Inputs: First word + 2 Input Slave 11
Input Slave 10
Input Slave 9
Input Slave 8
Inputs: First word + 3 Input Slave 15
Input Slave 14
Input Slave 13
Input Slave 12
Outputs: First word Output Slave 3
Output Slave 2
Output Slave 1
Output Slave 0
Outputs: First word + 1 Output Slave 7
Output Slave 6
Output Slave 5
Output Slave 4
Outputs: First word + 2 Output Slave 11 Output Slave 10 Output Slave 9
Output Slave 8
Outputs: First word + 3 Output Slave 15 Output Slave 14 Output Slave 13 Output Slave 12
In 4-point mode, 8-point Slaves use two node numbers.
Slave
8-point Slave
Node number setting
Odd number
Even number
Node number actually used
Node number setting to node
number setting + 1
Example:
When the PLC word allocations are set to 8 words and an 8-output Slave’s
node number is set to 3, the Slave uses the words for Input Slave 3 and Input
Slave 4.
135
Section 4-5
SRM1-C0@-V2 Master Control Units
I/O Allocation Example (2 Words)
In this example the number of points/node number is set to 4, the PLC word
allocations are set to 2 words, and the system has the configuration shown in
the following diagram. (The node numbers are indicated by #0, #1, #2, and
#3.)
CQM1-SRM21-V1
CPU
IN 16
SRM
IN 16
OUT 16
OUT 16
PS
CQM1
PS: Power Supply Unit
CPU: CPU Unit
IN: Input Unit or CPU Unit inputs
OUT: Output Unit
SRM: Master Unit
Terminator
#2
#0
#0
#1
#3
SRT1ID04
SRT1ID08
SRT1OD04
SRT1OD08
SRT1ND08S
4 inputs
8 inputs
4 outputs
8 outputs 4 inputs, 4 outputs
The I/O allocations for this system are shown below.
Bits
Inputs
CPU Unit inputs
IR 000
IR 001
SRT1- SRT1ND08S ID04
SRT1-ID08
Input Unit
IR 002
Outputs
IR 100
4-5
Bits
SRT1ND08S
SRT1-OD08
IR 101
Output Unit
IR 102
Output Unit
SRT1OD04
SRM1-C0@-V2 Master Control Units
The SRM1 Master Control Unit contains both CPU Unit and Master Unit and it
connects to all I/O using CompoBus/S. This manual provides SRM1 specifications only. For details, refer to the CompoBus/S SRM1(-V2) Master Control
Unit Operation Manual (W318).
4-5-1
Specifications and Part Names
Specifications
Item
Model
Port
136
Specifications
SRM1-C01-V2
Peripheral port
SRM1-C02-V2
Peripheral port
RS-232C port
Section 4-5
SRM1-C0@-V2 Master Control Units
General Specifications
Item
Power supply voltage
Specifications
24 V DC
Allowable power supply
voltage
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Power consumption
Inrush current
3.5 W max.
12.0 A max.
Noise immunity
1500 Vp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise time
of 1 ns (via impulse noise simulator)
Vibration resistance
Conforming to JIS C0911:
10 to 57 Hz with single-amplitude of 0.075 mm
57 to 150 Hz with fixed acceleration of 9.8 m/s2
10 sweeps each in X, Y, and Z directions (8 minutes per
sweep × 10 sweeps = 80 minutes)
Conforms to JIS C0912
147 m/s2
3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions
Shock resistance
Ambient temperature
Ambient operating relative humidity
Operating environment
Operating: 0 to 55°C
Storage: – 20 to 75°C
10% to 90% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
Terminal screw size
Power holding time
M3
DC power: 2 ms min.
Weight
150 g max.
Master Specifications
Item
I/O points
Specifications
256 points (128 inputs/128 outputs) or
128 points (64 inputs/64 outputs)
(Determined by the usable node number setting in DM.
The default setting is 256 points.)
Number of points per
node number
8-point mode
Usable node numbers
IN0 to IN15/OUT0 to OUT15 or
IN0 to IN7/OUT0 to OUT7
(Can be switched with setting in DM.)
I/O words
Input: IR 000 to 007
Output: IR 010 to 017
Programming language
Instructions
Ladder program
14 basic instruction + 81 special instructions with
129 variations
Processing speed
Program capacity
LD instruction: 0.97 µs, MOV instruction: 9.1 µs
4,096 words
Data memory
Timers/Counters
2,022 words + 512 words (Read only)
128 total
Work bits
Memory backup
640
Flash memory: User programs, etc. (without battery)
Lithium battery: Data memories, etc. (Battery life: 10 years
or more at ambient temperature of 25°C)
Peripheral port
1 port
137
Section 4-5
SRM1-C0@-V2 Master Control Units
Item
RS-232C port
Specifications
1 port (SRM1-C02-V2 only)
Host link, NT link, 1:1 PLC link, ASCII data transfer with
XON, XOFF flow control
Programming Console (CQM1-PR001-E/C200H-PR027-E)
SYSMAC Support Software
C500-ZL3AT1-E (for IBM PC/AT, English version)
Programming Devices
Dimensions (Common)
15
PWR
RUN
ERR
85.5
110
SD
RD
ERS
COMM
36
40
60
Mounting Holes
100 ± 0.2
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
(Unit: mm)
30 ± 0.2
138
Section 4-5
SRM1-C0@-V2 Master Control Units
Name and Function of Parts
Mounting Screw Hole
Used when screwing onto
control panel.
Peripheral Port
Used to connect Programming
Devices. Connection requires
special cable.
PWR
CPU Indicator Section
Indicates status of SRM1 as
CPU Unit.
RUN
ERR
SD
CompoBus/S Indicator Section
Indicates status of SRM1 as
CompoBus/S Master Unit, and
status of communications with
Slaves.
RD
RS-232C Port (SRM1-C02-V2 only)
ERS
Used to connect to the RS-232C
interface cable of a personal
computer, PLC, etc. Not available
on SRM1-C01-V2.
COMM
Communications Port Status LED
Blinks during communications
with peripheral port or RS-232C
port.
Mounting Screw Hole
Used when screwing onto control
panel.
Power Supply Terminals
Used to connect SRM1 power
supply (common to internal
circuitry power supply, I/O power
supply, and communications
power supply).
CompoBus/S Communications Terminal
Used to connect CompoBus/S
communications cable.
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
Status
Meaning
PWR (green)
ON
OFF
Power ON
Power OFF
RUN (green)
ON
OFF
RUN/MONITOR mode
PROGRAM mode or abnormal stop
ERR (red)
ON
Flashing
Fatal error (operation discontinues)
Non-fatal error (operation continues)
SD (yellow)
OFF
ON
Normal
CompoBus/S sending data
RD (yellow)
OFF
ON
CompoBus/S not sending data
CompoBus/S receiving data
ERC (red)
OFF
ON
CompoBus/S not receiving data
CompoBus/S communications error
OFF
COMM (yellow) Flashing
OFF
Other
Communicating with peripheral port or RS-232C port
Other
139
Section 4-6
CPM2C-S Series CPM2C-S@@@C (-DRT)
4-5-2
Settings
The CompoBus/S System settings are described in this section.
Usable Node Number
Settings
Usable node numbers are set from a Programming Device by specifying
either of the following values as BCD in data memory (bits 0 to 3 of DM6603).
Bits 0 to 3
DM6603
××@@
Cannot be
changed
Setting (BCD) Usable Node Number Setting
0
IN0 to IN15/OUT0 to OUT15
IN0 to IN7/OUT0 to OUT7
1
Note The setting is read when SRM1 is started. After changing the setting, be sure
to restart SRM1.
Communications Mode
Setting
The communications mode is set from a Programming Device by specifying
either of the following values as a BCD in data memory (bits 4 to 7 of
DM6603).
Bits 4 to 7
DM6603
××@@
Cannot be
changed
Setting (BCD)
0
1
Communications mode
setting
High-speed
Communications Mode
Long-distance
Communications Mode
Communications
distance
Communications Communications
baud rate
cycle time
100 m max.
750 kbps
0.5 or 0.8 ms
500 m max.
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
Note Long-distance Communications Mode can only be set in the SRM1-C0@-V2.
Earlier models (SRM1-C0@, SRM1-C0@-V1) cannot use this mode.
4-6
CPM2C-S Series CPM2C-S@@@C (-DRT)
The CPM2C-S Series is a small PLC based on the CPM2C Series with built-in
CompoBus/S Master functions. The CPM2C-S Series, like the CPM2C
Series, incorporates a variety of functions, such as pulse synchronous control, input interrupt control, high-speed counters, pulse outputs, and clock
functions.
Up to 32 CompoBus/S Slaves can be connected to the CPM2C-S Series to
construct an I/O link system with up to 256 points (128 inputs and 128 outputs). With CompoBus/S Slaves, such as CompoBus/S Remote Terminals,
Analog Terminals, Sensor Terminals, and Bit Chain Terminals connected, the
CPM2C-S Series saves wiring effort and supports long-distance communications.
A model number with the suffix “-DRT” means that the model also supports
DeviceNet Slave functions, thus enabling I/O linking with the DeviceNet Master.
140
Section 4-6
CPM2C-S Series CPM2C-S@@@C (-DRT)
4-6-1
Specifications and Part Names
System Configuration
The following diagram shows a system configuration of a CPM2C-S PLC with
DeviceNet Slave functions.
DeviceNet Master
CS, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE (-ZE),
and CVM1/CV PLCs
DeviceNet transmission path
DeviceNet Slave
Remote I/O communications and message communications up to 32 inputs
and 32 outputs
DeviceNet Slave
CPM2C-S Series
I/O control, interrupt inputs, high-speed counters,
pulse outputs, pulse sync control, and analog I/O
Expansion Units
CompoBus/S transmission path
Remote I/O communications
up to 128 inputs and 128
outputs
CompoBus/S Slave
Unit Specifications
Unit
With CompoBus/S Master functions
Number of inputs
6 at 24 V DC
With CompoBus/S Master and
DeviceNet Slave functions
Number of outputs
Model
4 NPN transistors
4 PNP transistors
CPM2C-S100C
CPM2C-S110C
4 NPN transistors
CPM2C-S100C-DRT
4 PNP transistors
CPM2C-S110C-DRT
Master Specifications
Item
Specification
Programming method
1 address/instruction
Instruction length
1 to 5 words/instruction
Number of instructions
Basic instructions: 14
Special instruction: 105 (185 variations)
Execution time
Basic instructions: 0.64 s (LD instruction)
Special instructions: 7.8 s (MOV instruction)
Program capacity
Maximum I/O points
4,096 words
CPU: 10 points (6 inputs and 4 outputs)
Expansion: 338 points (182 inputs and 156 outputs)
Input bits
Output bits
160 bits: 00000 to 00915
160 bits: 01000 to 01915
Bits not used as I/O bits in words can
be used as work bits
CompoBus/S input bits
CompoBus/S output bits
128 bits: 02000 to 02715
128 bits: 03000 to 03715
Bits not used as CompoBus/S I/O bits
in words can be used as work bits
Work bits
672 bits: 02800 to 02915 (words 028 to 029), 03800 to 04915 (words 038 to
049), and 20000 to 22715 (words 200 to 227)
SR bits
TR bits
448 bits: 22800 to 25515 (words 228 to 255)
8 bits: TR0 to TR7
HR bits
AR bits
320 bits: HR 0000 to 1915 (words HR 00 to 19)
384 bits: AR 0000 to 2315 (words AR 00 to 23)
LR bits
256 bits: LR 0000 to 1515 (words LR 00 to 15)
141
CPM2C-S Series CPM2C-S@@@C (-DRT)
Item
Section 4-6
Specification
256 bits: TIM/CNT 000 to 255
1-ms timer (TMHH instruction), 10-ms timer (TIMH instruction), 100-ms timer
(TIM instruction), 1-s/10-s timer (TIML instruction), Decrementing counter
(CNT instruction), and reversible counter (CNTR instruction)
Timer/Counters
DM words
Read/Write: 2,048 words (DM 0000 to 2047) (DM 2000 to 2021 are the error
log area.)
Read-only: 456 words (DM 6144 to 6599)
PLC Setup: 56 words (DM 6600 to 6655)
256 points (128 inputs and 128 outputs) or 128 points (64 inputs and 64 outputs)
(Determined by the node number settings in the DM Area. The value is by
default set to 256.)
CompoBus/S Mas- I/O points
ter function
Number of points
per node number
Node number setting
I/O words
DeviceNet Slave function
8-point mode
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15 or IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7 (selected
with DM settings)
Input: 020 to 027 (CompoBus/S input bits)
Output: 030 to 037 (CompoBus/S output bits)
DeviceNet remote I/O link points: Up to 1,024 points (Up to 32 input words
and 32 output words)
Explicit message communications
Read/Write any desired area from the Master
Power failure backup function
Flash memory: User program, DM (Read only), and PLC Setup
Memory backup: Holds DM (Read/Write), HR, AR, and CNT contents with
battery for 2 years at an ambient temperature of 25°C.
Programming Device
CQM1H-PRO01-E, CQM1-PRO01-E, or C200H-PRO27-E Programming
Console
WS02-CXPC1-EV2 CX-Programmer
WS01-CPTB1-E SYSMAC-CPT
C500-ZL3AT1-E SYSMAC Support Software
Dimensions (Same for All Units)
(Unit: mm)
The CPM2C-S has rotary switches for DeviceNet settings and communications connector only if the CPM2C-S model number has a suffix of “DRT.” For
the dimensions of the CPM2C-S with wires connected or Expansion Units
mounted, refer to the CPM2C-S Series Operation Manual.
142
Section 4-6
CPM2C-S Series CPM2C-S@@@C (-DRT)
Name and Function of Parts
DIP Switch
Used to set the operation of the CPM2C-S.
(See CPM2C-S Operation Manual.)
Communications Port
Used to connect Programming Devices and other RS-232C devices. Used both as a peripheral
port and RS-232C port. Connection requires
special cable.
CPU Indicator Section
Indicates the status of CPM2C-S, status of
communications with Slaves, and status of
built-in I/O. Models with the model number
suffix "DRT" have a DeviceNet indicator.
CompoBus/S Communications Terminal
Used to connect CompoBus/S communications cable.
Rotar y Switches (for models with the
model number suffix "DRT" only)
Indicates the node number as a DeviceNet
Slave. (See CPM2C-S Operation Manual.)
DeviceNet Communications Terminal (for models
with the model number suffix "DRT" only)
Used to connect DeviceNet communications cable.
I/O Connector
Used to connect I/O (6 inputs and 4
outputs). (See CPM2C-S Operation
Manual.)
DIN Track Mounting Hook
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
PWR
RUN
ERR/ALM
Name
Power
Run
Operating error
Color
Green
ON
Status
Power ON
Meaning
Green
OFF
ON
Power OFF
RUN/MONITOR mode
Red
OFF
ON
PROGRAM mode or abnormal stop
Fatal error (operation stops)
Flashing
OFF
Non-fatal error (operation continues)
Normal
SD
Sending data
Yellow
ON
OFF
CompoBus/S sending data
CompoBus/S not sending data
RD
Receiving data
Yellow
ON
OFF
CompoBus/S receiving data
CompoBus/S not receiving data
ERC
Communications Red
error
ON
OFF
CompoBus/S communications error
Other
COMM
Port communica- Yellow
tions
Flashing
Communicating with peripheral port or RS-232C
port
MS (models
with model
number suffix
“DRT” only)
Module status
Green/Red
OFF
---
Other
Lights or flashes according to the status of the
DeviceNet node. (See note.)
Green/Red
---
ON, flashes, or OFF according to the status of
DeviceNet network. (See note.)
Yellow
ON
Input terminals turned ON (See note.)
Yellow
OFF
ON
Input terminals turned OFF (See note.)
Output terminals turned ON (See note.)
OFF
Output terminals turned OFF (See note.)
NS (models with Network status
model number
suffix “DRT”
only)
0 to 5
Input
0 to 3
Output
Note Refer to the CPM2C-S Series Operation Manual for details.
143
Section 4-6
CPM2C-S Series CPM2C-S@@@C (-DRT)
4-6-2
Settings
The CompoBus/S System settings are described in this section.
Usable Node Number
Usable node numbers are set by specifying either of the following BCD values
Settings
in data memory (bits 0 to 3 of DM6603).
Bits 0 to 3
DM 6603 XX((
Cannot
be changed
Setting (BCD)
0
Usable node number settings
IN0 to IN15/OUT0 to OUT15
1
IN0 to IN7/OUT0 to OUT7
Note The setting is read when the CPM2C-S is started. After changing the
setting, be sure to restart the CPM2C-S.
Communications Mode
Setting
The communications mode is set by specifying either of the following BCD
values in data memory (bits 4 to 7 of DM6603).
Bits 4 to 7
DM 6603
XX((
Cannot be
changed
144
Setting (BCD)
Communications mode
setting
Communications distance
Communications baud
rate
Communications cycle
time
0
High-speed
communications mode
100 m max.
750 kbps
0.5 or 0.8 ms
1
Long-distance
Communications Mode
500 m max.
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
SECTION 5
Slave Specifications and Operations
This section explains the functions of each Slave, including information on specifications, switch settings, and I/O.
5-1
Remote Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1
SRT@@-ID@@ (-1) Remote Terminals
with 4, 8, or 16 Transistor Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
SRT@-ID16T (-1) Remote Terminals
with 16 Transistor Inputs (and 3-tier Terminal Blocks) . . . . . . . . . .
157
5-1-3
SRT@-OD@@ (-1) Remote Terminals
with 4, 8, or 16 Transistor Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
163
5-1-4
SRT@-OD16T (-1) Remote Terminals
with 16 Transistor Outputs (and 3-tier Terminal Blocks). . . . . . . . .
173
SRT@-MD16T (-1) Remote Terminals
with 8 Input and 8 Output Transistors (3-tier Terminal Block) . . . .
179
SRT@-RO@@@ Remote Terminals with Relay/Power MOS FETs
185
Connector Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
194
5-1-2
5-1-5
5-1-6
5-2
5-2-1
SRT2-VID@@@@ (-1) Connector Terminals
with 8 Input or 16 Output Transistors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
194
SRT2-VOD@@@@ (-1) Connector Terminals
with 8 or 16 Transistor Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
SRT2-ID32ML (-1) Connector Terminals
with 32 Transistor Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
225
5-2-4
SRT2-OD32ML (-1) Connector Terminals
with 32 Transistor Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
236
5-2-5
SRT2-MD32ML (-1) Connector Terminals
with 16 Transistor Inputs and 16 Transistor Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . .
246
Wiring and Assembly of Communications
Connector and MIL Connector for Connector Terminals. . . . . . . . .
256
Remote I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
260
5-2-2
5-2-3
5-2-6
5-3
5-3-1
5-4
SRT@-@D16P Remote I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
260
Water-resistant Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
268
5-4-1
SRT2-ID@@CL (-1) Water-resistant Terminals
with 4 or 8 Transistor Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
268
5-4-2
SRT2-OD@@CL (-1) Water-resistant Terminals
with 4 or 8 Transistor Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
277
Shielded Connector Wiring and Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
284
Sensor Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
287
5-4-3
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
147
5-5-1
SRT@-@D08S Sensor Terminals with 8 Transistor Inputs
or 4 Transistor Inputs and 4 Transistor Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
287
5-5-2
SRT@-OD08S Sensor Terminal with 8 Transistor Outputs . . . . . . .
295
Fiber Amplifier Communications Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
301
5-6-1
301
E3X-SRT21 Fiber Amplifier Communications Unit . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Input Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
308
5-7-1
SRT2-AD04 Analog Input Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
308
Analog Output Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
318
5-8-1
318
SRT2-DA02 Analog Output Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
5-9
146
I/O Link Units for CPM1A and CPM2A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
327
5-9-1
327
CPM1A-SRT21 I/O Link Unit for CPM1A and CPM2A . . . . . . . . .
5-10 I/O Link Units for CPM2C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
331
5-10-1 CPM2C-SRT21 I/O Link Unit for CPM2C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
331
5-11 Sensor Amplifier Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
335
5-11-1 SRT1-T@D04S Sensor Amplifier Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
335
5-11-2 Sensor Amplifier Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
343
5-12 Application Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
350
5-12-1 Two-wire DC Sensor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
350
5-12-2 Sensor Inrush Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
351
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
5-1
5-1-1
Remote Terminals
SRT@@-ID@@ (-1) Remote Terminals with 4, 8, or 16 Transistor
Inputs
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and input specifications for the SRT@ID@@@ (-1) Remote Terminals.
Ratings
Item
Specification
Models
SRT1-ID04
SRT1-ID08
SRT1-ID16
SRT1-ID04-1
SRT1-ID08-1
SRT1-ID16-1
SRT2-ID04
SRT2-ID08
SRT2-ID16
SRT2-ID04-1
SRT2-ID08-1
SRT2-ID16-1
Input points
SRT@-ID04: 4 points (NPN)
SRT@-ID08: 8 points (NPN)
SRT@-ID16: 16 points (NPN)
SRT@-ID04-1: 4 points (PNP)
SRT@-ID08-1: 8 points (PNP)
SRT@-ID16-1: 16 points (PNP)
Communications mode
SRT1-ID@@ (-1): High-speed Communications Mode
SRT2-ID@@ (-1): High-speed Communications Mode or
Long-distance Communications Mode
Multiple power supplies
Power supply type
Communications power
supply voltage
I/O power supply voltage
14 to 26.4 V DC
(Power can be supplied from the Special Flat Cable.)
I/O power supply current
Current consumption
(See note.)
Noise immunity
1 A max.
Communications power: 50 mA max. at 24 V DC
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
10 to 55 Hz, 1.0 mm double-amplitude
Dielectric strength
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Operating environment
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC +10%/–15%)
±1.5 kVp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise
time of 1 ns (via impulse noise simulator)
200 m/s2
500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
Operating: 0 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –20 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Operating: 35% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
Mounting method
Mounting strength
M4 screws or 35-mm DIN track mounting
Pulling: 50 N
Tightening: 1.5 N • m
Terminal strength
Pulling: 50 N
Tightening: 0.6 to 1.18 N • m
147
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Item
Node number settings
Specification
The node number is set on a DIP switch. (Set the node
number before turning on the Slave.)
Weight
SRT@-ID04: 80 g max.
SRT@-ID08: 80 g max.
SRT@-ID16: 110 g max.
SRT@-ID04-1: 80 g max.
SRT@-ID08-1: 80 g max.
SRT@-ID16-1: 110 g max.
Note The current consumption is the value with all 4 and 8 and 16 points turned ON
excluding the current consumption of the external sensor connected to the
input Remote Terminal and the current consumption of the load connected to
the output Remote Terminal.
Input Specifications
Item
Specification
Input current
ON delay time
6 mA max./point at 24 V DC
1.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
ON voltage
1.5 ms max.
SRT@-ID@@:
SRT@-ID@@-1:
OFF voltage
SRT@-ID@@:
SRT@-ID@@-1:
Slave Components
OFF current
1 mA max.
Insulation method
Input indicators
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
15 V DC min. (between each input terminal
and V)
15 V DC min. (between each input terminal
and G)
5 V DC min. (between each input terminal
and V)
5 V DC min. (between each input terminal
and G)
The following diagram shows the main components of the SRT2-ID08 Transistor Remote Terminal. The functions of these components are described
below.
DIP Switch
Open the cover to reveal the DIP switch. The DIP switch's pins
have the following functions:
Pins 1 and 2: Communications mode setting (SRT2 Series)
or Reserved (Always OFF.) (SRT1 Series)
Pins 3 to 6: Node number setting
CompoBus/S Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave and communications.
Input Indicators
Indicate the status of each contact. (Lit when the input is ON.)
The SRT@-ID04 and SRT@-ID04-1 have 4 indicators,
the SRT@-ID08 and SRT@-ID08-1 have 8 indicators,
and the SRT@-ID16 and SRT@-ID016-1 has 16 indicators.
Mounting Screw Holes
Used when screwing the Unit to a control panel.
DIN Track Mounting Hook
Used when mounting the Unit to a DIN track.
Terminal Block
Connect the CompoBus/S communications cable, communications power supply, I/O power supply,
and input devices such as switches and sensors to the terminal block.
148
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
PWR (green)
Status
ON
Meaning
The communications power supply is ON.
COMM (yellow)
OFF
ON
The communications power supply is OFF.
Normal communications
OFF
A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in
standby status.
ERR (red)
ON
OFF
A communications error has occurred.
Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
0 to 3 (4 inputs)
0 to 7 (8 inputs)
0 to 15 (16
inputs)
(yellow)
ON
OFF
The corresponding input is ON.
The corresponding input is OFF or the Unit is in standby
status.
DIP Switch
The DIP switch is located on the left side of the Transistor Remote Terminal,
under the cover. Always turn OFF the Slave before changing the node number
setting.
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Communications mode setting (SRT2 Series)
or Reserved (Always OFF.) (SRT1 Series)
Node number setting
Note
1. Always turn OFF the Slave before changing DIP switch settings.
2. In the SRT1 Series, pin 2 must always be left OFF. Otherwise, the Unit may
not function correctly.
Communications Mode Settings (SRT2 Series Only)
The following communications modes are set with pin 2.
Pin 2
OFF
ON
CommunicaCommunications mode
tions distance
High-speed Com- 100 m max.
munications
Mode
500 m max.
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
Communications baud rate
750 kbps
Communications cycle time
0.5 or 0.8 ms
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
The communications mode settings using pin 2 only apply to SRT2-series
Slaves and cannot be used with the SRT1-series Slaves, which operate in
High-speed Communications Mode at all times.
Note Make sure that the communications mode of the Slave is the same as that of
the Master Unit. If the communications modes are not the same, normal communications with the Master Unit will not be possible. The operating status of
the Slave can be verified with LED indicators. Refer to 6-5-1 Indicators.
149
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Node Number Settings
Set the node number with pins 3 through 6, as shown in the following table.
Node number
Pin 3
(8)
Pin 4
(4)
Pin 5
(2)
Pin 6
(1)
0
1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
2
3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
4
5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
6
7
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
8
9
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
10
11
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
12
13
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
14
15
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Note The actual node number setting range depends on the type of PLC in which
the Master is mounted as well as the Master’s settings. Refer to 2-1 Communications Specifications for details.
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-ID04.
Photocoupler
24 V DC
Internal
circuitry
24 V DC
0 V Photocoupler
24 V DC
0V
150
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-ID04-1.
Photocoupler
24 V DC
Internal
circuitry
24 V DC
Photocoupler
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-ID08.
24 V DC
Internal
circuitry
Photocoupler
24 V DC
0 V Photocoupler
0V
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-ID08-1.
Photocoupler
24 V DC
Internal
circuitry
24 V DC
Photocoupler
151
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-ID16.
Internal
circuitry
Photocoupler
24 V DC
Photocoupler
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-ID16-1.
Internal
circuitry
Photocoupler
Terminal Arrangement
and Wiring
24 V DC
Photocoupler
Install the following M3 crimp terminals on the signal wires and connect to the
terminal block.
6.0mm max.
6.0mm max.
Tighten the terminal block screws to the specified tightening torque of
0.5 N⋅m.
152
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-ID04.
CompoBus/S
24 V DC
NPN output 3-wired 2-wired sensor
sensor (photoelec- (limit switch)
tric or proximity
sensor)
Blue
Black
Brown
Blue
Brown
Blue
I/O power supply
Black
CompoBus/S
communications
Brown
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
NPN output 3-wired
sensor (photoelectric or proximity
sensor)
Note The V terminals (terminal numbers 4, 6, and 11) are all connected internally,
as are the G terminals (terminal numbers 3, 5, and 7). When I/O power is supplied to terminals 11 and 3, power can be supplied to sensors from terminals
4 and 5 as well as 6 and 7.
When the power supply exceeds 1.0 A, provide an external power supply to
the I/O power supply instead of providing the supply from the terminals.
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-ID04-1.
CompoBus/S
24 V DC
Blue
Brown
Blue
I/O power supply
Black
CompoBus/S
communications
Brown
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
PNP output 3-wired 2-wired sensor
sensor (photoelec- (limit switch)
tric or proximity
sensor)
Note The V terminals (terminal numbers 4, 6, and 11) are all connected internally,
as are the G terminals (terminal numbers 3, 5, and 7). When I/O power is supplied to terminals 11 and 3, power can be supplied to sensors from terminals
4 and 5 as well as 6 and 7.
When the power supply exceeds 1.0 A, provide an external power supply to
the I/O power supply instead of providing the supply from the terminals.
153
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-ID08.
CompoBus/S
24 V DC
NPN output 3-wired 2-wired sensor
sensor (photoelec- (limit switch)
tric or proximity
sensor)
Blue
Black
Brown
Blue
Brown
Black
I/O power supply
Blue
CompoBus/S
communications
Brown
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
NPN output 3-wired
sensor (photoelectric or proximity
sensor)
Note The V terminals (terminal numbers 11 and 16) are all connected internally, as
are the G terminals (terminal numbers 3 and 8). When I/O power is supplied
to terminals 11 and 3, power can be supplied to sensors from terminals 16
and 8.
When the power supply exceeds 1.0 A, provide an external power supply to
the I/O power supply instead of providing the supply from the terminals.
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-ID08-1.
CompoBus/S
24 V DC
Blue
Brown
Blue
I/O power supply
Black
CompoBus/S
communications
Brown
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
PNP output 3-wired 2-wired sensor
sensor (photoelec- (limit switch)
tric or proximity
sensor)
Note The V terminals (terminal numbers 11 and 16) are all connected internally, as
are the G terminals (terminal numbers 3 and 8). When I/O power is supplied
to terminals 11 and 3, power can be supplied to sensors from terminals 16
and 8.
When the power supply exceeds 1.0 A, provide an external power supply to
the I/O power supply instead of providing the supply from the terminals.
154
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-ID16.
CompoBus/S
24 V DC
NPN output 3-wired 2-wired sensor
sensor (photoelec- (limit switch)
tric or proximity
sensor)
Black
Blue
Brown
Blue
Brown
Blue
I/O power supply
Brown
CompoBus/S
communications
Black
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
NPN output 3-wired
sensor (photoelectric or proximity
sensor)
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-ID16-1.
CompoBus/S
24 V DC
Blue
Brown
Black
I/O power supply
Blue
CompoBus/S
communications
Brown
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
PNP output 3-wired 2-wired sensor
sensor (photoelec- (limit switch)
tric or proximity
sensor)
155
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
SRT@-ID04/ID04-1/ID08/
ID08-1 Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the SRT@-ID04/ID04-1/ID08/
ID08-1. All dimensions are in mm.
(48)
28
27
50
(54)
80
48
Mounting Holes
(65)
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
68±0.2
SRT@-ID16/ID16-1
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the SRT@-ID16/ID16-1. All
dimensions are in mm.
(48)
28
27
50
(54)
105
48
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
93±0.2
156
(65)
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
5-1-2
SRT@-ID16T (-1) Remote Terminals with 16 Transistor Inputs (and
3-tier Terminal Blocks)
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and input specifications for the SRT@ID16T (-1) Remote Terminal.
Ratings
Item
Specification
Models
SRT1-ID16T
SRT1-ID16T-1
SRT2-ID16T
SRT2-ID16T-1
Input points
SRT@-ID16T: 16 points (NPN)
SRT@-ID16T-1: 16 points (PNP)
Communications mode
SRT1-ID16T (-1): High-speed Communications Mode
SRT2-ID16T (-1): High-speed Communications Mode
and Long-distance Communications
Mode
3-tier terminal block (with common I/O terminal for each
input point)
Terminal
Power supply type
Communications power
supply voltage
I/O power supply voltage
Multiple power supplies
14 to 26.4 V DC
(Power can be supplied from the communications cable)
Current consumption
(See note.)
Noise immunity
Communications power: 50 mA max. at 24 V DC
Vibration resistance
10 to 150 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude or 70 m/s2
Shock resistance
Operating environment
Malfunction: 200 m/s2
500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
1,000 V AC for 1 minute (1-mA sensing current, between
charged and uncharged sections)
Operating: –10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –25 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
Mounting method
Mounting strength
M4 screws or 35-mm DIN track mounting
100 N in each direction
Terminal strength
Pulling: 100 N
Tightening: 0.3 to 0.5 N • m
The node number is set with a rotary switch. (Set before
turning ON the Slave.)
300 g max.
Dielectric strength
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Node number settings
Weight
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC +10%/–15%)
±1.5 kVp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise
time of 1 ns (via impulse noise simulator)
Note The current consumption is the value with all 16 points turned ON excluding
the current consumption of the external sensor connected to the input Remote
Terminal and the current consumption of the load connected to the output
Remote Terminal.
157
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Input Specifications
Item
Input current
ON delay time
OFF delay time
ON voltage
OFF voltage
OFF current
Insulation
method
Input indicators
Slave Components
Specification
6 mA max./point at 24 V DC
3 mA min./point at 17 V DC
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
SRT@-ID16T: 15 V DC min. (between each input terminal and V)
SRT@-ID16T-1: 15 V DC min. (between each input terminal and G)
SRT@-ID16T: 5 V DC max. (between each input terminal and V)
SRT@-ID16T-1: 5 V DC max. (between each input terminal and G)
1 mA max. at 24 V DC
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
The following diagram shows the main components of the SRT2-ID16T Transistor Remote Terminal. The functions of these components are described
below.
Rotary Switch
Sets node number.
DIP Switch
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 and 2: Reserved (Always OFF)
Pin 3: Communications mode setting (SRT2 Series)
or Reserved (Always OFF) (SRT1 Series)
Pin 4: Reserved (Always OFF)
CompoBus/S Indicators
Indicate the status of Slave
and communications.
Input Indicators
Indicate input status of each contact.
(Lit when the input is ON.)
Circuit Block Mounting
Screw
Terminal Block
Used to connect I/O power
supply, and input devices such
as switches and sensors.
Used to remove the circuit block
when replacing it.
Mounting Screw Holes
DIN Track Mounting Hooks
Used when screwing the
Used when mounting the Unit to a DIN track.
Unit to a control panel.
Terminal Block
Used to connect CompoBus/S communications cables and
communications power supply.
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
PWR (green)
158
Status
ON
Meaning
The communications power supply is ON.
OFF
The communications power supply is OFF.
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Indicator
COMM (yellow)
Switch Settings
Status
ON
Meaning
Normal communications
OFF
ERR (red)
ON
A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in
standby status.
A communications error has occurred.
0 to 15 (yellow)
OFF
ON
Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
The corresponding input is ON.
OFF
The corresponding input is OFF or the Unit is in standby
status.
Rotary and DIP switches are used to enter settings.
DIP Switch
Rotary Switch
Reserved (Always OFF)
Node number setting
Note
Reserved
(Always OFF)
Communications mode setting
(SRT2 Series)
or Reserved (Always OFF)
(SRT1 Series)
1. Always turn OFF the Slave before changing DIP switch settings.
2. In the SRT1 Series, pin 3 must always be left OFF. Otherwise, the Unit may
not function correctly.
3. All pins marked “RSV” (reserved) must be left OFF. If any of them is ON,
the Unit may not function correctly.
Node Number Settings
The rotary switch specifies node numbers as hexadecimal numbers, as
shown below.
Note
Node number
Setting
(Hexadecimal)
Node number
Setting
(Hexadecimal)
0
1
0
1
8
9
8
9
2
3
2
3
10
11
A
B
4
5
4
5
12
13
C
D
6
7
6
7
14
15
E
F
1. Node numbers of 16-point Slaves are always treated as even numbers.
Even if an odd number is specified, the actual node number setting becomes the even number immediately preceding it.
2. The actual node number setting range depends on the type of PLC in
which the Master is mounted as well as the Master’s settings. Refer to 2-1
Communications Specifications for details.
159
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Communications Mode Settings (SRT2 Series Only)
The communications mode is set with pin 3, as shown below.
Pin 3
Communications mode
Communications distance
Communications baud rate
Communications cycle time
OFF
High-speed Com- 100 m max.
munications
Mode
750 kbps
0.5 or 0.8 ms
ON
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
500 m max.
The communications mode settings using pin 3 only apply to the SRT2-series
Slaves and cannot be used with the SRT1-series Slaves, which operate in
High-speed Communications Mode at all times.
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-ID16T.
24 V DC
DC static
converter
(Insulated)
Photocoupler
Internal
circuitry
0 to 7
24 V DC
Photocoupler
8 to 15
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-ID16T-1.
24 V DC
DC-DC
converter
(Insulated)
Internal
circuitry
Photocoupler
24 V DC
Photocoupler
Terminal Arrangement
and Wiring
0 to 7
8 to 15
Install the following M3 crimp terminals on the signal wires and connect to the
terminal block.
6.0mm max.
6.0mm max.
Note Tighten the terminal block screws to the specified tightening torque of
0.5 N⋅m.
160
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-ID16T.
2-wired sensor
(limit switch)
NPN output 3-wired
sensor (photoelectric
sensor or proximity
sensor)
Black
Brown
Blue
Blue
Brown
Black
Brown
Blue
Blue
CompoBus/S
communications
Brown
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
2-wired sensor NPN output 3-wired
sensor (photoelectric
(limit switch)
sensor or proximity
sensor)
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-ID16T-1.
2-wired sensor
(limit switch)
PNP output 3-wired
sensor (photoelectric
sensor or proximity
sensor)
Black
Brown
Blue
Blue
Brown
Black
Brown
Blue
Blue
CompoBus/S
communications
Brown
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
2-wired sensor PNP output 3-wired
sensor (photoelectric
(limit switch)
sensor or proximity
sensor)
Note The V terminals V1 and V2 are not connected internally, and neither are the G
terminals G1 and G2 (I/O power supply). Care must be taken when connecting them.
161
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
SRT@-ID16T/ID16T-1
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the SRT@-ID16T/ID16T-1. All
dimensions are in mm.
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
Note The circuit block can be removed by loosening the circuit block mounting
screw. Before removing the circuit block for replacement, check that all power
supplies, including I/O power supply, to the Unit are turned OFF.
162
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
5-1-3
SRT@-OD@@ (-1) Remote Terminals with 4, 8, or 16 Transistor
Outputs
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and output specifications for the SRT@OD@@ (-1).
Ratings
Item
Models
Output points
Communications mode
Power supply type
Specification
SRT1-OD04
SRT1-OD08
SRT1-OD16
SRT1-OD04-1
SRT1-OD08-1
SRT1-OD16-1
SRT2-OD04
SRT2-OD08
SRT2-OD16
SRT2-OD04-1
SRT2-OD08-1
SRT2-OD16-1
SRT@-OD04: 4 points (NPN)
SRT@-OD08: 8 points (NPN)
SRT@-OD16: 16 points (NPN)
SRT@-OD04-1: 4 points (PNP)
SRT@-OD08-1: 8 points (PNP)
SRT@-OD16-1: 16 points (PNP)
SRT1-OD@@ (-1): High-speed Communications Mode
SRT2-OD@@ (-1): High-speed Communications Mode
and Long-distance Communications
Mode
Multiple power supplies
Communications power
supply voltage
I/O power supply voltage
14 to 26.4 V DC
(Power can be supplied from the communications cable)
I/O power supply current
SRT@-OD04 and SRT@-OD04-1: 1 A max.
SRT@-OD08 and SRT@-OD08-1: 1 A max.
Current consumption
(See note.)
Noise immunity
Communications power: 50 mA max. at 24 V DC
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Dielectric strength
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC +10%/–15%)
±1.5 kVp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise
time of 1 ns (via impulse noise simulator)
10 to 55 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude
Malfunction: 200 m/s2
500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
Ambient temperature
Operating: 0 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –20 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity
Operating: 35% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 20% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
Operating environment
Mounting method
Mounting strength
Terminal strength
M4 screws or 35-mm DIN track mounting
Pulling: 50 N
Tightening: 1.5 N • m
Pulling: 50 N
Tightening: 0.6 to 1.18 N • m
163
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Item
Node number settings
Specification
The node number is set on a DIP switch. (Set the node
number before turning ON the Slave.)
Weight
SRT@-OD04: 80 g max.
SRT@-OD08: 80 g max.
SRT@-OD16: 110 g max.
SRT@-OD04-1: 80 g max.
SRT@-OD08-1: 80 g max.
SRT@-OD16-1: 110 g max.
Note The current consumption is the value with all 4 and 8 and 16 points turned ON
excluding the current consumption of the external sensor connected to the
input Remote Terminal and the current consumption of the load connected to
the output Remote Terminal.
Output Specifications
Item
Rated output current
Residual voltage
Slave Components
Specification
Leakage current
0.3 A/point
0.6 V max.
SRT@-OD@@: Between each output terminal and G
SRT@-OD@@-1: Between each output terminal and V
0.1 mA max.
ON delay time
OFF delay time
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Insulation method
Output indicators
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
The following diagram shows the main components of the SRT2-OD08 Transistor Remote Terminal. The functions of these components are described
below.
DIP Switch
Open the cover to reveal the DIP switch. The DIP switch's
pins have the following functions:
Pin 1: Hold/clear outputs for communications error
Pin 2: Communications mode setting (SRT2 Series)
or Reserved (Always OFF) (SRT1 Series)
Pins 3 to 6: Node number setting
CompoBus/S Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave and communications.
Output Indicators
Indicate the status of each contact.
(Lit when the output is ON.)
The SRT(-OD04 and SRT(-OD04-1 have 4 indicators,
the SRT(-OD08 and SRT(-OD08-1 have 8 indicators, and
the SRT(-OD16 and SRT(-OD16-1 have 16 indicators.
Mounting Screw Holes
Used when screwing the Unit to a control panel.
DIN Track Mounting Hook
Used when mounting the Unit to a DIN track.
Terminal Block
Connect the CompoBus/S communications cable, communications
power supply, I/O power supply, and output devices such as relays
and indicators to the terminal block.
164
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
PWR (green)
Status
ON
Meaning
The communications power supply is ON.
COMM (yellow)
OFF
ON
The communications power supply is OFF.
Normal communications
OFF
A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in
standby status.
ON
OFF
A communications error has occurred.
Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
The corresponding output is ON.
ERR (red)
0 to 3 (4 outputs)
ON
0 to 7 (8 outputs)
OFF
0 to 15 (16 outputs)
(yellow)
The corresponding output is OFF or the Unit is in
standby status.
DIP Switch
The DIP switch is located on the left side of the Transistor Remote Terminal,
under the cover. Always turn OFF the Slave before changing DIP switch settings.
Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Communications mode setting (SRT2 Series)
or Reserved (Always OFF) (SRT1 Series)
Node number setting
Note
1. Always turn OFF the Slave before changing DIP switch settings.
2. In the SRT1 Series, pin 2 must always be left OFF. Otherwise, the Unit may
not function correctly.
Hold/Clear Outputs for Communications Error
Pin 1 is used to set the output data status when a communications error
occurs, as shown in the following table.
Pin 1 (HOLD)
OFF
ON
Output setting
Clear output status.
Maintain output status.
Communications Mode Settings (SRT2 Series Only)
The following communications modes are set with pin 2.
Pin 2
OFF
ON
Communications mode
Communications distance
High-speed Com- 100 m max.
munications
Mode
Long-distance
500 m max.
Communications
Mode
Communications baud rate
Communications cycle time
750 kbps
0.5 or 0.8 ms
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
The communications mode settings using pin 2 only apply to the SRT2-series
Slaves and cannot be used with the SRT1-series Slaves, which operate in
High-speed Communications Mode at all times.
165
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Note Make sure that the communications mode of the Slave is the same as that of
the Master Unit. If the communications modes are not the same, normal communications with the Master Unit will not be possible. The operating status of
the Slave can be verified with LED indicators. Refer to 6-5-1 Indicators.
Node Number Settings
Set the node number with pins 3 through 6, as shown in the following table.
Node number
0
Pin 3
(8)
OFF
Pin 4
(4)
OFF
Pin 5
(2)
OFF
Pin 6
(1)
OFF
1
2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
3
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
5
6
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
7
8
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
9
10
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
11
12
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
13
14
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
15
ON
ON
ON
ON
Note The actual node number setting range depends on the type of PLC in which
the Master is mounted as well as the Master’s settings. Refer to 2-1 Communications Specifications for details.
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-OD04.
Photocoupler
Voltage
step-down
24 V DC
24 V DC
Internal
circuitry
24 V DC
166
Photocoupler
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-OD04-1.
24 V DC
Internal
circuitry
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Voltage
step-down
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-OD08.
24 V DC
24 V DC
Internal
circuitry
Photocoupler
Voltage
step-down
24 V DC
Photocoupler
167
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-OD08-1.
24 V DC
Internal
circuitry
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Voltage
step-down
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-OD16.
Internal
circuitry
Photocoupler
Voltage
step-down
24 V DC
Photocoupler
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-OD16-1.
24 V DC
Internal
circuitry
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Voltage
step-down
168
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Terminal Arrangement
and Wiring
Install the following M3 crimp terminals on the signal wires and connect to the
terminal block.
6.0mm max.
6.0mm max.
Note Tighten the terminal block screws to the specified tightening torque of
0.5 N⋅m.
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-OD04.
CompoBus/S
24 V DC
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
CompoBus/S
communications
I/O power supply
Solenoid
Note
Valve
Solenoid
1. The V terminals (terminal numbers 4, 5, 6, 7, and 11) are all connected internally. When I/O power is supplied to terminals 11 and 3, power can be
supplied to output devices from terminals 4, 5, 6, and 7.
When the power supply exceeds 1.0 A, provide an external power supply
to the I/O power supply instead of providing the supply from the terminals.
2. When inductive loads such as solenoids and valves are used, either use
ones with built-in diodes that absorb the back-electromotive force or connect a diode externally.
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-OD04-1.
CompoBus/S
24 V DC
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
CompoBus/S
communications
I/O power supply
Solenoid
Note
Valve
1. G terminals (terminal numbers 3 and 4, 5, 6, 7) are all connected internally.
When I/O power is supplied to terminals 11 and 3, power can be provided
to output devices from terminals 4, 5, 6, and 7.
169
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
When the power supply exceeds 1.0 A, provide an external power supply
to the I/O power supply instead of providing the supply from the terminals.
2. When inductive loads such as solenoids and valves are used, either use
loads with built-in diodes that absorb the back-electromotive force or connect a diode externally.
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-OD08.
CompoBus/S
24 V DC
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
CompoBus/S
communications
I/O power supply
Solenoid
Note
Valve
Solenoid
1. The V terminals (terminal numbers 11, 8, and 16) are all connected internally. When I/O power is supplied to terminal 11 and 3, power can be supplied to output devices from terminals 8 and 16.
When the power supply exceeds 1.0 A, provide an external power supply
to the I/O power supply instead of providing the supply from the terminals.
2. When inductive loads such as solenoids and valves are used, either use
ones with built-in diodes that absorb the back-electromotive force or connect a diode externally.
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-OD08-1.
CompoBus/S
24 V DC
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
CompoBus/S
communications
I/O power supply
Solenoid
Note
170
Valve
1. G terminals (terminal numbers 3 and 8 and 16) are all connected internally.
When I/O power is supplied to terminals 11 and 3, power can be provided
to output devices from terminal 8 or 16.
When the power supply exceeds 1.0 A, provide an external power supply
to the I/O power supply instead of providing the supply from the terminals.
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
2. When inductive loads such as solenoids and valves are used, either use
loads with built-in diodes that absorb the back-electromotive force or connect a diode externally.
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-OD16.
CompoBus/S
24 V DC
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
CompoBus/S
communications
I/O power supply
Solenoid
Valve
Solenoid
Note When inductive loads such as solenoids and valves are used, either use ones
with built-in diodes that absorb the back-electromotive force or connect a
diode externally.
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-OD16-1.
CompoBus/S
24 V DC
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
CompoBus/S
communications
I/O power supply
Solenoid
Valve
Note When inductive loads such as solenoids and valves are used, either use loads
with built-in diodes that absorb the back-electromotive force or connect a
diode externally.
171
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
SRT@-OD04/OD04-1/
OD08/OD08-1 Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the SRT@-OD04/OD04-1/
OD08/OD08-1. All dimensions are in mm.
(48)
28
27
50
(54)
80
48
Mounting Holes
(65)
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
68 ± 0.2
SRT@-OD16/OD16-1
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the SRT@-OD16/OD16-1. All
dimensions are in mm.
(48)
28
27
50
(54)
105
48
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
93±0.2
172
(65)
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
5-1-4
SRT@-OD16T (-1) Remote Terminals with 16 Transistor Outputs
(and 3-tier Terminal Blocks)
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and output specifications for the SRT@OD16T (-1).
Ratings
Item
Specification
Models
SRT1-OD16T
SRT1-OD16T-1
SRT2-OD16T
SRT2-OD16T-1
Output points
SRT@-OD16T: 16 points (NPN)
SRT@-OD16T-1: 16 points (PNP)
Communications mode
SRT1-OD16T (-1): High-speed Communications Mode
SRT2-OD16T (-1): High-speed Communications Mode
and Long-distance Communications
Mode
3-tier terminal block (with common I/O terminal for each
output point)
Terminals
Power supply type
Communications power
supply voltage
I/O power supply voltage
Multiple power supplies
14 to 26.4 V DC
(Power can be supplied from the communications cable)
Current consumption
(See note.)
Noise immunity
Communications power: 50 mA max. at 24 V DC
Vibration resistance
10 to 150 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude or 70 m/s2
Shock resistance
Malfunction: 200 m/s2
Destruction: 300 m/s2
500 V AC for 1 minute (between insulated circuits)
1,000 V AC for 1 minute (1-mA sensing current between
charged and uncharged sections)
Dielectric strength
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC +10%/–15%)
±1.5 kVp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise
time of 1 ns (via impulse noise simulator)
Ambient temperature
Operating: 10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –20 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity
Operating environment
Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
Mounting method
Mounting strength
M4 screws or 35-mm DIN track mounting
100 N in each direction
Terminal strength
Pulling: 100 N
Tightening: 0.3 to 0.5 N • m
Node number settings
The node number is set with a rotary switch. (Set the
node number before turning ON the Slave.)
Weight
Approx. 300 g
Note The current consumption is the value with all 16 points turned ON excluding
the current consumption of the external sensor connected to the input Remote
Terminal and the current consumption of the load connected to the output
Remote Terminal.
173
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Output Specifications
Item
Output current
Specification
0.5 A/point
Residual voltage
Slave Components
Leakage current
1.2 V max.
(SRT@-OD16T: 0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and G)
(SRT@-OD16T-1: 0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and
V)
0.1 mA max.
ON delay time
OFF delay time
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Insulation method
Input indicators
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
The following diagram shows the main components of the SRT@-ID16T (-@)
Remote Terminal. The functions of these components are described below.
Rotary Switch
Sets node number.
DIP Switch
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 and 2: Reserved (Always OFF)
Pin 3: Communications mode setting (SRT2 Series)
or Reserved (Always OFF) (SRT1 Series)
Pin 4: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
CompoBus/S Indicators
Indicate the status of the
Slave and communications.
Circuit Block Mounting
Screw
Used to remove the circuit block
when replacing it.
Output Indicators
Indicate output status of
each contact. (Lit when the
output is ON.)
Terminal Block
Used to connect I/O power
supply, and output devices
such as relays and
indicators.
DIN Track Mounting Hooks
Mounting Screw Holes
Used when mounting
Used when screwing the
the Unit to a DIN track.
Unit to a control panel.
Terminal Block
Used to connect CompoBus/S communications cables
and communications power supply.
174
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
PWR (green)
Status
ON
Meaning
The communications power supply is ON.
COMM (yellow)
OFF
ON
The communications power supply is OFF.
Normal communications
OFF
A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in
standby status.
ERR (red)
ON
OFF
A communications error has occurred.
Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
0 to 15 (16
points.) (yellow)
ON
OFF
The corresponding input is ON.
The corresponding input is OFF or the Unit is in standby
status.
Switch Settings
Rotary and DIP switches are used to enter settings.
DIP Switch
Rotary Switch
Hold/Clear outputs for
communications error
Node number setting
Note
Reserved
(Always OFF)
Communications mode setting
(SRT2 Series)
or Reserved (Always OFF)
(SRT1 Series)
1. Always turn OFF the Slave before changing DIP switch settings.
2. In the SRT1 Series, pin 3 must always be left OFF. Otherwise, the Unit may
not function correctly.
3. All pins marked “RSV” (reserved) must be left OFF. If any of them is ON,
the Unit may not function correctly.
Node Number Settings
The rotary switch specifies node numbers as hexadecimal numbers, as
shown below.
Node number
Note
Node number
0
Setting
(Hexadecimal)
0
8
Setting
(Hexadecimal)
8
1
2
1
2
9
10
9
A
3
4
3
4
11
12
B
C
5
6
5
6
13
14
D
E
7
7
15
F
1. Node numbers of 16-point Slaves are always treated as even numbers.
Even if an odd number is specified, the actual node number setting becomes the even number immediately preceding it.
2. The actual node number setting range depends on the type of PLC in
which the Master is mounted as well as the Master’s settings. Refer to 2-1
Communications Specifications for details.
175
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Communications Mode Settings (SRT2 Series Only)
The communications mode is set with pin 3, as shown below.
Pin 3
Communications mode
Communications distance
Communications baud rate
Communications cycle time
OFF
High-speed Com- 100 m max.
munications
Mode
750 kbps
0.5 or 0.8 ms
ON
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
500 m max.
The communications mode settings using pin 3 only apply to the SRT2-series
Slaves and cannot be used with the SRT1-series Slaves, which operate in
High-speed Communications Mode at all times.
Hold/Clear Outputs for Communications Error
Pin 4 is used to set the output data status when a communications error
occurs, as shown in the following table.
Pin 4 (HOLD)
OFF
ON
Setting
Clear output
Hold output
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-OD16T.
ST
24 V DC
0 to 7
Photocoupler
24 V DC
ST
Internal
circuitry
DC static
converter
(Insulated)
8 to 15
Photocoupler
ST: Step-down transformer
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-OD16T-1.
ST
24 V DC
DC static
converter
(Insulated)
Photocoupler
24 V DC
ST
Internal
circuitry
0 to 7
8 to 15
Photocoupler
ST: Step-down transformer
176
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Terminal Arrangement
and Wiring
Install the following M3 crimp terminals on the signal wires and connect to the
terminal block.
6.0mm max.
6.0mm max.
Note Tighten the terminal block screws to the specified tightening torque of
0.5 N⋅m.
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-OD16T.
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
CompoBus/S
communications
Solenoid,
valve
Solenoid,
valve
Solenoid,
valve
Solenoid,
valve
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-OD16T-1.
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
CompoBus/S
communications
Solenoid,
valve
Note
Solenoid,
valve
Solenoid,
valve
Solenoid,
valve
1. The V terminals V1 and V2 are not connected internally, and neither are
the G terminals G1 and G2 (I/O power supply). Care must be taken when
connecting them.
2. Do not allow the current between V1 and G1 or between V2 and G2 to exceed 4 A.
3. When using inductive loads such as solenoids and valves, either use loads
with built-in diodes that absorb the back-electromotive force or connect a
diode externally.
177
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
SRT@-OD16T/OD16T-1
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the SRT@-OD16T/OD16T-1.
All dimensions are in mm.
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
Note The circuit block can be removed by loosening the circuit block mounting
screw. Before removing the circuit block for replacement, check that all power
supplies, including I/O power supply, to the Unit are turned OFF.
178
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
5-1-5
SRT@-MD16T (-1) Remote Terminals with 8 Input and 8 Output
Transistors (3-tier Terminal Block)
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and I/O specifications for the SRT@MD16T (-1).
Ratings
Item
Specification
Models
SRT1-MD16T
SRT1-MD16T-1
SRT2-MD16T
SRT2-MD16T-1
I/O points
SRT@-MD16T: 8 inputs, 8 outputs
SRT@-MD16T-1: 8 inputs, 8 outputs
Communications mode
SRT1-MD16T (-1): High-speed Communications Mode
SRT2-MD16T (-1): High-speed Communications Mode
and Long-distance Communications
Mode
3-tier terminal block (with common I/O terminal for each I/
O point)
Terminals
Power supply type
Communications power
supply voltage
I/O power supply voltage
Multiple power supplies
14 to 26.4 V DC
(Power can be supplied from the communications cable)
Current consumption
(See note.)
Noise immunity
Communications power: 50 mA max. at 24 V DC
Vibration resistance
10 to 150 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude or 70 m/s2
Shock resistance
Malfunction: 200 m/s2
500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
Dielectric strength
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC +10%/–15%)
±1.5 kVp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise
time of 1 ns (tested with impulse noise simulator)
Ambient temperature
Operating: –10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –20 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity
Operating environment
Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
Mounting method
Mounting strength
M4 screws or 35-mm DIN track mounting
100 N in each direction
Terminal strength
Pulling: 100 N
Tightening: 0.3 to 0.5 N • m
Node number settings
The node number is set with a rotary switch. (Set the
node number before turning ON the Slave.)
Weight
Approx. 300 g
Note The current consumption is the value with all 16 points turned ON excluding
the current consumption of the external sensor connected to the input Remote
Terminal and the current consumption of the load connected to the output
Remote Terminal.
179
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Input Specifications
Item
Input current
ON delay time
Specification
6 mA max./point at 24 V DC
3 mA min./point at 17 V DC
1.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
ON voltage
1.5 ms max.
SRT@-MD16T: 15 V DC min. (between each input terminal and V)
SRT@-MD16T-1: 15 V DC min. (between each input terminal and G)
OFF voltage
OFF current
SRT@-MD16T: 5 V DC max. (between each terminal and
V)
SRT@-MD16T-1: 5 V DC max. (between each terminal
and G)
1 mA max. at 24 V DC
Insulation method
Input indicators
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
Output Specifications
Item
180
Specification
Output current
Residual voltage
0.5 A/point
1.2 V max.
(SRT@-MD16T: 0.5 A DC, between each output terminal
and G)
(SRT@-MD16T-1: 0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and V)
Leakage current
ON delay time
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
1.5 ms max.
Insulation method
Input indicators
Photocoupler
LED (yellow)
Remote Terminals
Section 5-1
Slave Components
The following diagram shows the main components of the SRT@-MD16T (-@)
Remote Terminal. The functions of these components are described below.
Rotary Switch
Sets node number.
DIP Switch
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 and 2: Reserved (Always OFF)
Pin 3: Communications mode setting (SRT2 Series)
or Reserved (Always OFF) (SRT1 Series)
Pin 4: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
CompoBus/S Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave
and communications.
I/O Indicators
Indicate I/O status of each contact.
The left half is lit when the input is ON, the
right half is lit when the output is ON.
Circuit Block Mounting
Screw
Used to remove the circuit block
when replacing it.
Terminal Block
The left half is the input terminal block
and is used to connect I/O power
supply, and input devices such as
switches and sensors.
The right half is the output terminal
Mounting Screw Holes
DIN Track Mounting Hooks
block and is used to connect I/O
Used when screwing the
Used when mounting
power supply, and output devices
Unit to a control panel.
the Unit to a DIN track.
such as relays and indicators.
Terminal Block
Used to connect CompoBus/S communications cables
and communications power supply.
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
Status
Meaning
PWR (green)
ON
OFF
The communications power supply is ON.
The communications power supply is OFF.
COMM (yellow)
ON
OFF
ON
Normal communications
A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in
standby status.
A communications error has occurred.
OFF
ON
Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
The corresponding input is ON.
ERR (red)
0 to 7 (8 inputs)
0 to 7 (8 outputs) OFF
(yellow)
The corresponding input is OFF or the Unit is in standby
status.
181
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Switch Settings
Rotary and DIP switches are used to enter settings.
Rotary Switch
DIP Switch
Node number setting
Note
Reserved
(Always OFF)
Hold/Clear outputs for
communications error
Communications mode
setting (SRT2 Series)
or
Reserved (Always OFF)
(SRT1 Series)
1. Always turn the Slave OFF before changing DIP switch settings.
2. In the SRT1 Series, pin 3 must always be left OFF. Otherwise, the Unit may
not function correctly.
3. All pins marked “RSV” (reserved) must be left OFF. If any of them is ON,
the Unit may not function correctly.
Node Number Settings
The rotary switch specifies node numbers as hexadecimal numbers, as
shown below.
Note
Node number
Setting
(Hexadecimal)
Node number
Setting
(Hexadecimal)
0
1
0
1
8
9
8
9
2
3
2
3
10
11
A
B
4
5
4
5
12
13
C
D
6
7
6
7
14
15
E
F
1. A 16-point I/O Slave is handled as a single 8-point Input Slave and a single
8-point Output Slave that possess the same node number.
2. The actual node number setting range depends on the type of PLC in
which the Master is mounted as well as the Master’s settings. Refer to 2-1
Communications Specifications for details.
Communications Mode Settings (SRT2 Series Only)
The communications mode is set with pin 3, as shown below.
Pin 3
Communications mode
Communications distance
Communications baud rate
Communications cycle time
OFF
High-speed Com- 100 m max.
munications
Mode
750 kbps
0.5 or 0.8 ms
ON
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
500 m max.
The communications mode settings using pin 3 only apply to the SRT2 Series
and cannot be used with the SRT1 Series, which operate in High-speed Communications Mode at all times.
182
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Hold/Clear Outputs for Communications Error
Pin 4 is used to set the output data status when a communications error
occurs, as shown in the following table.
Pin 4 (HOLD)
OFF
Setting
Clear output
ON
Hold output
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-MD16T.
24 V DC
DC static
converter
(Insulated)
Photocoupler
24 V DC
ST
Internal
circuitry
0 to 7
Photocoupler
0 to 7
ST: Step-down transformer
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-MD16T-1.
24 V DC
DC static
converter
(Insulated)
Photocoupler
Internal
circuitry
0 to 7
ST
24 V DC
0 to 7
Photocoupler
ST: Step-down transformer
Terminal Arrangement
and Wiring
Install the following M3 crimp terminals on the signal wires and connect to the
terminal block, as shown in the following diagram.
6.0mm max.
6.0mm max.
Note Tighten the terminal block screws to the specified tightening torque of
0.5 N⋅m.
183
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-MD16T.
Black
Blue
Brown
CompoBus/S
communications
Blue
Brown
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
2-wired sensor NPN output 3-wired
sensor (photoelectric
(limit switch)
sensor or proximity
sensor)
Solenoid,
valve
Solenoid,
valve
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-MD16T-1.
Black
Brown
Blue
Blue
CompoBus/S
communications
Brown
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
2-wired sensor PNP output 3-wired
sensor (photoelectric
(limit switch)
sensor or proximity
sensor)
Note
Solenoid,
valve
Solenoid,
valve
1. The V terminals V1 and V2 are not connected internally, and neither are
the G terminals G1 and G2 (I/O power supply). Care must be taken when
connecting them.
2. When inductive loads such as solenoids and valves are used, either use
loads with built-in diodes that absorb the back-electromotive force or connect a diode externally.
184
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
SRT@-MD16T/MD16T-1
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the SRT@-MD16T/MD16T-1.
All dimensions are in mm.
50
(54)
180
58
(83)
40±0.2
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
170±0.2
Note The circuit block can be removed by loosening the circuit block mounting
screw. Before removing the circuit block for replacement, check that all power
supplies, including I/O power supply, to the Unit are turned OFF.
5-1-6
SRT@-RO@@@ Remote Terminals with Relay/Power MOS FETs
Specifications
The following tables and graphs show the ratings and output specifications for
the SRT@-RO@@@.
Ratings
Item
Specification
Models
SRT1-ROC08
SRT1-ROF08
SRT1-ROC16
SRT1-ROF16
SRT2-ROC08
SRT2-ROF08
SRT2-ROC16
SRT2-ROF16
Output points
SRT@-ROC08: 8 relay outputs
SRT@-ROF08: 8 power MOS FET outputs
SRT@-ROC16: 16 relay outputs
SRT@-ROF16: 16 power MOS FET outputs
(The 16-output Remote Terminals cannot be used with a
CQM1-SRM21 Master Unit that is in 4-point mode.)
185
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Item
Communications mode
Power supply type
Specification
SRT1-RO@@@: High-speed Communications Mode
SRT2-RO@@@: High-speed Communications Mode or
Long-distance Communications Mode
Local power supply
Communications power
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC +10%/–15%)
supply voltage (including I/ (Power cannot be supplied from the communications
O power supply)
cable)
Current consumption
Internal circuits: 350 mA max. at 24 V DC
(Including relay coil current)
Noise immunity
±1.5 kVp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise
time of 1 ns (via impulse noise simulator)
3 A max.
Common terminal current
(COM 0, 1, and 2 through
7)
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
Malfunction: 100 m/s2
500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
2,000 V AC (between all output terminals and the power
supply or between all communications terminals and all
different-polarity contacts)
20 MΩ min. at 250 V DC
(at the same locations as dielectric strength specs.)
Ambient temperature
Operating: 0 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –20 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity
Operating: 35% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Operating environment
Mounting method
No corrosive gases
M4 screws or 35-mm DIN track mounting
Mounting strength
50 N
Track direction: 10 N • m
Pulling: 50 N
Tightening: 0.6 to 1.18 N • m
The node number is set on a DIP switch. (Set the node
number before turning ON the Slave.)
SRT@-ROC08: 145 g max.
SRT@-ROF08: 145 g max.
SRT@-ROC16: 240 g max.
SRT@-ROF16: 240 g max.
Terminal strength
Node number settings
Weight
186
10 to 55 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Relay Output Specifications (SRT@-ROC08, SRT@-ROC16)
Item
Applicable relay
Specification
G6D-1A (one for each output point)
Rated load
Rated carry current
3 A at 250 V AC/3 A at 30 V DC (resistive loads)
3A
Max. contact voltage
Max. contact current
250 V AC/30 V DC
3A
Max. switching capacity
Min. permissible load
730 VA (AC), 90 W (DC)
10 mA at 5 V DC
This value fulfills the P reference value of opening/
closing at a rate of 120 times per min.
Electrical life expectancy
100,000 operations min. (3 A at 250 V AC/3 A at 30 V
DC, resistive loads at 1800 operations/hour)
300,000 operations min. (2 A at 250 V AC/2 A at 30 V
DC, resistive loads at 1800 operations/hour)
20,000,000 operations min.
(at 18,000 operations/hour)
Mechanical life expectancy
Power MOS FET Relay Output Specifications (SRT@-ROF08, SRT@ROF16)
Item
Specification
Applicable relay
Load voltage
G3DZ-2R6PL (one for each output point)
3 to 264 V AC/3 to 125 V DC
Load current
Inrush current
100 µA to 0.3 A
6 A max. (10 ms)
Note Refer to the PCB Relays Catalog (X33) for the ratings of the G6D and G3DZ.
Reference Data
These graphs are based on actual measured values sampled from the production line. Treat the data as reference values because there is some variation in relay characteristics.
Life Expectancy
250 V AC/30 V DC
resistive load
250 V AC/30 V DC
inductive load
(cosφ = 0.4, L/R = 7 ms)
Switching current (A)
Max. Switching Capacity
Switching current (A)
Life expectancy (Operations × 100,000)
The following graphs show the characteristics for G6D-1A Relays installed in
SRT1-ROC08 and SRT1-ROC16 Relay-mounted Remote Terminals.
DC resistive load
DC inductive load
AC resistive load
AC inductive load
(cosφ = 0.4)
Switching voltage (V)
187
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
The following graphs show the characteristics for G3DZ-2R6PL Relays
installed in SRT1-ROF08 and SRT1-ROF16 Relay-mounted Remote Terminals.
Inrush Current Limit
Non-repetitive (Keep the inrush
current to half the rated value if it
occurs repetitively.)
Load Current (A)
Inrush Current (A. peak)
Load Current vs. Ambient Temperature
Characteristics
Ambient Temperature (°C)
Slave Components
Energizing Time (ms)
The following diagram shows the main components of the Relay-mounted
Remote Terminals. The functions of these components are described below.
CompoBus/S Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave and communications.
Mounting Screw Holes
Used when screwing the Unit to a control panel.
Power Relays or Power MOS FET Relays
These are the power relays (SRT(-ROC08 and
SRT(-ROC16) or power MOS FET relays
(SRT(-ROF08 and SRT(-ROF16). There are 8
in the 8-output Relay-mounted Remote Terminals and 16 in the 16-output Relay-mounted
Remote Terminals. The relays can be replaced.
Terminal Block
Connect the CompoBus/S communications cable,
communications power supply (including the power
supply for the outputs), and output devices such as
lamps and solenoids to the terminal block.
DIN Track Mounting Hook
Used when mounting the Unit to a DIN track.
Relay Removal Tool
Use this tool when removing power relays or power MOS FET
relays. Remove the tool from the Relay-mounted Remote Terminal by pulling it away from the Unit.
DIP Switch
Open the cover to reveal the DIP switch. The DIP
switch's pins have the following functions:
Pin 1: Hold/clear outputs for communications error
Pin 2: Communications setting (SRT2 Series)
or Reserved (Always OFF) (SRT1 Series)
Pins 3 to 6: Node number setting
188
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
PWR (green)
Status
Meaning
ON
The communications power supply is ON.
COMM (yellow)
OFF
ON
The communications power supply is OFF.
Normal communications
OFF
A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in
standby status.
ON
OFF
A communications error has occurred.
Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
The corresponding output is ON.
ERR (red)
0 to 7 (8 outputs)
ON
0 to 15 (16 outputs) OFF
(yellow)
The corresponding output is OFF or the Unit is in
standby status.
DIP Switch
The DIP switch is located on the left side of the Relay-mounted Remote Terminal, under the cover. Always turn OFF the Slave before changing DIP
switch settings.
Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Communications setting (SRT2 Series) or
Reserved (Always OFF) (SRT1 Series)
Node number setting
Note
1. Always turn OFF the Slave before changing DIP switch settings.
2. In the SRT1 Series, pin 2 must always be left OFF. Otherwise, the Unit may
not function correctly.
Hold/Clear Outputs for Communications Error
Pin 1 is used to set the output data status when a communications error
occurs, as shown in the following table.
Pin 1 (HOLD)
OFF
Output setting
Clear output status.
ON
Maintain output status.
Communications Mode Setting (SRT2 Series Only)
The following communications modes are set with pin 2.
Pin 2
OFF
ON
CommunicaCommunications mode
tions distance
High-speed Com- 100 m max.
munications
Mode
Communications baud rate
750 kbps
Communications cycle time
0.5 or 0.8 ms
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
500 m max.
The communications mode settings using pin 2 only apply to the SRT2-series
Slaves and cannot be used with the SRT1-series Slaves, which operate in
High-speed Communications Mode at all times.
189
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Note Make sure that the communications mode of the Slave is the same as that of
the Master Unit. If the communications modes are not the same, normal communications with the Master Unit will not be possible. The operating status of
the Slave can be verified with LED indicators. Refer to 6-5-1 Indicators.
Node Number Settings
Set the node number with pins 3 through 6, as shown in the following table.
Node number
0
Pin 3
(8)
OFF
Pin 4
(4)
OFF
Pin 5
(2)
OFF
Pin 6
(1)
OFF
1
2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
3
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
5
6
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
7
8
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
9
10
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
11
12
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
13
14
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
15
ON
ON
ON
ON
Note The actual node number setting range depends on the type of PLC in which
the Master is mounted as well as the Master’s settings. Refer to 2-1 Communications Specifications for details.
190
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for all of the Relay/Power
MOS FET Relay-mounted Remote Terminals (SRT@-ROC08/ROC16 and
SRT@-ROF08/ROF16).
BS+
BS−
Later blocks
0
(4)
(8) (12)
Internal
circuitry
COM0 (COM2)(COM4)(COM6)
Relay driver circuit
BD H
BD L
Relay driver
circuit
1
Relay driver
circuit
2
(6) (10 ) (14)
Relay driver
circuit
3
(7) (11 ) (15 )
(5)
(9) (13)
COM1 (COM3)(COM5)(COM7)
16-output Units only
Install the following M3 crimp terminals on the signal wires and connect to the
terminal block.
6.0mm max.
6.0mm max.
Note Tighten the terminal block screws to the specified tightening torque of
0.5 N⋅m.
Load
Load
Load
Load
CompoBus/S
communications
Load
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
(including I/O
power supply)
Load
Load
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the 8output Relay-mounted Remote Terminals (SRT@-ROC08 and SRT@-ROF08).
Load
Terminal Arrangement
and Wiring
Internal connection
Relay or Power MOS FET Relay
191
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
Note The BS+ and BS− terminals of the communications power supply (including
the I/O power supply) cannot be supplied from the communications cable, so
they must be supplied separately.
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the 16output Relay-mounted Remote Terminals (SRT@-ROC16 and SRT@-ROF16).
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
CompoBus/S
communications
Load
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
(including I/O
power supply)
Load
CompoBus/S
Internal connection
Relay or Power
MOS FET
Relay
Note
1. There are two each of the COM2 and COM3 terminals, and two each of
the COM4 and COM5 terminals. When power is supplied to all the terminals at once, wiring the COM terminals can be simplified by short-circuiting
the central COM terminals.
2. The maximum carry current for each terminal from COM0 to COM7 is 3 A.
When power is supplied to all the terminals at once, the total carry current
for the COM terminals connected together must not exceed 3 A.
3. The BS+ and BS− terminals of the communications power supply (including the I/O power supply) cannot be supplied from the communications cable, so they must be supplied separately.
192
Section 5-1
Remote Terminals
SRT@-ROC08/ROF08
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the 8-output Relay-mounted
Remote Terminals (SRT@-ROC08 and SRT@-ROF08). All dimensions are in
mm.
(87)
(54)
51
51
(25)
51
(65)
100
50
Mounting Holes
40±0.2
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
80±0.2
193
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the 16-output Relay-mounted
Remote Terminals (SRT@-ROC16 and SRT@-ROF16). All dimensions are in
mm.
51
SRT@-ROC16/ROF16
Dimensions
Mounting Holes
40±0.2
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
135±0.2
5-2
5-2-1
Connector Terminals
SRT2-VID@@@@ (-1) Connector Terminals with 8 Input or 16
Output Transistors
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and input specifications for the SRT2VID@@@@(-1).
Ratings
Item
194
Specification
Models
SRT2-VID08S
SRT2-VID08S-1
SRT2-VID16ML
SRT2-VID16ML-1
Input points/Connection type
SRT2-VID08S:
8 points (NPN)/
Cable connector input
SRT2-VID08S-1: 8 points (PNP)/
Cable connector input
SRT2-VID16ML: 16 points (NPN)/
MIL connector input
SRT2-VID16ML-1: 16 points (PNP)/
MIL connector input
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Item
Connection Input
Communications
power
I/O power
Power supply type
Specification
SRT2-VID08S (-1):
By XS8A-0441 Connector or XS8A-0442 Connector (both sold separately)
SRT2-VID16ML (-1):
By XG4M-2030-T MIL Connector (sold separately), or G79-050C, G79-025C, G79-150C and
G79-125C MIL-compatible Cables (all sold separately)
By communications connector (included as standard)
Multiple power supplies
Communications power supply
voltage
14 to 26.4 V DC
(Power can be supplied from the communications
cable)
I/O power supply voltage
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC +10%/–15%)
I/O power supply current
Cable connector: 2.4 A max.
MIL connector: 2.0 A max.
Communications power: 50 mA max. at 24 V DC
Current consumption
(See note.)
Noise immunity
±1.5 kVp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a
rise time of 1 ns (tested with impulse noise simulator)
Vibration resistance
10 to 150 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude or 70 m/s2
Shock resistance
200 m/s2
500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
Dielectric strength
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Operating: –10 to 55°C
(with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –25 to 65°C
(with no icing or condensation)
Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Operating environment
Standard accessory
No corrosive gases
1 communications connector
Note: Mounting Brackets A (SRT2-ATT01) and B
(SRT2-ATT02) are sold separately.
Mounting strength
Pulling: 100 N in each direction.
(When mounted with Mounting Bracket B: 40 N)
Pulling: As stated below.
Communications connector: 100 N
Cable connector: 40 N
MIL connector: 100 N
Tightening: 0.25 N • m (for communications connector)
Terminal strength
Node number settings
Weight
The node number is set on a DIP switch. (Set the
node number before turning ON the Slave.)
Approx. 75 g
Note This is the current consumption when all the maximum simultaneous input
points are ON, excluding the current consumption of external sensors.
195
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Input Specifications
Item
Input current
ON delay time
VID08S/VID08S-1
6 mA max./point at 24 V DC
3 mA min./point at 17 V DC
1.5 ms max.
VID16ML/VID16ML-1
OFF delay time
ON voltage
1.5 ms max.
VID08S/VID16ML:
15 V DC min. (between each input terminal and V)
VID08S-1/VID16ML-1:
15 V DC min. (between each input terminal and G)
OFF voltage
VID08S/VID16ML:
5 V DC max. (between each input terminal and V)
VID08S-1/VID16ML-1:
5 V DC max. (between each input terminal and G)
1 mA max.
OFF current
Insulation method Photocoupler
Max. simulta8 points
neous input points
Number of circuits 8 points/single common circuit
12 points
16 points/single common circuit
Simultaneous Input Points and Installation Spacing
For Connector Terminals with transistor inputs, the ambient operating temperature places a limit on the maximum number of points that can be turned ON
simultaneously. In addition, when installing Connector Terminals, care must
be taken to provide adequate space between them to prevent overheating.
As shown in the graphs below, the spacing of Connector Terminals varies
according to the Connector Terminal type, the ambient operating temperature,
and the number of simultaneous input points. Make the distance between
Connector Terminals greater than that shown in the graphs.
For example, if SRT2-VID16ML Connector Terminals are to be mounted vertically where the ambient operating temperature will be 55°C and the maximum
number of simultaneous input points will be 8, the spacing of Connector Terminals should be at least 10 mm.
Ambient operating temperature (°C)
Ambient operating temperature (°C)
8 points
ON simultaneously
Ambient operating temperature (°C)
12 points ON
8 points ON
simultaneously simultaneously
Ambient operating temperature (°C)
Space between Units L (mm)
4 points
ON simultaneously
12 points ON
simultaneously
8 points ON
simultaneously
4 points
ON simultaneously
Ambient operating temperature (°C)
VID16ML Input Units
mounted horizontally
Space between Units L (mm)
12 points ON
simultaneously
8 points ON
simultaneously
Ambient operating temperature (°C)
VID16ML Input Units
mounted facing upward
Space between Units L (mm)
Space between Units L (mm)
VID16ML Input Units
mounted vertically
196
8 points ON
simultaneously
VID08S Input Units
mounted facing downward
VID16ML Input Units
mounted facing downward
8 points ON
simultaneously
4 points
ON simultaneously
Ambient operating temperature (°C)
Space between Units L (mm)
8 points ON
simultaneously
VID08S Input Units
mounted horizontally
Space between Units L (mm)
VID08S Input Units
mounted facing upward
Space between Units L (mm)
Space between Units L (mm)
VID08S Input Units
mounted vertically
12 points ON
8 points ON
simultaneously simultaneously
4 points
ON simultaneously
Ambient operating temperature (°C)
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Slave Components
The following diagram shows the main components of the SRT2-VID@@@@ (@) Connector Terminals with transistor inputs. The functions of these components are described below.
Models with Sensor Connectors
SRT2-VID08S/VID08S-1
Communications Connector
Used to connect CompoBus/S communications data (BD H, BD L), communications
power supply, and I/O power supply ( see page 256). One compatible connector is provided as standard.
Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave and communications, and
input status of each contact. (Lit when the input is ON.)
DIP Switch
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 to 4: Node number setting
Pins 5 and 6: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin7: Communications mode setting
Pin 8: Reserved (Always OFF.)
DIN Track Mounting Hook
Input Connector (Cable Connector)
Connect 8 inputs with cable connector (see page 67).
2
) and the
The XS8A-0441 Cable Connector (compatible wire size: 0.3 to 0.5 mm
2
XS8A-0442 Cable Connector (compatible wire size: 0.14 to 0.2 mm ) are sold separately.
197
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Models with MIL Connectors
SRT2-VID16ML/VID16ML-1
Communications Connector
Used to connect CompoBus/S communications data (BD H, BD L), communications power
supply and I/O power supply (see page 256).
One compatible connector is provided as standard.
Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave and communications, and
input status of each contact. (Lit when the input is ON.)
DIP Switch
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 to 4: Node number setting
Pins 5 and 6: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin7: Communications mode setting
Pin 8: Reserved (Always OFF.)
View from arrow (A) (base)
DIN Track Mounting Hook
Input Connector (MIL Connector)
Connect 16 inputs with MIL Connector (see page 258).
XG4M-2030-T MIL Connector and compatible cable are sold separately.
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
Status
Meaning
PWR (green)
ON
OFF
The communications power supply is ON.
The communications power supply is OFF.
COMM (yellow)
ON
OFF
ERR (red)
ON
Normal communications
A communications error has occurred or the Unit is
in standby status.
A communications error has occurred.
0 to 7 (8 inputs)
0 to 15 (16 inputs)
OFF
Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
ON
OFF
The corresponding input is ON.
The corresponding input is OFF or the Unit is in
standby status.
DIP Switch
The DIP switch is located on the base of the Connector Terminal.
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Communications mode setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Node number setting
Note Always turn OFF the Slave before changing DIP switch settings.
198
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Node Number Settings
Set the node number with pins 1 through 4, as shown in the following table.
Node number
Pin 4
(8)
Pin 3
(4)
Pin 2
(2)
Pin 1
(1)
0
1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
2
3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
4
5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
6
7
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
8
9
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
10
11
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
12
13
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
14
15
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Communications Mode Settings
The following communications modes are set with pin 7 as shown below.
Pin 7
OFF
ON
Communications mode
Communications distance
High-speed Com- 100 m max.
munications
Mode
500 m max.
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
Communications baud rate
Communications cycle time
750 kbps
0.5 or 0.8 ms
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
Note Make sure that the communications mode of the Slave is the same as that of
the Master Unit. If the communications are not the same, normal communications with the Master Unit will not be possible. The operating status of the
Slave can be verified with LED indicators. Refer to 6-5-1 Indicators for details.
199
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-VID08S.
V
G
Photocoupler
BS +
G
V
IN
IN
Internal
circuitry
BS –
BD H
Photocoupler
G
V
IN
IN
BD L
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-VID08S-1.
V
G
Photocoupler
BS –
Internal
circuitry
BS +
G
V
IN
IN
Photocoupler
BD H
BD L
200
G
V
IN
IN
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-VID16ML.
V
V
V
G
G
G
Photocoupler
BS –
Internal
circuitry
BS +
BD H
IN
Photocoupler
BD L
IN
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-VID16ML-1
V
V
V
G
G
G
Photocoupler
BS –
BD H
BD L
IN
Internal
circuitry
BS +
Photocoupler
IN
201
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Wiring
• Communications Connector Pin Arrangement
Communications
power supply
24 V DC
I/O power supply
24 V DC
CompoBus/S communications
The communications connector (provided as standard) can be ordered as the
following product:
BL3.5/6F (product no. 160668) manufactured by Weidmuller Co., Ltd.
Note
1. OMRON recommends the following products manufactured by Weidmuller
Co., Ltd. for use as crimp terminals.
Sleeve (product no.046290)
Cable
Crimp
terminal
For inserting 2 wires
(product no. 901851)
Crimp
terminal
Cable
Insert cable then crimp
2. The following special tool is available:
Crimper PZ1.5 (product no. 900599) manufactured by Weidmuller Co., Ltd.
• Cable Connector Pin Arrangement (SRT2-VID08S and SRT2-VID08S1)
Cable connector
(Sold separately)
Cable Connector
Model
Compatible cable conductor size
XS8A-0441 0.3 to 0.5 mm2
XS8A-0442 0.14 to 0.2 mm2
Note The XS8A-0441 and XS8A-0442 Connectors are not provided with the Unit.
The Connectors must be ordered separately.
202
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
• MIL Connector Pin Arrangement (SRT2-VID16ML and SRT2VID16ML-1)
Function
Function
Name
MIL connector
Model
XG4M-2030-T
MIL
socket
Reinforcing clip
▲Mark
Connector Pin No.
Note The XG4M-2030-T MIL Connector is not provided as standard and must be
ordered separately.
• Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Method
SRT2-VID08S
CompoBus/S
communications
SRT2-VID08S-1
CompoBus/S
communications
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
CompoBus/S
I/O power
communications supply
power supply
I/O power
supply
Black (White)
Blue (Black)
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
2-wired sensor
Note
Sensor
Brown (Red)
3-wired sensor
Sensor
Terminal numbers
Brown (Red)
Black (White)
Blue (Black)
3-wired sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Terminal numbers
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
2-wired sensor
1. The V terminals are all connected internally, as are the G terminals. When
providing I/O power from a communications connector, power can be provided to sensors from the V and G terminals of the corresponding cable
connector.
203
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
2. In accordance with the changes in the standards for photoelectric sensors
and proximity sensors, wire colors have been changed. Colors in parentheses are the old wire colors.
SRT2-VID16ML
CompoBus/S
communications
SRT2-VID16ML-1
CompoBus/S
communications
CompoBus/S
I/O power
communications supply
power supply
Brown (Red)
Sensor
Brown (Red)
Black (White)
Black (White)
Blue (Black)
Blue (Black)
3-wire sensor
3-wire sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
CompoBus/S
I/O power
communications supply
power supply
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
Brown (White)
Blue (Black)
2-wire sensor
2-wire sensor
▲Mark
▲Mark
Note
1. The V terminals are all connected internally, as are the G terminals. When
providing I/O power from a communications connector, power can be provided to sensors from the V and G terminals of the MIL Connector.
2. In accordance with the changes in the standards for photoelectric sensors
and proximity sensors, wire colors have been changed. Colors in parentheses are the old wire colors.
Compatible External Input Devices and Cables
Models with Sensor Connectors (SRT2-VID08S-1)
The XS8A-0441 and XS8A-0442 Connectors (sold separately) are used to
connect to external input devices. Use the following flowchart to check the
compatibility of external input devices and cables. Refer to 3-4-3 Cable Connector Wiring and Assembly for details on the assembly, wiring, and installation of cable connectors.
Locking Lever
204
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Is the input power supply
voltage 20.4 to 26.4 V DC?
No
Incompatible
Yes
Do input specifications agree?
No
Incompatible
Yes
What is the size of the
conductors in the cable?
0.14 to 0.2 mm2
0.3 to 0.5 mm2
Compatible
Use an XS8A-0441 Connector to
connect the sensor.
Note
Compatible
Use an XS8A-0442 Connector to
connect the sensor.
Other
Incompatible
1. The size of the sensor cable conductor is calculated as below.
Conductor description of sensor cable:
φ Outside diameter of cable (number of wires/wire diameter)
conductor size (mm2)
= (wire diameter/2)2 × π × number of wires
Example: E3S-A Sensor
φ 4 (18/0.12) → Conductor size (mm2)
= (0.12/2)2 × 3.14 × 18 = 0.20
Since the conductor size works out to be 0.2 mm2, use XS8A-0442 Connector.
2. The XS8A-0441 and XS8A-0442 Connectors are not provided with the
Unit. The Connectors must be ordered separately.
Models with MIL Connectors (SRT2-VID16ML-1)
The MIL Connector can be connected to external devices using either of the
following methods.
1,2,3...
1. Using an XG4A-2030-T MIL Connector (sold separately) to Assemble Your
Own Cable
For details, refer to MIL Connector Wiring and Assembly on page 258.
Insert with protrusion
facing right.
205
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
2. Connecting with OMRON Products Using an MIL-compatible Cable Manufactured by OMRON
MIL-compatible cable
Straight power supply cable
G79-O50C (L = 500 mm)
G79-O25C (L = 250 mm)
Wiring diagram
Cross power supply cable
G79-I50C (L = 500 mm)
G79-I25C (L = 250 mm)
Wiring diagram
Compatible OMRON Products Used with MIL Connectors
Slave model
number
SRT2-VID16ML
SRT2-VID16ML-1
SRT2-VOD16ML
Connecting cable
G79-150C (50 cm)
G79-125C (25 cm)
G79-050C (50 cm)
G79-025C (25 cm)
G79-050C (50 cm)
G79-025C (25 cm)
G79-050C (50 cm)
G79-025C (25 cm)
Compatible product
G7TC-IA16/ID16
XW2D-20G6
XW2B-20G5/20G4
XW2D-20G6
XW2B-20G5/20G4
G7TC-OC16/08
G70D Series
G70R-SOC08
G70A-ZOC16-3 and Relays
XW2D-20G6
SRT2-VOD16ML-1
G79-I50C (50 cm)
G79-I25C (25 cm)
G79-050C (50 cm)
G79-025C (25 cm)
XW2B-20G5/20G4
G7TC-OC16-1
G70D-SOC16-1/FOM16-1
G70A-ZOC16-4 and Relays
XW2D-20G6
XW2B-20G5/20G4
Note MIL-compatible cables are not provided as standard and must be ordered
separately.
206
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Dimensions
• Models with Sensor Connectors
All dimensions are in mm.
(70)
• Models with MIL Connector
All dimensions are in mm.
(77)
Wiring Dimensions
• Models with Sensor Connector
All dimensions are in mm.
(85)
207
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
• Models with MIL Connector
All dimensions are in mm.
(82)
Mounting Methods
Connector Terminals can be mounted using any of methods 1 to 4 below.
1,2,3...
1. Mounting Directly to DIN Track (Mounting Brackets Not Required)
DIN Track
Connector side
facing front
a) Hook over the top of the DIN Track, then press the Connector Terminal
against the DIN Track.
a. Hook over top of DIN Track.
DIN Track
b. The DIN Track Mounting Hook will engage automatically when
the Connector Terminal is pressed against the DIN Track.
208
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
b) Secure both sides of the Connector Terminal with two end plates.
End Plates
Hook the bottom, then the top of
the end plate over the track, and
fasten with a screw.
2. Mounting on DIN Track with Connector Side Facing Upward (Mounting
Brackets A and B Required)
Connector
side up
a) Secure Mounting Bracket A on the DIN Track with two Phillips screws.
b. Hitch top hooks
onto DIN Track.
DIN Track
c. Secure Mounting Bracket A
on DIN Track with two
Phillips screws. These
screws are provided with
Mounting Bracket A.
a. Hitch bottom hooks
onto DIN Track.
Mounting Bracket A
b) Press the Connector Terminal down into Mounting Bracket A.
b. Pressing the Connector
Terminal downward will
cause the DIN Track
mounting hooks to engage
automatically.
DIN Track
a. Hook the Connector
Terminal onto the inner
ridge.
Mounting Bracket A
209
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
3. Mounting Perpendicularly to Wall or Panel (Mounting Bracket B Required)
Wall or Panel Face
Perpendicular
to wall or panel
Mounting Bracket B
a) Attach Mounting Bracket B to the wall or panel with two Phillips screws.
b) Using Mounting Bracket B in place of the DIN Track, attach the Connector Terminal to it as you would to the DIN Track directly.
4. Mounting Flat against Wall or Panel (Mounting Bracket B Required)
Wall or Panel Face
Flat against wall or panel
(Attached to side of
Connector Terminal.)
Mounting Bracket B
210
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
a) Attach Mounting Bracket B perpendicularly to the wall or panel with
two Phillips screws.
b) Using Mounting Bracket B in place of the DIN Track, attach the Connector Terminal to it as you would to the DIN Track directly.
Mounting Bracket
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions of Mounting Brackets A and B.
Mounting Bracket A (SRT2-ATT01)
53.2
Mounting Bracket B (SRT2-ATT02)
Mounting dimensions
Two, 3.2 dia. or M3 holes
(Unit: mm)
211
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Mounting Methods
All dimensions are in mm.
1. Mounting Directly to DIN Track
2. Mounting on DIN Track with Connector Side Facing Upward
Mounting
Bracket A
DIN Track
DIN Track
(35)
3. Mounting Perpendicular to Wall or Panel
(120)
4. Mounting Flat against Wall or Panel
Mounting
Bracket B
Mounting
Bracket B
Distance from Duct
(Leave space of at least 20 mm above and below the Connector Terminal.)
Duct
Duct
212
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
5-2-2
SRT2-VOD@@@@ (-1) Connector Terminals with 8 or 16 Transistor
Outputs
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and output specifications for the SRT2VOD@@@@ (-1).
Ratings
Item
Specification
Models
SRT2-VOD08S
SRT2-VOD08S-1
SRT2-VOD16ML
SRT2-VOD16ML-1
Output points/Connection type
SRT2-VOD08S:
Connection
8 points (NPN)/Cable connector output
SRT2-VOD08S-1: 8 points (PNP)/Cable connector output
SRT2-VOD16ML: 16 points (NPN)/MIL connector output
SRT2-VOD16ML-1: 16 points (PNP)/MIL connector output
Output
SRT2-VOD08S (-1):
By XS8A-0441 or XS8A-0442 Connector (both sold
separately)
SRT2-VID16ML (-1):
By XG4M-2030-T MIL Connector (sold separately), or
G79-050C, G79-025C, G79-150C and G79-125C MILcompatible Cables (all sold separately)
Communi- By communications connector (included as standard)
cations
power
I/O power
Power supply type
Communications power
supply voltage
I/O power supply voltage
Multiple power supplies
14 to 26.4 V DC
(Power can be supplied from the communications cable)
I/O power supply current
Cable connector: 2.4 A max.
MIL connector: 2.0 A max.
Communications power: 50 mA max. at 24 V DC
Current consumption
(See note.)
Noise immunity
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC +10%/–15%)
±1.5 kVp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise
time of 1 ns (tested with impulse noise simulator)
Vibration resistance
10 to 150 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude or 70 m/s2
Shock resistance
200 m/s2
Dielectric strength
Ambient temperature
500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
Operating: –10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –25 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
Ambient humidity
Operating environment
Standard accessory
1 communications connector
Note:Mounting Brackets A (SRT2-ATT01) and B (SRT2ATT02) are sold separately.
Mounting strength
Pulling: 100 N in each direction.
(When mounted with Mounting Bracket B: 40 N)
213
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Item
Terminal strength
Specification
Pulling: As stated below
Communications connector: 100 N
Cable connector: 40 N
MIL Connector: 100 N
Tightening: 0.25 N • m (for communications connector)
Node number settings
The node number is set on a DIP switch. (Set the node
number before turning ON the Slave.)
Weight
Approx. 75 g
Note This is the current consumption when all the maximum simultaneous output
points are ON, excluding the current consumption of external sensors.
Output Specifications
Item
Output current
VOD08S/VOD08S-1
0.3 A max./point
Residual voltage
VOD08S/VOD16ML:
VOD08S-1/VOD16ML-1:
Leakage current
VOD16ML/VOD16ML-1
0.3 A max./point (2 A common) (See note.)
1.2 V DC max. (between each input
terminal and G)
1.2 V DC max. (between each input
terminal and V)
ON delay time
VOD08S/VOD16ML:
VOD08S-1/VOD16ML-1:
0.5 ms max.
0.1 mA max.
0.1 mA max.
OFF delay time
Insulation method
1.5 ms max.
Photocoupler
Number of circuits
8 points/single common circuit 16 points/single common circuit
Note When using the V and G terminals of the MIL connector, make sure that current does not exceed 1 A at each terminal.
214
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Slave Components
The following diagram shows the main components of the SRT2-VOD@@@@
(-@) Connector Terminals with Transistor Outputs. The functions of these
components are described below.
Models with Sensor Connectors
SRT2-VOD08S/VOD08S-1
Communications connector
Used to connect CompoBus/S communications data (BD H, BD L), communications
power supply, and I/O power supply (see page 256).
One compatible connector is provided as standard.
Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave and communications, and
output status of each contact. (Lit when the output is ON.)
DIP Switch
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 to 4: Node number setting
Pins 5 and 6: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 7: Communications mode setting
Pin 8: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
View from (A) (base)
DIN Track Mounting Hook
Output connector (cable connector)
Connect 8 outputs with cable connector (see page 67).
The XS8A-0441 Cable Connector (compatible conductor size: 0.3 to 0.5 mm22)) and
and XS8A-0442
XS8A-0442 Cable
Cable
Connector (compatible conductor size: 0.14 to 0.2 mm22)) are
are sold
sold separately.
separately.
215
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Models with MIL Connectors
SRT2-VOD16ML/VOD16ML-1
Communications connector
Used to connect CompoBus/S communications data (BD H, BD L), communications
power supply, and I/O power supply (see page 256).
One compatible connector is provided as standard.
Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave and communications, and
output status of each contact. (Lit when the output is ON.)
DIP Switch
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 to 4: Node number setting
Pins 5 and 6: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 7: Communications mode setting
Pin 8: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
View from (A) (base)
DIN Track Mounting Hook
Output Connector (MIL Connector)
Connect 16 outputs with MIL connector (see page 258).
XG4M-2030-T MIL Connector and compatible cable are sold separately.
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
PWR (green)
Status
ON
Meaning
The communications power supply is ON.
COMM (yellow)
OFF
ON
The communications power supply is OFF.
Normal communications
OFF
A communications error has occurred or the Unit is
in standby status.
ERR (red)
ON
OFF
A communications error has occurred.
Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
0 to 7 (8 outputs)
0 to 15 (16 outputs)
ON
The corresponding output is ON.
OFF
The corresponding output is OFF or the Unit is in
standby status.
DIP Switch
The DIP switch is located on the base of the Connector Terminal.
Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Communications mode setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Node number setting
Note Always turn OFF the Slave before changing DIP switch settings.
216
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Node Number Settings
Set the node number with pins 1 through 4, as shown in the following table.
Node number
Pin 4
(8)
Pin 3
(4)
Pin 2
(2)
Pin 1
(1)
0
1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
2
3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
4
5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
6
7
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
8
9
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
10
11
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
12
13
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
14
15
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Communications Mode Settings
The following communications modes are set with pin 7.
Pin 7
OFF
ON
Communications mode
Communications distance
High-speed Com- 100 m max.
munications
Mode
500 m max.
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
Communications baud rate
Communications cycle time
750 kbps
0.5 or 0.8 ms
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
Note Make sure that the communications mode of the Slave is the same as that of
the Master Unit. If the communications modes are not the same, normal communications with the Master Unit will not be possible. The operating status of
the Slave can be verified with LED indicators. Refer to 6-5-1 Indicators.
Hold/Clear Outputs for Communications Error
Pin 8 is used to set the output data status when a communications error
occurs, as shown in the following table.
Pin 8 (HOLD)
OFF
ON
Setting
Clear output status
Maintain output status
217
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-VOD08S.
V
G
ST
Photocoupler
BS –
Internal
circuitry
BS +
G
V
OUT
OUT
Photocoupler
BD H
G
V
OUT
OUT
BD L
ST: Step-down transformer
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-VOD08S-1.
V
G
Photocoupler
G
V
OUT
OUT
BS +
Internal
circuitry
BS –
BD H
G
V
OUT
OUT
ST
BD L
Photocoupler
ST: Step-down transformer
218
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-VOD16ML.
V
V
V
G
G
G
ST
Photocoupler
BS +
OUT
Internal
circuitry
BS –
Photocoupler
BD H
BD L
OUT
ST: Step-down transformer
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-VOD16ML-1.
V
V
V
G
G
G
Photocoupler
BS +
BD H
Internal
circuitry
BS –
OUT
Photocoupler
OUT
ST
BD L
ST: Step-down transformer
219
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Wiring
• Communications Connector Pin Arrangement
Communications
power supply
24 V DC
I/O power supply
24 V DC
CompoBus/S
communications
The communications connector (provided as standard) can be ordered as the
following product:
BL3.5/6F (product no. 160668) manufactured by Weidmuller Co., Ltd.
Note
1. OMRON recommends the following products manufactured by Weidmuller
Co., Ltd. for use as crimp terminals.
For inserting 2 wires
(product no. 901851)
Sleeve (product no.046290)
Crimp
Terminal
Cable
Crimp
Terminal
Cable
Insert cable then crimp
2. The following special tool is available:
Crimper PZ1.5 (product no. 900599) manufactured by Weidmuller Co., Ltd.
• Cable Connector Pin Arrangement
Cable connector
(sold separately)
Cable connector
Model
Compatible cable conductor size
XS8A-0441 0.3 to 0.5 mm2
XS8A-0442 0.14 to 0.2 mm2
Note The XS8A-0441 and XS8A-0442 Connectors are not provided with the Unit.
The Connectors must be ordered separately.
220
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
• MIL Connector Pin Arrangement (SRT2-VOD16ML and SRT2VOD16ML-1)
Function
Function
Name
MIL connector
Model
XG4M-2030-T
MIL
Socket
Reinforcing Clip
▲Mark
Connector Pin No.
Note The XG4M-2030-T MIL Connector is not provided as standard and must be
ordered separately.
• Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Method
SRT2-VOD08S
SRT2-VOD08S-1
CompoBus/S
communications
CompoBus/S
communications
CompoBus/S
I/O power
communications supply
power supply
CompoBus/S
I/O power
communications supply
power supply
Terminal numbers
Terminal numbers
Note
Output
device
Output
device
Solenoid, etc.
Solenoid, etc.
Output
device
Output
device
Valve, etc.
Valve, etc.
1. The V terminals are all connected internally, as are the G terminals. When
providing I/O power from a communications connector, power can be provided to output devices from the V and G terminals of the corresponding
cable connector.
221
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
2. When inductive loads such as solenoids and valves are used, either use
loads with built-in diodes that absorb the back-electromotive force or connect a diode externally.
SRT2-VOD16ML
SRT2-VOD16ML-1
CompoBus/S
communications
CompoBus/S
communications
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
I/O power
supply
Output
device
Output
device
Solenoid, etc.
Solenoid, etc.
Output
device
Output
device
Valve, etc.
Valve, etc.
I/O power
supply
▲Mark
Note
▲Mark
1. The V terminals are all connected internally, as are the G terminals. When
providing I/O power from a communications connector, power can be provided to output devices from the V and G terminals of the MIL Connector.
2. When inductive loads such as solenoids and valves are used, either use
loads with built-in diodes that absorb the back-electromotive force or connect a diode externally.
Compatible External Output Devices and Cables
Models with Sensor Connectors (SRT2-VOD08S-1)
The XS8A-0441 and XS8A-0442 Connectors (sold separately) are used to
connect to external output devices. Use the following flowchart to check the
compatibility of external output devices and cables. Refer to 3-4-3 Cable Connector Wiring and Assembly for details on the assembly, wiring, and installation of cable connectors.
Locking Lever
222
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Is the output power supply
voltage 20.4 to 26.4 V DC?
No
Incompatible
Yes
Do output specifications agree? No
Incompatible
Yes
What is the size of the
conductors in the cable?
0.14 to 0.2 mm2
0.3 to 0.5 mm2
Compatible.
Use an XS8A-0441 Connector to
connect the sensor.
Compatible.
Use an XS8A-0442 Connector to
connect the sensor.
Other
Incompatible
Note The XS8A-0441 and XS8A-0442 Connectors are not provided with the Unit.
The Connectors must be ordered separately.
Models with MIL Connector (SRT2-VOD16ML-1)
The MIL Connector can be connected to external devices in either of the following methods.
1,2,3...
1. Using an XG4A-2030-T MIL Connector (sold separately) to Assemble Your
Own Cable
For details, refer to MIL Connector Wiring and Assembly on page 258.
Insert with protrusion
facing right.
223
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
2. Connecting with OMRON Products Using an MIL-compatible Cable Manufactured by OMRON
MIL-compatible cable
Straight power supply cable
G79-O50C (L = 500 mm)
G79-O25C (L = 250 mm)
Wiring diagram
Cross power supply cable
G79-I50C (L = 500 mm)
G79-I25C (L = 250 mm)
Wiring diagram
Compatible OMRON Products Used with MIL Connectors
Slave model
number
SRT2-VID16ML
Connecting cable
Compatible product
G79-150C (50 cm)
G79-125C (25 cm)
G7TC-IA16/ID16
G79-050C (50 cm)
G79-025C (25 cm)
XW2D-20G6
XW2B-20G5/20G4
SRT2-VID16ML-1
G79-050C (50 cm)
G79-025C (25 cm)
XW2D-20G6
XW2B-20G5/20G4
SRT2-VOD16ML
G79-050C (50 cm)
G79-025C (25 cm)
G7TC-OC16/08
G70D Series
G70R-SOC08
G70A-ZOC16-3 and Relays
XW2D-20G6
XW2B-20G5/20G4
SRT2-VOD16ML-1
G79-I50C (50 cm)
G79-I25C (25 cm)
G7TC-OC16-1
G79-050C (50 cm)
G79-025C (25 cm)
G70D-SOC16-1/FOM16-1
G70A-ZOC16-4 and Relays
XW2D-20G6
XW2B-20G5/20G4
Note MIL-compatible cables are not provided as standard and must be ordered
separately.
224
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Dimensions
• Models with Sensor Connectors
All dimensions are in mm.
(70)
• Models with MIL Connectors
All dimensions are in mm.
(77)
Note For details on wiring dimensions, installation methods, Mounting Bracket
dimensions, and mounting methods, refer to 5-2-1 SRT2-VID@@@@ (-1) Connector Terminals with 8 Input or 16 Output Transistors.
5-2-3
SRT2-ID32ML (-1) Connector Terminals with 32 Transistor Inputs
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and input specifications for the SRT2ID32ML (-1).
Ratings
Item
Models
Specification
SRT2-ID32ML, SRT2-ID32ML-1
Input points/Connection
type
SRT2-ID32ML: 32 points (NPN)/MIL connector input
SRT2-ID32ML-1: 32 points (PNP)/MIL connector input
Connection
Communications power: By communications connector
(included as standard)
Input: MIL connector or MIL-compatible Cables (both sold
separately) (see page 233)
I/O power: MIL connector
Power supply type
Multiple power supplies
225
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Item
Communications power
supply voltage
Specification
14 to 26.4 V DC
(Power can be supplied from the communications cable)
I/O power supply voltage
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC +10%/–15%)
Current consumption
(See note.)
Communications power: 50 mA max. at 24 V DC
Noise immunity
1.5 kVp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise time
of 1 ns (tested with impulse noise simulator)
Vibration resistance
10 to 150 Hz, 0.7-mm double amplitude or 50 m/s2
Shock resistance
150 m/s2
Dielectric strength
Ambient temperature
500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
Operating: –10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –25 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
Ambient humidity
Operating environment
Standard accessory
1 communications connector
Note Mounting Bracket B (SRT2-ATT02) is sold separately
Mounting strength
Terminal strength
50 N
Pulling: As stated below
Communications connector: 30 N
MIL connector: 30 N
Communications connector: 0.25 to 0.3 N⋅m
Tightening torque
Node number settings
The node number is set on a DIP switch. (Set the node
number before turning ON the Slave.)
Weight
Approx. 100 g max.
Note This is the current consumption when all the maximum simultaneous input
points are ON, excluding the current consumption of external sensors.
Input Specifications
Item
Input current
ON delay time
OFF delay time
ON voltage
OFF voltage
OFF current
Insulation method
Max. simultaneous
input points
Number of circuits
Specification
6 mA max./point at 24 V DC
3 mA min./point at 17 V DC
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
ID32MIL: 17 V DC min. (between each input terminal and V)
ID32ML-1: 17 V DC (between each input terminal and G)
ID32ML: 5 V DC max. (between each input terminal and V)
ID32M-1: 5 V DC max. (between each input terminal and G)
1 mA max.
Photocoupler
32 points
32 points/single common circuit
Simultaneous Input Points and Installation Spacing
For Connector Terminals with 32 transistor inputs, the ambient operating temperature places a limit on the maximum number of points that can be turned
ON simultaneously.
For example, if Connector Terminals are mounted in a direction other than the
following directions at an ambient operating temperature of 55°C with all the
32 input points turned ON simultaneously, the Connector Terminals must not
be mounted closely together.
226
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
a. Input Units mounted upside down
b. Input Units mounted horizontally
with the MIL connectors facing
downward
Distance between Units L (mm)
a. Input Units mounted upside down
b. Input Units mounted horizontally with the MIL connectors facing downward
c. Input Units mounted facing downward
If 32 input points of any Unit mounted in the above directions need to be
turned ON simultaneously, the spacing between the Units is limited as shown
in the following graph. For example, if the ambient operating temperature is
55°C, a minimum space of 10 mm is required between Units.
Operating ambient temperature (°C)
c. Input Units mounted facing downward
Slave Components
The following diagram shows the main components of the SRT2-ID32ML (-@)
Connector Terminals with Transistor Inputs. The functions of these components are described below.
Communications Connector
Used to connect CompoBus/S communications data (BD H, BD L) and communications
power supply (see page 256 ). One compatible connector is provided as standard.
Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave and communications, and input
status of each contact. (Lit when the input is ON.)
(A)
View from arrow (A)
(Top)
Rotary Switch
Used to set the node number.
DIP Switch
The DIP switch's pins have the following
functions:
Pins 1 to 2: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 3: Communications mode setting
Pin 4: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Input Connector (MIL Connector)
Connect 32 inputs with MIL Connector (see page 258).
XG4M-4030-T MIL Connector and compatible cable are
sold separately.
DIN Track Mounting Hook
227
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
PWR (green)
Name
Power
Status
ON
OFF
COMM1 (yellow)
Communica- ON
tions
OFF
COMM2 (yellow)
A communications error has
occurred on word m or the Unit is
in standby status.
Normal communications on word
m+1.
ON
OFF
ERR1 (red)
A communications error has
occurred on word m+1 or the Unit
is in standby status.
A communications error has
occurred on word m.
Communica- ON
tions error
ERR2 (red)
I (yellow) 0 to 15
(16 inputs)
Input
II (yellow) 0 to 15
(16 inputs)
Meaning
The communications power supply is ON.
The communications power supply is OFF.
Normal communications on word
m.
OFF
Normal communications on word
m or the Unit is in standby status.
ON
A communications error has
occurred on word m+1.
OFF
Normal communications on word
m+1 or the Unit is in standby status.
ON
The corresponding input on word
m is ON.
OFF
The corresponding input is OFF or
the Unit is in standby status.
ON
The corresponding input on word
m+1 is ON.
The corresponding input on word
m+1 is OFF or the Unit is in
standby status.
OFF
Note Word m is the first word allocated in the Unit.
Switch Settings
The rotary switch and the DIP switch are located on the upper part of the Connector Terminal.
O
N
RSV RSV DR RSV
Node number setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Communications mode setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Note Always turn OFF the Slave before changing switch settings.
Node Number Settings
Set the node number in hexadecimal with the rotary switch as shown in the
following table.
228
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Note
Node number
0
Setting (Hex)
0
Node number
8
Setting (Hex)
8
1
2
1
2
9
10
9
A
3
4
3
4
11
12
B
C
5
6
5
6
13
14
D
E
7
7
15
F
1. The node number of the 32-point Slave must be set to an even number. If
an odd number is input, the odd number less one will be set in the Slave.
2. The possible range of node numbers varies with the type of Master and
settings in the Master. Refer to 2-1 Communications Specifications for details.
Communications Mode Settings
The following communications modes are set with pin 3 of the DIP switch.
Pin 3
Communications
mode
Communications distance
OFF
High-speed Communications Mode
100 m max.
ON
Long-distance Com- 500 m max.
munications Mode
Communications baud rate
Communications cycle
time
750 kbps
0.5 or 0.8 ms
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
Note Make sure that the communications mode of the Slave is the same as that of
the Master Unit. If the communications modes are not the same, normal communications with the Master Unit will not be possible. The operating status of
the Slave can be verified with LED indicators. Refer to 6-5-1 Indicators.
Internal Circuits
SRT2-ID32ML
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-ID32ML.
Internal circuitry
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
229
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
SRT2-ID32ML-1
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-ID32ML-1.
Internal circuitry
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Wiring
Communications Connector Pin Arrangement
Communications
power supply
24 V DC
CompoBus/S Communications
The communications connector (provided as standard) can be ordered as
the following product:
BL3.5/6F (product no. 160668) manufactured by Weidmuller Co., Ltd.
Note
1. OMRON recommends the following products manufactured by Weidmuller
Co., Ltd. for use as crimp terminals.
Sleeve (product no. 046290)
Crimp terminal Cable
For inserting 2 wires (product no. 901851)
Crimp terminal
Cable
Insert cable then crimp
2. The following special tool is available:
Crimper PZ1.5 (product no. 900599) manufactured by Weidmuller Co., Ltd.
230
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
MIL Connector Pin Arrangement
Function
Function
Word m
MIL socket
Reinforcing clip
Word m+1
Mark
Connector Pin No.
Name
MIL connector
Model
XG4M-4030-T
Note The XG4M-2030-T MIL Connector is not provided as standard and must be
ordered separately.
231
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Method
SRT2-ID32ML
SRT2-ID32ML-1
CompoBus/S
communications
CompoBus/S
communications
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
I/O power supply
I/O power supply
Word
m
Sensor
Sensor
Brown
(red)
Black
(white)
Blue
(Black)
Brown
(White)
Blue
(Black)
3-wired
sensor
2-wired
sensor
Sensor
Brown
(White)
Blue
(Black)
Word
m
Sensor
Brown
(red)
Black
(white)
Blue
(Black)
2-wired
sensor
3-wired
sensor
Word
m+1
Word
m+1
Sensor
Sensor
Brown
(red)
Black
(white)
Blue
(Black)
Brown
(red)
Black
(white)
Blue
(Black)
3-wired
sensor
3-wired
sensor
Mark
Mark
Note
1. The V terminals are all connected internally, as are the G terminals.
2. Wire colors have been changed. Colors in parentheses are the old wire
colors.
I/O Allocations
Provided that the first word of the Connector Terminal with 32 transistor inputs
allocated to the Master Unit is m, the pin numbers of the MIL connector correspond to the following word and bit allocations.
Word m
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
16 inputs
Word m+1 5
232
7
9 11 13 15 17 19 6
8 10 12 14 16 18 20
16 inputs
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Compatible External Input
Devices and Cables
Connector Terminals with 32 inputs connect to external devices over one of
the following method.
1,2,3...
1. Using an XG4A-4030-T MIL Connector (sold separately) to Assemble Your
Own Cable
For details, refer to MIL Connector Wiring and Assembly on page 258.
Insert with protrusion
facing right.
2. Connecting with OMRON Products Using MIL-compatible Cables Manufactured by OMRON
Select the MIL-compatible Cable from the following table according to the
Connector Terminal and I/O Block to be connected.
Slave model
SRT2-ID32ML
MIL-compatible Cable
G79-I50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-I75-50-D1 (75 cm)
Connecting I/O block
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-IA16
SRT2-ID32ML-1
G79-I50-25-D2 (50 cm)
G79-I75-50-D2 (75 cm)
G70A-ZIM16-5
Note MIL-compatible cables are not provided as standard and must be ordered
separately.
The following cables are available, each of which is provided with a single MIL
connector for the Connector Terminal end.
MIL-compatible cable
Remarks
G79-A200C-D1 (2 m)
G79-A500C-D1 (5 m)
Wire dia.: AWG28 (other end)
All wires are precut.
G79-Y100C-D1 (1 m)
G79-Y200-D1 (2 m)
G79-Y500C-D1 (5 m)
Fork terminals provided to other end.
Fork terminal: Nippon Tanshi’s 161071M2
233
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
The pin numbers of the MIL connector corresponds to the following color
wires marked with color dots.
Pin
Wire
color
1
2
Light
brown
3
4
Dots
■
Dot
color
Pin
Wire
color
Dots
■■■
Black
Red
21
22
Light
brown
Yellow
Black
Red
23
24
Yellow
Black
Red
5
6
Light
green
Black
Red
25
26
Light
green
Black
Red
7
8
Gray
Black
Red
27
28
Gray
Black
Red
9
10
White
Black
Red
29
30
White
Black
Red
11
12
Light
brown
Black
Red
31
32
Light
brown
13
14
Yellow
Black
Red
33
34
Yellow
Black
Red
15
16
Light
green
Black
Red
35
36
Light
green
Black
Red
17
18
Gray
Black
Red
37
38
Gray
Black
Red
19
20
White
Black
Red
39
40
White
Black
Red
■■
■■■■
Dimensions
(Unit: mm)
Wired Dimensions
(82)
Reference dimension
Top view
(Unit: mm)
234
Dot
color
Black
Red
Black
Red
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Mounting Methods
The following mounting methods can be used. These methods are the same
as those used for mounting Connector Terminals with 8 or 16 inputs.
• DIN track mounting (with no mounting brackets): Refer to page 208.
• Vertical panel mounting (with Mounting Bracket B only): Refer to
page 210.
• Horizontal panel mounting (with Mounting Bracket B only): Refer to
page 210.
Note The 32-point Connector Terminals cannot be directly panel-mounted with
screws. Use the SRT2-ATT02 Mounting Bracket B.
Mounting Bracket
Dimensions
SRT2-ATT02 Mounting Bracket B
Mounting dimensions
Two, 3.2 dia. or M3 holes.
(Unit: mm)
Mounting Dimensions
Direct DIN Track Mounting
Horizontal Panel
Mounting
Vertical Panel Mounting
SRT2
PWR
COMM1
ERR1
35
COMM2
ERR2
I
8
8
0
1
9
1
9
2
10
2
10
3
11
3
11
4
12
4
12
5
13
5
13
6
14
6
14
7
15
7
15
0
BS+
Mounting
bracket B
BSH
45
DIN track
Mounting
bracket B
BSL
BS−
NC
NC
IN
0.1
(Unit: mm)
Distance from Duct
Keep the Unit at least 20 mm away from the upper and lower ducts.
Duct
Duct
(Unit: mm)
235
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
5-2-4
SRT2-OD32ML (-1) Connector Terminals with 32 Transistor
Outputs
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and output specifications for the SRT2OD32ML (-1).
Ratings
Item
Models
Specification
SRT2-OD32ML, SRT2-OD32ML-1
Output points/Connection type
SRT2-OD32ML: 32 points (NPN)/MIL connector output
SRT2-OD32ML-1: 32 points (PNP)/MIL connector output
Connection
Communications power:
By communications connector (included as standard)
Output:
MIL connector or MIL-compatible Cables (both sold separately) (see page 243)
I/O power:
MIL connector
Multiple power supplies
Power supply type
Communications power 14 to 26.4 V DC
supply voltage
(Power can be supplied from the communications cable)
I/O power supply voltage 20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC +10%/
–15%)
Current consumption
(See note.)
Noise immunity
Communications power: 70 mA max. at 24 V DC
1.5 kVp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise time
of 1 ns (tested with impulse noise simulator)
Vibration resistance
10 to 150 Hz, 0.7-mm double amplitude or 50 m/s2
Shock resistance
150 m/s2
500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
Dielectric strength
Ambient temperature
Operating: –10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –25 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity
Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Operating environment
Standard accessory
No corrosive gases
1 communications connector
Note Mounting Brackets B (SRT2-ATT02) is sold separately
50 N
Mounting strength
Terminal strength
Pulling: As stated below
Communications connector: 30 N
MIL connector: 30 N
Tightening torque
Node number settings
Communications connector: 0.25 to 0.3 N • m
The node number is set on a DIP switch. (Set the node
number before turning ON the Slave.)
Approx. 90 g max.
Weight
Note This is the current consumption when all the maximum simultaneous input
points are ON, excluding the current consumption of external loads.
236
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Output Specifications
Item
Output current
Specifications
0.3 max./point (4 A common) (See note.)
Residual voltage
ON delay time
OD32ML: 1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC between each output terminal and G)
OD32ML-1: 1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC between each output
terminal and V)
OD32ML: 0.1 mA max.
OD32ML-1: 0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
Insulation method
1.5 ms max.
Photocoupler
Number of circuits
32 points/single common circuit
Leakage current
Note When using the V and G terminals of the MIL connector, make sure that current does not exceed 1 A at each terminal.
Slave Components
The following diagram shows the main components of the SRT2-OD32ML (@) Connector Terminals with Transistor Outputs. The functions of these components are described below.
Communications Connector
Used to connect CompoBus/S communications data (BD H, BD L) and communications
power supply (see page 256 ). One compatible connector is provided as standard.
Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave and communications, and output
status of each contact. (Lit when the input is ON.)
(A)
View from arrow (A)
(Top)
Rotary Switch
Used to set the node number.
DIP Switch
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 to 2: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 3: Communications mode setting
Pin 4: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Output Connector (MIL Connector)
Connect 32 inputs with MIL Connector (see page 258).
XG4M-4030-T MIL Connector and compatible cable are
sold separately.
DIN Track Mounting Hook
237
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
PWR (green)
Name
Power
Status
ON
OFF
COMM1 (yellow)
Communications
ON
OFF
COMM2 (yellow)
A communications error has
occurred on word n or the Unit is
in standby status.
Normal communications on word
n+1.
ON
OFF
ERR1 (red)
Communications error
A communications error has
occurred on word n+1 or the Unit
is in standby status.
A communications error has
occurred on word n.
ON
ERR2 (red)
Outputs
I (yellow) 0 to
15 (16 outputs)
II (yellow) 0 to
15 (16 inputs)
Meaning
The communications power supply is ON.
The communications power supply is OFF.
Normal communications on word
n.
OFF
Normal communications on word
n or the Unit is in standby status.
ON
A communications error has
occurred on word n+1.
OFF
Normal communications on word
n+1 or the Unit is in standby status.
ON
The corresponding output on
word n is ON.
OFF
The corresponding output is OFF
or the Unit is in standby status.
ON
The corresponding output on
word n+1 is ON.
The corresponding output on
word n+1 is OFF or the Unit is in
standby status.
OFF
Note Word n is the first word allocated in the Unit.
Switch Settings
The rotary switch and the DIP switch are located on the upper part of the Connector Terminal.
O
N
RSV RSV DR HOLD
Node number setting
Hold/Clear setting
Communications mode setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Note Always turn OFF the Slave before changing switch settings.
Node Number Settings
Set the node number in hexadecimal with the rotary switch as shown in the
following table.
238
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Note
Node number
0
Setting (Hex)
0
Node number
8
Setting (Hex)
8
1
2
1
2
9
10
9
A
3
4
3
4
11
12
B
C
5
6
5
6
13
14
D
E
7
7
15
F
1. The node number of the 32-point Slave must be set to an even number. If
an odd number is input, the odd number less one will be set in the Slave.
2. The possible range of node numbers varies with the type of Master and
settings in the Master. Refer to 2-1 Communications Specifications for details.
Communications Mode Settings
The following communications modes are set with pin 3 of the DIP switch as
shown below.
SW3
Communications mode
Communications distance
Communications baud rate
Communications cycle time
OFF
High-speed Com- 100 m max.
munications
Mode
750 kbps
0.5 or 0.8 ms
ON
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
500 m max.
Note Make sure that the communications mode of the Slave is the same as that of
the Master Unit. If the communications modes are not the same, normal communications with the Master Unit will not be possible. The operating status of
the Slave can be verified with LED indicators. Refer to 6-5-1 Indicators.
Hold/Clear Outputs for Communications Errors
Pin 4 is used to set the output data status when a communications error
occurs, as shown in the following table.
OFF
Pin 4 (HOLD)
Setting
Clear output status
ON
Maintain output status
239
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Internal Circuits
SRT2-OD32ML
ST
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-OD32ML.
Internal circuitry
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
SRT2-OD32ML-1
ST
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-OD32ML-1.
Internal circuitry
Photocoupler
240
Photocoupler
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Wiring
Communications Connector Pin Arrangement
Communications
power supply
24 V DC
CompoBus/S Communications
The communications connector (provided as standard) can be ordered
as the following product:
BL3.5/6F (product no. 160668) manufactured by Weidmuller Co., Ltd.
Note
1. OMRON recommends the following products manufactured by Weidmuller
Co., Ltd. for use as crimp terminals.
Sleeve (product no. 046290)
Crimp terminal
Cable
For inserting 2 wires (product no. 901851)
Crimp terminal
Cable
Insert cable then crimp
2. The following special tool is available: Crimper PZ1.5 (product no. 900599)
manufactured by Weidmuller Co., Ltd.
241
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
MIL Connector Pin Arrangement
Function
Function
Word n
MIL socket
Reinforcing clip
Word n+1
Mark
Connector Pin No.
Name
MIL connector
Model
XG4M-4030-T
Note The XG4M-4030-T MIL Connector is not provided as standard and must be
ordered separately.
242
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Method
SRT2-OD32ML
SRT2-OD32ML-1
CompoBus/S
communications
CompoBus/S
communications
CompoBus/S
communications power
supply
CompoBus/S
communications power
supply
I/O power supply
I/O power supply
Word
n
Word
n
Solenoid,
valve,
etc.
Solenoid,
valve,
etc.
Solenoid,
valve,
etc.
Solenoid,
valve,
etc.
Word
n+1
Word
n+1
Solenoid,
valve,
etc.
I/O Allocations
Solenoid,
valve,
etc.
Mark
Provided that the first word of the Connector Terminal with 32 transistor outputs allocated to the Master Unit is n, the pin numbers of the MIL connector
correspond to the following word and bit allocations.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Word n
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
Word n+1 5
Compatible External Input
Devices and Cables
Mark
7
9 11 13 15 17 19 6
8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Bit
16 outputs
16 outputs
The Connector Terminals with 32 inputs connect to external devices over one
of the following method.
243
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
1,2,3...
1. Using an XG4A-4030-T MIL Connector (sold separately) to Assemble Your
Own Cable
For details, refer to MIL Connector Wiring and Assembly on page 258.
Insert with protrusion
facing right.
2. Connecting with OMRON Products Using an MIL-compatible Cables Manufactured by OMRON
Select the MIL-compatible Cable from the following table according to the
Connector Terminals and I/O Block to be connected.
Slave model
SRT2-OD32ML
MIL-compatible Cable
G79-O50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-O75-50-D1 (75 cm)
SRT2-OD32ML-1
G79-O50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-O75-50-D1 (75 cm)
G79-I50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-I75-50-D1 (75 cm)
Connecting I/O block
G7TC-OC16/OC08
G70D-SOC16/VSOC16
G70A-ZOC16-3
G70A-ZOC16-4
G70D-SOC16-1
G7TC-OC16-4
M7F
Note MIL-compatible cables are not provided as standard and must be ordered
separately.
The following cables are available, each of which is provided with a single MIL
connector for the Connector Terminal end.
MIL-compatible cable
244
Remarks
G79-A200C-D1 (2 m)
G79-A500C-D1 (5 m)
Wire dia.: AWG28 (other end)
All wires are precut.
G79-Y100C-D1 (1 m)
G79-Y200C-D1 (2 m)
G79-Y500C-D1 (5 m)
Fork terminals provided to other end.
Fork terminal: Nippon Tanshi’s 161071-M2
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
The pin numbers of the MIL connector corresponds to the following color
wires marked with color dots.
Pin
Wire
color
1
2
Light
brown
3
4
Dots
■
Dot
color
Pin
Wire
color
Dots
■■■
Dot
color
Black
Red
21
22
Light
brown
Yellow
Black
Red
23
24
Yellow
Black
Red
5
6
Light
green
Black
Red
25
26
Light
green
Black
Red
7
8
Gray
Black
Red
27
28
Gray
Black
Red
9
10
White
Black
Red
29
30
White
Black
Red
11
12
Light
brown
Black
Red
31
32
Light
brown
13
14
Yellow
Black
Red
33
34
Yellow
Black
Red
15
16
Light
green
Black
Red
35
36
Light
green
Black
Red
17
18
Gray
Black
Red
37
38
Gray
Black
Red
19
20
White
Black
Red
39
40
White
Black
Red
■■
■■■■
Black
Red
Black
Red
Dimensions
(Unit: mm)
Note For details on wiring dimensions, refer to 5-2-3 SRT2-ID32ML (-1) Connector
Terminals with 32 Transistor Inputs.
Mounting Methods
The following mounting methods are available. These methods are the same
as those used for mounting Connector Terminals with 8 or 16 inputs.
• DIN track mounting (with no mounting brackets): Refer to page 208.
• Vertical panel mounting (with Mounting Bracket B only): Refer to
page 210.
• Horizontal panel mounting (with Mounting Bracket B only): Refer to
page 210.
Note
1. The 32-point Connector Terminal cannot be directly panel-mounted with
screws. Use the SRT2-ATT02 Mounting Bracket B.
245
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
2. For details on wiring dimensions, refer to 5-2-3 SRT2-ID32ML (-1) Connector Terminals with 32 Transistor Inputs.
5-2-5
SRT2-MD32ML (-1) Connector Terminals with 16 Transistor Inputs
and 16 Transistor Outputs
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and I/O specifications for the SRT2MD32ML (-1).
Ratings
Item
Specification
Models
Input points/Connection
type
SRT2-MD32ML, SRT2-MD32ML-1
SRT2-MD32ML: 16 input and 16 output points (NPN)/MIL
connector input
SRT2-MD32ML-1: 16 input and 16 output points (PNP)/
MIL connector input
Connection
Power supply type
Communications power:
By communications connector (included as standard)
Input:
MIL connector or MIL-compatible Cables (both sold separately) (see page 253)
I/O power:
MIL connector
Multiple power supplies
Communications power
supply voltage
14 to 26.4 V DC
(Power can be supplied from the communications cable)
I/O power supply voltage 20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC +10%/
–15%)
Current consumption
(See note.)
Communications power: 60 mA max. at 24 V DC
Noise immunity
1.5 kVp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise time
of 1 ns (tested with impulse noise simulator)
Vibration resistance
10 to 150 Hz, 0.7-mm double amplitude or 50 m/s2
Shock resistance
150 m/s2
Dielectric strength
Ambient temperature
500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
Operating: –10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –25 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Ambient humidity
Operating environment
Standard accessory
No corrosive gases
1 communications connector
Note Mounting Bracket B (SRT2-ATT02) is sold separately
Mounting strength
Terminal strength
50 N
Pulling: As stated below.
Communications connector: 30 N
MIL connector: 30 N
Communications connector: 0.25 to 0.3 N • m
Tightening torque
Node number settings
The node number is set on a DIP switch. (Set the node
number before turning ON the Slave.)
Weight
Approx. 100 g max.
Note This is the current consumption when all the maximum simultaneous input
points are ON, excluding the current consumption of external sensors.
246
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Input Specifications
Item
Input current
ON delay time
OFF delay time
ON voltage
OFF voltage
Specifications
6 mA max./point at 24 V DC
3 mA min./point at 17 V DC
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
MD32MIL: 17 V DC min. (between each input terminal and V)
MD32ML-1: 17 V DC min.(between each input terminal and G)
MD32ML: 5 V DC max. (between each input terminal and V)
MD32M-1: 5 V DC max. (between each input terminal and G)
OFF current
Insulation method
1 mA max.
Photocoupler
Max. simultaneous input points
16 points
Number of circuits
16 points/single common circuit
Output Specifications
Item
Output current
Specifications
0.3 max./point (4 A common) (See note.)
Residual voltage
MD32ML:
Leakage current
1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC between each output terminal and G)
MD32ML-1: 1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC between each output terminal and V)
MD32ML: 0.1 mA max.
MD32ML-1: 0.1 mA max.
ON delay time
OFF delay time
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Insulation method
Photocoupler
Number of circuits
16 points/single common circuit
Note When using the V and G terminals of the MIL connector, make sure that current does not exceed 1 A at each terminal.
Simultaneous Input Points and Installation Spacing
For Connector Terminals with 16 transistor inputs and 16 transistor outputs,
the ambient operating temperature places a limit on the maximum number of
points that can be turned ON simultaneously.
For example, if Connector Terminals are to be mounted in the direction other
than the following directions at an ambient operating temperature of 55°C with
all the 16 points turned ON simultaneously, the Connector Terminals must not
be mounted closely together.
a. Units mounted upside down
b. Units mounted horizontally with the MIL connectors facing downward
c. Units mounted facing downward
If 16 points of any Unit mounted in the above directions need to be turned ON
simultaneously, the spacing of the Units is limited as shown in the following
247
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
a. Units mounted upside down
b. Units mounted horizontally with the
MIL connectors facing downward
Operating ambient temperature (°C)
c. Units mounted facing downward
Slave Components
Distance between Units L (mm)
graph. For example, if the ambient operating temperature is 55°C, a minimum
space of 10 mm is required between Units.
The following diagram shows the main components of the SRT2-MD32ML (@) Connector Terminals with Transistor Inputs and Transistor Outputs. The
functions of these components are described below.
Communications Connector
Used to connect CompoBus/S communications data (BD H, BD L)
and communications power supply (see page 256).
One compatible connector is provided as standard.
Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave and communications, and
input status of each contact. (Lit when the input is ON.)
(A)
View from arrow (A)
(Top)
Rotary Switch
Used to set the node number.
DIP Switch
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 to 2: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 3: Communications mode setting
Pin 4: Hold/Clear Outputs for Communications Errors
Input Connector (MIL Connector)
Connect 16 input and 16 output points with MIL Connector (see page 258).
XG4M-4030-T MIL Connector and compatible cable are sold separately.
DIN Track Mounting Hook
248
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
PWR
(green)
Name
Power
Status
ON
Meaning
The communications power supply is ON.
COMM1
(yellow)
Communications
OFF
ON
The communications power supply is OFF.
Normal communications on word m.
OFF
A communications error has occurred on
word m or the Unit is in standby status.
COMM2
(yellow)
ON
OFF
ERR1 (red) Communications
error
ON
Normal communications on word n.
A communications error has occurred on
word n or the Unit is in standby status.
A communications error has occurred on
word m.
OFF
Normal communications on word m or the
Unit is in standby status.
ERR2 (red)
ON
A communications error has occurred on
word n.
OFF
Normal communications on word n or the
Unit is in standby status.
The corresponding input on word m is ON.
I (yellow) 0
to 15 (16
inputs)
I/O
ON
II (yellow) 0
to 15 (16
outputs)
OFF
The corresponding input is OFF or the Unit is
in standby status.
ON
OFF
The corresponding output on word n is ON.
The corresponding output on word n is OFF
or the Unit is in standby status.
Note Word m is the word allocated in the Unit as an input Slave. Word n is the word
allocated in the Unit as an output Slave.
Switch Settings
The rotary switch and the DIP switch are located on the upper part of the Connector Terminal.
O
N
RSV RSV DR HOLD
Hold/Clear Outputs for Communications Errors
Communications mode setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Node number setting
Note Always turn OFF the Slave before changing switch settings.
Node Number Settings
Set the node number in hexadecimal with the rotary switch as shown in the
following table.
Node number
Setting (Hex)
Node number
Setting (Hex)
0
1
0
1
8
9
8
9
2
3
2
3
10
11
A
B
4
5
4
5
12
13
C
D
6
7
6
7
14
15
E
F
249
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Note
1. The 32-point Slave is handled as a 16-point input Slave and a 16-point output Slave. The node number of the 32-point Slave must be set to an even
number. If an odd number is input, the odd number less one will be set in
the Slave.
2. The possible range of node numbers varies with the type of Master and
settings in the Master. Refer to 2-1 Communications Specifications for details.
Communications Mode Settings
The following communications modes are set with pin 3 of the DIP switch as
shown below.
Pin
CommunicaCommunica3
tions mode
tions distance
OFF High-speed Com- 100 m max.
munications Mode
ON Long-distance
500 m max.
Communications
Mode
Communications baud rate
750 kbps
Communications cycle time
0.5 or 0.8 ms
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
Note Make sure that the communications mode of the Slave is the same as that of
the Master Unit. If the communications modes are not the same, normal communications with the Master Unit will not be possible. The operating status of
the Slave can be verified with LED indicators. Refer to 6-5-1 Indicators for
details.
Hold/Clear Outputs for Communications Error
Pin 4 is used to set the output data status when a communications error
occurs, as shown in the following table.
Pin 4 (HOLD)
Output setting
OFF
ON
Clear output status.
Maintain output status.
Internal Circuits
SRT2-MD32ML
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-MD32ML.
250
Photocoupler
ST
Internal circuitry
Photocoupler
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
SRT2-MD32ML-1
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-MD32ML-1.
ST
Internal circuitry
Photocoupler
Photocoupler
Wiring
Communications Connector Pin Arrangement
Communications
power supply
24 V DC
CompoBus/S Communications
The communications connector (provided as standard) can be ordered as
the following product:
BL3.5/6F (product no. 160668) manufactured by Weidmuller Co., Ltd.
Note
1. OMRON recommends the following products manufactured by Weidmuller
Co., Ltd. for use as crimp terminals.
Sleeve (product no. 046290)
Crimp terminal
Cable
For inserting 2 wires (product no. 901851)
Crimp terminal
Cable
Insert cable then crimp
2. The following special tool is available:
Crimper PZ1.5 (product no. 900599) manufactured by Weidmuller Co., Ltd.
251
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
MIL Connector Pin Arrangement
Function
Function
Word m
MIL socket
Reinforcing clip
Word n
Mark
Connector Pin No.
Name
MIL connector
Model
XG4M-4030-T
Note The XG4M-4030-T MIL Connector is not provided as standard and must be
ordered separately.
252
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Method
SRT2-MD32ML
SRT2-MD32ML-1
CompoBus/S
communications
CompoBus/S
communications
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
I/O power supply
(for inputs)
I/O power supply
(for inputs)
Word
m
Sensor
Brown (red)
Brown
(White)
Blue
(Black)
Black (white)
Blue (Black)
Brown (red)
Black (white)
Blue (Black)
2-wired
sensor
3-wired
sensor
2-wired
sensor
Sensor
Brown
(White)
Blue
(Black)
Sensor
Sensor
Word
m
3-wired
sensor
I/O power supply
(for outputs)
I/O power supply
(for outputs)
Word
n
Word
n
Solenoid,
value,
etc.
Solenoid,
value,
etc.
Solenoid,
value,
etc.
Solenoid,
value,
etc.
Mark
Mark
Note In accordance with the changes in the standards for photoelectric sensors
and proximity sensors, wire colors have been changed. Colors in parentheses
are the old wire colors.
I/O Allocations
Provided that the words of the Connector Terminal with 32 transistor inputs
and 32 transistor outputs allocated as input and output Slaves to the Master
Unit are m and n, the pin numbers of the MIL connector correspond to the following word and bit allocations.
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Word m 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
16 inputs
Word n
Compatible External Input
Devices and Cables
5
7
9 11 13 15 17 19 6
8 10 12 14 16 18 20
16 outputs
The Connector Terminals with 32 inputs connect to external devices over one
of the following method.
253
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
1,2,3...
1. Using an XG4A-4030-T MIL Connector (sold separately) to Assemble Your
Own Cable
For details, refer to MIL Connector Wiring and Assembly on page 258.
Insert with protrusion facing right.
2. Connecting with OMRON Products Using an MIL-compatible Cables Manufactured by OMRON
Select the MIL-compatible Cable from the following table according to the
Connector Terminals and I/O Block to be connected.
MIL-compatible Cable
Connecting I/O block
SRT2-MD32ML
Slave model
G79-M50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-M75-50-D1 (75 cm)
SRT2-MD32ML-1
G79-M50-25-D2 (50 cm)
G79-M75-50-D2 (75 cm)
Inputs:G7TC-ID16/IA16
Outputs:G7TC-OC08/OC16
G7OD-SOC16/VSOC16
G70A-ZOC16-3
Inputs:G70A-ZIM16-5
Outputs:G70A-ZOC16-4
G70D-SOC16-1
Remarks
Input and output wires can
be distinguished with the
following colors.
Inputs: Red
Outputs: Yellow
Note MIL-compatible cables are not provided as standard and must be ordered
separately.
The following cables are available, each of which is provided with a single MIL
connector for the Connector Terminal end.
MIL-compatible cable
G79-A200C-D1 (2 m)
G79-A500C-D1 (5 m)
G79-Y100C-D1 (1 m)
G79-Y200C-D1 (2 m)
G79-Y500C-D1 (5 m)
254
Remarks
Wire dia.: AWG28 (other end)
All wires are precut.
Fork terminals provided to other end.
Fork terminal: Nippon Tanshi’s 161071-M2
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
The pin numbers of the MIL connector corresponds to the following color
wires marked with color dots.
Pin
Wire
color
1
2
Light
brown
3
4
Dots
■
Dot
color
Pin
Wire
color
Dots
■■■
Dot
color
Black
Red
21
22
Light
brown
Yellow
Black
Red
23
24
Yellow
Black
Red
5
6
Light
green
Black
Red
25
26
Light
green
Black
Red
7
8
Gray
Black
Red
27
28
Gray
Black
Red
9
10
White
Black
Red
29
30
White
Black
Red
11
12
Light
brown
Black
Red
31
32
Light
brown
13
14
Yellow
Black
Red
33
34
Yellow
Black
Red
15
16
Light
green
Black
Red
35
36
Light
green
Black
Red
17
18
Gray
Black
Red
37
38
Gray
Black
Red
19
20
White
Black
Red
39
40
White
Black
Red
■■
■■■■
Black
Red
Black
Red
Dimensions
(Unit: mm)
Note For details on wiring dimensions, refer to 5-2-3 SRT2-ID32ML (-1) Connector
Terminals with 32 Transistor Inputs.
Mounting Methods
The following mounting methods are available. These methods are the same
as those used for mounting Connector Terminals with 8 or 16 inputs.
• DIN track mounting (with no mounting brackets): Refer to page 208.
• Vertical panel mounting (with Mounting Bracket B only): Refer to
page 210.
• Horizontal panel mounting (with Mounting Bracket B only): Refer to
page 210.
Note
1. The 32-point Connector Terminal cannot be directly panel-mounted with
screws. Use the SRT2-ATT02 Mounting Bracket B.
255
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
2. For details on wiring dimensions, refer to 5-2-3 SRT2-ID32ML (-1) Connector Terminals with 32 Transistor Inputs.
5-2-6
Wiring and Assembly of Communications Connector and MIL
Connector for Connector Terminals
Connect the communications cable to the Connector Terminal using the rectangular communications connector provided with the Unit. The Connector
Terminals with MIL connectors are used to connect the external I/O. The wiring and assembly methods of square communications connectors and MIL
connectors are described here.
The Connector Terminals with sensor connectors are used to connect the
external I/O cable connector. The cable connector wiring and assembly methods are the same as for Sensor Terminals, so refer to 3-4-3 Cable Connector
Wiring and Assembly for details.
Wiring
A CompoBus/S cable must be connected to a Connector Terminal after the
communications data (BD H, BD L), communications power supply (BS+,
BS–), and I/O power supply (G, V) lines are connected to the communications
connector (i.e., the connector on the cable end). I/O power is not supplied to
32-point Connector Terminals.
!Caution Be sure to turn OFF the Slave power supply and communications power supply before connecting communications data, communications power supply,
or I/O power supply lines, and before attaching or detaching connectors. For
the connector, use the communications connector provided with the Connector Terminal.
Use the following procedure to connect the communications data, communications power supply, and I/O power supply lines to the connector.
1,2,3...
1. Remove sufficient insulation from the signal wires for a crimp terminal, and
twist the exposed wire strands together tightly.
If using VCTF cable, cover the severed end of the insulation with vinyl tape
or heat-shrinking tube.
Apply vinyl tape or heatshrinking tube
2. After attaching a crimp terminal to the exposed signal wires, cover with vinyl tape or heat-shrinking tube.
OMRON recommends the following products manufactured by Weidmuller
Co., Ltd. for use as crimp terminals.
Sleeve (product no. 046290)
Crimp terminal Cable
For inserting 2 wires (product no. 901851)
Crimp terminal
Cable
Insert cable then crimp
The following special tool is available:
Crimper PZ1.5 (product number 900599) manufactured by Weidmuller
Co., Ltd.
256
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
3. Paying attention to the orientation of the connector, insert each signal wire
into the corresponding hole in the connector, as shown below.
SRT2-V@D@@@@ (-1)
CompoBus/S
communications data
Low side (BD L)
High side (BD H)
CompoBus/S
communications power
supply
– side (BS –)
+ side (BS +)
Communications
power supply
– side (G)
+ side (V)
Communications data
I/O
power
supply
I/O power supply
SRT2-@32ML (-1)
CompoBus/S
communications power
supply
– side (BS –)
+ side (BS +)
Communications
power supply
Communications data
CompoBus/S
communications data
Low side
(BD L)
High side
(BD H)
!Caution Before inserting the signal wires, loosen the clamp screws used to secure
wires to the connector. If a wire is inserted before the corresponding screw is
loosened, the wire may enter the gap behind the connector, and remain unsecured. Use crimp terminals when wiring. Do not attach twisted bare wires
directly to connectors.
4. Tighten the clamp screws securing each signal wire to the connector. Note
that a normal screwdriver has a keystone tip with a flared blade, and may
not be able to penetrate deeply enough to reach the screw. Use a small
slotted screwdriver of constant width. The correct tightening torque is 0.2
to 0.4 N⋅m.
The following example is for the SRT2-V@D@@@@(-1).
Small slotted
screwdriver with tip of
constant width.
257
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
Note Use a fine-tipped screwdriver. The size of the communications Connector Terminal screws is M2.5.
Attaching Connectors
Note
Attach the communications cable fitted with a connector to the connector of
the Connector Terminal.
1. The direction of the connector depends on the Connector Terminal node
model. Communications connectors of 8-point and 16-point Connector
Terminals lie horizontally, and the communications connectors of 32-point
Connector Terminals are positioned vertically. Check the direction of the
connector carefully before inserting it.
2. Check that the communications cables are a sufficient length when connecting to prevent them from being pulled out or bent over. Do not place
heavy objects on the cable cord. Doing so may cause the cables to break.
1,2,3...
1. Attach the communications cable connector to the connector of the Connector Terminal as shown in the following figure.
The following example is for the SRT2-V@D@@@@(-1).
2. Tighten the connector screws to secure the connector to the Connector
Terminal. The correct tightening torque is 0.2 to 0.4 N⋅m.
MIL Connector Wiring and
Assembly
Use the procedure below to assemble a cable using the following MIL connectors.
SRT2-V@D16ML (-1): XG4M-2030-T (20-pin MIL Connector)
SRT2-@D32ML (-1): XG4M-4030-T (40-pin MIL Connector)
The following procedure is an example to assemble the 20-pin MIL Connector.
The same procedure will apply if the 40-pin MIL Connector is used.
1,2,3...
1. Using a fine-tipped screwdriver, release both sides of the plug to separate
the MIL socket into its contact and cover components. The contact component of the socket has two small hooks on each side. Release both sides
of the cover from these hooks one by one, taking care not to forcefully unhook one side only.
Cover
Contact
2. Insert the flat cable between the cover and contact components separated
in 1 above, then, after making sure that each cable wire is placed in the correct position on the contact component, lock the cover and contact components together. Use a vise or similar tool to press the components together
258
Section 5-2
Connector Terminals
firmly until the hooks engage.
The following cables can be used with MIL connectors.
• 1.27-mm-pitch flat cable AWG28 (7-wire twisted cable)
• UL2651 (standard cable)
• UL20012 (fabric cable)
• UL20028 (color-coded cable)
3. If necessary, fold the cable back over as shown and lock on a reinforcing
clip.
4. Insert the newly assembled MIL connector into the Connector Terminal.
Insert with protrusion
facing right.
1
2
1
259
Section 5-3
Remote I/O Modules
5-3
5-3-1
Remote I/O Modules
SRT@-@D16P Remote I/O Modules
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and I/O specifications for the SRT@@D16P.
Ratings
Item
Models
I/O points
SRT1-ID16P
SRT2-ID16P
16 input points
Specification
SRT1-OD16P
SRT2-OD16P
16 output points
Internal I/O circuit common NPN (+ common)
NPN (– common)
Mounting method
PCB mounting with I/O terminals soldered
Communications mode
Power supply type
SRT1-@D16P: High-speed communications mode
SRT2-@D16P: High-speed Communications Mode or
Long-distance Communications Mode
---
Communications power
supply voltage
I/O power supply voltage
20.4 to 26.4 V DC
Current consumption
(See note.)
Ambient temperature
60 mA max.
Ambient humidity
Dielectric strength
24 V DC +10%/–15%
20 mA max.
Operating: 0 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –20 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Operating: 35% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
500 V AC for 1 minute
(1-mA sensing current, between insulated circuits)
Node number settings
The node number is set on the address terminal.
(Set the node number before turning ON the Slave.)
Weight
35 g max.
Note The current consumption is the value with all points turned ON excluding the
current consumption of the external sensors connected to the Module inputs
and the current consumption of the loads connected to the Module outputs.
Characteristics
Item
5-V output current
Specification
20 mA max. (at 5 V±0.5 V)
LED drive current
(COMM, ERR)
SW carry current
(ADR0 to 3, HOLD)
10 mA max. (5 V DC)
1 mA max.
Input Specifications
Item
Input current
2 mA max./point
ON delay time
OFF delay time
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
ON voltage
15 V DC min.
(between each input terminal and BS+ terminal)
5 V DC max.
(between each input terminal and BS+ terminal)
OFF voltage
260
Specification
Section 5-3
Remote I/O Modules
Output Specifications
Slave Components
Item
Rated output current
Specification
0.2 A/point, 0.6 A/common
Residual voltage
0.6 V max. (between each output terminal and G terminal
at 0.2 A)
Leakage current
0.1 mA max. (between each output terminal and G terminal
at 24 V DC)
ON delay time
OFF delay time
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
The following diagram shows the main components of SRT1-OD16P Remote
I/O Modules. The function of these components are described below.
Communications Terminal
Connect the CompoBus/S
communications cable.
Communications Terminal
Connect the CompoBus/S
communications cable.
Communications Power Supply Terminal
Connect the negative line of 24-V DC
communications power supply.
Communications Power Supply Terminal
Connect the positive line of 24-V DC
communications power supply.
I/O Terminals
Connect I/O devices.
I/O Terminals
Connect I/O devices.
5-V Output Terminal
The positive line of power supply for
the COMM, ERR, and PWR.
Communications mode setting
terminals (SRT2 Series only)
Terminals to set the
communications
mode. (Not used for
Node Number Setting Terminals
SRT1 Series.)
Used when setting the
node number.
Communications Status Terminals
Used for indicating the
status of communications.
Hold/Clear Output Setting Terminal
Used for holding or clearing the output.
(Incorporated by the Output Module only.)
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
COMM (yellow)
ERR (red)
Status
Low
Hi
Low
Hi
Meaning
Normal communications.
A communications error has occurred or the
Unit is in standby status.
A communications error has occurred.
Normal communications or the Unit is in
standby status.
261
Section 5-3
Remote I/O Modules
Communications Mode,
Node Number and Output
HOLD/CLEAR Mode
Set the node number with the NC, ADR1 through ADR3, and hold/clear output
setting terminals.
SW (see note 3.)
(see note 1.)
Internal
circuitry
(see note 2.)
BS– or G
Note
1. The DR terminal is not used by the SRT1 Series.
2. The HOLD terminal is not used by the Input Module.
3. Low: The input bit is ON. Hi: The input bit is OFF.
Note The HOLD terminal is not used by the Input Module.
Communications Mode Settings (SRT2 Series Only)
The following communications modes are set with the communications mode
setting terminal (DR) as shown below.
DR
Hi
Low
CommunicaCommunications mode
tions distance
High-speed Com- 100 m max.
munications
Mode
CommunicaCommunications baud rate tions cycle time
750 kbps
0.5 or 0.8 ms
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
93.75 kbps
500 m max.
4.0 or 6.0 ms
Communications mode settings are possible for SRT2-series Slaves only.
SRT1-series Slaves are always in high-speed communications mode.
Note Make sure that the communications mode of the Slave is the same as that of
the Master Unit. If the communications modes are not the same, normal communications with the Master Unit will not be possible. The operating status of
the Slave can be verified with LED indicators. The COMM terminal corresponds to the COM indicator and ERR terminal corresponds to the ERR indicator.
Node Number Settings
Set the node number with terminals ADR1 through ADR3, as shown in the following table.
Note
262
Node number
ADR3
(8)
ADR2
(4)
ADR1
(2)
0
2
Hi
Hi
Hi
Hi
Hi
Low
4
6
Hi
Hi
Low
Low
Hi
Low
8
10
Low
Low
Hi
Hi
Hi
Low
12
14
Low
Low
Low
Low
Hi
Low
1. Low: The input bit is ON. Hi: The input bit is OFF.
Section 5-3
Remote I/O Modules
2. The node number should be an even number.
3. The terminals are pulled up to the 5-V line internally.
Note The actual node number setting range depends on the type of PLC in which
the Master is mounted as well as the Master’s settings. Refer to 2-1 Communications Specifications for details.
Hold/Clear Output Setting for Communications Errors
(Output Module Only)
The HOLD terminal is used to set the output data status when a communications error occurs, as shown in the following table.
HOLD
Hi
Low
Output status is cleared when a communications error occurs.
Output status is maintained.
Internal
circuitry
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-ID16P (16
inputs).
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-OD16P (16
outputs).
Internal
circuitry
Internal Circuits
Setting
263
Remote I/O Modules
Section 5-3
External Connections
The following diagram shows the external connections for the SRT@-ID16P
(16 inputs).
Internal
circuitry
Communications
24 V DC
Two-wired
proximity sensor
BS– or G
The following diagram shows the external connections for the SRT@-OD16P
(16 outputs).
Internal
circuitry
Communications
Relay
24 V DC
D1: Reverse voltage prevention diode
Internal
circuitry
Connecting Communications Status Indicators
R: LED current limiting resistor
LED1: LED for COMM
LED2: LED for ERR
The maximum current for LED1
and LED2 is 10 mA.
264
Section 5-3
Remote I/O Modules
The 5-V output terminals have positive power supplies (maximum output current of 20 mA) for the ERR and COMM LEDs. Recommended LED colors are
red for ERR and yellow for COMM.
Precautions on Inner-layer
Pattern Connecting BD H
and BD L Terminals
The pattern connecting terminals BD H and BD L should be as short and as
straight as possible. The following precautions should also be observed.
10 mm
BD L
L1
BD L
SRT@-ID16P/OD16P
BD H
Terminal
block
L2
BD H
10 mm
Area prohibited to inner
layer conductor pattern
• Conductor Pattern Length
The length of the conductors in the pattern connecting the BD L and
BD H terminals of the terminal block to those of either SRT@-ID16P or
SRT@-OD16P (L1, L2) must satisfy the following conditions.
L1 + L2 ≤ 10 cm
L1 ≈ L2 (Within ratio of 1.5)
• Conductor Pattern Width
The width of the conductor in the pattern connecting the BD L and BD
H terminals of the terminal block to those of either SRT@-ID16P or
SRT@-OD16P must be sufficient to carry a current of 250 mA DC, and
must also not exceed 0.3 mm (0.3 mm recommended).
• Area Prohibited to Inner Layer Conductor Pattern
Do not create another conductor pattern within 10 mm of the pattern
connecting the BD L and BD H terminals of the terminal block to those
of either SRT@-ID16P or SRT@-OD16P.
Precautions on Crossing Conductors
When it is necessary for the conductors of the pattern connecting the BD L
and BD H terminals of the terminal block to those of either SRT@-ID16P or
SRT@-OD16P to cross, be sure to create one end on the soldered surface of
the circuit board, and make the conductors cross between the terminal block
and the SRT@-ID16P or SRT@-OD16P.
BD H
BD L
SRT(-ID16P/OD16P
Terminal
block
BD L
BD H
265
Section 5-3
Remote I/O Modules
Precautions on Bending Conductor Pattern
When it is necessary for the conductors of the pattern connecting the BD L
and BD H terminals of the terminal block to those of either SRT@-ID16P or
SRT@-OD16P to change direction, make sure the direction does not veer at a
right angle. Keep the direction change within 45°.
BD L
BD L
SRT(-ID16P/
OD16P
Terminal
block
Within 45 °
BD H
Noise Protection Circuit
BD H
Add the following protection circuit if noise is generated from the power supply, input section, or output section.
Power supply noise protection
circuit
Input section noise protection circuit
Output section noise protection
circuit
L
PLC: Photocoupler
PHC
BS +
V
+
50 V
100 µF
0 to 15
BS +
V
50 V
0.1 µF
R
Load
SRT@
SRT@
V
D
C
R2
BS –
G
Input
device
L: Coil for the common mode
(100 µH min.)
Install the coil near the SRT@.
V: 24 V DC
(Even if a separate power supply is
used, the same kind of protection is
recommended.)
R1
R1: Resistor for limiting photocoupler
input current
D: Photocoupler protection diode
C: Noise absorption condenser
R2: Resistor for limiting operating level
PHC: Photocoupler
V: DC power supply
0 to
15
SRT@
G
PHC
R
D
C
SA
R
C: 0.1 µF min.
R: Limiting resistor
SA: Varistor
D: Back-electromotive force protection
diode
PHS: Photo coupler
V: DC power supply
Recommended circuit example:
R1: 2.7 kΩ; 1/2 W
R2: 390 Ω; 1/4 W
C: 50 V; 0.1 µF min.
(However, these are only examples and
are not guaranteed values. Construct
the circuit in accordance with the characteristics of the input device to be connected.)
Note
1. Mounting and PCB Cleaning:
• If a soldering iron is used to solder the circuit, make sure that the circuit
is soldered within 3 s at 280 to 300°C.
• If a soldering tub is used to solder the circuit, make sure that the circuit
is soldered within 5 s at 260°C maximum.
• Do not pass through a reflow furnace. If it is necessary to pass through
a reflow furnace, after reflow processing manually apply soldering only
to the main parts.
• Do not apply strong acid or alkali solvent to clean the flux. Also, do not
apply ultrasonic cleaning.
266
Section 5-3
Remote I/O Modules
2. NC Terminal:
• The NC terminal is used internally. Therefore, do not connect anything
to the NC terminal.
Inner-layer Pattern for Noise Protection
When adding a noise protection circuit to the input or output section, create
inner-layer patterns as follows:
• There must be at least 2.54 mm between the adjacent inner-layer patterns of the external and internal circuits.
• The inner-layer pattern of the external circuit must be kept at least 10 mm
from each terminal of the SRT@-ID16P or SRT@-OD16P,
No parts must be mounted on the soldered surfaces around the SRT@-ID16P
or SRT@-OD16P.
Example: SRT1-ID16P
IN15
DC
IN8
DC
(External circuit)
A
A
10 mm
min.
15
G
5V OUT
COMM
ERR
HOLD
BD L
BS–
8
BD L
i“à ”‰ñ˜H
(Internal
circuit)j
BS+
0
BD H
BD H
7
G
NC
ADR1
ADR2
ADR3
SRT1-ID16P
Terminal
block
10 mm
min.
A
(Internal circuit)
IN7
DC
IN0
DC
(External circuit)
(External circuit)
A
A: 2.54 mm min.
267
Section 5-4
Water-resistant Terminals
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the SRT@-ID16P/OD16P. All
dimensions are in mm.
16
SRT@-ID16P/OD16P
Dimensions
1.6 dia.
2.54 × 15 = 38.1
PCB Dimensions (Top View)
35
2.54 × 15 = 38.1
2.2 dia.
60
+0.1
–0
32-0.9 dia. +0.1
–0
No cumulative tolerance allowed.
5-4
5-4-1
Water-resistant Terminals
SRT2-ID@@CL (-1) Water-resistant Terminals with 4 or 8
Transistor Inputs
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and input specifications for the SRT2ID@@CL (-1).
Ratings
Item
SRT2-ID04CL, SRT2-ID04CL-1, SRT2-ID08CL, SRT2ID08CL-1
I/O points
Power supply type
SRT2-ID04CL: 4 input points (NPN)
SRT2-ID04CL-1: 4 input points (PNP)
SRT2-ID08CL: 8 input points (NPN)
SRT2-ID08CL-1: 8 input points (PNP)
Communications
XS2C-D4S7: Connector Socket Assembly (female)
(Crimp terminals/Solder terminals)
Inputs
XS2G-D4@@: Connector Plug Assembly (male) (Crimp
terminals/Solder terminals)
XS2H-D421-@@@: Connector with cable (male plug on
one end)
XS2W-D42@-@@@: Connectors with cable (Socket/Plug
on both ends)
I/O power
XS2C-D4@@: Connector Socket Assembly (female)
(Crimp terminals/Solder terminals)
XS2F-D42@-@80-A: Connector with cable (female
socket on one end)
Multiple power supplies
Communications power
supply voltage
14 to 26.4 V DC
(Power can be supplied from the communications cable)
Connection
268
Specification
Models
Section 5-4
Water-resistant Terminals
Item
Specification
I/O power supply voltage 20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC +10%/
–15%)
I/O power supply current
2.4 A max.
Current consumption
(See note.)
Communications power: 50 mA max. at 24 V DC
Noise immunity
1.5 kVp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise time
of 1 ns (tested with impulse noise simulator)
Vibration resistance
10 to 150 Hz, 0.7-mm double amplitude or 50 m/s2
Shock resistance
150 m/s2
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
20 MΩ min. (between insulated circuits)
Ambient temperature
Operating environment
Operating: –10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –25 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
Enclosure rating
Mounting method
IP67
M5 screws
Terminal strength
Node number settings
100N
The node number is set on a rotary switch. (Set the node
number before turning ON the Slave.)
SRT2-ID04CL (-1): 180 g max.
SRT2-ID08CL (-1): 240 g max.
Ambient humidity
Weight
Note This is the current consumption when all the maximum simultaneous input
points are ON, excluding the current consumption of external sensors.
Input Specifications
Item
Specifications
Input current
6 mA max./point at 24 V DC
3 mA min./point at 17 V DC
ON delay time
OFF delay time
1.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
ON voltage
ID04CL/ID08CL:
OFF voltage
15 V DC min. (between each input
terminal and V)
ID04CL-1/ID08CL-1: 15 V DC (between each input terminal and G)
ID04CL/ID08CL:
5 V DC max. (between each input
terminal and V)
ID04CL-1/ID08CL-1: 5 V DC max. (between each input
terminal and G)
OFF current
Insulation method
1 mA max.
Photocoupler
Input indicator
Number of circuits
LED (yellow)
ID04CL (-1): 4 points/single common circuit
ID08CL (-1): 8 points/single common circuit
269
Section 5-4
Water-resistant Terminals
Slave Components
The following diagram shows the main components of the SRT2-ID@@CL (@) Water-resistant Terminals with Transistor Inputs. The functions of these
components are described below.
Communications Connector
Used to connect CompoBus/S communications data
(BD H, BD L) and communications power supply
(see page 284).
CompoBus/S Indicators
Indicate the status of the
Slave and communications.
Input Indicators
Indicate the status of
each input. (Lit when
the input is ON.)
Rotary Switch
Used to set the
node number
DIP switch
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 to 2: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 3: Communications mode setting
External Power Supply
Pin 4: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Connector
Connect I/O power supply
for input.
Input Connectors
Connect the cables from switches and sensors here.
The SRT2-ID04CL has 4 connectors and SRT2-ID08CL
has 8 connectors.
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
PWR (green)
Switch Settings
Name
Status
Power
Meaning
ON
The communications power supply is
ON.
OFF
The communications power supply is
OFF.
COMM (yellow) Communications
ON
OFF
Normal communications.
A communications error has occurred
or the Unit is in standby status.
ERR (red)
Communications error
ON
OFF
IN0 to 3 (4
inputs)
IN0 to 7 (8
inputs)
(yellow)
Inputs
A communications error has occurred.
Normal communications or the Unit is
in standby status.
The corresponding input is ON.
ON
OFF
The corresponding input is OFF or the
Unit is in standby status.
The rotary switch and the DIP switch are located under the transparent cover.
ON
RSV RSV DR RSV
Node number setting
Note
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Communications mode setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
1. Always turn OFF the Slave before changing switch settings.
2. Always set all the reserved pins to OFF, or otherwise the Unit may not operate normally.
270
Section 5-4
Water-resistant Terminals
Node Number Settings
Set the node number in hexadecimal with the rotary switch as shown in the
following table.
Node number
0
Setting (Hex)
0
Node number
8
Setting (Hex)
8
1
2
1
2
9
10
9
A
3
4
3
4
11
12
B
C
5
6
5
6
13
14
D
E
7
7
15
F
Note The possible range of node numbers varies with the type of Master and settings in the Master. Refer to 2-1 Communications Specifications for details.
Communications Mode Settings
The following communications modes are set with pin 3 of the DIP.
Pin 3
Communications mode
Communications distance
Communications baud rate
Communications cycle time
OFF
High-speed Com- 100 m max.
munications
Mode
750 kbps
0.5 or 0.8 ms
ON
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
500 m max.
Note Make sure that the communications mode of the Slave is the same as that of
the Master Unit. If the communications modes are not the same, normal communications with the Master Unit will not be possible. The operating status of
the Slave can be verified with LED indicators. Refer to 6-5-1 Indicators.
Internal Circuits
SRT2–ID04CL, SRT2-ID08CL
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-ID04-CL and
SRT2-ID08CL.
External power
supply connector
CompoBus/S
communications
connector
Internal circuitry
Photocoupler
Input connector 0
Photocoupler
Input connector 1
271
Section 5-4
Water-resistant Terminals
SRT2–ID04CL-1, SRT2-ID08CL-1
External power
supply connector
CompoBus/S
communications
connector
Internal circuitry
Photocoupler
Input connector 0
Photocoupler
Input connector 1
Wiring
SRT2-ID04CL
Input 0
Input 1
2-wired sensor
(or limit switch)
Black
(white)
Brown
(red)
Brown
(white)
Blue
(black)
Input 3
Blue
(black)
I/O power supply
Input
2
3-wired sensor with NPN
output (photoelectric sensor or proximity switch)
SRT2-ID04CL-1
Input 0
Input 1
2-wired sensor
(or limit switch)
272
Black
(white)
Brown
(red)
Blue
(black)
Brown
(white)
Input 3
Blue
(black)
I/O power supply
Input
2
3-wired sensor with PNP
output (photoelectric sensor or proximity switch)
Section 5-4
Water-resistant Terminals
SRT2-ID08CL
Input 3
Input
7
Blue
(black)
Input 5
Blue
(black)
I/O power supply
Input
6
Brown
(white)
Input 1
Input 4
2-wired sensor
(or limit switch)
Black
(white)
Brown
(red)
Input 2
Input 0
3-wired sensor with NPN
output (photoelectric sensor or proximity switch)
SRT2-ID08CL-1
2-wired sensor
(or limit switch)
Note
Input
6
Input
7
Blue
(black)
Input 5
Blue
(black)
I/O power supply
Input 3
Brown
(white)
Input 1
Input 4
Black
(white)
Brown
(red)
Input 2
Input 0
3-wired sensor with PNP
output (photoelectric sensor or proximity switch)
1. The V terminals are all connected internally, as are the G terminals. Input
connectors G and V can be used to supply power to sensors, provided that
the total current flow through these connectors is less than 2.4 A when input power supply is provided to the external power supply connector. Connect external power supply if the total current flow is 2.4 A or more.
2. Wire colors have been changed. Colors in parentheses are the old wire
colors.
273
Section 5-4
Water-resistant Terminals
Dimensions
SRT2–ID04CL, SRT2-ID04CL-1
10
Mounting dimensions
Three, 5.3 dia. or M5 holes
(Unit: mm)
SRT2–ID08CL, SRT2-ID08CL-1
10
Mounting dimensions
Three, 5.3 dia. or M5 holes
(Unit: mm)
274
Section 5-4
Water-resistant Terminals
Communications Cable, I/O Power Supply, and I/O Wiring
Communications Cable Wiring
Use the following connectors to connect the communications cable.
Connectors
Type
Connector Socket Assembly (female)
(Crimp terminals/Solder terminals)
Model
XS2C-D4S7
Connector Plug Assembly (male)
(Crimp terminals/Solder terminals)
XS2G-D4S7
T-joint
XS2R-D427-5
XS2R-D427-5 T-joint
XS2C-D4S7 Connector Socket Assembly
(female)
XS2R-D427-5 T-joint
XS2G-D4S7
Connector Plug
Assembly (male)
XS2C-D4S7 Connector Socket Assembly
(female)
XS2G-D4S7
Connector Plug
Assembly (male)
4-conductor VCTF cable
XS2G-D4S7
Connector Plug
Assembly (male)
4-conductor VCTF cable
XS2G-D4S7
Connector Plug
Assembly (male)
SRT2-ID04CL
4-conductor VCTF cable
SRT2-ID08CL
XS2C-D4S7 Connector Socket Assembly
(female)
XS2C-D4S7 Connector Socket Assembly
(female)
Note Tighten the connector securely by hand to a torque of 0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m. If the
connector is not tightened securely, the connector will be loosened or cannot
maintain the enclosure rating. Do not tighten the connector with tools such as
pliers, or otherwise the connector may be broken.
I/O Power Supply Wiring
Use the following XS2-series Round Water-resistant Connectors to wire I/O
power supply.
Connectors
Type
Model
Connectors with Cable (Socket and Plug) XS2W-D42@-@81-@
Connector with Cable (Female socket on XS2F-D42@-@80-@
one end)
T-joint
XS2R-D427-5
SRT2-ID04CL
SRT2-ID08CL
I/O power supply
XS2W-D42(-(81-(
Round Water-resistant
Connectors with Cable
(socket and plug)
I/O power supply
XS2R-D427-5 T-joint
XS2F-D42(-(80-( Round
Water-resistant Connector with
Cable (socket on one end)
XS2R-D427-5 T-joint
XS2W-D42(-(81-( Round
Water-resistant Connectors
with Cable (socket and plug)
275
Water-resistant Terminals
Section 5-4
Note
1. Tighten the connector securely by hand to a torque of 0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m. If
the connector is not tightened securely, the connector will be loosened or
cannot maintain the enclosure rating. Do not tighten the connector with
tools such as pliers, or otherwise the connector may be broken.
2. A single I/O power supply can be used for input and output. Input devices
may, however, malfunction due to noise generated from output devices.
Therefore, it is recommended to use independent I/O power supplies.
3. Commercial available VCTF cable can be used for I/O power cable, provided that the specifications of the VCTF cable, such as the permissible current and voltage drop, satisfy the conditions.
I/O Wiring
Used the following XS2-series Round Water-resistant Connectors to wire I/O.
Connectors
Type
Model
Connector with Cable (Male plug on one XS2H-D421-@80-A
end)
Connectors with Cable (Socket and plug) XS2W-D42@-@81-A
Connector Plug Assembly (Male)
(Crimp terminals/Solder terminals)
XS2R-D4@@
A sensor with a relay connector can directly connect to the Unit.
When connecting a device, check the pin arrangement of the device with the
datasheet.
XS2M-D42(-(81-A
Round Water-resistant
Connector with Cable
(socket and plug)
XS2H-D421-(80-A
Round Water-resistant Connector with
Cable
Sensor with built-in connector
XS2G
Sensor with relay connector
Sensor with cord
Refer to the Sensor General Catalog for sensors with connectors and Round
Water-resistant Connectors (sensor I/O connectors) in detail.
Note
1. Tighten the connector securely by hand to a torque of 0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m. If
the connector is not tightened securely, the connector will be loosened or
cannot maintain the enclosure rating. Do not tighten the connector with
tools such as pliers, or otherwise the connector may be broken.
2. Attach the XS2Z-12 Water-resistant Cover or XS2Z-15 Dust Cover to unused connectors.
XS2Z-12 Water-resistant Cover
The connector with the Water-resistant
Cover will be of IP67 construction. Attach
the Water-resistant Cover to the connector and tighten the Water-resistant Cover
securely by hand to a torque of 0.39 to
0.49 N • m.
276
XS2Z-15 Dust Cover
Press the Dust Cover deeply
enough to the Dust Cover. The
Dust Cover is not of IP67
construction.
Water-resistant Terminals
Section 5-4
Note
1. Check that the junction of the contact block and cover is free of external
force imposed, or otherwise the IP67 enclosure rating will be lost.
2. Water-resistant Terminals used as Slaves are of IP67 construction. Do not
attempt to use the Water-resistant Terminals for applications where the
Water-resistant Terminals are always underwater.
3. The Unit is a plastic resin mold product. Do not tread on the Unit or put objects on the Unit.
OMRON’s 2-wired Proximity Sensors with relay connectors are classified into
M1GJ models, which have the IEC pin arrangement, and M1J models, which
have the OMRON pin arrangement. The following Water-resistant Terminals
are compatible with these different pin arrangements.
5-4-2
2-wired sensor (with relay connector)
IEC pin arrangement (M1GJ model)
Compatible Water-resistant Terminals
SRT2-ID04CL-1
SRT2-ID08CL-1
OMRON pin arrangement (M1J model)
SRT2-ID04CL
SRT2-ID08CL
SRT2-OD@@CL (-1) Water-resistant Terminals with 4 or 8
Transistor Outputs
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and input specifications for the SRT2OD@@CL (-1).
Ratings
Item
Models
I/O points
Connection
Specification
SRT2-OD04CL, SRT2-OD04CL-1, SRT2-OD08CL,
SRT2-OD08CL-1
SRT2-OD04CL: 4 output points (NPN)
SRT2-OD04CL-1: 4 output points (PNP)
SRT2-OD08CL: 8 output points (NPN)
SRT2-OD08CL-1: 8 output points (PNP)
Communications
XS2C-D4S7: Connector Socket Assembly (female)
(Crimp terminals/Solder terminals)
Outputs
XS2G-D4@@: Connector Plug Assembly (male)
(Crimp terminals/Solder terminals)
XS2H-D421-@@@: Connector with cable (male plug on
one end)
XS2W-D42@-@@@:Connectors with cable (Socket/Plug
on both ends)
I/O power
XS2C-D4@@: Connector Socket Assembly (female)
(Crimp terminals/Solder terminals)
XS2F-D42@-@80-A: Connector with cable
(female socket on one end)
Power supply type
Communications power
supply voltage
I/O power supply voltage
Multiple power supplies
14 to 26.4 V DC
(Power can be supplied from the communications cable)
I/O power supply current
2.4 A max.
Current consumption
(See note.)
Communications power: 50 mA max. at 24 V DC
Noise immunity
1.5 kVp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise time
of 1 ns (tested with impulse noise simulator)
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC +10%/–15%)
277
Section 5-4
Water-resistant Terminals
Item
Vibration resistance
Specification
10 to 150 Hz, 0.7-mm double amplitude or 50 m/s2
Shock resistance
150 m/s2
500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
Ambient temperature
20 MΩ min. (between insulated circuits)
Operating: –10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –25 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity
Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Operating environment
Enclosure rating
No corrosive gases
IP67
Mounting method
Terminal strength
M5 screws
100N
Node number settings
The node number is set on a rotary switch. (Set the node
number before turning ON the Slave.)
Weight
SRT2-OD04CL (-1): 180 g max.
SRT2-OD08CL (-1): 240 g max.
Note This is the current consumption when all the maximum simultaneous output
points are ON, excluding the current consumption of external loads.
Output Specifications
Item
Output current
Slave Components
Residual voltage
Specifications
OD04CL (-1): 0.3 A/point 1.2 A/common
OD08CL (-1): 0.3 A/point 2.4 A/common
1.2 V max.
Leakage current
ON delay time
0.1 mA max.
0.5 ms max.
OFF delay time
Insulation method
1.5 ms max.
Photocoupler
Output indicator
Number of circuits
LED (yellow)
OD04CL (-1): 4 points/single common circuit
OD08CL (-1): 8 points/single common circuit
The following diagram shows the main components of the SRT2-OD@@CL
(-@) Water-resistant Terminals with Transistor Outputs. The functions of these
components are described below.
CompoBus/S Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave and communications.
Communications Connector
Used to connect CompoBus/S communications data (BD H, BD L) and communications power supply (see page 284).
Output Indicators
Indicate the status of
each output.
(Lit when the output
is ON.)
Rotary Switch
Used to set the
node number
DIP switch
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 to 2: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 3: Communications mode setting
Pin 4: Reserved (Always OFF.)
278
External Power Supply Connector
Connect I/O power supply for output.
Output Connectors
Connect the cables from relays and display terminals
here. The SRT2-OD04CL has 4 connectors and
SRT2-OD08CL has 8 connectors.
Section 5-4
Water-resistant Terminals
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
PWR (green)
Name
Power
COMM (yellow)
Communications
ERR (red)
Communications
error
OUT0 to 3 (4 outputs) Output
OUT0 to 7 (8 outputs)
(yellow)
Switch Settings
Status
Meaning
ON
The communications power supply is
ON.
OFF
The communications power supply is
OFF.
ON
Normal communications.
OFF
ON
A communications error has occurred
or the Unit is in standby status.
A communications error has occurred.
OFF
Normal communications or the Unit is in
standby status.
ON
OFF
The corresponding input is ON.
The corresponding input is OFF or the
Unit is in standby status.
The rotary switch and the DIP switch are located under the transparent cover.
ON
RSV RSV DRHOLD
Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Communications mode setting
Node number setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Note
1. Always turn OFF the Slave before changing switch settings.
2. Always set all the reserved pins to OFF, or otherwise the Unit may not operate normally.
Node Number Settings
Set the node number in hexadecimal with the rotary switch as shown in the
following table.
Node number
Setting (Hex)
Node number
Setting (Hex)
0
1
0
1
8
9
8
9
2
3
2
3
10
11
A
B
4
5
4
5
12
13
C
D
6
7
6
7
14
15
E
F
Note The possible range of node numbers varies with the type of Master and settings in the Master. Refer to 2-1 Communications Specifications for details.
279
Section 5-4
Water-resistant Terminals
Communications Mode Settings
The following communications modes are set with pin 3 of the DIP switch as
shown below.
Pin 3
Communications mode
Communications distance
Communications baud rate
Communications cycle time
OFF
High-speed Com- 100 m max.
munications
Mode
750 kbps
0.5 or 0.8 ms
ON
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
500 m max.
Note Make sure that the communications mode of the Slave is the same as that of
the Master Unit. If the communications modes are not the same, normal communications with the Master Unit will not be possible. The operating status of
the Slave can be verified with LED indicators. Refer to 6-5-1 Indicators.
Hold/Clear Outputs for Communications Error
Pin 4 is used to set the output data status when a communications error
occurs, as shown in the following table.
Pin 4 (HOLD)
OFF
ON
Output setting
Clear output status.
Maintain output status.
Internal Circuits
SRT2–OD04CL and SRT2–OD08CL
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-OD04CL and
SRT2-OD08CL.
Photocoupler
ST
External power
supply connector
CompoBus/S
communications
connector
280
Internal circuitry
Output connector 0
Photocoupler
Output connector 1
Section 5-4
Water-resistant Terminals
SRT2-OD04CL-1 and SRT2-OD08CL-1
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-OD04CL-1 and
SRT2-OD08CL-1.
External power
supply connector
CompoBus/S
communications
connector
Internal circuitry
Photocoupler
Output connector 0
Photocoupler
ST
Output connector 3
(Output connector 7)
Wiring
SRT2-OD04CL
Output 0
Output 1
Output
2
Output 3
I/O power supply
Solenoid
Valve
281
Section 5-4
Water-resistant Terminals
SRT2-OD04CL-1
Output 0
Output 1
Output
2
Output 3
I/O power supply
Solenoid
Valve
Note The V terminals are all connected internally, as are the G terminals. Output
connectors G and V are available to external power supply, provided that the
total current flow through these connectors is less than 2.0 A when output
power supply is provided to the external power supply connector. Connect
external power supply if the total current flow is 2.0 A or more.
SRT2-OD08CL
Output 2
Output 0
Output 4
Output 6
Output 5
Output 1
Output 3
Output 7
I/O power supply
Valve
Solenoid
SRT2-OD08CL-1
Output 2
Output 0
Output 4
Output 6
Output 5
Output 1
Output 3
Output 7
I/O power supply
Solenoid
282
Valve
Section 5-4
Water-resistant Terminals
Note The V terminals are all connected internally, as are the G terminals. Output
connectors G and V are available to external power supply, provided that the
total current flow through these connectors is less than 2.4 A when output
power supply is provided to the external power supply connector. Connect
external power supply if the total current flow is 2.4 A or more.
Dimensions
SRT2–OD04CL, SRT2-OD04CL-1
10
Mounting dimensions
Three, 5.3 dia. or M5 holes
(Unit: mm)
283
Section 5-4
Water-resistant Terminals
SRT2–OD08CL, SRT2-OD08CL-1
10
Mounting dimensions
Three, 5.3 dia. or M5 holes
(Unit: mm)
Note For details on the communications cable, I/O power supply, and I/O wiring,
refer to Communications Cable, I/O Power Supply, and I/O Wiring on
page 275 under 5-4-1 SRT2-ID@@CL (-1) Water-resistant Terminals with 4 or
8 Transistor Inputs.
5-4-3
Shielded Connector Wiring and Assembly
Connect external I/O power supply and I/O Units to Water-resistant Terminals
through Shielded Connector (round Water-resistant connectors). Water-resistant Terminals has a male plug for the external power supply connector and a
female socket for the I/O connector. Select ones from the following XS2-series
Round Water-resistant Connectors according to the I/O power supply method
or the I/O Unit.
284
Section 5-4
Water-resistant Terminals
• Connectors for External Power Supply
Connector type
Round Water-resistant Connectors with
Cable (socket and plug)
Round Water-resistant Connector with
Cable (socket on one end)
Connector Socket Assembly (female)
(Crimp terminals/Solder terminals)
Model
XS2W-D42@-@81-@
XS2F-D42@-@80-@
XS2C-D4@@
SRT2-ID08CL
SRT2-ID04CL
I/O power supply
XS2W-D42(-(81-( Round
Water-resistant Connectors
with Cable (socket and plug)
XS2R-D427-5 T-joint
I/O power supply
XS2F-D42(-(80-( Round
Water-resistant Connector
with Cable (socket on one
end)
I/O power supply
XS2R-D427-5 T-joint
XS2F-D42(-(81-( Round
Water-resistant Connector
with Cable (socket on one
end)
• I/O Connectors
Connector type
Connector with cable (male plug on one end)
Model
XS2H-D421-@80-A
Round Water-resistant Connectors with Cable (socket and
plug)
XS2W-D42@-@81-A
Connector Socket Assembly (female) (Crimp terminals/Solder terminals)
XS2G-D4@
The sensor with a relay connector can directly connect to the Unit.
When connecting a device, check the pin arrangement of the device with the
datasheet.
XS2W-D42(-(81-A
Round Water-resistant
Connectors with Cable
(socket and plug)
XS2H-D421-(80-A
Connector with cable
(male plug on one
end)
Sensor with built-in connector
XS2G
Sensor with relay connector
Sensor with cord
Press the cable connector to the terminal connector until the cable connector
comes in contact with the bottom end of the cable connector. Tighten the connector screws to the specified tightening torque (0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m).
!Caution Tighten the connector securely by hand to a torque of 0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m. If the
connector is not tightened securely, the connector will be loosened or cannot
keep the enclosure rating. Do not tighten the connector with tools such as pliers, or otherwise the connector may be broken.
!Caution Connectors vary in direction. Check the direction before inserting the connector.
!Caution Do not pull or bend the cable. Provide some margin when laying the cable.
Check that the cable is free of heavy objects, or otherwise the cable may be
broken.
285
Water-resistant Terminals
Section 5-4
Note
1. A single I/O power supply can be used for input and output. Input devices
may, however, malfunction due to noise generated from output devices.
Therefore, it is recommended to use independent I/O power supplies.
2. Refer to the Sensor Catalog for sensors with connectors and Round Water-resistant Connectors (sensor I/O connectors) in detail.
Round Communications
Connector to Waterresistant Terminals or Tjoints
The communications cable connects to Water-resistant Terminals or T-joints
through a round communications connector. Press the cable connector to the
terminal or joint connector until the cable connector comes in contact with the
bottom end of the cable connector. Tighten the connector screws to the specified tightening torque (0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m).
!Caution The connector direction varies with the type of Connector Terminal. Check the
connecting direction before inserting the connector.
!Caution Do not pull or bend the communications cable. Provide some margin when
laying the communications cable. Check that the communications cable is
free of heavy objects, or otherwise the cable may be broken.
Shielded Terminator
Connection
The Shielded Terminator has round communications connector (or shielded
connector). Connect the Shield Terminator to T-joints or the round communications connectors of communications cable. Press the cable connector to the
terminal or joint connector until the cable connector comes in contact with the
bottom end of the cable connector. Tighten the connector screws to the specified tightening torque (0.39 to 0.49 N⋅m).
!Caution The connector direction varies with the type of Connector Terminal. Check the
connecting direction before inserting the connector.
286
Section 5-5
Sensor Terminals
5-5
5-5-1
Sensor Terminals
SRT@-@D08S Sensor Terminals with 8 Transistor Inputs or 4
Transistor Inputs and 4 Transistor Outputs
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and I/O specifications for the SRT@@D08S
Ratings
Item
Models
Specification
Power supply type
SRT1-ID08S
SRT1-ND08S
SRT2-ID08S
SRT2-ND08S
SRT@-ID08S: 8 input points
SRT@-ND08S: 4 input and 4 output points
SRT1-@D08S: High-speed Communications Mode
SRT2-@D08S: High-speed Communications Mode or
Long-distance Communications Mode
Network power supply
Communications
power supply voltage
14 to 26.4 V DC (see note 1)
(Power can be supplied from the communications cable)
Current consumption
(see note 2)
Communications: 50 mA max. at 24 V DC
Noise immunity
±1.5 kVp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise time of
1 ns (via impulse noise simulator)
10 to 55 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude
I/O points
Communications
mode
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Dielectric strength
200 m/s2
500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
Ambient temperature
Operating: 0 to 55°C
Storage: –20 to 65°C
Ambient humidity
Operating: 35% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Operating environment
Mounting method
No corrosive gases
M4 screws or 35-mm DIN track mounting
Mounting strength
50 N
Track direction: 10 N • m
Terminal strength
Pulling: 50 N
Tightening: 0.6 to 1.18 N • m
Node number settings The node number is set on a DIP switch.
(Set the node number before turning ON the Slave.)
Weight
SRT@-ID08S: 100 g max.
SRT@-ND08S: 80 g max.
Note
1. Maintain a voltage of 20.4 to 26.4 V DC when using a 2-wired Proximity
Sensor.
2. This is the current consumption when all contacts are OFF, not including
the current consumption of the sensors. Be sure to take the sensor’s current into account when supplying power from a CompoBus/S cable. The
maximum current consumption of the Sensor Terminal can be calculated
from the following equation:
Max. current consumption = current consumption of the Sensor Terminal
+ ({input current + output current + sensor’s current consumption} × the
number of sensors being used)
287
Section 5-5
Sensor Terminals
The total current consumption of the sensors must be less than 500 mA.
Input Specifications
Item
ON voltage
Specification
12 V DC min. (between each input terminal and VCC, the
external sensor power supply)
OFF voltage
4 V DC max. (between each input terminal and VCC, the
external sensor power supply)
OFF current
Input current
1 V max.
10 mA max./point
ON delay time
OFF delay time
1 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Insulation resistance
Insulation method
20 MΩ min. at 250 V DC (between insulated circuits)
Photocoupler
Output Specifications
Item
Rated output current
288
Specification
20 mA max.
Residual voltage
1 V max. (between each output terminal and VCC, the
external sensor power supply)
Leakage current
0.1 mA max. (between each output terminal and VCC,
the external sensor power supply)
ON delay time
OFF delay time
1.0 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
Insulation resistance
Insulation method
20 MΩ min. at 250 V DC
Photocoupler
Section 5-5
Sensor Terminals
Slave Components
The following diagram shows the main components of the Sensor Terminals.
The functions of these components are described below.
CompoBus/S Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave and communications.
DIP Switch
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 to 4: Node number setting
Pin 5: Communications mode setting (SRT2 Series) or
Reserved (Always OFF) (SRT1 Series)
Pin 6: Hold/clear outputs for communications error
Mounting Screw Holes
Used when screwing the Unit to a control panel.
I/O Indicators
Indicate the status of each contact.
(Lit when the input or output is ON.)
The SRT@-ID08S has 8 input indicators and
the SRT@-ND08S has 4 input indicators and
4 output indicators.
Sensor Terminal I/O Connectors
Connect the cables from the sensors here.
DIN Track Mounting Hook
Used when mounting the Unit to a DIN track.
CompoBus/S Terminal Block
Connect the CompoBus/S communications cable and the communications power supply (including the I/O power supply).
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
Status
Meaning
PWR (green)
ON
OFF
The communications power supply is ON.
The communications power supply is OFF.
COMM (yellow)
ON
OFF
Normal communications
A communications error has occurred or the
Unit is in standby status.
ERR (red)
ON
OFF
A communications error has occurred.
Normal communications or the Unit is in
standby status.
The corresponding input is ON.
IN0 to 3 (4 inputs/outputs) ON
IN0 to 7 (8 inputs)
OFF
(yellow)
The corresponding input is OFF or the Unit is in
standby status.
OUT0 to 3
(4 inputs/outputs)
(yellow)
The corresponding output is ON.
The corresponding output is OFF or the Unit is
in standby status.
ON
OFF
289
Section 5-5
Sensor Terminals
DIP Switch
Node number setting
Hold/clear outputs for
communications error
Communications mode setting (SRT2 Series)
or Reserved (Always OFF) (SRT1 Series)
Note Always turn OFF the Slave before changing DIP switch settings.
Node Number Settings
Set the node number with pins 1 through 4, as shown in the following table.
Node number
Pin 4
(8)
Pin 3
(4)
Pin 2
(2)
Pin 1
(1)
0
1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
2
3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
4
5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
6
7
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
8
9
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
10
11
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
12
13
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
14
15
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Note The actual node number setting range depends on the type of PLC in which
the Master is mounted as well as the Master’s settings. Refer to 2-1 Communications Specifications for details.
Communications Mode Settings (SRT2 Series Only)
The following communications modes are set with pin 5 as shown below.
Pin 5
OFF
ON
CommunicaCommunications mode
tions distance
High-speed Com- 100 m max.
munications
Mode
Communications baud rate
750 kbps
Communications cycle time
0.5 or 0.8 ms
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
500 m max.
The communications mode settings using pin 5 only apply to the SRT2-series
Slaves and cannot be used with the SRT1-series Slaves, which operate in
High-speed Communications Mode at all times.
Note Make sure that the communications mode of the Slave is the same as that of
the Master Unit. If the communications modes are not the same, normal communications with the Master Unit will not be possible. The operating status of
the Slave can be verified with LED indicators. Refer to 6-5-1 Indicators.
290
Section 5-5
Sensor Terminals
Hold/Clear Outputs for Communications Error
Pin 6 is used to set the output data status when a communications error
occurs, as shown in the following table.
Pin 6
Output setting
OFF
Clear output status.
ON
Sensor Compatibility
Maintain output status.
Use the following flowchart to determine whether a sensor is compatible with
the Sensor Terminal.
Can the sensor be used with 14 to 26.4 V DC?
(20.4 to 26.4 V DC for 2-wired proximity sensors)
No
Incompatible
Yes
Are the sensor’s I/O specifications compatible with
the Sensor Terminal’s I/O specifications? (See
page 287 and page 295 for details on the
specifications.)
No
Incompatible
Yes
What is the size of the conductors in the
sensor's cable?
0.14 to 0.2 mm2
0.3 to 0.5 mm2
Compatible
Use an XS8A-0441 Connector
to connect the sensor.
Compatible
Use an XS8A-0442 Connector
to connect the sensor.
Other
Incompatible
Note The XS8A-0441 and XS8A-0442 Connectors are not provided with the Unit.
The Connectors must be ordered separately.
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-ID08S (8
inputs).
Internal
circuitry
Internal Circuits
Terminals
for 1 sensor
291
Section 5-5
Sensor Terminals
Internal
circuitry
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT@-ND08S (4
inputs and 4 outputs).
Terminals
for 1 sensor
Terminal Arrangement
and Wiring
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-ID08S (8 inputs).
I/O Connectors
Sensor
CompoBus/S
communications
Blue (black)
Brown (white)
Blue (black)
Black (white)
CompoBus/S
communications power
supply (including I/O
power supply)
Brown (red)
Terminal numbers
CompoBus/S
Sensor
3-wired sensor
2-wired sensor
(Without diagnostic (Without diagnostic
output function)
output function)
Note In accordance with the changes in the standards for photoelectric sensors
and proximity sensors, wire colors have been changed. Colors in parentheses
are the old wire colors.
The following table shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the Sensor
Terminal’s I/O Connector.
Terminal number
292
Function
1
2
IN (Input)
NC (Not used.)
3
VCC (V) (External sensor power supply, + terminal)
4
GND (G) (External sensor power supply, – terminal)
Section 5-5
Sensor Terminals
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
SRT@-ND08S (4 inputs and 4 outputs).
I/O Connectors
CompoBus/S
communications
Sensor
Blue
Black
Purple
Brown
Pink (Gray)
Blue (black)
Brown (red)
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
(including I/O
power supply)
Black (white)
Terminal numbers
CompoBus/S
Sensor
Sensor with teaching
function
Sensor with external
diagnostic function
Sensor with bankswitching function
Note In accordance with the changes in the standards for photoelectric sensors
and proximity sensors, wire colors have been changed. Colors in parentheses
are the old wire colors.
The following table shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the Sensor
Terminal’s I/O Connector.
Terminal number
Function
1
2
IN (Input)
OUT (Output)
3
VCC (V) (External sensor power supply, + terminal)
4
GND (G) (External sensor power supply, – terminal)
293
Section 5-5
Sensor Terminals
SRT@-ID08S Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the SRT@-ID08S (8 inputs).
All dimensions are in mm.
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
SRT@-ND08S Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the SRT@-ND08S (4 inputs
and 4 outputs). All dimensions are in mm.
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
294
Section 5-5
Sensor Terminals
5-5-2
SRT@-OD08S Sensor Terminal with 8 Transistor Outputs
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and output specifications for the SRT@OD08S.
Ratings
Item
Specification
Models
SRT1-OD08S
SRT2-OD08S
Output points
Communications mode
8 points
SRT1-OD08S: High-speed Communications Mode
SRT2-OD08S: High-speed Communications Mode or
Long-distance Communications Mode
Power supply type
Local power supply
Communications power
20.4 to 26.4 V DC (24 V DC +10%/–15%)
supply voltage
(Power can be supplied from the communications cable)
(including I/O power supply)
I/O power supply current
Current consumption
(See note.)
Noise immunity
2.4 A max.
50 mA max. at 24 V DC
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5 mm double amplitude
±1.5 kVp-p a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise time of
1 ns (via impulse noise simulator)
Malfunction: 200 m/s2 (approx. 20G)
Destruction: 300 m/s2 (approx. 30G)
500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
Dielectric strength
Ambient temperature
Operating: 0 to 55°C
Storage: –20 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity
Operating: 35% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
Operating environment
Mounting method
Mounting strength
Terminal strength
Node number settings
Weight
M4 screws or 35-mm DIN track mounting
50 N
Track direction: 10 N • m
Pulling: 50 N
Tightening torque: 0.6 to 1.18 N • m
Excluding strength of connector lock
The node number is set on a DIP switch. (Set the node
number before turning ON the Slave.)
100 g max.
Note The current consumption is the value when all points are OFF, excluding the
current consumption of the external sensor connected to the Sensor Terminal
inputs and the current consumption of the load connected to the Sensor Terminal outputs.
Output Specifications
Item
Output current
Specification
0.3 A max./point
Residual voltage
Leakage current
0.6 V max.
0.1 mA max.
ON delay time
OFF delay time
0.5 ms max.
1.5 ms max.
295
Section 5-5
Sensor Terminals
Slave Components
Item
Insulation method
Photocoupler
Specification
Output indicators
LED (yellow)
The following diagram shows the main components of the SRT@-OD08S Sensor Terminals. The functions of these components are described below.
CompoBus/S Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave and communications.
Indicate the status of the Slave and communications.
DIP Switch
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 to 4: Node number setting
Pin 5: Communications mode setting (SRT2 Series)
or Reserved (Always OFF) (SRT1 Series)
Pin 6: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Mounting Screw Holes
Used when screwing the
Unit to a control panel.
Output Indicators
Indicate the output status
of each contact. (Lit when
the output is ON.)
Output Connector for Remote Terminal
Connect the cable connector attached to output wires
leading to output devices such as solenoids, valves, and
lamps
Cable connectors XS8A-0441 (compatible wire size: 0.3 to
0.5 mm2) and XS8A-0442 (compatible wire size: 0.14 to
0.2 mm2) are sold separately.
DIN Track Mounting Hook
Used when mounting the Unit to a DIN track.
Power Supply Terminal Block
Used to connect the CompoBus/S communications power
supply (including I/O power supply).
Power supply from the special Flat Cable is not possible,
so a separate power supply must be connected.
CompoBus/S Terminal Block
Used to connect the CompoBus/S communications cable.
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
PWR (green)
Status
Meaning
ON
The external power supply is ON.
COMM (yellow)
OFF
ON
The external power supply is OFF.
Normal communications
OFF
A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in
standby status.
ON
OFF
A communications error has occurred.
Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
ERR (red)
296
Section 5-5
Sensor Terminals
Indicator
OUT 0 to 7
(yellow)
Status
Meaning
ON
The corresponding output is ON.
OFF
The corresponding output is OFF or the Unit is in standby
status.
DIP Switch
Node number setting
Hold/Clear outputs for
communications error
Communications mode setting (SRT2 Series)
or Reserved (Always OFF) (SRT1 Series)
Note
1. Always turn OFF the Slave before changing DIP switch settings.
2. In the SRT1 Series, pin 5 must always be left OFF. Otherwise, the Unit may
not function correctly.
Hold/Clear Outputs for Communications Error
Pin 6 is used to set the output data status when a communications error
occurs, as shown in the following table.
Pin 6 (HOLD)
OFF
Output setting
Clear output status.
ON
Maintain output status.
Communications Mode Settings (SRT2 Series Only)
The following communications modes are set with pin 5.
Pin 5
Communications mode
Communications distance
Communications baud rate
Communications cycle time
OFF
High-speed Com- 100 m max.
munications
Mode
750 kbps
0.5 or 0.8 ms
ON
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
500 m max.
The communications mode settings using pin 5 only apply to the SRT2-series
Slaves and cannot be used with the SRT1-series Slaves, which operate in
High-speed Communications Mode at all times.
Note Make sure that the communications mode of the Slave is the same as that of
the Master Unit. If the communications modes are not the same, normal communications with the Master Unit will not be possible. The operating status of
the Slave can be verified with LED indicators. Refer to 6-5-1 Indicators for
details.
297
Section 5-5
Sensor Terminals
Node Number Settings
Set the node number with pins 1 through 4, as shown in the following table.
Node number
Pin 4
(8)
Pin 3
(4)
Pin 2
(2)
Pin 1
(1)
0
1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
2
3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
4
5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
6
7
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
8
9
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
10
11
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
12
13
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
14
15
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Note The actual node number setting range depends on the type of PLC in which
the Master is mounted as well as the Master’s settings. Refer to 2-1 Communications Specifications for details.
Compatible External
Devices and Cables
Remote Terminals with Connector Output Transistors use the XS8A-0441 and
XS8A-0442 Connectors (sold separately) to connect to external devices. Use
the following flowchart to check the compatibility of external devices and
cables. Refer to 3-4-3 Cable Connector Wiring and Assembly for details on
the assembly, wiring, and installation of cable connectors.
Locking lever
298
Section 5-5
Sensor Terminals
Can the external device or cable No
be used with 20.4 to 26.4 V DC?
Incompatible
Yes
Are the output specifications of
the external device or cable
compatible with those of the
Remote Terminal?
Yes
No
Incompatible
What is the size of the
conductors in the cable?
0.3 to 0.5 mm2
0.14 to 0.2 mm2
Compatible.
Connect with XS8A-0441
Connector.
Compatible.
Connect with XS8A-0442
Connector.
Other
Incompatible
Note The XS8A-0441 and XS8A-0442 Connectors are not provided with the Unit.
The Connectors must be ordered separately.
Internal Circuits
Internal
circuitry
DC static
converter
(Insulated)
Photocoupler
24 V DC
Terminals
for 1 sensor
299
Section 5-5
Sensor Terminals
Terminal Arrangement
and Wiring
internal circuitry. The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and
wiring for the SRT@-OD08S.
Output Connectors
Terminal numbers
CompoBus/S
CompoBus/S
communications
power supply
(including I/O
power supply)
Output
device
Solenoid
Output
device
Valve
CompoBus/S
communications
The following table shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
Remote Terminal’s output connector.
Terminal
number
1
Function
VCC (V) (External device power supply, + terminal)
2
3
GND (G) (External device power supply, – terminal)
OUT (Output)
4
Note
1. Terminals 3 and 4 are connected internally, so external devices should be
connected to terminal 1 (+24 V) and either terminal 3 or 4.
2. The BS– and BS+ terminals of the communications power supply (including the I/O power supply) cannot be supplied from a flat cable, so they must
be supplied separately.
3. When inductive loads such as solenoids and valves are used, either use
loads with built-in diodes that absorb the back-electromotive force or connect a diode externally.
300
Section 5-6
Fiber Amplifier Communications Units
SRT@-OD08S Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the SRT@-OD08S. All
dimensions are in mm.
(74.8)
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
5-6
5-6-1
Fiber Amplifier Communications Units
E3X-SRT21 Fiber Amplifier Communications Unit
The Fiber Amplifier Communications Units are Communications Units for
E39-TM1 Terminal Block Units or E3X-DA-N-series Digital Fiber Amplifier
Units used with Optical Fiber Sensors.
Note In the following description, Digital Fiber Amplifier Units and Terminal Block
Units are referred to collectively as Fiber Amplifier Units
The E3X-SRT21 uses CompoBus/S and receives input from the Fiber Amplifier Unit. (Models that function as DeviceNet or RS-422A Slaves are also
available.)
Fiber Amplifier Units with connectors can also be used. Data is exchanged
with the Fiber Amplifier Units by connecting the Fiber Amplifier Communications Unit to the left side of the multiple Fiber Amplifier Units.
The E3X-MC11 Mobile Console for Fiber Amplifier Units can also be connected.
301
Section 5-6
Fiber Amplifier Communications Units
This section provides an overview of the specifications and functions of the
Fiber Amplifier Communications Unit for CompoBus/S. For details, refer to the
Fiber Amplifier Communications Unit Operation Manual (Cat. No. Z152)
CompoBus/S Master Unit
PLC
CompoBus/S
Remote I/O
communications
Fiber Sensors
CompoBus/S Slave
E3X-MC11
Mobile
Console
E3X-DA-N-series Digital Fiber
Amplifiers (use Cordless Slave
Connectors)
E3X-SRT21 Fiber Amplifier
Communications Unit for
CompoBus/S
The unit numbers (addresses) are allocated to the Digital Fiber Amplifiers in
order starting from the left, as follows:
Amplifiers that use one node: Unit numbers 1 to 6
Amplifiers that use two nodes: Unit numbers 1 to 14
Specifications
Item
Models
I/O points and I/O connection conditions
302
Specification
E3X-SRT21
6 inputs + 2 status points input from Fiber Amplifier Unit or
14 inputs + 2 status points input from Fiber Amplifier Unit
(switch using DIP switch setting)
Section 5-6
Fiber Amplifier Communications Units
Item
Connection
Specification
Inputs:
Fiber Amplifier Units
Communications:
Communications Connector (standard connector provided with Unit)
I/O power:
Communications Connector (standard connector provided with Unit)
Power supply type
Network power supply
Communications power 14 to 26.4 V DC
supply voltage
(Power can be supplied from the communications cable)
I/O power supply voltage
Current consumption
(See note.)
Communications power: 30 mA max. at 24 V DC
Maximum input delay
time
Up to 8 Sensors connected:
0.1 × n + 1.5 (ms) (n: unit number)
9 or more Sensors connected:
0.2 × n + 1.5 (ms) (n: unit number)
Operating: –20 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –30 to 70°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Operating environment
Operating: 35% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
Node number settings
The node number is set on a rotary switch. (Set the node
number before turning ON the Slave.)
Dimensions
Weight
30 × 34.6 × 71.3 mm (W × H × D)
150 g max.
Note This is the current consumption when all the maximum simultaneous input
points are ON, excluding the current consumption of external sensors.
Slave Part Names and Functions
C E
0
A
9
11
5 7
13 1
5
Rotary switches
1
3
E3X-MC11 Mobile
Console Connector
Used to connect the
Mobile Console.
4 6
1 2 3 4 NODE
ADR
8
ON
2
DIP switch
PWR
Sensor reset switch
Resets the connected sensor by
turning the power supply OFF and ON.
COMM
ERR
Communications Connector
Communications connector for
CompoBus/S used to supply power
from the CompoBus/S communications
power terminal to all the Sensors
connected to the Communications Unit
LED indicators
U.ERR
SS
Power supply connectors
The E3X-SRT21 is supplied
power from the
communications connector, so
power supply cables are not
used.
303
Section 5-6
Fiber Amplifier Communications Units
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
PWR (green)
Name
Power
Status
ON
OFF
COMM (yellow) Communications
ON
OFF
ERR (red)
Communications error
ON
Normal CompoBus/S communications or the Unit is in standby status.
A Unit error has occurred.
The Unit is communicating normally or
is in standby status.
Normal Sensor communications
Unit error
ON
OFF
SS (green)
Sensor communications
status
ON
SS (---)
A CompoBus/S communications error
has occurred or the Unit is in standby
status.
A CompoBus/S communications error
has occurred.
OFF
U.ERR (red)
SS (red)
Meaning
The communications power supply is
ON.
The communications power supply is
OFF.
Normal CompoBus/S communications.
ON
OFF
A Sensor communications error has
occurred.
Sensors are in communications wait
status or power is turned OFF.
Switch Settings
Rotary Switches
2
C E
0
A
4 6
CompoBus/S node number setting
5 7
9
11
3
13 1
5
8
1
Number of connected Sensors
registered.
Registers the number of connected
Sensors. Registering the number of
Sensors allows detection of errors in the
configuration. Up to 14 Fiber Amplifier
Units can be connected, so an error will
occur if this switch is set to 15 or 16.
Note Fiber Amplifier Units that use two unit numbers (E3X-DA6TW, E3X-DA8TW)
must be counted as two Units when counting the number of Sensors.
DIP Switch
ON
Operating mode setting
Communications mode setting
Reserved for system use
Reserved for system use
1234
Operating Mode Setting (Pin 1)
This pin sets the operating mode. The maximum number of Fiber Amplifier
Units that can be connected and the nodes that each Unit is allocated
depends on the operating mode, as follows:
Pin 1 (MODE)
304
OFF
Maximum number of Fiber Amplifier
Units connected
6 Units
Number of allocated
nodes
1 input node
ON
14 Units
2 input nodes
Section 5-6
Fiber Amplifier Communications Units
Note Fiber Amplifier Units that use two unit numbers (E3X-DA6TW, E3X-DA8TW)
must be counted as two Units when counting the number of Sensors.
Communications Mode Setting (Pin 2)
This pin is used to switch the CompoBus/S communications mode
OFF
Pin 2 (DR)
Communications mode setting
High-speed Communications Mode
ON
Long-distance Communications Mode
Note The Slave communications mode setting must match the communications
mode setting of the Master Unit. If the communications modes are different,
the Master Unit will not communicate properly. Check the operating status of
the Slaves using the indicators.
I/O Allocations
Pin 1 OFF (Up to 6 Sensors)
Up to 6 Sensors can be connected in this mode. The data is 8 bits and is
stored in the IN Area, which is set as the node number area
Bit
00
Contents
Unit 1 ON/OFF data
01
02
Unit 2 ON/OFF data
Unit 3 ON/OFF data
03
04
Unit 4 ON/OFF data
Unit 5 ON/OFF data
05
06
Unit 6 ON/OFF data
Sensor Communications Error Flag
07
Sensor Communications Flag
Sensor Communications Error Flag
Bit 06 turns ON when the registered number of Sensors does not match the
number of Sensors that are enabled to communicate, or when a communications error occurs after communications have been established with the Sensors.
Sensor Communications Flag
Bit 07 turns ON when communications are established with the Sensors.
Pin 1 ON (Up to 14 Sensors)
Up to 14 Sensors can be connected in this mode. The data allocated is 16 bits
and is stored in the IN Area, as shown in the following table.
Node number
Odd number
Even number
Node numbers actually used
Node number setting − 1 to node number setting
Node number setting to node number setting + 1
305
Section 5-6
Fiber Amplifier Communications Units
Odd node number
Node number −1
Node number
Even node numBit
ber
Node number
00
Node number +1
Contents
Unit 1 ON/OFF data
01
02
Unit 2 ON/OFF data
Unit 3 ON/OFF data
03
04
Unit 4 ON/OFF data
Unit 5 ON/OFF data
05
06
Unit 6 ON/OFF data
Unit 7 ON/OFF data
07
00
Unit 8 ON/OFF data
Unit 9 ON/OFF data
01
02
Unit 10 ON/OFF data
Unit 11 ON/OFF data
03
04
Unit 12 ON/OFF data
Unit 13 ON/OFF data
05
06
Unit 14 ON/OFF data
Sensor Communications Error
Flag
Sensor Communications Flag
07
CompoBus/S Wiring
BS+
BS−
BDH
NC
NC
BDL
Communications
power supply
24 V DC
BD H
BD L
CompoBus/S communications
Note
1. The power supplied from the CompoBus/S communications power supply
is supplied to the Communications Unit and all the Sensors connected to
it. Consider the current consumption of the Communications Unit and the
Sensors when selecting the power supply. The E3X-SRT21 is a network
power supply. Special Flat Cable or 4-conductor VCTF cable can be used
to supply power. Check that the allowable current of the communications
cable is not exceeded.
2. OMRON recommends the following products manufactured by Weidmuller
Co., Ltd. for use as crimp terminals.
Sleeve (product no.046290)
Crimp terminal
Cable
For inserting 2 wires (product no.901851)
Crimp terminal
Cable
Insert cable then crimp
3. The following special tool is available:
Crimper PZ1.5 (product no. 900599) manufactured by Weidmuller Co. Ltd.
306
Section 5-6
Fiber Amplifier Communications Units
4. The tightening torque for the cable lock screws is 0.2 to 0.4 N⋅m.
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions of the Unit. All dimensions are in
mm. The area shown with broken lines indicates the dimensions when the
connector is mounted to the Unit.
34.6
34.8
71.3
(75)
(106)
16
30
PWR
COMM
ERR
U.ERR
SS
(44)
(65)
307
Section 5-7
Analog Input Terminals
5-7
5-7-1
Analog Input Terminals
SRT2-AD04 Analog Input Terminal
Note Do not connect the Analog Input Terminal to any of the following incompatible
Master Units or incorrect data may be transmitted.
PLC
Incompatible Master
Units
Compatible Master Units
CS-series, C200HX/
C200HG/ C200HE-(Z)E,
and C200HS
C200HW-SRM21
C200HW-SRM21-V1
CS-series
CJ-series
-----
CS1W-SRM21
CJ1W-SRM21
CQM1
SRM1 (Integrated with
CPU Unit)
CPM2C-S (Integrated with
CPU Unit)
CQM1-SRM21
SRM1-C0@
SRM1-C0@-V1
---
CQM1-SRM21-V1
SRM1-C0@-V2
All Units
The Analog Input Terminal is also incompatible with the following Master
Units:
3G8B3-SRM0@ CompoBus/S VME Board
C200PC-ISA@2-SRM SYSMAC Board
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and input specifications for the SRT2AD04.
General Specifications
Item
SRT2-AD04
Input points
Power supply type
4, 3, 2, or 1 points (switchable using DIP switch)
(4, 3, 2, or 1 words are allocated to the Master.)
Network power supply
Communications power
supply voltage
14 to 26.4 V DC
(Power can be supplied from the communications cable.)
Current consumption
Noise immunity
Communications power: 100 mA max.
±1.5 kVp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise
time of 1 ns (via impulse noise simulator)
10 to 55 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
308
Specification
Model
200 m/s2
500 V AC for 1 minute (between insulated circuits)
20 MΩ min. at 250 V DC (between insulated circuits)
Operating: –10 to 55°C
Storage: –25 to 65°C
Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Operating environment
Mounting method
No corrosive gases
M4 screws or 35-mm DIN track mounting
Mounting strength
50 N
Track direction: 10 N
Terminal strength
Weight
Pulling: 50 N
Approx. 120 g
Section 5-7
Analog Input Terminals
Input Specifications
Item
Specification
Voltage input
Input signal range
0 to 5 V
0 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V
4 to 20 mA
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
Input signal range settings for Input 0 and Input 1 are
shared.
Input signal range settings for Input 2 and Input 3 are
shared.
Max. signal input
Input impedance
±15 V
1 MΩ min.
±30 mA
Approx. 250 Ω
Resolution
General
25°C
precision
0 to 55°C
Conversion time
1/6000 (Full scale)
±0.3%FS
±0.4%FS
AD conversion output
data
Averaging Function
Slave Components
Current input
±0.6%FS
±0.8%FS
1 ms/point (4 ms/4 points, 3 ms/3 points, 2 ms/2 points, or
1 ms/1 point)
Binary data
−10 to 10 V: Full scale F448 to 0 to 0BB8 Hex
Other: Full scale 0000 to 1770 Hex
Can be set (with DIP switch)
Burnout detection function
Available
Insulation method
Between analog input and communications line: Photocoupler
Between each analog input signal: Non-insulated
The following diagram shows the main components of the SRT2-AD04 Analog
Input Terminal. The functions of these components are described below.
DIP Switch SW101
Open the cover to reveal DIP switch SW101.
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 and 2: Number of input points setting
Pin 3: Communications mode setting
Pin 4: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pins 5 to 8: Node number setting
CompoBus/S Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave
and communications.
DIP Switch SW102
Open the cover to reveal DIP switch SW102.
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 to 3: Input range setting for Inputs 0 and 1
Pins 4 to 6: Input range setting for Inputs 2 and 3
Pin 7: Averaging setting
Pin 8: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Mounting Screw Holes
Used when screwing the Unit to a control panel.
DIN Track Mounting Hooks
Used when mounting the Unit to a DIN track.
Terminal Block
Used to connect CompoBus/S communications cables,
communications power supply, and input devices.
309
Section 5-7
Analog Input Terminals
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
DIP Switches
Indicator
PWR (green)
Status
ON
Meaning
The communications power supply is ON.
COMM (yellow)
OFF
ON
The communications power supply is OFF.
Normal communications
OFF
A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in
standby status.
ERR (red)
ON
OFF
A communications error has occurred.
Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
U.ERR (red)
ON
OFF
An error has occurred in the Unit.
Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
Always turn OFF the Slave before changing DIP switch settings.
SW101
Number of input points setting
Communications mode setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Node number setting
OFF
Pin 1
OFF
Number of input points setting
4 points (Factory setting)
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
3 points (Inputs 0 to 2 valid)
2 points (Inputs 0 and 2 valid)
ON
ON
1 point (Input 0 valid)
Pin 3
OFF
ON
Pin 2
Communications mode setting
High-speed Communications Mode (Factory setting)
Long-distance Communications Mode
Pin 4
Always set to OFF.
Note Make sure that the communications mode of the Slave is the same as that of
the Master Unit. If the communications modes are not the same, normal communications with the Master Unit will not be possible. The operating status of
the Slave can be verified with LED indicators. Refer to 6-5-1 Indicators for
details.
310
Section 5-7
Analog Input Terminals
Node Number Setting
Set the node number with pins 5 through 8, as shown in the following table.
Node number
Pin 5
(8)
Pin 6
(4)
Pin 7
(2)
Pin 8
(1)
0
1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
2
3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
4
5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
6
7
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
8
9
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
10
11
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
12
13
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
14
15
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
A single Analog Input Terminal is allocated 64 points, 48 points, 32 points, or
16 points. Points are assigned as shown in the following table. Note that when
a CQM1 Master Unit is used in 4-point mode, the Analog Input Terminal cannot be connected.
Allocated points
64 points
(4 inputs)
48 points
(3 inputs)
Node number setting
Node number setting – 1 to node number setting + 6
Even
Node number setting to node number
setting + 7
Node number setting – 1 to node number setting + 4
Node number setting to node number
setting + 5
Node number setting – 1 to node number setting + 2
Odd
Even
32 points
(2 inputs)
16 points
(1 input)
Node number actually used
Odd
Odd
Even
Node number setting to node number
setting + 3
Odd
Node number setting – 1 to node number setting
Even
Node number setting to node number
setting + 1
311
Section 5-7
Analog Input Terminals
SW102
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Averaging
Input range setting
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Range setting for Inputs 0 and 1
Pin 4
OFF
Pin 5
OFF
Pin 6
OFF
Range setting for Inputs 2 and 3
0 to 5 V (Factory setting)
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
–10 to 10 V
4 to 20 mA
ON
OFF
ON
0 to 20 mA
Do not set to any values but those given above.
Pin 7
OFF
ON
Averaging
No averaging (Factory setting)
With averaging (8-time moving average)
Pin 8
Always set to OFF.
Note Input range settings for Input 0 and Input 1 are shared, and those for Input 2
and Input 3 are shared. An example is shown below.
Input 0 and Input 1: 4 to 20 mA (Pins 1, 2, 3 = OFF, OFF, ON)
Input 2 and Input 3: 1 to 5 V (Pins 4, 5, 6 = ON, OFF, OFF)
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-AD04.
V+
510 kΩ
250 Ω
V+
510 kΩ
Internal
circuitry
BS–
DC static
converter
(Insulated)
250 Ω
I+
Input 1
–
510 kΩ
V+
510 kΩ
250 Ω
BD H
Input 0
–
510 kΩ
BS+
I+
I+
Input 2
–
510 kΩ
BD L
V+
510 kΩ
250 Ω
510 kΩ
I+
–
AG
Analog GND
312
Input 3
Section 5-7
Analog Input Terminals
Terminal Block
Install the following M3 crimp terminals on the signal wires and connect them
to the terminal block.
6.0mm max.
6.0mm max.
Note Tighten the terminal block screws to the specified tightening torque of
0.5 N⋅m.
The following diagram shows the terminal block for the SRT2-AD04.
BD
H
BD
L
BS
+
BS
–
AG
NC
V0+
AG
I0+
0–
V1+
NC
I1+
1–
V2+
NC
I2+
V3+
2–
NC
I3+
3–
Note For current input, short terminals V+ and I+.
Wiring
Wire the connector terminals of the Analog Input Terminal as shown below
according to voltage input or current input.
Voltage Input
I+
V+
BD
H
BS
+
BD
L
AG
Current Input
I+
V+
–
AG
–
BS
–
–
+
BD L BD H
CompoBus/S
CompoBus/S
communications communications
power supply
(including internal
circuit power supply)
0V
0V
(For current input, short
terminals V+ and I+.)
For current input, short terminals V+ and I+. Use the short circuiting fitting
provided to accomplish this.
Input Range and
Conversion Data
The analog data that is input will be converted to digital values according to
the input range.
Note If the input range is surpassed, the AD conversion data will be fixed at the
upper or lower limit.
–10 to 10 V
Voltages between –10 V and 10 V correspond to F448 to 0BB8 Hex (–3000 to
3000). The range of data that can be converted is F31C to 0CE4 Hex (–3300
to 3300). When voltage is negative, it is expressed as 2’s complement (16
313
Section 5-7
Analog Input Terminals
bits). In the event of disconnection, the data becomes the same value as in
the case of 0 V input (0000 Hex).
Hexadecimal (decimal)
conversion data
0CE4 (3300)
0BB8 (3000)
0000 (0)
–11 V –10 V
Voltage
0V
10 V 11 V
F448 (–3000)
F31C (–3300)
0 to 10 V
Voltages between 0 V and 10 V correspond to 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000).
The range of data that can be converted is FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to 6300).
When voltage is negative, it is expressed by 2’s complement (16 bits). In the
event of disconnection, the data becomes the same value as in the case of
0 V input (0000 Hex).
Hexadecimal (decimal)
conversion data
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
–0.5 V
FED4 (–300)
Voltage
0V
10 V 10.5 V
0 to 5 V
Voltages between 0 V and 5 V correspond to 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000).
The range of data that can be converted is FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to 6300).
When voltage is negative, it is expressed by 2’s complement (16 bits). In the
event of disconnection, the data becomes the same value as in the case of
0 V input (0000 Hex).
Hexadecimal (decimal)
conversion data
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
–0.25 V
FED4 (–300)
Voltage
0V
5 V 5.25 V
1 to 5 V
Voltages between 1 V and 5 V correspond to 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000).
The range of data that can be converted is FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to 6300).
314
Section 5-7
Analog Input Terminals
When voltage is less than the input range (i.e., input voltage is less than
0.8 V), the burnout detection function is activated, and data becomes 7FFF.
Hexadecimal (decimal)
conversion data
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
7FFF
0000 (0)
FED4 (–300)
0.8 V
Voltage
1V
5 V 5.2 V
0 to 20 mA
Currents between 0 mA and 20 mA correspond to 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to
6000). The range of data that can be converted is FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to
6300). When current is negative, it is expressed by 2’s complement (16 bits).
In the event of disconnection, the data becomes the same value as in the
case of 0 mA input (0000 Hex).
Hexadecimal (decimal)
conversion data
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
0000 (0)
–1 mA
FED4 (–300)
Current
0 mA
20 mA 21 mA
4 to 20 mA
Currents between 4 mA and 20 mA correspond to 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to
6000). The range of data that can be converted is FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to
6300). When current is less than the input range (i.e., input current is less
than 3.2 mA) the burnout detection function is activated, and data becomes
7FFF.
Hexadecimal (decimal)
conversion data
189C (6300)
1770 (6000)
7FFF
0000 (0)
FED4 (–300)
Switching between 4, 3, 2,
and 1 Inputs
3.2 mA
4 mA
Current
20 mA 20.8 mA
It is possible to restrict the number of inputs with pins 1 and 2 of DIP switch
SW101. In this way, the sampling cycle can be set to 4 ms/4 points, 3 ms/3
315
Section 5-7
Analog Input Terminals
points, 2 ms/2 points, or 1 ms/1 point, making conversions faster. In accordance with the number of inputs, the number of words allocated to the Analog
Input Terminal in the PLC for the Master Unit will also be set to 4 words/4
points, 3 words/3 points, 2 words/2 points, or 1 word/1 point. When the number of inputs is 3, Inputs 0, 1, and 2 will be used; when the number of inputs is
2, Inputs 0 and 2 will be used; and when the number of inputs is 1, Input 0 will
be used.
Averaging Function (8time Moving Average)
When pin 7 of DIP switch SW102 is ON, the averaging function (8-time moving average) will be activated for all Inputs 0 to 3.
The averaging function outputs the average of the previous 8 inputs (moving
average) as conversion data.
Turn ON this pin when the inputs fluctuate slightly but frequently as shown in
the following figure. The averaging function will make the actual inputs
smoother.
Actual input
Averaged input
Time
Note Even in this case, conversion data will be updated at the normal rate of 1 ms/
point. After power is turned ON, the data transmitted first are sampled 8 times,
averaged, and then output.
Burnout Detection
Function
When the input range is 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA, and the input signal is less
than 0.8 V or less than 3.2 mA, the input line is deemed to be disconnected,
and the burnout detection function is activated. Once the burnout detection
function is activated, the conversion data is set to 7FFF Hex.
The time required to activate or cancel the burnout detection function is the
same as the time required for conversion.
If input returns to the convertible range, the burnout detection function will be
cancelled automatically, and normal data conversion will be resumed.
Precautions on Using Shared Power Supply for Input Devices
If the power supply is shared by input devices, and a disconnection occurs
during voltage input, the status of the circuit becomes as shown in the follow-
316
Section 5-7
Analog Input Terminals
ing figure. (There is no effect during current input, even if the power supply is
shared.)
Analog Input Terminal
A
Power
supply
Input
device
V+
I+
B
–
Voltage
generated
Internal
circuits
V+
Input
device
I+
–
When portion A in the above diagram is disconnected, the sneak circuit indicated by → will be formed. As a result, despite the disconnection, a voltage
equivalent to 1/2 to 1/3 of the output of the connected input device is generated at the disconnected input device. (The same is true if portion B is disconnected.) When this kind of voltage is generated, the burnout detection
function may fail to activate.
For voltage input, either do not have the power supply shared by the input
devices, or use an isolator for each input.
AD Conversion Data
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
First word
Input 0 AD conversion data
First word +1
Input 1 AD conversion data
First word +2
Input 2 AD conversion data
First word + 3
Input 3 AD conversion data
3
2
1
0
Bit
When the AD conversion data becomes negative, it is expressed as 2’s complement. The NEG instruction can be used to obtain the absolute value from
this 2’s complement.
Conversion Time
AD conversion data is updated every 1 ms for each point.
317
Section 5-8
Analog Output Terminals
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the SRT2-AD04. All dimensions are in mm.
(54)
SRT2-AD04 Dimensions
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
Note To prevent damage from static electricity, mount the Unit where it cannot be
touched accidentally.
5-8
5-8-1
Analog Output Terminals
SRT2-DA02 Analog Output Terminal
Note Do not connect the Analog Output Terminal to any of the following incompatible Master Units or incorrect data may be transmitted.
PLC
Incompatible Master Units
CS-series, C200HX/
C200HW-SRM21
C200HG/ C200HE-(Z)E,
and C200HS
CS-series
---
Compatible Master Units
C200HW-SRM21-V1
CJ-series
CQM1
--CQM1-SRM21
CJ1W-SRM21
CQM1-SRM21-V1
SRM1 (Integrated with
CPU Unit)
SRM1-C0@
SRM1-C0@-V1
SRM1-C0@-V2
CPM2C-S (Integrated
with CPU Unit)
---
All Units
CS1W-SRM21
The Analog Output Unit is also incompatible with the following Master Units:
3G8B3-SRM0@ CompoBus/S VME Board
C200PC-ISA@2-SRM SYSMAC Board
SDD-CS1 NKE Corporation UNI-WIRE Send Unit
318
Section 5-8
Analog Output Terminals
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and output specifications for the SRT2DA02.
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Model
SRT2-DA02
Output points
2 or 1 points (switchable using DIP switch)
(2 or 1 words are allocated to the Master.)
Power supply type
Communications power
supply voltage
Network power supply
14 to 26.4 V DC
(Power cannot be supplied from the communications
cable)
Communications power: 170 mA max.
Current consumption
Noise immunity
±1.5 kVp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise
time of1 ns (via impulse noise simulator)
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
10 to 55 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude
200 m/s2
Dielectric strength
Insulation resistance
500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
20 MΩ min. at 250 V DC (between insulated circuits)
Ambient temperature
Operating: –10 to 55°C
Storage: –25 to 65°C
Ambient humidity
Operating: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases
Operating environment
Mounting method
Mounting strength
Terminal strength
M4 screws or 35-mm DIN track mounting
50 N
Track direction: 10 N
Pulling: 50 N
Weight
Approx. 100 g
Output Specifications
Item
Output signal range
Allowable load resistance of external output
Specification
Voltage output
Current output
0 to 5 V
4 to 20 mA
1 to 5 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
Output signal range is set separately for Output 0 and
Output 1.
5 k Ω min.
600 Ω max.
External output impedance
0.5 Ω max.
Resolution
General
25°C
precision
0 to 55°C
Conversion time
1/6,000 (Full scale)
±0.4%FS
---
±0.8%FS
2 ms/2 points (2 outputs) or 2 ms/1 point (1 output)
DA conversion input data Binary data
–10 to 10 V: Full scale F448 to 0 to 0BB8 Hex
Other: Full scale 0000 to 1770 Hex
Insulation method
Between analog output and communications line: Photocoupler
Between each analog output signal: Non-insulated
319
Section 5-8
Analog Output Terminals
Slave Components
The following diagram shows the main components of the SRT2-DA02 Analog
Output Terminal. The functions of these components are described below.
DIP Switch SW101
Open the cover to reveal DIP switch SW101.
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pin 1: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pin 2: Number of output points setting
Pin 3: Communications mode setting
Pin 4: Reserved (Always OFF.)
Pins 5 to 8: Node number setting
CompoBus/S Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave
and communications.
DIP Switch SW102
Open the cover to reveal DIP switch SW102.
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 to 3: Output range setting for Output 0
Pins 4 to 6: Output range setting for Output 1
Pins 7 and 8: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Mounting Screw Holes
Used when screwing the Unit to a control panel.
DIN Track Mounting Hooks
Used when mounting the Unit to a DIN track.
Terminal Block
Used to connect CompoBus/S communications
cables, communications power supply, and
output devices.
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
PWR (green)
Status
ON
OFF
COMM (yellow) ON
OFF
DIP Switches
Meaning
The communications power supply is ON.
The communications power supply is OFF.
ERR (red)
ON
Normal communications
A communications error has occurred or the Unit is in
standby status.
A communications error has occurred.
U.ERR (red)
OFF
ON
Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
An error has occurred in the Unit.
OFF
Normal communications or the Unit is in standby status.
Always turn OFF the Slave before changing DIP switch settings.
SW101
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Number of output points setting
Communications mode setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Node number setting
Pin 1
320
Always set to OFF.
Section 5-8
Analog Output Terminals
OFF
Pin 2
Number of output points setting
2 points (Factory setting)
ON
1 point (Output 0 valid)
Pin 3
OFF
ON
Communications mode setting
High-speed Communications Mode (Factory setting)
Long-distance Communications Mode
Pin 4
Always set to OFF.
Note Make sure that the communications mode of the Slave is the same as that of
the Master Unit. If the communications modes are not the same, normal communications with the Master Unit will not be possible. The operating status of
the Slave can be verified with LED indicators. Refer to 6-5-1 Indicators for
details.
Node Number Setting
Set the node number with pins 5 through 8, as shown in the following table.
Node number
0
Pin 5
(8)
OFF
Pin 6
(4)
OFF
Pin 7
(2)
OFF
Pin 8
(1)
OFF
1
2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
3
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
5
6
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
7
8
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
9
10
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
11
12
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
13
14
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
15
ON
ON
ON
ON
A single Analog Output Terminal is allocated either 32 points or 16 points.
Points are assigned as shown in the following table. Note that when CQM1
Master Unit is used in 4-point mode, an Analog Output Terminal cannot be
connected.
Allocated points Node number setting
Node number actually used
32 points
Odd
Node number setting – 1 to node num(2 outputs)
ber setting + 2
Even
Node number setting to node number
setting + 3
16 points
(1 output)
Odd
Node number setting – 1 to node number setting
Even
Node number setting to node number
setting + 1
321
Section 5-8
Analog Output Terminals
SW102
Output range setting
Pin 1
Pin 4
Output setting for communications error
Pin 2
Pin 5
Pin 3
Pin 6
Range setting for Output 0
Range setting for Output 1
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
0 to 5 V (Factory setting)
1 to 5 V
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
OFF
OFF
ON
4 to 20 mA
Do not set to any values but those given above.
Pin 7
Pin 8
Output setting for communications error
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Clear to lower output limit (Factory setting)
Clear to upper output limit
ON
OFF
0 V output (When output range is –10 to 10 V.)
Clear to lower output limit (Any other time.)
ON
ON
Hold output
Note Output range is set separately for Output 0 and Output 1. An example is
shown below.
Output 0: 4 to 20 mA (Pins 1, 2, 3 = OFF, OFF, ON)
Output 1: 1 to 5 V (Pins 4, 5, 6 = ON, OFF, OFF)
Internal Circuits
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the SRT2-DA02.
BS+
DC static
converter
(Insulated)
I+
V+
BS –
Output 0
Internal
circuitry
–
BD H
I+
V+
BD L
Output 1
–
Analog GND
Terminal Block
Install the following M3 crimp terminals on the signal wires and connect them
to the terminal block.
6.0mm max.
6.0mm max.
Note Tighten the terminal block screws to the specified tightening torque of
0.5 N⋅m.
322
Section 5-8
Analog Output Terminals
The following diagram shows the terminal block for the SRT2-DA02.
BD
H
BD
L
Wiring
BS
+
BS NC
–
NC
NC
NC
V0+
NC
0–
I0+ V1+
NC
I1+
1–
Wire the connector terminals of the Analog Output Terminal as shown below
according to voltage output or current output.
Voltage Output
V+
BD
H
I+
V+
–
I+
BS
+
BS
–
BD
L
–
+
BD L BD H
External
CompoBus/S
CompoBus/S
device
communications communications
power supply
(including
internal circuit
power supply)
Output Range and
Conversion Data
–
Current Output
+
–
External
device
+
–
The digital values that are input are converted to analog data according to the
output range.
1 to 5 V
Values 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000) correspond to voltages between 1 and
5 V. The output range is 0.8 to 5.2 V.
Voltage
5.2 V
5V
1V
8000 FED4
(–300)
0.8 V
0V
0000 (0)
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
1770 189C 7FFF conversion data
(6000) (6300)
323
Section 5-8
Analog Output Terminals
0 to 5 V
Values 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000) correspond to voltages between 0 and
5 V. The output range is –0.25 to 5.25 V.
Voltage
5.25 V
5V
0V
FED4
8000 (–300)
–0.25 V
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
1770 189C 7FFF conversion data
(6000) (6300)
0000 (0)
0 to 10 V
Values 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000) correspond to voltages between 0 and
10 V. The output range is –0.5 to 10.5 V.
Voltage
10.5 V
10 V
0V
FED4
8000 (–300)
–0.5 V
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
1770 189C 7FFF conversion data
(6000) (6300)
0000 (0)
–10 to 10 V
Values F448 to 0BB8 Hex (–3000 to 3000) correspond to voltages between –
10 and 10 V. The output range is –11 to 11 V.
Negative voltages are specified as 2’s complement (16 bits).
Voltage
11 V
10 V
F31C F448
8000 (–3300) (–3000)
0000 (0)
0V
–10 V
–11 V
324
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
0BB8 0CE4 7FFF conversion data
(3000) (3300)
Section 5-8
Analog Output Terminals
4 to 20 mA
Values 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000) correspond to currents between 4 and
20 mA. The output range is 3.2 to 20.8 mA.
Current
20.8 mA
20 mA
4 mA
8000 FED4
(–300)
3.2 mA
0 mA
0000 (0)
1770 189C
(6000) (6300)
Hexadecimal
(decimal)
7FFF conversion data
Switching between 2 and 1
Outputs
It is possible to restrict the number of outputs with pin 2 of DIP switch SW101.
In accordance with the number of outputs, the number of words allocated to
the Analog Output Terminal in the PLC for the Master Unit will also be set to 2
words/2 points or 1 word/1 point. When the number of outputs is 2, Outputs 0
and 1 will be used; and when the number of outputs is 1, Output 0 will be
used.
Output Data During
Communications Error
Pins 7 and 8 of DIP switch SW102 are used to select one of the following
methods for processing output data when a communications error occurs in
the CompoBus/S System.
Pin 7 OFF, Pin 8 OFF: Clear to lower limit value
Pin 7 OFF, Pin 8 ON: Clear to upper limit value
Pin 7 ON, Pin 8 OFF: Clear to 0 V (when voltage range is –10 to 10 V.)
Clear to lower limit value (All other times.)
Pin 7 ON, Pin 8 ON: Hold the value immediately preceding error
When the pins are set at Low Clear, High Clear, or 0 V, output data will
become as shown in the following table.
Output range
DA Conversion Data
Pin 7 OFF,
Pin 8 OFF
Pin 7 OFF,
Pin 8 ON
Pin 7 ON,
Pin 8 OFF
0 to 5 V
1 to 5 V
–0.25 V
0.8 V
5.25 V
5.2 V
–0.25 V
0.8 V
0 to 10 V
–10 to 10 V
–0.5 V
–11 V
10.5 V
11 V
–0.5 V
0V
4 to 20 mA
3.2 mA
20.8 mA
3.2 mA
In the Master Unit, DA conversion data should be output as shown in the following diagram.
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
First word
Output 0 DA conversion data
First word + 1
Output 1 DA conversion data
3
2
1
0 Bit
To output a negative voltage is output, specify DA conversion data as 2’s complement. The NEG instruction can be used to obtain the 2’s complement from
the absolute value.
325
Section 5-8
Analog Output Terminals
Conversion Time
DA conversion data is updated every 2 ms irrespective of the number of output points.
SRT2-DA02 Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions for the SRT2-DA02. All dimensions are in mm.
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
Note To prevent damage from static electricity, mount the Unit where it cannot be
touched accidentally.
326
Section 5-9
I/O Link Units for CPM1A and CPM2A
5-9
5-9-1
I/O Link Units for CPM1A and CPM2A
CPM1A-SRT21 I/O Link Unit for CPM1A and CPM2A
Specifications
The following table shows the ratings and I/O specifications for the CPM1ASRT21.
Ratings
Item
Specification
Model
CPM1A-SRT21
I/O points
8 input points, 8 output points
(All the I/O points use the same node number. I/O is performed only with I/O memory of CPM1A/CPM2A, not with
external devices.)
Connection to CPM1A/
CPM2A
Power supply type
Connect expansion I/O connecting cable to the expansion
connector of the CPU Unit or the Expansion Unit.
---
Communications power
supply and internal circuits power supply
Vibration resistance
Supplied from CPM1A or CPM2A CPU Unit. (See note.)
Shock resistance
Ambient temperature
Conforming to JIS C0911
10 to 57 Hz with single-amplitude of 0.075 mm
57 to 150 Hz with fixed acceleration of 9.8 m/s2
80 minutes each in X, Y, and Z directions (8 minutes per
sweep × 10 sweeps = 80 minutes)
Conforming to JIS C0912
Peak acceleration of 147 m/s2 3 times each in X, Y, and Z
directions
Operating: 0 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –20 to 75°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity
Operating: 10% to 90% (with no condensation)
Storage: 10% to 90% (with no condensation)
Operating environment
Node number settings
No corrosive gases
The node number is set on a DIP switch. (Set the node
number before turning ON the CPM1A or CPM2A CPU
Unit.)
Approx. 200 g
Weight
Note CompoBus/S communications and common I/O terminals are not used.
327
Section 5-9
I/O Link Units for CPM1A and CPM2A
Slave Components
The following diagram shows the main components of the CPM1A-SRT21 I/O
Link Unit for CPM1A/CPM2A. The functions of these components are
described below.
DIP Switch
Open the cover to reveal the DIP switch. The DIP
switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 to 4: Node number setting
Pin 5: Communications mode setting
Pin 6: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Expansion I/O Connecting Cable
(provided with this Unit)
Connect to the expansion
connector of the CMP1A/CPM2A
CPU Unit or the Expansion Unit.
CompoBus/S Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave and
communications.
No.
COMM
ERR
SRT21
EXP
BD H NC(BS+)
BD L NC(BS-)NC
Expansion Connector
Open the cover to reveal the expansion
connector. Other Expansion Units for
CPM1A/CPM2A can be connected here.
DIN Track Mounting Hooks
Used when mounting the Unit to a DIN track.
Terminal Block
Used to connect CompoBus/S communications cable.
Shared communications and I/O terminals are not used.
Mounting Screw Holes
Used when screwing the Unit to a control panel.
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
DIP Switch
Name
Status
Meaning
COMM
(yellow)
Communications
ON
OFF
Normal communications.
A communications error has occurred or
the Unit is in standby status.
ERR
(red)
Communications
error
ON
OFF
A communications error has occurred.
Normal communications or the Unit is in
standby status.
Always turn OFF the CPM1A or CPM2A CPU Unit before changing DIP switch
settings.
Node Address
Hold/Clear outputs for
communications error
Node number setting Communications mode setting
Node Number Setting
Set the node number with pins 1 through 4, as shown in the following table.
Node number
328
0
Pin 4
(8)
OFF
Pin 3
(4)
OFF
Pin 2
(2)
OFF
Pin 1
(1)
OFF
1
2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
Section 5-9
I/O Link Units for CPM1A and CPM2A
Node number
Note
3
Pin 4
(8)
OFF
Pin 3
(4)
OFF
Pin 2
(2)
ON
Pin 1
(1)
ON
4
5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
6
7
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
8
9
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
10
11
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
12
13
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
14
15
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
1. All the 8 input and 8 output points use the same node number.
2. The actual node number setting range depends on the type of PLC in
which the Master is mounted as well as the Master’s settings. Refer to 2-1
Communications Specifications for details.
Communications Mode Settings
The following communications modes are set with pin 5.
Pin 5
(DR)
OFF
ON
Note
Communications mode
Communications distance
High-speed Com- 100 m max.
munications
Mode
Long-distance
500 m max.
Communications
Mode
(see note 1)
Communications baud rate
Communications cycle time
750 kbps
0.5 or 0.8 ms
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
1. Only the C200HW-SRM21-V1, CQM1-SRM21-V1, CPM2C-S, and SRM1C0@-V2 Master Units can use Long-distance Communications Mode.
2. Make sure that the communications mode of the Slave is the same as that
of the Master Unit. If the communications modes are not the same, normal
communications with the Master Unit will not be possible. The operating
status of the Slave can be verified with LED indicators. Refer to 6-5-1 Indicators for details.
Hold/Clear Outputs for Communications Error
Pin 6 is used to set the output data status when a communications error
occurs, as shown in the following table.
Pin 6 (HOLD)
OFF
Setting
Clear output status.
ON
Maintain output status.
329
Section 5-9
I/O Link Units for CPM1A and CPM2A
Terminal Arrangement
and Wiring
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
CPM1A-SRT21.
3
1
4
BD
H
2
BD
L
BS
–
BS
+
*1
*1
*1: Not used
BD L BD H
CompoBus/S
communications
When viewed from the CPM1A or CPM2A CPU Unit, the 8 input and 8 output
points under the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit are allocated to the I/O memory
(input and output bits) of the CPU Unit, as is the case with Expansion I/O
Units. However, actual I/O operation is not performed for the I/O memory of
the CPM1A or CPM2A CPU Unit, but it is performed for the I/O memory of the
CPU Unit in which the CompoBus/S Master Unit is mounted.
CompoBus/S Master Unit
(or SRM1 CompoBus/S
Master Control Unit or
CPM2C-S CPU Unit)
CPM1A/CPM2A
CPU Unit
CPM1A-SRT21 I/O Link
Unit for CPM1A/CPM2A
CompoBus/S Communications Cable
(Special Flat Cable or VCTF cable)
Allocation to CPM1A/
CPM2A I/O Bits
As with other Expansion I/O Units for the CPM1A and CPM2A, both input and
output bits for the I/O Link Unit start with the word following the last word allocated to the CPM1A or CPM2A CPU Unit or the previous Expansion I/O Unit
to which it is connected. If the last input word allocated to the CPM1A/CPM2A
CPU Unit or the previous Expansion Unit is word m, and the last output word
allocated to that Unit is word n, word allocations are as shown in the following
figure.
I/O Link Unit for CPM1A/CPM2A
Bits 00 to 07 of
word m+1
8 input points
8 output points
Bits 00 to 07 of
word n+1
For example, an I/O Link Unit for CPM1A/CPM2A can be connected to the
first 30-point I/O CPM2A CPU Unit as shown in the following figure.
Input number
IR 000
IR 001
30-point I/O
CPU Unit
Output number
330
IR 010
IR 011
IR 002
Link Unit for
CPM1A/CPM2A
IR 012
Section 5-10
I/O Link Units for CPM2C
Allocation to Master CPU
Unit
The 8 input and 8 output points allocated to the I/O memory of the CPM1A or
CPM2A CPU Unit are allocated to the Special I/O Unit data area of the Master
CPU Unit according to the node number.
Both 8 input and 8 output points use the same node number.
For example, if the range of node numbers IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7 is
set, and node number 0 is used, data will be input from bits 00 to 07 of word n
(Output Slave 0) and data will be output to bits 00 to 07 of word n + 4 (Input
Slave 0).
Master PLC (CS Series)
CPU Unit
Because node
number is 0*
I/O Memory
Output
IR 2000
(n)
Node number is 0
I/O Link Unit for
CPM1A/CPM2A
CompoBus/S
Master Unit
No. 0
30-point I/O CPU Unit
I/O Memory
8 points
Output Slave 0
8 points
8 points
Input Slave 0
8 points
Input
IR 002
Output
IR 012
Input
IR 2004
(n+4)
*: For node numbers IN0 to IN7/OUT0 to OUT7
CompoBus/S
Network
5-10 I/O Link Units for CPM2C
5-10-1 CPM2C-SRT21 I/O Link Unit for CPM2C
Specifications
The following table shows the ratings and I/O specifications for the CPM2CSRT21.
Ratings
Item
Model
I/O points
Connection to CPM2C
Power supply type
Specification
CPM2C-SRT21
8 input points, 8 output points
(All the I/O points use the same node number. I/O is performed only with I/O memory of CPM2C, not with external
devices. One input word and output word of CPM2C are
allocated.)
Connect expansion I/O connecting cable to the expansion
connector of the CPU Unit or the Expansion Unit.
(Up to 5 Units are connectable.)
---
Communications power
supply and internal circuits power supply
Supplied from CPM2C CPU Unit. (See note.)
Node number settings
The node number is set on a DIP switch. (Set the node
number before turning ON the CPM2C CPU Unit.)
Weight
Approx. 150 g
Note CompoBus/S communications power supply is not connected.
Standard Specifications
Conform to standard CPM2C specifications.
331
Section 5-10
I/O Link Units for CPM2C
Slave Components
The following diagram shows the main components of the CPM2C-SRT21 I/O
Link Unit. The functions of these components are described below.
Indicators
Indicate the status of the Slave and communications
DIP Switch
The DIP switch's pins have the following functions:
Pins 1 to 4: Node number setting
Pin 5: Communications mode setting
Pin 6: Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Communications Connector
Connect the CompoBus/S communications cable. The communications
power supply is not connected. A suitable connector is provided with
the CPM2C-SRT21.
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
DIP Switch
Name
Status
COMM
(yellow)
Communications
ON
OFF
ERR (red)
Communications
error
ON
Meaning
Normal communications
A communications error has occurred
or the Unit is in standby status.
A communications error has occurred.
OFF
Normal communications or the Unit is
in standby status.
Always turn OFF the CPM2C CPU Unit before changing DIP switch settings.
Hold/Clear outputs for communications error
Communications mode setting
Node number setting
Note Always turn OFF the power supply to the CPM2C before setting the DIP
switch.
Node Number Setting
Set the node number with 1 through 4, as shown in the following table.
Node
number
0
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Node
number
8
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
1
2
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
9
10
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
3
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
11
12
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
5
6
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
13
14
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
7
OFF
ON
ON
ON
15
ON
ON
ON
ON
332
SW4 (8)
SW3 (4)
SW2 (2)
SW1 (1)
SW 4 (8)
SW 3 (4)
SW2 (2)
SW1 (1)
Section 5-10
I/O Link Units for CPM2C
Note
1. All 8 input and 8 output points use the same node number.
2. The actual node number setting range depends on the PLC model in which
the Master is mounted as well as the Master’s settings. Refer to 2-1 Communications Specifications for details.
Communications Mode Settings
The following communications modes are set with pin 5 of the DIP switch.
Note
Pin 5
(DR)
OFF
CommunicaCommunications mode
tions distance
High-speed Com- 100 m max.
munications
Mode
Communications baud rate
750 kbps
Communications cycle time
0.5 or 0.8 ms
ON
Long-distance
Communications
Mode
93.75 kbps
4.0 or 6.0 ms
500 m max.
1. Only the C200HW-SRM21-V1, CQM1-SRM21-V1, SRM1-CO@-V2, and
CPM2C-S Master Units can be Long-distance Communications Mode.
2. Make sure that the communications mode of the Slave is the same as that
of the Master Unit. If the communications modes are not the same, normal
communications with the Master Unit will not be possible. The operating
status of the Slave can be verified with LED indicators. Refer to 6-5-1 Indicators for details.
Hold/Clear Outputs for Communications Error
Pin 6 is used to set the output data status when a communications error
occurs, as shown in the following table.
OFF
Pin 6 (HOLD)
Setting
Clear output status
ON
Maintain output status
Terminal Arrangement and Wiring
CompoBus/S
communications
CompoBus/S
communications
The BD H terminals are all
connected internally, as
are the BD L terminals.
When viewed from the CPM2C CPU Unit, the 8 input and 8 output points
under the CompoBus/S I/O Link Unit are allocated to the I/O memory (input
and output bits) of the CPU Unit, as is the case with Expansion I/O Units. One
input and one output words are allocated. Actual I/O operations are not performed for the I/O memory of the CPM2C CPU Unit, but it is performed for the
333
Section 5-10
I/O Link Units for CPM2C
I/O Memory of the CPU Unit in which the CompoBus/S Master Unit is
mounted.
CompoBus/S Master Unit (SRM1
CompoBus/S Master Control Unit
or CPM2C-S Series)
CPM2C CPU Unit
CPM2C-SRT21 I/O
Link Unit for
CPM2C
CompoBus/S Communications Cable
(Special flat cable or VCTF cable)
Allocation to CPM2C I/O
Bits
As with other Expansion I/O Units for the CPM2C, both input and output bits
for the I/O Link Unit start with the word following the last word allocated to the
CPM2C CPU Unit or the previous Expansion I/O Unit to which it is connected.
If the last input word allocated to the CPM2C CPU Unit or the previous Expansion Unit is word m, and the last output word allocated to that Unit is word n,
word allocations are as shown in the following figure.
Word m+1
I/O Link Unit for CPM2C
Input word m+1
CompoBus/S communications error
0: Normal
1: Error
CompoBus/S communications
0: Not in communication
1: In communication
Data from Master
---: Not used for AR bits
Output word n+1
Word n+1
---: Used for AR bits
Transmission data to Master
An I/O Link Unit for the CPM2C Series can be connected to the first 20-point I/
O CPM2C CPU Unit as shown in the following figure.
CPU Unit
(with 20 I/O
points)
Input number
IR 000
Input number
IR 001
CPM2C-SRT21 I/O
Link Unit for
CPM2C
Output number Output number
IR 010
IR 011
Note
334
1. Data transmissions are not synchronized for all 8 I/O points. Eight-point
data simultaneously output from the Master CPU will not always reach the
CPM2C CPU Unit simultaneously. Eight-point data simultaneously output
from the CPM2C CPU Unit will not always reach the CPU Unit of the Master simultaneously. If 8-point data needs synchronization, write the ladder
Section 5-11
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
program to read the data twice consecutively on the input side and treat
the data as valid data only if the same data is read both times.
2. Output bits allocated to the I/O Link Unit for CPM2C but not used for data
output can be used as work bits.
3. Allocated input bits cannot be used as work bits regardless of the input bits
are used for data input or not.
Allocation to Master CPU
Unit
The 8 input and 8 output points allocated to the I/O memory of the CPM2C
CPU Unit will be allocated in the Special I/O Unit data area of the Master CPU
Unit according to the node number. Both 8 input and 8 output points use the
same node number. For example, if the range of node numbers IN0 to IN7
and OUT0 to OUT7 is set, and node number 0 is used, data will be input from
bits 00 to 07 of word n (Output Slave 0) and output to bits 00 to 07 of word n +
4 (Input Slave 0).
Master PLC (CS Series)
CPU Unit
Node number is 0
I/O Link Unit for
CPM2C I/O Link
Unit
CompoBus/S
Master Unit No. 0
CPM2C
20-point I/O CPU Unit
Because node number is 0*
I/O Memory
I/O Memory
8 points
Output
IR 2000 (n)
8 points
Output Slave 0
Input
IR 001
8 points
8 points
Input Slave 0
Output
IR 011
Input
IR 2004
(n+4)
*: For node numbers IN0 to IN7/OUT0 to OUT7
CompoBus/S Network
Note Input word bits 08 and 09 of the CPM2C CPU Unit are used by the I/O Link
Unit for CPM2C. As an Output Slave of the Master CPU Unit, only 8 points are
allocated.
5-11 Sensor Amplifier Terminals
5-11-1 SRT1-T@D04S Sensor Amplifier Terminals
Combinations
Sensor Amplifier Communications Terminals
Input
Model
4 input points
(1 channel × 4 units)
SRT1-TID04S
4 input points
(4 channels × 1 unit)
SRT1-TKD04S
Connector Units (1 Channel Input)
Input
E3X-N Connector
Terminal Block Unit
Sensor Amplifier Expansion Terminals
Input
Model
4 input points
(1 channel × 4 units)
SRT1-XID04S
4 input points
(4 channels × 1 unit)
SRT1-XKD04S
Specifications
Model
General-purpose, E3X-NT16
1 channel
Multi-function,
1 channel
E3X-NT26
1 input point
E39-JID01
Connecting Unit (4 Channels Input)
Input
E3X-N Connector
Specifications
Multi-function,
1 channel
Model
E3X-NM16
335
Section 5-11
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
Specifications
The following tables show the ratings and specifications for the SRT1T@D04S.
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
Item
SRT1-TID04S
Specification
SRT1-TKD04S SRT1-XID04S
Communications
Total of four
One E3X-NM16
E3X-NT@6 or
(see note 1)
E39-JID01
(see note 1)
Input points
(see note 2)
4 points
Communications
mode
High-speed communications
mode only
---
Power supply type
Communications
power supply voltage
Network power supply
14 to 26.4 V DC (see note 3)
-----
Current consumption
Noise immunity
60 mA max. (see note 4)
10 mA max. (see note 4)
±1.5 kVp-p with a pulse width of 0.1 to 1 µs and a rise time of 1 ns
(via impulse noise simulator)
10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Expansion
Total of four
E3X-NT@6 or
E39-JID01
SRT1-XKD04S
Classification
Connected Sensors
One E3X-NM16
200 m/s2
500 V AC (between insulated circuits)
Dielectric strength
Ambient temperature
Operating: 0 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –20 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity
Operating: 35% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Mounting method
Mounting strength
M4 screws or 35-mm DIN track mounting
49 N in each direction.
Track direction: 10 N
Terminal strength
Pulling: 49 N
Tightening: 0.6 to 1.18 N • m
Node number settings
The node number is set on a DIP switch. (Set the node number
before turning ON the Slave.)
Weight
70 g max.
Note
65 g max.
45 g max.
35 g max.
1. When adding Connector Units, use SRT1-XID04S or SRT1-XKD04S.
2. The Sensor Amplifier Terminal is treated as a Slave with four input points
if the Sensor Amplifier Communications Terminal is used alone. The combination of Sensor Amplifier Communications Terminal and Sensor Amplifier Expansion Terminal are treated as a Slave with eight input points.
3. The communications power supply voltage must be 20.4 to 26.4 V DC if
the Terminal is connected to 2-wired proximity sensors.
4. The value doesn’t include the current consumption of Connector Units.
Connector Units
E3X-N Connector Unit
Item
E3X-NT16
Amplifier
General-purpose
Number of fiber inputs 1 channel
Current consumption
Response time
336
Specification
E3X-NT26
E3X-NM16
Multi-function
4 channels
50 mA max.
150 mA max.
500 µs max. (2.0 ms max. when connected to the SRT1@@D04S)
Section 5-11
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
Item
E3X-NT16
Specification
E3X-NT26
E3X-NM16
Timer function
Indicators
Not available
OFF-delay timer (fixed to 40 ms)
Orange LED: Lit during output operation
Green LED: Lit with stable light reception or no light
Teaching confirmation
function
Indicators (red/green LED) and buzzer
Output
Ambient illumination
Insulation resistance
Light ON and Dark ON (switch selectable)
Sunlight:10,000 lux max.; incandescent lamp: 3,000 lux
max.
20 MΩ min. at 500 V DC
Dielectric strength
Vibration resistance
1,000 V AC at 50/60 Hz
Destruction: 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude
Shock resistance
Destruction: 500 m/s2
Operating: 0 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
Storage: –20 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient temperature
Ambient humidity
Operating: 35% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Mounting method
Mounting strength
Connected to SRT1-@@D04S
49 N in each direction.
Weight
30 g max.
30 g max.
60 g max.
Terminal Block Unit
Item
Specification
Model
E39-JID01
Input points
Input current
1 point
10 mA max.
ON voltage
12 V DC min. (between input terminal and external sensor power
supply)
OFF voltage
4 V DC max. (between input terminal and external sensor power
supply)
OFF current
ON delay time
1 mA max.
1 ms max. (connected to SRT@-@@D04S)
OFF delay time
Input indicators
1.5 ms max. (connected to SRT@-@@D04S)
LED (orange)
External sensor
current capacity
50 mA max.
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
10 to 55 Hz, 1.0-mm double amplitude
200 m/s2 (approx. 20G)
Ambient tempera- Operating: 0 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation)
ture
Storage: –20 to 65°C (with no icing or condensation)
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 85% (with no condensation)
Storage: 25% to 85% (with no condensation)
Mounting method M4 screws or 35-mm DIN track mounting
Mounting
49 N in each direction. (But only 10 N in direction of track.)
strength
Terminal strength Pulling: 49 N
Tightening: 0.6 to 1.18 N • m
Weight
25 g max.
337
Section 5-11
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
Slave Components
The following diagram shows the main components of the Sensor Amplifier
Terminals. The functions of these components are described below.
SRT1-TID04S
SRT1-TKD04S
Indicators
Indicators
Node
Number
Settings
Node
Number
Settings
Mounting
Screw
Holes
DIN Track
Mounting
Hook
Contact 0 Contact 2
Contact 1
Mounting
Screw
Holes
Contacts 0 to 3
DIN Track
Mounting
Hook
Contact 3
Communications Power Supply Terminals
Connect a 24-V DC communications power supply.
Communications Terminals
Connect the CompoBus/S communications cable.
Communications Power Supply Terminals
Connect a 24-V DC communications power supply.
Communications Terminals
Connect the CompoBus/S communications cable.
Indicators
The following table shows the meaning of the indicators.
Indicator
PWR
(green)
DIP Switch
Name
Power
Status
Meaning
ON
The communications power supply is
ON.
OFF
The communications power supply is
OFF.
COMM
(yellow)
Communications
ON
OFF
Normal communications.
A communications error has occurred or
the Unit is in standby status.
ERR
(red)
Communications
error
ON
OFF
A communications error has occurred.
Normal communications or the Unit is in
standby status.
Always turn OFF the Slave before changing DIP switch settings.
Node number
setting
Reserved (Always OFF.)
Reserved (Always OFF)
Note
1. Always turn OFF the Slave before changing DIP switch settings.
2. Pins 5 and 6 must always be left OFF. Otherwise, the Unit may not function
correctly.
Node Number Settings
Set the node number with pins 1 through 8, as shown in the following table.
Node number
338
0
Pin 1
(1)
OFF
Pin 2
(2)
OFF
Pin 4
(4)
OFF
Pin 8
(8)
OFF
1
2
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Section 5-11
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
Node number
3
Pin 1
(1)
ON
Pin 2
(2)
ON
Pin 4
(4)
OFF
Pin 8
(8)
OFF
4
5
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
6
7
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
8
9
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
10
11
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
12
13
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
14
15
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Note The actual node number setting range depends on the type of PLC in which
the Master is mounted as well as the Master’s settings. Refer to 2-1 Communications Specifications for details.
The following diagram shows the internal circuits for the E39-JID01.
Terminal Arrangement
and Wiring
The following diagram shows the terminal arrangement and wiring for the
E39-JID01.
Internal Circuitry
Internal Circuits
3-wired Sensor
2-wired Sensor
Brown
Black
Brown
Blue
Sensor
Sensor
Blue
339
Section 5-11
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
Dimensions
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
• SRT1-TID04S Sensor Amplifier Terminals (1 Channel × 4 Units)
All dimensions are in mm.
Two, 4.5 dia.
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
• SRT1-XID04S Sensor Amplifier Expansion Terminal (1 Channel × 4 Units)
All dimensions are in mm.
Two,
4.5 dia.
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
340
Section 5-11
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
• SRT1-TKD04S Sensor Amplifier Terminal (4 Channels × 1 Unit)
All dimensions are in mm.
Two, 4.5 dia.
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
• SRT1-XKD04S Sensor Amplifier Expansion Terminal (4 Channels × 1
Unit)
All dimensions are in mm.
Two,
4.5 dia.
Mounting Holes
Two, 4.2 dia. or M4
341
Section 5-11
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
Connector Units
• E3X-NT@6 Connector (General-purpose or Multi-function, 1 Channel)
All dimensions are in mm.
Output indicator
Stability indicator
Two, 2.4 dia.
• E3X-NM16 Connector (Multi-function, 4 Channels)
All dimensions are in mm.
Output indicator
Eight, 2.4 dia.
342
Stability indicator
Section 5-11
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
• E39-JID01 Terminal Block Unit (1 Input Point)
All dimensions are in mm.
Output indicator
5-11-2 Sensor Amplifier Terminals
Attaching and Removing
Connector Units
1 Channel × 4 Units
Sensor Amplifier Terminal
SRT1/SRT2-TID04S
SRT1/SRT2-XID04S
Connector Unit
E3X-NT16
E3X-NT26
E39-JID01
Attaching Connector Units:
1,2,3...
1. Hook Section A of the Connector Unit onto Section B of the Sensor Amplifier Terminal.
2. Push in the Connector Unit until Section C locks inside Section D of the
Sensor Amplifier Terminal.
Section C
Section D
Section A
Section B
Bottom view
Section A
343
Section 5-11
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
Removing Connector Units:
1,2,3...
1. While pushing Section D, pull the Connector Unit in direction E.
2. When Section D releases from the lock, the Connector Unit can be removed.
E
Push here
Section D
4 Channels × 1 Unit
Sensor Amplifier Terminal
SRT1/SRT2-TKD04S
SRT1/SRT2-XKD04S
Connector Unit
E3X-NM16
Attaching Connector Unit:
1,2,3...
1. Hook Section A of the Connector Unit onto Section B of the Sensor Amplifier Terminal.
2. Push in the Connector Unit until Section C locks inside Section D of the
Sensor Amplifier Terminal.
Section C
Section D
Section A
Section B
Bottom view
Section A
Removing Connector Unit:
1,2,3...
344
1. While pushing Section D, pull the Connector Unit in direction E.
Section 5-11
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
2. When Section D releases from the lock, the Connector Unit can be removed.
E
Push here
Section D
Expanding Sensor Amplifier Terminals
1,2,3...
1. Remove the cover from the side of the SRT@-T@D04S. When the cover is
removed, the expansion connector can be seen inside.
Cover
2. Connect this expansion connector to the connector located on the side of
the SRT@-X@D04S.
SRT(-T(D04S
SRT(-X(D04S
Side view
Connector
Removing Contact
Connector Cover
Contacts 1 through 3 of the SRT@-TID04S are covered with a contact connector cover. When using these contacts, refer to the following figure and pull
out and remove Section A of the contact connector cover in the direction of its
end.
Section A
Contact connector cover
345
Section 5-11
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
E3X-N Connectors
Nomenclature
E3X-NT(6
E3X-NM16
Operation indicator (orange)
Four operation indicators (orange)
Four stability indicators (green)
Stability indicator (green)
Teaching indicator (red/green)
Channel
selector
Teaching button
Teaching indicator (red/green)
Mode selector
Teaching
button
Timer switch
Mode
selector
Operation mode selectors
Operation mode selector
Note The E3X-NT16 does not have a timer function.
Optical Axis Adjustment (Super-flashing Function)
Set the mode selector of the E3X-N@ to TEACH. The super-flashing function
of the E3X-N@ will be activated. When the optical axes of the fiber heads are
divergent and the light value decreases by approximately 10% of the maximum value, the tip of the emitting fiber will start flashing and the built-in
buzzer will beep. At this time, if the optical axes are divergent, adjust the axes.
The peak light value will be memorized by the E3X-N@. Do not press the
teaching button before or while adjusting the optical axes, otherwise, the
super-flashing function will not operate.
θ
Fiber for light emission
Fiber for light reception
Light reception
The peak of light reception
90% of the peak value
Lit in this range.
Angle of the head (θ)
Flashing
Lit
Flashing
Sensitivity Settings
Maximum Sensitivity Setting
Procedure
Operation
E3X-NT
1
Locate the sensor head within the rated sensing range with the E3X-N@.
2
Set the mode selector to TEACH.
TEACH
RUN
3
346
The super-flashing function of the E3X-N@ will be activated.
--Therefore, adjust the optical axes so that the tip of the emitting
fiber will be lit. If the optical axes are divergent, the tip of the
emitting fiber will flash and the built-in buzzer of the E3X-N@
will beep.
E3X-NM
TEACH
TIMER
SET
RUN
Section 5-11
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
Procedure
Operation
4
Press the teaching button for three seconds minimum with or
without a sensing object. In the case of the E3X-NM, select a
channel with the channel selector, at which time the stability
indicator for the selected channel will flash.
The teaching indicator (red) turns green.
The built-in buzzer beeps once when the color of the teaching
indicator is red.
The built-in buzzer beeps continuously when the color of the
teaching indicator is green.
Note: The built-in buzzer will stop beeping when the teaching
button is no longer being pressed.
5
Set the mode selector to RUN to complete the sensitivity setting.
The teaching indicator is OFF.
Note: When the sensitivity is set to maximum, the sensitivity
will be automatically adjusted regardless of the set distances of the fibers or light.
6
Select the logical output required with the operation mode
selector.
E3X-NT
E3X-NM
TEACH
TEACH
TEACH
TEACH
TIMER
SET
RUN
RUN
L
D
ON
CH 1
L ON
D ON
2 3 4
ON
347
Section 5-11
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
No-object Teaching
Procedure
Operation
E3X-NT
1
Locate the sensor head within the rated sensing range with the E3X-N@.
2
Set the mode selector to TEACH.
TEACH
E3X-NM
TEACH
TIMER
SET
RUN
RUN
3
The super-flashing function of the E3X-N@ will be activated.
--Therefore, adjust the optical axes so that the tip of the emitting
fiber will be lit. If the optical axes are divergent, the tip of the
emitting fiber will flash and the built-in buzzer of the E3X-N@
will beep.
4
Press the teaching button for 0.5 to 2.5 seconds without a
sensing object. In the case the E3X-NM, select a channel with
the channel selector and press the teaching button, at which
time the stability indicator for the selected channel will flash.
The teaching indicator (red) is lit.
The built-in buzzer beeps once.
5
6
TEACH
TEACH
Set the mode selector to RUN. No-object teaching will be set
when the first sensing object passes through the sensing
area.
The teaching indicator (red) turns green (automatically turned
off in one second).
Select the logical output required with the operation mode
selector.
TEACH
RUN
L
D
Note
TEACH
TIMER
SET
RUN
ON
CH 1
L ON
D ON
2 3 4
ON
1. After no-object teaching is performed, the first to fifth incident with the corresponding sensing objects will be sampled to adjust the sensitivity.
2. The E3X-N@ will be ready to detect objects in approximately one second
after the mode selector is set to RUN.
With/Without-object Teaching
Procedure
Operation
1
Locate the sensor head within the rated sensing range with
the E3X-N@.
2
E3X-NT
---
Set the mode selector to TEACH.
TEACH
RUN
3
348
E3X-NM
The super-flashing function of the E3X-N@ will be activated.
--Therefore, adjust the optical axes so that the tip of the emitting
fiber will be lit. If the optical axes are divergent, the tip of the
emitting fiber will flash and the built-in buzzer of the E3X-N@
will beep.
TEACH
TIMER
SET
RUN
Section 5-11
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
Procedure
Operation
4
Locate a sensing object in the sensing area and press the
teaching button once. In the case of the E3X-NM, select a
channel with the channel selector and press the teaching
button, at which time the stability indicator for the selected
channel will flash.
Through-beam Model
Reflective Model
E3X-NT
E3X-NM
TEACH
TEACH
Reflective Model
Mark
Light is interrupted.
Base
The teaching indicator (red) is lit.
The built-in buzzer beeps once.
5
Move the object and press the teaching button.
Through-beam Model
Reflective Model
Reflective Model
TEACH
TEACH
Mark
Light is received.
Base
If teaching is OK: The teaching indicator (red) turns green.
The built-in buzzer beeps once.
If teaching is NG: The teaching indicator (red) starts flashing.
The operation indicator also starts flashing.
(E3X-NM)
The built-in buzzer beeps 3 times.
Change the position of the object and the sensing distance
that have been set and repeat from the beginning.
6
7
Set the mode selector to RUN to complete the sensitivity setting.
The teaching indicator (green) is OFF.
Select the logical output required with the operation mode
selector.
TEACH
TEACH
TIMER
SET
RUN
RUN
L
D
ON
CH 1
L ON
D ON
2 3 4
ON
349
Section 5-12
Application Precautions
5-12 Application Precautions
5-12-1 Two-wire DC Sensor Connections
When connecting a Unit with transistor inputs to a 2-wire DC sensor, check
that the following conditions are satisfied, or otherwise the Unit may malfunction.
Relationship between ON Voltage of Unit with Transistor Inputs and
Residual Voltage of Sensor
VON ≤ VCC – VR
VCC:
I/O power supply voltage (calculated at 20.4 V in consideration of
the worst condition through the power supply voltage range is between 20.4 and 26.4 V.)
VON: ON voltage of Unit with transistor inputs (Refer to page 351 for
specifications for each Slave.)
Output residual voltage of sensor
V R:
The above formula can be satisfied by setting the I/O power supply voltage
(VCC) to 26.4 V.
Relationship between ON Current of Unit with Transistor Inputs and
Control Output (Load current) of Sensor
IOUT (min) ≤ ION ≤ IOUT (max)
IOUT:Sensor control output (Load current)
ION: ON current of Unit with transistor inputs
ION is obtained from the following formula.
ION = (VCC–VR–VF) / RIN
VF: Residual voltage of Transistor Input (Refer to page 351 for specifications for each Slave.)
RIN:Input impedance of Unit with transistor inputs (Refer to page 351
for specifications for each Slave.)
If ION is smaller than IOUT (min), connect the bleeder resistance R obtained
from the following formula.
R ≤ (VCC – VR) / (IOUT (min) – ION)
Power W ≥ (VCC – VR)2/R × 4 (Excess gain)
2-wire
sensor
Unit with
transistor
inputs
Relationship between OFF Current of Unit with Transistor Inputs and
Current Leakage of Sensor
IOFF ≥ Ileak
IOUT: OFF current of Unit with transistor inputs (Refer to page 351 for specifications for each Slave.)
Ileak: Current leakage of sensor
If Ileak is smaller than IOUT, connect the bleeder resistance R obtained from
the following formula.
R ≤ (IOFF × RIN + VF) / (Ileak – IOFF)
Power W ≥ (VCC – VR)2/R × 4 (Excess gain)
350
Section 5-12
Application Precautions
Specifications of each Slave
The following table shows specifications of each Slave: The ON voltage, residual voltage, input impedance, and OFF current.
Model
ON voltage (VON)
Residual voltage
(VF)
Input impedance
(RIN)
OFF current (IOUT)
SRT@-ID04/08/16 (-1)
15 V
2.5 V (See note.)
4.7 kΩ
1.0 mA
SRT@-ID16T/MD16T (-1)
SRT2-VID08S (-1)
15 V
15 V
1.5 V
1.5 V
4.4 kΩ
4.4 kΩ
1.0 mA
1.0 mA
SRT2-VID16ML (-1)
SRT2-ID32ML (-1)
15 V
15 V
1.5 V
1.5 V
4.4 kΩ
4.4 kΩ
1.0 mA
1.0 mA
SRT2-MD32ML (-1)
SRT@-ID08S
15 V
12 V
1.5 V
4.5 V (See note.)
4.4 kΩ
2.7 kΩ
1.0 mA
1.0 mA
SRT@-ND08S
SRT2-ID04CL (-1)
12 V
15 V
4.5 V (See note.)
1.5 V
2.7 kΩ
4.4 kΩ
1.0 mA
1.0 mA
SRT2-ID08CL (-1)
15 V
1.5 V
4.4 kΩ
1.0 mA
Note The value includes the voltage drop resulting from the LEDs and diodes.
5-12-2 Sensor Inrush Current
When the sensor ready to input is turned ON after the PLC is turned ON and
the internal power supply of a Slave is turned ON, the wrong signal may be
input from the sensor due to the inrush current of the sensor. Check the
period between the moment the sensor is turned ON and the moment the
operation of the sensor has become stable. Then program a timer delay after
the sensor is turned ON.
Program example
00000
TIM
000
#0001
TIM000
00001
00100
1,2,3...
1. Set input bit IR 00000 to the sensor power supply voltage.
2. Insert a timer delay for the stabilization of the sensor. The delay will be
100 ms if OMRON’s Proximity Sensor is used.
3. After the timer is ON, sensor input to input bit IR 00001 is accepted and
output bit IR 00100 will be ON.
351
SECTION 6
Starting Communications
This section provides information on error processing, periodic maintenance operations, and troubleshooting procedures
needed to keep the CompoBus/S System operating properly.
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
Turning the Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
354
6-1-1
Power-up Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
355
Checking Operations for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E,
and C200HS Master Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
356
6-2-1
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
356
6-2-2
Checking Status Using Status Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
357
6-2-3
Checking Normal Operations Using Ladder Programs . . . . . . . . . .
359
6-2-4
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
360
Checking Operations of CS-series and CJ-series Master Units . . . . . . . . . . .
365
6-3-1
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
365
6-3-2
Checking Status Using Status Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
365
6-3-3
Checking Status Using Special I/O Unit DM Area . . . . . . . . . . . . .
367
6-3-4
Checking Normal Operations Using Ladder Programming . . . . . . .
371
6-3-5
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
373
Checking Operations of CQM1 Master Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
377
6-4-1
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
377
6-4-2
Error Detection with the Alarm Output (CQM1 Only) . . . . . . . . . .
378
6-4-3
Checking Normal Operations Using Ladder Programming . . . . . . .
379
6-4-4
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
379
Checking Slave Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
382
6-5-1
6-6
6-7
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
382
Cleaning and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
384
6-6-1
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
384
6-6-2
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
384
Precautions for Replacement of Units or Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
385
6-7-1
Precautions for Unit Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
385
6-7-2
Settings after Unit Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
385
6-7-3
Replacing Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
385
353
Section 6-1
Turning the Power ON
6-1
Turning the Power ON
Once all of the connections and settings have been made, power can be supplied to all of the Units in the CompoBus/S System and communications can
be started.
!Caution Power Connections
Be sure to check the power supply connections carefully before turning the
power ON. Incorrect wiring can damage the Units in the system or cause
them to malfunction.
Required Settings
The settings required for CompoBus/S I/O data communications are the Master Unit switch settings, the node number setting, and the communications
mode setting on each Slave Unit. Depending on the Slaves being used, other
settings such as holding or clearing outputs for communications errors may be
required. Refer to SECTION 4 Master Unit Specifications and Operations and
SECTION 5 Slave Specifications and Operations for details.
Before turning ON the power, check the settings and wiring, referring to 3-5
Operations Checklist.
Turning the Power ON
The Units in a CompoBus/S System can be turned ON in any order. Turn ON
the power to the Slaves first, however, to enable communications to start at
the same time that the Master Unit is started up. The following table shows
which Units are supplied by each power supply.
Unit
Master
Required power supply
PLC’s power supply
Network power supply Slave Communications power supply
(including the I/O power supply)
Dual power supply Slave
Local power supply Slave
Communications power supply and I/O power supply
Slave power supply
CompoBus/S communications will start up automatically once the required
power has been supplied to all of the Units.
Note
1. An error will not occur if the Slave has the same node number setting as
another Unit. Use the status area in the Master Unit to detect for Slaves
that have the same node number.
2. When the Slave registration function is used with a CS-series or CJ-series
Master Unit, the Slaves start to be checked after the Master has been started up and the registered Slave input monitoring time has lapsed.
When Slaves are slow to power up, a verification error (Slave missing) may
occur, so check the power-up timing
3. When using a CS-series or CJ-series Master Unit, if the Slave registration
function is used and the system is started up after being connected and
set, incorrect node number settings and Slaves that are missing from the
network can be easily checked
354
Section 6-1
Turning the Power ON
6-1-1
Power-up Checklist
After turning the power ON, use the following checklist to verify the CompoBus/S communications have started properly.
Unit
Check
Master Are the RUN, SD, and RD indicators lit?
Slave
Note
Answer
Yes No
With CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS
Master Units, is the ERC indicator OFF?
Yes
No
With CS-series Master Units, are the ERH and ERC indicators
OFF?
Yes
No
With CJ-series Master Units, are the ERH and ERC indicators
Yes
OFF?
With a CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Yes
Master Unit, CS-series Master Unit, or CJ-series Master Unit,
are the Active Node Flags ON for all of the Slaves connected to
the system?
No
With CQM1 Masters, are the ERS and ERC indicators OFF?
Are the PWR and COMM indicators lit?
Yes
Yes
No
No
Is the ERR indicator OFF?
Is the U.ERR indicator OFF?
(For SRT2-AD04 and SRT2-DA02 Analog Terminals only)
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
1. If any questions are answered “No,” refer to 6-2 Checking Operations for
CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Master Units to
6-5 Checking Slave Operations for instructions on identifying and clearing
the cause of the error.
2. For SRM1 and CPM2C-S Master Units, refer to the SRM1 Operation Manual and CPM2C-S Operation Manual.
355
Checking Operations for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Master Units
6-2
Section 6-2
Checking Operations for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/
C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Master Units
6-2-1
Indicators
Errors and Troubleshooting
Situation
Indicator status
Probable cause
Possible remedy
RUN ERC SD
ON
OFF ON
RD
ON
---
---
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
The PLC’s power is OFF.
Turn the PLC’s power supply ON.
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
The Master is not completely
connected to the Backplane.
Mount the Master properly.
CPU Unit standby sta- OFF
tus
Special I/O Unit error OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
I/O UNIT OVER error
OFF
I/O BUS error
Slave not connected
Normal communications
PLC’s power OFF
Not connected to
Backplane
OFF
One of the Special I/O Units is
faulty.
OFF Refreshing between the PLC
and Master Unit is not being
performed properly.
Replace the faulty Unit, which will be
indicated by a“$” in the I/O table.
After correcting the cause, toggle the
Unit’s restart bit in the AR Area.
Replace the Unit if it doesn’t reset
when the restart bit is toggled.
OFF
OFF
OFF
The same unit number has
been set on two or more Special I/O Units.
An out-of-range unit number
has been set.
Set unique unit numbers.
If the usable node numbers are
within IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to
OUT15, 9 or F cannot be set. node
numbers A to F cannot be used with
C200HX-CPU3@-(Z)E/ -CPU4@(Z)E, C200HG-CPU3@-(Z)E/ CPU4@-(Z)E, or C200HS PLCs.
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Check the I/O connecting cables
between all Racks. Clear the error
after the connection is fixed.
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
The I/O bus is not connected
correctly. (In CS-series PLCs,
an I/O BUS error may have
occurred in another Unit.)
No Slaves are connected, or
the communications mode of
each Slave does not match
that of the Master Unit.
ON
ON
---
An error has occurred with a
Slave during communications
and it is withdrawn from the
system.
Check the Communications Error
Flags or indicators and clear the
cause of the communications error.
See Communications Error Node
Number Indicators below.
Communications error ON
with a Slave
Use a Slave that can communicate
properly, or make the communications mode of each Slave match that
of the Master Unit.
Note Check the system’s operation with just one Slave connected (one Slave at a
time) if the CompoBus system does not operate but the Master’s indicator status does not match any of those in the table.
Communications Error
Node Number Indicators
(C200HW-SRM21-V1 Only)
When a communications error occurs with a Slave during communications
and the ERC indicator lights, the other indicators will show the node number
of the Slave where the error occurred in binary.
When several communications errors occur simultaneously, the node number
of the Slave with the first recognized communications error will be displayed.
The display will not be changed if another communications error occurs while
a node number is already being displayed. A new node number can be displayed after the first communications error is cleared.
When a communications error occurs in a 16-point or greater Slave, any of
the node numbers currently used by that Slave may be displayed.
356
Checking Operations for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Master Units
Section 6-2
The following table shows some examples of node number displays.
Situation
ERC
Communications error in the Input
Slave with node number 13
Communications error in the Output
Slave with node number 6
Communications error in the Input
Slave with node number 0
A communications error occurs in
the Output Slave with node number
11 after an error occurs in the Input
Slave with node number 3.
6-2-2
ON
ON
ON
ON
Indicator status
I/O
8
4
2
OFF ON
ON
Possible remedy
1
OFF ON
Check the communications cable to Input
Slave 13 and the status of the Slave itself.
ON OFF ON ON OFF Check the communications cable to Output
Slave 6 and the status of the Slave itself.
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Check the communications cable to Input
Slave 0 and the status of the Slave itself.
OFF OFF OFF ON ON First, check the communications cable to
Input Slave 3 and the status of the Slave
itself.
Once the error in Input Slave 3 is cleared,
the display will show the error in Output
Slave 11 and this error can be cleared.
Checking Status Using Status Information
When using CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, or C200HS Master
Units, information on active Slave status and communications error status is
stored for each Slave in the status area of the PLC’s Special I/O Unit Area.
Status Area Location and
Configuration
The location and configuration of the status area is shown in the following
table.
Usable Node Number is IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7
Two words are used for flags when the max. number of Slaves setting is 16.
PLC
CS-series PLCs
Location of Status Area
First word = 2000 + unit number × 10
C200HX/C200HG/
C200HE-(Z)E, and
C200HS PLCs
Unit numbers 0 to 9:
First word = 100 + unit number × 10
Unit numbers A to F (10 to 15):
First word = 400 + (unit number – 10) × 10
Bits
Output Slave Communications Error Flags
First
word + 8 Slave 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0
Active Output Slave Flags
Slave 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0
First
Input Slave Communications Error Flags
word + 9 Slave 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0
Active Input Slave Flags
Slave 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0
Usable Node Number is IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15
Four words are used for flags when the max. number of Slaves setting is 32.
PLC
CS-series PLCs
Location of Special I/O Unit Area
First word = 2000 + unit number × 10
C200HX/C200HG/
C200HE-(Z)E, and
C200HS PLCs
Unit numbers 0 to 8:
First word = 100 + unit number × 10
Unit numbers A to E (10 to 14):
First word = 400 + (unit number – 10) × 10
357
Checking Operations for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Master Units
Section 6-2
Bits
Status Flag Functions
First word
+ 16
First word
+ 17
Output Slave Communications Error Flags
Slave 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0
Active Output Slave Flags
Slave 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0
Input Slave Communications Error Flags
Slave 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0
Active Input Slave Flags
Slave 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 0
First word
+ 18
Output Slave Communications Error Flags
Slave 15 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8
Active Output Slave Flags
Slave 15 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8
First word
+ 19
Input Slave Communications Error Flags
Slave 15 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8
Active Input Slave Flags
Slave 15 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8
The status flags have the following functions. These flags are automatically
cleared to 0 when the power is turned ON or the system is restarted.
Active Output Slave Flags
These flags indicate whether the corresponding Output Slaves are active
nodes in the CompoBus/S communications.
Flag status
0 (OFF)
1 (ON)
Meaning
The corresponding Slave is not participating in communications.
(OFF if the Slave didn’t participate even one time.)
The corresponding Slave is participating in communications.
(Not changed even if the Slave is withdrawn from communications.)
Active Input Slave Flags
These flags indicate whether the corresponding Input Slaves are active nodes
in the CompoBus/S communications.
Flag status
0 (OFF)
Meaning
The corresponding Slave is not participating in communications.
(OFF if the Slave didn’t participate even one time.)
1 (ON)
The corresponding Slave is participating in communications.
(Not changed even if the Slave is withdrawn from communications.)
Output Slave Communications Error Flags
These flags indicate whether a communications error has occurred with the
corresponding Output Slaves.
Flag status
0 (OFF)
1 (ON)
Meaning
Normal communications or the Slave is not participating in communications.
Withdrawn from communications (communications error)
Input Slave Communications Error Flags
These flags indicate whether a communications error has occurred with the
corresponding Input Slaves.
Flag status
Meaning
0 (OFF)
Normal communications or the Slave is not participating in communications.
1 (ON)
Withdrawn from communications (communications error)
Note Input from Input Slaves and output to Output Slaves are enabled when the
CompoBus/S System is started up and the Active Node Flag corresponding to
the Slave turns ON. During actual operation, it is recommended to create ladder programming that processes Slave I/O after checking that Active Node
Flags are ON and Communications Error Flags are OFF.
358
Checking Operations for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Master Units
6-2-3
Section 6-2
Checking Normal Operations Using Ladder Programs
This section provides information on how to write a ladder program to monitor
the operation of the CompoBus/S System and prohibit using the I/O data of
the Slaves in the system when an error occurs.
To write a ladder program for CompoBus/S remote I/O communications for the
CS-series, C200HX, C200HG, C200HE-(Z)E, or C200HS Master Unit, it is
recommended to write I/O data on condition that the Active Node Flags and
Communications Error Flags in the status area are monitored to check the
operation of the CompoBus/S System.
The CompoBus/S status area has the following flags. (Refer to page 81.)
Active Node Flags:
Once a Slave joins the CompoBus/S network after the Slave is turned ON,
the Active Node Flag corresponding to the Slave will be ON.
Communications Error Flags:
If a Slave in the network fails to communicate with the Master, the Communications Error Flag corresponding to the Slave will be ON. After the Communications Error Flag is ON, the previous input data from the input Slave
will be kept on hold. While the Communications Error Flag is ON, the input
date of the input Slave is not reliable. (The program will be executed with
the previous data.)
The following ladder program example uses I/O data after checking the normal operation of the CompoBus/S System. In this example, the C200HX Master with unit number 0 is used and usable node numbers are IN0 to IN7 and
OUT0 to OUT7.
359
Checking Operations for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Master Units
Section 6-2
Wrong
(n + 4 words bit 00)
The system is not always in normal operation
when bit 00 of input Slave 0 is turned ON.
Normal operation
Input Slave
Bit 00 of node number 0
Normal communications
Bit 10400 is ON
and the system
seems to be in
normal operation.
CompoBus/S Master Unit
Communications error
CompoBus/S
Master Unit
Bit 10400 is
ON and the
system seems
to be in normal
operation.
Communications
error
Slave
Slave
Bit 00 ON
Bit 00 is OFF when a
communications error
occurs.
Correct
10900
(n + 9 words bit 00)
Input Slave
Node address 0
Active Node Flag
a
10908
(n + 9 words bit 08)
AR bit
Work bit (a) is ON if input Slave Node 0 is
in normal communication in the network.
Input Slave
Normal operation
Node address 0
Communications Error Flag
10400
(n + 4 words bit 00)
Input Slave
Node address 0
Bit 00
Bit 00 of input Slave is used after checking
that the system is in normal operation.
It is possible to write a ladder program that confirms normal operation when a
work bit (a) turns OFF.
A ladder program that checks all the Active Node Flags and Communications
Error Flags in a batch, checks the overall CompoBus/S System operations,
and then performs I/O processing for the Slaves in a batch can also be written. For details, refer to the section for CJ-series Master Units under 6-3-4
Checking Normal Operations Using Ladder Programming.
6-2-4
Troubleshooting
When an error occurs, the indicators of a Master Unit connected to a CSseries, C2missing00HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, or C200HS PLC will indicate
the error. Check the Master Unit’s indicators and perform the error processing
described in the following table.
360
Checking Operations for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Master Units
Section 6-2
When an error occurs in a Slave, the Slave can be identified from the status of
the Master’s indicators or from the status flags in the PLC’s Special I/O Unit
Area.
Error
The Master Unit’s
RUN indicator is
OFF
The Master Unit’s
RUN indicator is
OFF
Probable cause
The PLC’s power is OFF.
Possible remedy
Turn the PLC’s power supply ON.
The same unit number has been set
on another Special I/O Unit, causing
an I/O UNIT OVER error in the PLC.
Check that the same unit number is not used by more than
one Special I/O Unit and restart the PLC. In particular, when
the usable node number setting is IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to
OUT15, check that the next unit number after the one set on
the Master Unit is not set on another Special I/O Unit.
The unit number has been set outside Check that the unit number is set within the range specified
the specified range, causing an I/O
for Special I/O Units and restart the PLC.
UNIT OVER error in the PLC.
CS-series:
Unit numbers 0 to F can be set when the maximum number
of Slaves setting is 16 (pin 1 OFF); Mountable number of
Master Units is 16 when using 10 words as a Special I/O
Unit; Usable node number setting is IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to
OUT7
Unit numbers 0 to E can be set when the maximum number
of Slaves setting is 32 (pin 1 ON); Mountable number of Master Units is 8 when using 20 words as a Special I/O Unit;
Usable node number setting is IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to
OUT15
C200HX-CPU3@-(Z)E/-CPU4@-(Z)E, C200HX-CPU3@-(Z)E/
-CPU4@-(Z)E, C200HE, and C200HS PLCs:
Unit numbers 0 to 9 can be set when the maximum number
of Slaves setting is 16 (pin 1 OFF); Mountable number of
Master Units is 10 when using 10 words as a Special I/O
Unit; Usable node number setting is IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to
OUT7
Unit numbers 0 to 8 can be set when the maximum number
of Slaves setting is 32 (pin 1 ON); Mountable number of Master Units is 5 when using 20 words as a Special I/O Unit;
Usable node number setting is IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to
OUT15
C200HX-CPU5@-(Z)E/-CPU6@-(Z)E/-CPU8@-(Z)E and
C200HG-CPU5@-(Z)E/-CPU6@-(Z)E PLCs:
Unit numbers 0 to 9 or A to F can be set when the maximum
number of Slaves setting is 16 (pin 1 OFF); Mountable number of Master Units is 16 (when using 10 words as a Special
I/O Unit; Usable node number setting is IN0 to IN7 and OUT0
to OUT7
Unit numbers 0 to 8 or A to E can be set when the maximum
number of Slaves setting is 32 (pin 1 ON); Mountable number
of Master Units is 8 (when using 20 words as a Special I/O
Unit; Usable node number setting is IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to
OUT15
A Special I/O Unit error occurred in
Turn the PLC OFF and then ON again.
the PLC because the usable node
number setting was changed with the
PLC power ON, but just the Master
Unit was restarted.
A Special I/O Unit error occurred in
the PLC because the Master Unit is
not connected securely.
An input-output I/O table error
occurred in the PLC because the Master Unit’s unit number or usable node
number setting was changed after the
I/O table was registered.
Turn the PLC OFF, make sure that the Master Unit is
mounted correctly, and then turn the PLC ON again. Replace
the Master Unit if the error recurs.
Register the I/O table again.
The Master Unit is faulty.
Replace the Master Unit.
361
Checking Operations for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Master Units
Error
The Master Unit’s
SD indicator is
OFF
The Master Unit’s
RD indicator is
OFF
Section 6-2
Probable cause
Possible remedy
Either reset the Master Unit with the PLC’s Restart Bit or turn
the PLC OFF and then ON again. Replace the Master Unit if
the error recurs.
The communications cable is not con- Connect the communications cable correctly.
nected to the Master.
A Slave’s number has been set to 8 to Either change the Input and Output Slave’s node number set15 even though the usable node
tings so that they are 0 to 7 or change the usable node numaddress setting is IN0 to IN7 and
ber setting to IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15.
OUT0 to OUT7.
---
One of the Slaves is not turned ON.
(The Slave’s PWR indicator is OFF.)
There is a problem with the Slaves’
power supply.
The Slaves’ power supply is inadequate.
Turn ON the Slave’s power supply.
Communications modes of Master
Unit and Slave do not match.
A common system mistake has been
made. (Refer to the table on page 364
for a list of common mistakes.)
Set the communications mode so that it is the same as that of
the Master Unit.
Refer to the table on page 364 for common mistakes and
their remedies.
The Master Unit is faulty.
Power is not being supplied to the
Slaves.
Replace the Master Unit.
Turn ON the Slave’s power supply.
There is a problem with the Slaves’
power supply.
Check the power supply cable connections and connect the
cables to the Slaves correctly.
Check the power supply cable connections and connect the
cables to the Slaves correctly.
Check the power supply capacity. If it is inadequate, either
change the system configuration or change the power supply
so that sufficient power is provided.
There is a problem with the communi- Check the connections and cable. Replace the communicacation cable connection or the cable
tions cable if it is faulty.
itself.
The Master Unit’s
ERC indicator is
ON
Check the power supply capacity. If it is inadequate, either
change the system configuration or change the power supply
so that sufficient power is provided.
There is a problem with the communi- Check the connections and cable. Replace the communicacation cable connection or the cable
tions cable if it is faulty.
itself.
There is a non-existent node number Either reset the Master Unit with the PLC’s Restart Bit or turn
because a Slave’s node number was the PLC OFF and then ON again.
changed after communications were
established.
The Slaves’ power supply is inadequate.
The same node number is used on
two Slaves.
Change the Slaves’ node number settings to eliminate the
duplication and then turn the Slaves ON again. Either reset
the Master Unit with the PLC’s Restart Bit or turn the PLC
OFF and then ON again.
A common system mistake has been Refer to the table on page 364 for common mistakes and
made. (Refer to the table on page 364 their remedies.
for a list of common mistakes.)
A Slave Unit is faulty.
Replace the faulty Slave Unit.
362
Checking Operations for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Master Units
Error
A Slave Unit’s
COMM indicator
is OFF or its ERR
indicator is ON
Probable cause
An error has occurred at the Master
Unit.
Section 6-2
Possible remedy
Check the Master Unit’s indicators and follow the procedures
listed above.
The Slave cannot participate in com- Turn ON the Slave’s power supply.
munications because its power supply
is OFF. (The Slave’s PWR indicator is
OFF.)
The Slave cannot participate in com- Check the power supply cable connections and connect the
munications because there is a prob- cables to the Slaves correctly.
lem with the Slaves’ power supply.
The Slave cannot participate in com- Check the power supply capacity. If it is inadequate, either
munications because its power supply change the system configuration or change the power supply
is inadequate.
so that sufficient power is provided.
The Slave cannot participate in communications because there is a problem with the communication cable
connection or the cable itself.
The same node number is used on
another Slave.
Check the connections and cable. Replace the communications cable if it is faulty.
A Slave’s number has been set to 8 to
15 even though the usable node number setting is IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to
OUT7.
Communications modes of Master
Unit and Slave do not match.
A common system mistake has been
made. (Refer to the table on page 364
for a list of common mistakes.)
The Slave Unit is faulty.
Either change the Input and Output Slave’s node number settings so that they are 0 to 7 or change the usable node number setting to IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15.
The area used by the Analog Terminal
or 32-point Connector Terminal
exceeds the range of the Master Unit
I/O Area.
The same node number is set on two
or more Input Slaves or Output
Slaves.
Change to node numbers that do not exceed the I/O Area
range, then turn ON the PLC again.
The indicators on
the Master and
Slaves are normal, but there are
errors in the com- The PLC’s Output OFF Bit is ON, so
munications data the Output Slave outputs are always
OFF.
The communications power supply to
the Slaves is ON, but the I/O power
supply is OFF, so the Output Slave
outputs and Input Slave inputs are
always OFF.
There is a problem with the communication cable connection or the cable
itself.
Usable node numbers setting is incorrect.
Change one of the Slave’s node number settings to eliminate
the duplication and then turn the Slaves ON again. Either
reset the Master Unit with the PLC’s Restart Bit or turn the
PLC OFF and then ON again.
Set the communications mode so that it is the same as that of
the Master Unit.
Refer to the table on page 364 for common mistakes and
their remedies.
Replace the Slave Unit.
Check the Active Node Flags for the Master and see whether
the flags are ON for all of the connected Slaves. If two Slaves
have the same node number, change the Slaves’ node number settings.
Turn OFF the PLC’s Output OFF Bit.
Provide an I/O power supply to the Slaves.
Check the connections and cable. Replace the communications cable if it is faulty.
Refer to 4-1-3 I/O Allocations in CS-series, C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS PLCs and reset the
usable node numbers to correct values.
The Analog Terminal is connected to a Change the Master Unit to a C200HW-SRM21-V1.
C200HW-SRM21 (without V1).
A common system mistake has been Refer to the table on page 364 for common mistakes and
made. (Refer to the table on page 364 their remedies.
for a list of common mistakes.)
The Master or a Slave Unit is faulty.
Replace the Slave Unit. Replace the Master Unit if the problem recurs.
363
Checking Operations for CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS Master Units
Common Mistakes
Section 6-2
The following table shows common connection mistakes and their remedies.
Mistake
A terminator is not connected.
Remedy
Connect a terminator (connector or terminal-block) at the
end of the cable farthest from the Master.
The terminator is not connected at the end of the cable farthest from the Master.
Connect the terminator at the end of the cable farthest from
the Master.
The master is not connected at one end of the main line in a Connect the Master at one end of the main line.
system in which the main line must be distinguished from
the branch lines.
The length of the main line, a branch line, or the total length
of the branch lines of the system in which the main line must
be distinguished from the branch lines is not within specifications.
Make sure that the lengths of the cables in the system are
within the specifications listed in 2-2-2 Maximum Cable
Length, or change the communications mode to Long-distance Communications Mode so that the length of the
cables in the system will be within specifications.
The total communications cable in the system in which the Refer to 2-2-2 Maximum Cable Length and change the conmain line does not need to be distinguished from the branch figuration so that the length of the total communications
lines is not within specifications.
cable length will be within specifications.
2-conductor VCTF cable, 4-conductor VCTF cable, and
Special Flat Cable are used together in the same system.
Use just one kind of cable in the system.
There is a break in the communications cable.
When 4-conductor VCTF cable or Special Flat Cable is
being used, a connector is not attached securely to the
cable.
A connector is faulty.
Reconnect or replace the communications cable.
Make sure that the connectors are crimped correctly on the
cable.
364
Replace the faulty connector.
Section 6-3
Checking Operations of CS-series and CJ-series Master Units
6-3
Checking Operations of CS-series and CJ-series Master
Units
6-3-1
Indicators
Errors and Troubleshooting
Situation
Normal communications
PLC’s power OFF
Indicator status
RUN ERH ERC SD
ON
OFF OFF ON
OFF
Probable cause
RD
ON
---
OFF OFF OFF OFF The PLC’s power is OFF.
The correct voltage is not
being supplied to the PLC.
The Master Unit is faulty.
The PLC is faulty.
Unit number setting
error
OFF
ON
OFF OFF OFF The same unit number is set
on another Special I/O Unit,
or the unit number is not
within the specified range for
Special I/O Units.
The Master Unit was
restarted after changing the
usable node number setting
switch (DIP switch pin 1).
The CPU Unit is faulty.
Master Unit error
CPU Unit error
OFF
---
OFF ON
ON ---
Communications
error
ON
---
ON
Possible remedy
--Turn the PLC’s power supply ON.
Supply the correct voltage to the
PLC.
Replace the Master Unit.
Replace the PLC (CPU Unit,
Power Supply Unit).
Set unit numbers that are unique
and within the specified range.
Restart the PLC and set to automatically create I/O tables.
Restart the PLC. If the same error
occurs, replace the CPU Unit.
OFF OFF The Master Unit is faulty.
Replace the Master Unit.
----An error has occurred in the Remove the cause of the error,
CPU Unit.
and restart the PLC. If the same
error occurs, replace the CPU Unit.
----A Slave disconnection has
Remove the cause of the error. In
been detected.
communications stop mode, turn
ON the power or restart the Unit
after removing the cause of the
error. In normal communications
mode, the Unit will restart automatically.
The Master Unit is faulty.
Verification error
ON
---
ON
ON
---
Restart the Master Unit. If the
same error occurs, replace the
Master Unit.
When the Slave registration When a Slave is missing, the Unit
function is used indicates
will restart automatically when the
detection of a Slave that is
missing Slave is connected to the
missing in the network or an network. When an unregistered
unregistered Slave that is in Slave is detected, restart the Masthe network.
ter Unit after removing the unregistered Slave.
Note Check the system’s operation with just one Slave connected (one Slave at a
time) if the CompoBus system does not operate but the Master’s indicator status does not match any of those in the table.
6-3-2
Checking Status Using Status Information
When using a CS-series or CJ-series Master Unit, information on active Slave
status and communications error status is stored for each Slave in the status
area of the PLC's Special I/O Unit Area.
365
Section 6-3
Checking Operations of CS-series and CJ-series Master Units
This status can be read out using a Programming Device (such as the CXProgrammer) to monitor Slave status.
Status Area Location and
Configuration
The location and configuration of the status area is shown in the following
table.
PLC
Location of Status Area
CS-series and CJseries PLCs
First word = 2000 + unit number × 10
Usable Node Number is IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7
15 14 13 12 11 10
First word
+8
First word
+9
9
8
Output Slave Communications Error Flags
Slave 7
0
Input Slave Communications Error Flags
Slave 7
0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bits
Active Output Slave Flags
Slave 7
0
Active Input Slave Flags
Slave 7
0
Usable Node Number is IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15
15 14 13 12 11 10
First word
+ 16
First word
+ 17
First word
+ 18
First word
+ 19
Status Flag Functions
9
8
Output Slave Communications Error Flags
Slave 7
0
Input Slave Communications Error Flags
Slave 7
0
Output Slave Communications Error Flags
Slave 15
8
Input Slave Communications Error Flags
Slave 15
8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Active Output Slave Flags
Slave 7
Active Input Slave Flags
Slave 7
Active Output Slave Flags
Slave 15
Active Input Slave Flags
Slave 15
0 Bits
0
0
8
8
The status flags have the following functions. These flags are automatically
cleared to 0 when the power is turned ON or the system is restarted.
Active Output Slave Flags
These flags indicate whether the corresponding Output Slaves are active
nodes in the CompoBus/S communications.
Flag status
0 (OFF)
1 (ON)
Meaning
The corresponding Slave is not participating in communications.
(OFF if the Slave didn’t participate even one time.)
The corresponding Slave is participating in communications.
(Not changed even if the Slave is withdrawn from communications.)
Active Input Slave Flags
These flags indicate whether the corresponding Input Slaves are active nodes
in the CompoBus/S communications.
Flag status
Meaning
0 (OFF)
The corresponding Slave is not participating in communications.
(OFF if the Slave didn’t participate even one time.)
1 (ON)
The corresponding Slave is participating in communications.
(Not changed even if the Slave is withdrawn from communications.)
Output Slave Communications Error Flags
These flags indicate whether a communications error has occurred with the
corresponding Output Slaves.
Flag status
0 (OFF)
1 (ON)
366
Meaning
Normal communications or the Slave is not participating in communications.
Withdrawn from communications (communications error)
(This flag turns OFF automatically when the Slave rejoins communications.)
Section 6-3
Checking Operations of CS-series and CJ-series Master Units
Input Slave Communications Error Flags
These flags indicate whether a communications error has occurred with the
corresponding Input Slaves.
Flag status
0 (OFF)
1 (ON)
Note
Meaning
Normal communications or the Slave is not participating in communications.
Withdrawn from communications (communications error)
(This flag turns OFF automatically when the Slave rejoins communications.)
1. Input from Input Slaves and output to Output Slaves is enabled when the
CompoBus/S System is started up and the Active Node Flag corresponding to the Slave is turned ON. During actual operation, it is recommended
to create a ladder program that processes Slave I/O after checking that Active Node Flags are turned ON and Communications Error Flags are OFF.
2. When a CS-series or CJ-series Master Unit is set to communications stop
mode, communications will stop when the Output Slave Communications
Error Flag or Input Slave Communications Error Flag turns ON.
6-3-3
Checking Status Using Special I/O Unit DM Area
A CS-series and CJ-series Master Unit is allocated an area in the PLC's Special I/O Unit DM Area for setting and information storage for the Slave registration function and communications stop mode. Use a Programming Device
(such as the CX-Programmer) to read the area and check the communications status and which Slave the error occurred in.
Master Unit’s DM Area
Words and Configuration
The following table shows the location and configuration of the Special I/O
Unit DM Area words used by a CS-series and CJ-series Master Unit.
PLC
CS-series and CJseries PLCs
Location of Status Area
First word = D20000 + unit number × 100
367
Section 6-3
Checking Operations of CS-series and CJ-series Master Units
First word = D20000 + (unit number × 100)
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
First word
Output Slave Registration Table
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 1
Input Slave Registration Table
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 2
Registered Slave Participation Monitoring Time
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
0 Bits
CPU Unit-to-Master Unit
(The contents of this area is
transferred to the Master Unit
from the CPU Unit when the
power is turned ON. When the
contents has changed, turn ON
the power again.)
Reserved for system use. (Cannot be used.)
First word + 3
Status Flags
(Used when Slave registration or
communications stop mode are enabled.)
First word + 4
Master Unit-to-CPU Unit
Communications Stopped Node Number and Slave Type
(Used only when communications stop mode is enabled.)
First word + 5
First word + 6
Output Slave Verification Error: Slave Missing
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 7
Input Slave Verification Error: Slave Missing
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 8
Output Slave Verification Error: Unregistered Slave in Network
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 9
Input Slave Verification Error: Unregistered Slave in Network
(Used only when Slave registration function is enabled.)
First word + 10
to
Not used. (Can be used as work bits/words.)
First word + 99
The contents from the first word to the first word +9 cannot be used for any
other purpose. These words can be used, however, if the Slave registration
function and communications stop mode are not enabled.
Checking Operations
Using DM Area Words
368
The following table shows the functions of the words in the Master Unit’s Special I/O Unit DM Area that are used to check operations.
Checking Operations of CS-series and CJ-series Master Units
Section 6-3
For details on the words used to set the Slave registration function, refer to 43-5 Slave Registration Function and Communications Stop Mode.
Word
+4
Bit
00
08
09
+5
Name
Registration Completed
Flag
Function
This flag is turned ON when all registered Slaves have joined the network. If all the registered Slaves have joined the network within the registered Slave participation monitoring time this flag will turn ON even if
unregistered Slaves have also joined. The flag will not turn ON, however, if there are no Slaves set in the Slave registration table. The flag
will remain ON until the power is turned OFF and ON again or the Unit
is restarted.
Verification Error Flag:
Slave Missing
This flag is turned ON under the following conditions.
Registered Slaves do not join the network within the registered Slave
participation monitoring time. When the Slave that caused the verification error is joined in the network, the flag will automatically be turned
OFF.
Check which Slave caused the error in the bit for verification error
(Slave missing) in Output Slave (first word + 6) or verification error
(Slave missing) in Input Slave (first word + 7).
Verification Error Flag:
This flag is turned ON when an unregistered Slave has joined the netUnregistered Slave in Net- work. The flag will remain ON until the power is turned OFF and ON
work
again or the Unit is restarted, even if the Slave that caused the verification error is removed from the network.
Check which Slave caused the error in the bit for Output Slave verification error (unregistered Slave in network) (first word + 8) or Input Slave
verification error (unregistered Slave in network) (first word + 9).
10
Communications Stopped This flag is turned ON when the Master Unit is set to communications
Flag
stop mode and remote I/O communications stop due to a communications error,.
Once the flag has turned ON, the status remains until the power is
turned OFF and ON again or the Unit is restarted.
Check which Slave caused the error in the bits for communications
stopped node number (bits 00 to 07 of first word + 5) and communications stopped Slave type (bit 15 of first word + 5).
15
Error Flag
00 to 07
15
This flag is turned ON when any of the bits 08 to 10 are set to1(ON).
The flag is automatically turned OFF when all the bits 08 to 10 are
turned OFF.
Communications Stopped When the Master Unit is set to communications stop mode and remote
Node Number
I/O communications stop due to a communications error, the node
number of the Slave that caused the error is stored as a 2-digit hexadecimal (00 to 0F: 1 to 15).
Check the Slave type (Output or Input) in the word for communications
stopped Slave type (bit 15 of first word + 5).
The node address stored will be held until the power is turned OFF and
ON again or the Unit is restarted.
Communications Stopped When the Master Unit is set to communications stop mode and remote
Slave Type
I/O communications stop due to a communications error, the Slave type
of the Slave that caused the error is stored as follows:
0 (OFF): Output Slave
1 (ON): Input Slave
Check which Slave caused the error in the bits for communications
stopped node number (bits 00 to 07 of first word + 5)
When communications have stopped, the bit status is held until the
power is turned OFF and ON again or the Unit is restarted.
369
Checking Operations of CS-series and CJ-series Master Units
Word
+6
Bit
00
01
02
+7
+8
OUT1
OUT2
to
OUT13
14
15
OUT14
OUT15
00
01
Input Slave Verification
Error: Slave Missing
IN0
IN1
02
to
IN2
to
13
14
IN13
IN14
15
IN15
00
Output Slave Verification
Error: Unregistered Slave
in Network
OUT0
OUT1
OUT2
to
13
to
OUT13
14
15
OUT14
OUT15
00
01
02
370
OUT0
to
13
01
02
+9
Name
Output Slave Verification
Error: Slave Missing
Input Slave Verification
Error: Unregistered Slave
in Network
IN0
IN1
IN2
to
13
to
IN13
14
15
IN14
IN15
Section 6-3
Function
When the Slave registration
The bits in the Special I/O
function is enabled, the bit
Unit Area correspond to the
corresponding to the node
node numbers actually used
number of the Output Slave
by the Slaves. Therefore, for
that caused the verification
Slaves with 16 points or
error (Slave missing) will be
higher, the bits other than
turned ON.
those set for the node number
may also be turned ON. For
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
Output Slave node numbers 1 example, the two consecutive
bits used by a 16-point Slave
to 15. When the Slave that
or the four consecutive bits
caused the verification error
used by a 32-point Slave may
joins the network, the bit will
be turned ON at the same
automatically turned OFF.
time.
When the Slave registration
function is enabled, the bit
corresponding to the node
number of the Input Slave that
caused the verification error
(Slave missing) will be turned
ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
Input Slave node numbers 1
to 15. When the Slave that
caused the verification error
joins the network, the bit will
automatically turned OFF.
When the Slave registration
function is enabled, the bit
corresponding to the node
number of the Output Slave
where a verification error
(unregistered Slave in network) will be turned ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
Output Slave node numbers 1
to 15.
Once a bit has been turned
ON the status will be held until
the power is turned OFF and
ON again or the Unit is
restarted.
When the Slave registration
function is enabled, the bit
corresponding to the node
number of the Input Slave
where a verification error
(unregistered Slave in network) will be turned ON.
Bits 00 to 15 correspond to
Input Slave node numbers 1
to 15.
Once a bit has been turned
ON the status will be held until
the power is turned OFF and
ON again or the Unit is
restarted.
Section 6-3
Checking Operations of CS-series and CJ-series Master Units
6-3-4
Checking Normal Operations Using Ladder Programming
This section provides information on how to write a ladder program to monitor
the operation of the CompoBus/S System and prohibit using the I/O data of
the Slaves in the system when an error occurs or the Slaves are not participating in the network correctly.
Master Unit Settings
The following table shows the Master Unit settings used in the programming
example (when all Slaves OUT0 to OUT15 and IN0 to IN15 are connected).
Master’s unit number
Usable node numbers
Example 1
0
IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15
Communications will be performed only when the Communications Error
Flags of all Slaves are OFF, and the Active Node Flags correspond to the configuration of connected Slaves.
Status Area
(Refer to Status Flag Functions on page 97 and page 119 for details.)
15 14 13 12 11 10
CIO 2016
CIO 2017
CIO 2018
CIO 2019
9
8
Output Slave Communications Error Flags
Slave 7
0
Input Slave Communications Error Flags
Slave 7
0
Output Slave Communications Error Flags
Slave 15
8
Input Slave Communications Error Flags
Slave 15
8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Active Output Slave Flags
Slave 7
Active Input Slave Flags
Slave 7
Active Output Slave Flags
Slave 15
Active Input Slave Flags
Slave 15
0 Bits
0
0
8
8
Active Node Flags:
Once a Slave joins the CompoBus/S network after the Slave is turned ON, the
Active Node Flag corresponding to the Slave will be ON.
Communications Error Flags:
If a Slave in the network fails to communicate with the Master, the Communications Error Flag corresponding to the Slave will be ON. After the Communications Error Flag is ON, the previous input data from the input Slave will be
kept on hold. While the Communications Error Flag is ON, the input data of
the input Slave is not reliable. (The program will be executed with the previous
data.)
Operations
The input conditions require the Input Slave and Output Slave Active Node
Flags to match the network configuration and that the Output Slave or Input
Slave Communications Error Flags are OFF.
371
Section 6-3
Checking Operations of CS-series and CJ-series Master Units
a
> (320)
Communications error
2016
#00FF
Determines that Communications Error Flags in
leftmost 8 bits of DM 2016 to DM 2019 are OFF. If
the Flag for any node is ON, the comparison result
with constant #00FF is ON, and work bit turns ON.
> (320)
2017
#00FF
> (320)
2018
#00FF
> (320)
2019
#00FF
b
= (300)
= (300)
= (300)
= (300)
2016
2017
2018
2019
#00FF
#00FF
#00FF
#00FF
b
Slave
joined
network
a
JMP (004)
Slave joined
network
Determines that Active Node Flags for Slaves in
rightmost 8 bits of DM 2016 to DM 2019 match the
Slave configuration.
Set the FF part of the constant #00FF to match the
configuration of connected Slaves.
Communications
error
#0001
Slave I/O is processed when the JMP condition is
ON only.
If the JMP condition is OFF, the program jumps to
JME and Slave I/O is not processed.
Slave I/O processing program
JME (005)
#0001
Example 2
The input conditions can be set according to the following table when the
Slave registration table and communications stop mode are used (DIP switch
pins 3 and 4 both set to ON).
DM Area Contents
(Refer to Slave Registration Function and Communications Stop Mode on
page 98 and page 120 for details.)
DM
Bit
address
D20004 00
372
Name
Registration Completed Flag
Function
ON when all registered Slaves
have joined network.
ON when a Slave are not
present in network.
08
Verification Error Flag: Slave
Missing
09
Verification Error Flag: Unregis- ON when an unregistered Slave
tered Slave in Network
is in the network.
10
Communications Stopped Flag
15
Error Flag
ON when communications have
stopped due to a communications error.
ON when any of the flags 08 to
10 are ON.
Section 6-3
Checking Operations of CS-series and CJ-series Master Units
Operations
c
TST (350)
Error detected
D20004
#F
Bit 15 (Error Flag)
d
TST (350)
D20004
#0
d
When bit 15 of D20004 is ON, work bit c
(error detected) turns ON.
Bit 00 (Registration Completed Flag)
Registered
Slaves joined
network
When bit 00 of D20004 is ON, work bit d
(registered Slaves joined network) turns
ON.
c
JMP (004)
Registered
Slaves joined
network
Error
detected
#0002
Slave I/O is processed when JMP condition
is ON only.
If the JMP condition is OFF, the program
jumps to JME and Slave I/O is not
processed.
Slave I/O processing program
JME (005)
#0002
6-3-5
Troubleshooting
When an error occurs, the indicators of the Master Unit connected to a CSseries or CJ-series PLC will indicate the error. Check the Master Unit's indicators and perform the error processing described in the following table.
When an error occurs in a Slave, the Slave can be identified from the status of
the Master’s indicators (refer to page 76) or from the status flags (refer to
page 365) in the PLC’s Special I/O Unit Area.
Error
The Master Unit’s
RUN indicator is
OFF
Probable cause
Possible remedy
The PLC’s power is OFF.
The same unit number has been set
on another Special I/O Unit, causing
an area overlap error in the PLC.
Turn the PLC’s power supply ON.
Check that the same unit number is not used by more than
one Special I/O Unit and restart the PLC. In particular, when
the usable node number setting is IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to
OUT15, check that the next unit number after the one set on
the Master Unit is not set on another Special I/O Unit.
The unit number has been set outside Check that the unit number is set within the range specified
the specified range, causing an area
for Special I/O Units and restart the PLC.
overlap error in the PLC.
CS-series and CJ-series PLCs
Unit numbers 0 to 95 can be set when the Master Unit is
using 10 words as a single Special I/O Unit and the usable
node number setting is IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7 (DIP
switch pin 1 OFF).
Unit numbers 0 to 94 can be set when the Master Unit is
using 20 words as two Special I/O Units and the usable node
number setting is IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15 (DIP
switch pin 1 ON).
The usable node number setting was
changed with the PLC power ON, and
the Master Unit was restarted only.
A Special I/O Unit error occurred in
the PLC because the Master Unit is
not connected securely.
The Master Unit is faulty.
Turn the PLC OFF and then ON again, and recreate the I/O
tables.
Communications stop mode is set.
Communications stop when a communications error occurs
in communications stop mode. Remove the cause of the
error, and then reset the Master Unit using the PLC’s Restart
Bit or turn the PLC OFF and then ON again.
Turn the PLC OFF, make sure that the Master Unit is
mounted correctly, and then turn the PLC ON again. Replace
the Master Unit if the error recurs.
Replace the Master Unit.
373
Checking Operations of CS-series and CJ-series Master Units
Error
The Master Unit’s
SD indicator is
OFF (when communications stop
mode is not
enabled)
The Master Unit’s
RD indicator is
OFF
Probable cause
---
Section 6-3
Possible remedy
Either reset the Master Unit with the PLC’s Restart Bit or turn
the PLC OFF and then ON again. Replace the Master Unit if
the error recurs.
The communications cable is not connected to the Master.
A Slave’s number has been set to 8 to
15 even though the usable node
address setting is IN0 to IN7 and
OUT0 to OUT7.
Connect the communications cable correctly.
One of the Slaves is not turned ON.
(The Slave’s PWR indicator is OFF.)
There is a problem with the Slaves’
power supply.
The Slaves’ power supply is inadequate.
Turn ON the Slave’s power supply.
Communications modes of Master
Unit and Slave do not match.
A common system mistake has been
made. (Refer to the table on page 364
for a list of common mistakes.)
Set the communications mode so that it is the same as that of
the Master Unit.
Refer to the table on page 364 for common mistakes and
their remedies.
The Master Unit is faulty.
Power is not being supplied to the
Slaves.
There is a problem with the Slaves’
power supply.
Replace the Master Unit.
Turn ON the Slave’s power supply.
Either change the Input and Output Slave’s node number settings so that they are 0 to 7 or change the usable node number setting to IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15.
Check the power supply cable connections and connect the
cables to the Slaves correctly.
Check the power supply capacity. If it is inadequate, either
change the system configuration or change the power supply
so that sufficient power is provided.
There is a problem with the communi- Check the connections and cable. Replace the communicacation cable connection or the cable
tions cable if it is faulty.
itself.
The Master Unit’s
ERC indicator is
ON
Check the power supply cable connections and connect the
cables to the Slaves correctly.
Check the power supply capacity. If it is inadequate, either
change the system configuration or change the power supply
so that sufficient power is provided.
There is a problem with the communi- Check the connections and cable. Replace the communicacation cable connection or the cable
tions cable if it is faulty.
itself.
There is a non-existent node number Either reset the Master Unit with the PLC’s Restart Bit or turn
because a Slave’s node number was the PLC OFF and then ON again.
changed after communications were
established.
The Slaves’ power supply is inadequate.
The same node number is used on
two Slaves.
Change the Slaves’ node number settings to eliminate the
duplication and then turn the Slaves ON again. Either reset
the Master Unit with the PLC’s Restart Bit or turn the PLC
OFF and then ON again.
A registered Slave has not joined the Check the Slave registration table and the node number setnetwork (when Slave registration func- ting for each Slave.
tion is enabled).
An unregistered Slave is in the network (when Slave registration function is enabled).
A common system error has occurred. Refer to the table on page 364 for common errors and their
(Refer to the table on page 364 for a
remedies.
list of common errors.)
The Master Unit is faulty.
A Slave Unit is faulty.
374
Replace the Master Unit.
Replace the faulty Slave Unit.
Checking Operations of CS-series and CJ-series Master Units
Error
The Master Unit’s
ERH indicator is
ON
Section 6-3
Probable cause
The I/O table is not registered.
Possible remedy
Recreate the I/O tables.
The same unit number has been set
on another Special I/O Unit.
Check that the same unit number is not used by more than
one Special I/O Unit and turn the PLC OFF and ON again. In
particular, when the usable node number setting is IN0 to
IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15, check that the next unit number
after the one set on the Master Unit is not set on another
Special I/O Unit.
The unit number has been set outside Check that the unit number is set within the range specified
the specified range.
for Special I/O Units and turn the PLC OFF and ON again.
CS-series and CJ-series PLCs
Unit numbers 0 to 95 can be set when the Master Unit is
using 10 words as a single Special I/O Unit and the usable
node number setting is IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to OUT7 (DIP
switch pin 1 OFF).
Unit numbers 0 to 94 can be set when the Master Unit is
using 20 words as two Special I/O Units and the usable node
number setting is IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15 (DIP
switch pin 1 ON).
The CPU Unit is faulty.
An error has occurred at the Master
Unit.
Replace the CPU Unit.
Check the Master Unit’s indicators and follow the procedures
listed above.
A Slave Unit’s
COMM indicator
is OFF or its ERR The Slave cannot participate in com- Turn ON the Slave’s power supply.
indicator is ON
munications because its power supply
is OFF. (The Slave’s PWR indicator is
OFF.)
The Slave cannot participate in com- Check the power supply cable connections and connect the
munications because there is a prob- cables to the Slaves correctly.
lem with the Slaves’ power supply.
The Slave cannot participate in com- Check the power supply capacity. If it is inadequate, either
munications because its power supply change the system configuration or change the power supply
is inadequate.
so that sufficient power is provided.
The Slave cannot participate in communications because there is a problem with the communication cable
connection or the cable itself.
The same node number is used on
another Slave between inputs Slaves
or between output Slaves.
Check the connections and cable. Replace the communications cable if it is faulty.
A Slave’s number has been set to 8 to
15 even though the usable node number setting is IN0 to IN7 and OUT0 to
OUT7.
Communications modes of Master
Unit and Slave do not match.
A common system mistake has been
made. (Refer to the table on page 376
for a list of common mistakes.)
The Slave Unit is faulty.
Either change the Input and Output Slave’s node number settings so that they are 0 to 7 or change the usable node number setting to IN0 to IN15 and OUT0 to OUT15.
Change one of the Slave’s node number settings to eliminate
the duplication and then turn the Slaves ON again. Either
reset the Master Unit with the PLC’s Restart Bit or turn the
PLC OFF and then ON again.
Set the communications mode so that it is the same as that of
the Master Unit.
Refer to the table on page 376 for common mistakes and
their remedies.
Replace the Slave Unit.
The area used by the Analog Terminal Change to node numbers that do not exceed the I/O Area
or 32-point Connector Terminal
range, then turn ON the PLC again.
exceeds the range of the Master Unit
I/O Area.
375
Section 6-3
Checking Operations of CS-series and CJ-series Master Units
Error
The indicators on
the Master and
Slaves are normal, but there are
errors in the communications data
Probable cause
The same node number is set on two
or more Input Slaves or Output
Slaves.
The PLC’s Output OFF Bit is ON, so
the Output Slave outputs are always
OFF.
The communications power supply to
the Slaves is ON, but the I/O power
supply is OFF, so the Output Slave
outputs and Input Slave inputs are
always OFF.
There is a problem with the communication cable connection or the cable
itself.
Usable node numbers setting is incorrect.
A common system mistake has been
made. (Refer to the table on page 376
for a list of common mistakes.)
The Master or a Slave Unit is faulty.
Common Mistakes
Possible remedy
Check the Active Node Flags for the Master and see whether
the flags are ON for all of the connected Slaves. If there is a
duplication, change the Slaves’ node number settings.
Turn OFF the PLC’s Output OFF Bit.
Provide an I/O power supply to the Slaves.
Check the connections and cable. Replace the communications cable if it is faulty.
Refer to 4-2-3 I/O Allocations or 4-3-4 I/O Allocations and
reset the usable node numbers to correct values.
Refer to the table on page 376 for common mistakes and
their remedies.
Replace the Slave Unit. Replace the Master Unit if the problem recurs.
The following table shows common connection mistakes and their remedies.
Mistake
A terminator is not connected.
Remedy
Connect a terminator (connector or terminal-block) at the
end of the cable farthest from the Master.
The terminator is not connected at the end of the cable far- Connect the terminator at the end of the cable farthest from
thest from the Master.
the Master.
The master is not connected at one end of the main line in a Connect the Master at one end of the main line.
system in which the main line must be distinguished from
the branch lines.
The length of the main line, a branch line, or the total length
of the branch lines of the system in which the main line must
be distinguished from the branch lines is not within specifications.
Make sure that the lengths of the cables in the system are
within the specifications listed in 2-2-2 Maximum Cable
Length, or change the communications mode to Long-distance Communications Mode so that the length of the
cables in the system will be within specifications.
The total communications cable in the system in which the Refer to 2-2-2 Maximum Cable Length and change the conmain line does not need to be distinguished from the branch figuration so that the length of the total communications
lines is not within specifications.
cable length will be within specifications.
2-conductor VCTF cable, 4-conductor VCTF cable, and
Special Flat Cable are used together in the same system.
Use just one kind of cable in the system.
There is a break in the communications cable.
When 4-conductor VCTF cable or Special Flat Cable is
being used, a connector is not attached securely to the
cable.
A connector is faulty.
Reconnect or replace the communications cable.
Make sure that the connectors are crimped correctly on the
cable.
376
Replace the faulty connector.
Section 6-4
Checking Operations of CQM1 Master Units
6-4
6-4-1
Checking Operations of CQM1 Master Units
Indicators
Error Status
Situation
Normal communications
The Master Unit’s indicators can indicate operating errors.
Indicator status
RUN ERC
ERS
SD
ON
RD
OFF OFF
ON
PLC’s power
OFF
OFF
I/O UNIT OVER OFF
error
OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
I/O BUS error
ON/
OFF
OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
Slave not connected
ON
OFF OFF
ON
Data area over- ON
lap
---
ON
OFF OFF ON
Address over
error
ON
---
Flashing ON
ON
OFF
Communications error with
a Slave
ON
ON
---
---
ON
ON
ON
ALM
Output
OFF
OFF OFF
Probable cause
---
Possible remedy
---
The PLC’s power is OFF.
Turn the PLC’s power supply ON.
The PLC’s limit on I/O
Reduce the PLC word allopoints was exceeded by the cation setting or remove
CompoBus/S Master Unit. one of the other Units.
The connection between
Check the mounting of each
the CPU Unit and I/O bus is I/O Unit and the End Cover.
not correct.
Turn the PLC ON again
after correcting the cause of
the error.
No Slaves are connected,
Use a Slave that can comor the communications
municate properly, or make
mode of each Slave does
the communications mode
not match that of the Master of each Slave match that of
Unit.
the Master Unit.
When the “number of
Check the area allocated to
points/node number” setthe 8-point Slave where the
ting is set to 4, this status
error occurred, eliminate
indicates that the same
the area overlap, and then
area is allocated to more
restart the PLC.
than one Slave. Communi- See Communications Error
cations will be stopped.
Node Number Indicators
below.
When the “PLC word alloCheck the indicators and
cation” setting is 2 or 4
set the node number to an
words, this status indicates acceptable value.
that an out-of-range node
See Communications Error
number from 0 to 7 has
Node Number Indicators
been set.
below.
An error has occurred with Check the indicators and
a Slave during communica- clear the cause of the comtions and it is withdrawn
munications error. See
from the system.
Communications Error
Node Number Indicators
below.
Note Check the system’s operation with just one Slave connected (one Slave at a
time) if the CompoBus system doesn’t operate but the Master’s indicator status doesn’t match any of those in the following table.
Communications Error
Node Number Indicators
When a communications error occurs with a Slave during communications
and the ERC indicator lights or the ERS indicator lights or flashes, the other
indicators will show the node number of the Slave where the error occurred in
binary.
When several communications errors occur simultaneously, the node number
with the highest priority error will be displayed. The priority is as follows:
1,2,3...
1. Area overlap error (ERS lit)
2. Address over error (ERS flashing)
3. Communications error (ERC lit)
377
Section 6-4
Checking Operations of CQM1 Master Units
When the same error occurs in two or more Slaves, the node number of the
Slave with the first recognized error will be displayed. The display will not be
changed if the same error occurs in another Slave while a node number is
already being displayed for that error. The new node number can be displayed
after the first error is cleared.
When a communications error occurs in a 16-point Slave, either one of the
node numbers used by the Slave may be displayed.
The following table shows some examples of node number displays.
Situation
ERC
Area overlap in Output
Slaves with node numbers
4 and 5
---
ERS
ON
Indicator status
I/O
8
4
ON
OFF ON
Possible remedy
2
1
OFF OFF Change the node number for Output
Slave 4 or 5. Alternatively, change the
“number of points/node number” setting
to 8. Restart the PLC afterwards.
ON ON Change the node number for Input Slave
7. Alternatively, change the “PLC word
allocation” and “number of points/node
number” settings.
Address over error in the
--Input Slave with node number 7
Flashing OFF OFF ON
Communications error in
the Input Slave with node
number 13
ON
OFF
OFF ON
Communications error in
ON
the Output Slave with node
number 6
OFF
ON
Communications error in
the Input Slave with node
number 0
A communications error
occurs in the Output Slave
with node number 11 after
a communications error
occurs in the Input Slave
with node number 3.
ON
OFF
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Check the communications cable to Input
Slave 0 and the status of the Slave itself.
ON
OFF
OFF OFF OFF ON
6-4-2
ON
OFF ON
OFF ON
ON
Check the communications cable to Input
Slave 13 and the status of the Slave itself.
OFF Check the communications cable to Output Slave 6 and the status of the Slave
itself.
ON
First, check the communications cable to
Input Slave 3 and the status of the Slave
itself. Once the error in Input Slave 3 is
cleared, the display will show the error in
Output Slave 11 and this error can be
cleared.
Error Detection with the Alarm Output (CQM1 Only)
The CompoBus/S Master Unit for CQM1 PLCs is equipped with an alarm output terminal (ALM) which is shorted by an internal relay when an error occurs.
The alarm output is shorted when there is an area overlap error (ERS indicator ON) or a communications error (ERC indicator ON).
The alarm output can be used to speed the response to an error by connecting the output to a warning device such as a buzzer or using the alarm output
as an input to the PLC to trigger an error subroutine.
The following table shows the specifications for the alarm output terminal
(ALM). Use these specifications for reference when wiring the alarm output.
Item
Specification
Maximum switching capacity
Minimum switching capacity
2 A (24 V DC)
10 mA (5 V DC)
Relay model
Minimum ON time
G6D-1A
100 ms (Outputs are ON at least 100 ms.)
Circuits configuration
CQM1-SRM21-V1
Internal
circuit
24 V DC max.
at 2 A
378
Section 6-4
Checking Operations of CQM1 Master Units
6-4-3
Checking Normal Operations Using Ladder Programming
This section provides information on how to write a ladder program to monitor
the operation of the CompoBus/S System and prohibit using the I/O data of
the Slaves in the system when an error occurs or the Slaves are not participating in the network correctly.
The CQM1 Master Unit does not have a status area but an alarm output terminal (ALM) instead. The alarm output terminal is short-circuited if either of
the following errors occur. (Refer to page 117.)
• Area duplication error (ERS indicator is lit)
• Communications error (ERC indicator is lit)
It is recommended to write a program that enables the Input Unit to accept
alarm output and the I/O data of the Slaves in the network is used only when
the alarm output terminal is OFF.
6-4-4
Troubleshooting
The indicators of a Master Unit connected to a CQM1 PLC will indicate when
an error has occurred. Check the Master Unit’s indicators and perform the
error processing described in the following table.
When an error occurs in a Slave, the Slave can be identified from the status of
the Master’s indicators (refer to page 128) or from the status flags in the PLC’s
Special I/O Unit Area.
The alarm output can also be used to determine when an error has occurred.
Refer to 6-4-2 Error Detection with the Alarm Output (CQM1 Only) for details.
Error
The Master Unit’s RUN
indicator is OFF
Probable cause
Possible remedy
The PLC’s power is OFF.
An I/O UNIT OVER error occurred in the
PLC.
Turn the PLC’s power supply ON.
Either change the PLC word allocation setting on
pins 1 and 2 of the DIP switch or remove another I/
O Unit.
An I/O BUS error occurred in the PLC
because the Master Unit is not connected
securely.
Turn the PLC OFF, make sure that the Master Unit
is mounted correctly, and then turn the PLC ON
again. Replace the Master Unit if the error recurs.
An I/O BUS error occurred in the PLC
because the PLC’s End Cover is not connected securely.
Turn the PLC OFF, make sure that the End Cover
is mounted correctly, and then turn the PLC ON
again. Replace the Master Unit if the error recurs.
An I/O BUS error occurred in the PLC
Turn the PLC OFF and then ON again.
because the PLC word allocation setting
(pins 1 and 2) was changed after communications were established.
The Master Unit is faulty.
Replace the Master Unit.
The Master Unit’s SD
indicator is OFF
The same area may be allocated to more
than one Slave. (The Master Unit’s ERS
indicator will be ON at the same time.)
The Master Unit is faulty.
See the explanation under “The Master Unit’s
ERS indicator is ON.,” below.
Replace the Master Unit.
379
Section 6-4
Checking Operations of CQM1 Master Units
Error
The Master Unit’s RD
indicator is OFF
Probable cause
Possible remedy
The communications cable is not connected Connect the communications cable correctly.
to the Master.
One of the Slaves is not turned ON.
(The Slave’s PWR indicator is OFF.)
Turn ON the Slave’s power supply.
There is a problem with the Slaves’ power
supply.
Check the power supply cable connections and
connect the cables to the Slaves correctly.
The Slaves’ power supply is inadequate.
Check the power supply capacity. If it is inadequate, either change the system configuration or
change the power supply so that sufficient power
is provided.
There is a problem with the communication Check the connections and cable. Replace the
cable connection or the cable itself.
communications cable if it is faulty.
Communications modes of Master Unit and Set the communications mode so that it is the
Slave do not match.
same as that of the Master Unit.
A common system mistake has been made. Refer to the table on page 382 for common mis(Refer to the table on page 382 for a list of takes and their remedies.
common mistakes.)
The Master Unit’s ERS
indicator is ON
The Master Unit or a Slave Unit is faulty.
Replace the Master Unit. Replace the Slave Units
if the problem recurs.
The same area may be allocated to more
than one Slave.
Either change the Slaves’ node number settings to
eliminate the I/O Area overlap or change the Master Unit’s “number of points/node number” setting
to 8-point mode by turning pin 3 of the DIP switch
OFF. Turn the PLC ON again after making the
necessary changes.
The PLC’s data area has been exceeded.
Either change the node number setting of the
Slave that exceeded the PLC’s I/O Area or change
the Master Unit’s “number of points/node number”
setting to 8-point mode by turning pin 3 of the DIP
switch OFF. Turn the PLC ON again after making
the necessary changes.
A 16-point or greater Slave has been conEither remove the 16-point or greater Slave or
nected even though the Master Unit’s num- change the Master Unit’s number of points/node
ber of points/node number setting is 4-point number setting to 8-point mode by turning pin 3 of
mode. (Pin 3 of the DIP switch is ON.)
the DIP switch OFF. Turn the PLC ON again after
making the necessary changes.
There is a problem with the communication Check the connections and cable. Replace the
cable connection or the cable itself.
communications cable if it is faulty.
The Master Unit’s ERS
indicator is flashing
380
A Slave Unit is faulty.
The “PLC word allocation” setting is 2 or 4
words, but an out-of-range node number
from 0 to 7 has been set.
(An address over error occurred.)
Replace the faulty Slave Unit.
Either remove the Slave where the error occurred
or change the Master’s PLC word allocation setting (pins 1 and 2) and max. number of Slaves setting (pin 3) so that the Slave’s node number is
acceptable.
Refer to 4-4-2 Switch Settings for a table showing
all of the possible DIP switch settings.
A Slave Unit is faulty.
Replace the faulty Slave Unit.
Section 6-4
Checking Operations of CQM1 Master Units
Error
The Master Unit’s ERC
indicator is ON
Probable cause
Power is not being supplied to the Slaves.
Possible remedy
Turn ON the Slave’s power supply.
There is a problem with the Slaves’ power
supply.
The Slaves’ power supply is inadequate.
Check the power supply cable connections and
connect the cables to the Slaves correctly.
Check the power supply capacity. If it is inadequate, either change the system configuration or
change the power supply so that sufficient power
is provided.
There is a problem with the communication Check the connections and cable. Replace the
cable connection or the cable itself.
communications cable if it is faulty.
There is a non-existent node number
because a Slave’s node number was
changed after communications were established.
The same node number is set on two or
more Input Slaves or Output Slaves.
Either reset the Master Unit with the PLC’s Restart
Bit or turn the PLC OFF and then ON again.
A Slave Unit is faulty.
An error has occurred at the Master Unit.
Replace the faulty Slave Unit.
Check the Master Unit’s indicators and follow the
procedures listed above.
The Slave cannot participate in communications because its power supply is OFF. (The
Slave’s PWR indicator is OFF.)
The Slave cannot participate in communications because there is a problem with the
Slaves’ power supply.
The Slave cannot participate in communications because its power supply is inadequate.
Turn ON the Slave’s power supply.
The Slave cannot participate in communications because there is a problem with the
communication cable connection or the
cable itself.
The node address set for the Slave is outside the setting range.
When outside the setting range with the
node addresses 0 to 7: ERS indicator of the
Master Unit flashes
When outside the setting range with the
node address 8 to 15: ERS indicator of the
Master Unit goes OFF
The same node number is set on two or
more Input Slaves or Output Slaves.
Check the connections and cable. Replace the
communications cable if it is faulty.
After changing the Slaves’ node number settings
to eliminate the duplication, turn the Slaves ON
again and then turn the PLC ON again.
A common system mistake has been made. Refer to the table on page 382 for common mis(Refer to the table on page 382 for a list of takes and their remedies.
common mistakes.)
A Slave Unit’s COMM
indicator is OFF or its
ERR indicator is ON
Check the power supply cable connections and
connect the cables to the Slaves correctly.
Check the power supply capacity. If it is inadequate, either change the system configuration or
change the power supply so that sufficient power
is provided.
Change the node address of the Slave that
caused the address over or change the Master
Unit’s PLC word allocation setting (pins 1 and 2)
and max. number of Slaves setting (pin 3) so that
the Slave’s node number is acceptable.
Refer to 4-4-2 Switch Settings for a table showing
all of the possible DIP switch settings.
Change one of the Slave’s node number settings
to eliminate the duplication, turn the Slave ON
again, and then turn the PLC ON again.
Communications modes of Master Unit and Set the communications mode so that it is the
Slave do not match.
same as that of the Master Unit.
A common system mistake has been made. Refer to the table on page 382 for common mis(Refer to the table on page 382 for a list of takes and their remedies.
common mistakes.)
The Slave Unit is faulty.
Replace the Slave Unit.
381
Section 6-5
Checking Slave Operations
Error
The indicators on the
Master and Slaves are
normal, but there are
errors in the communications data
Probable cause
The same node number is set on two or
more Input Slaves or Output Slaves.
Possible remedy
Change one of the Slave’s node number settings
to eliminate the duplication, turn the Slave ON
again, and then turn the PLC ON again.
Turn OFF the PLC’s Output OFF Bit.
The PLC’s Output OFF Bit is ON, so the
Output Slave outputs are always OFF.
The communications power supply to the
Provide an I/O power supply to the Slaves.
Slaves is ON, but the I/O power supply is
OFF, so the Output Slave outputs and Input
Slave inputs are always OFF.
There is a problem with the communication
cable connection or the cable itself.
The setting of the number of words allocated to the PLC, or the number of points
allocated to a single node number is incorrect.
Check the connections and cable. Replace the
communications cable if it is faulty.
Refer to 4-4-3 I/O Allocations in CQM1 PLCs and
correct the number of words allocated to the PLC
or the number of points allocated to a single node
number.
An Analog Terminal is connected to a
CQM1-SRM21 (without V1).
Change the Master Unit to a CQM1-SRM21-V1.
A common system mistake has occurred.
(Refer to the table on page 382 for a list of
common mistakes.)
Refer to the table on page 382 for common mistakes and their remedies.
The Master or a Slave Unit is faulty.
Replace the Slave Unit. Replace the Master Unit if
the problem recurs.
Common Mistakes
The following table shows common connection mistakes and their remedies.
Mistake
A terminator is not connected.
The terminator is not connected at the end of the cable farthest from the Master.
Remedy
Connect a terminator (connector or terminal-block) at the
end of the cable farthest from the Master.
Connect the terminator at the end of the cable farthest from
the Master.
The master is not connected at one end of the main line of
the system that has the main line distinguishable from the
branch lines.
The length of the main line, a branch line, or the total length
of the branch lines of the system in which the main line must
be distinguished from the branch lines is not within specifications.
Connect the Master at one end of the main line.
When 4-conductor VCTF cable or Special Flat Cable is
being used, a connector is not attached securely to the
cable.
Make sure that the connectors are crimped correctly on the
cable.
A connector is faulty.
Replace the faulty connector.
Make sure that the lengths of the cables in the system are
within the specifications listed in 2-2-2 Maximum Cable
Length, or change the communications mode to Long-distance Communications Mode so that the length of the
cables in the system will be within specifications.
The total communications cable in the system in which the Refer to 2-2-2 Maximum Cable Length and change the conmain line does not need to be distinguished from the branch figuration so that the length of the total communications
lines is not within specifications.
cable length will be within specifications.
2-conductor VCTF cable, 4-conductor VCTF cable, and
Use just one kind of cable in the system.
Special Flat Cable are used together in the same system.
There is a break in the communications cable.
Reconnect or replace the communications cable.
6-5
6-5-1
Checking Slave Operations
Indicators
This section explains the indicators common to all of the Slave Units. In addition to these common indicators, Slaves have other indicators, such as indicators that reflect the status of the Slave’s I/O point. Refer to SECTION 5 Slave
Specifications and Operations for details on the indicators specific to each
Slave.
382
Section 6-5
Checking Slave Operations
Indicator Meanings
The following table shows the meaning of the common indicators.
Indicator
Color
PWR
Green
(POWER OUT)
COMM
Yellow
ERR
(BUS/S ERR)
Indicator Status for Errors
Situation
Red
Status
Meaning
ON
The communications power supply is ON.
OFF
ON
The communications power supply is OFF.
Normal communications
OFF
A communications error has occurred or the Unit
is in standby status.
ON
OFF
A communications error has occurred.
Normal communications or the Unit is in standby
status.
The following table shows the status of the common indicators when an error
occurs. Check the Master’s indicators to determine the node number of the
Slave in which the error occurred. The Slave’s node number will also be indicated in the status area (not provided in CQM1 Master Units) allocated in the
Special I/O Unit Area of the Master Unit.
Indicator status
Probable cause
Possible remedy
Slave’s power OFF
PWR COMM ERR
OFF OFF
OFF The Slave’s power is OFF.
Data area overlap
ON
OFF
ON
With a CQM1 Master that’s “number of points/node number” setting is set to 4, the same area may
be allocated to more than one
Slave. Communications will be
stopped.
Check the area allocated to the 8point Slave where the error
occurred, eliminate the area overlap, and then restart the PLC.
Address over error
ON
ON
OFF
Node number out-ofrange error
ON
OFF
OFF
With a CQM1 Master that’s “PLC
word allocation” setting is 2 or 4
words, an out-of-range node number from 0 to 7 may have been set.
With a CQM1 Master, an out-ofrange node number from 8 to 15
may have been set.
When a CS-series, C200HX/
C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and
C200HS Master Unit, CS-series
Master Unit, or CJ-series Master
Unit is used and the range of
usable node numbers is from 0 to
7, there are Slaves whose node
numbers are set between 8 and
15.
Check the Master’s indicators to
determine the node number and set
the node number within the specified range.
Check the Master’s indicators to
determine the node number and set
the node number within the specified range.
Communications
mode conflict
ON
OFF
OFF
Communications error ON
OFF
ON
Master’s power OFF
OFF
---
ON
Turn the Slave’s power supply ON.
The communications mode setting of the Master Unit does not
match that of the Slave.
Make the communications mode of
the Master Unit and Slave agree,
then power-up the Master Unit
again.
An error has occurred with a Slave Check the Master’s indicators and
during communications and it is
clear the cause of the communicawithdrawn from the system.
tions error.
The Master’s power is OFF.
Turn ON the Master’s power supply.
Errors Limited to Analog Terminals
Situation
Analog Terminal Error
Indicator status
Probable cause
Possible remedy
RUN COMM ERR U.ERR
ON
OFF
OFF ON
An error has occurred in inter- Power-up the Slave again. If
nal circuits of the CPU, anathe Slave does not return to
log-digital converter or digital- normal, replace it.
analog converter, etc.
383
Section 6-6
Cleaning and Inspection
6-6
Cleaning and Inspection
This section describes the routine cleaning and inspection recommended as
regular maintenance.
6-6-1
Cleaning
Clean the CompoBus/S regularly as described below in order to keep it in its
optimal operating condition.
• Wipe the Unit with a dry, soft cloth for regular cleaning.
• When a spot cannot be removed with a dry cloth, dampen the cloth with a
neutral cleanser, wring out the cloth, and wipe the Unit.
• A smudge may remain on the Unit from gum, vinyl, or tape that was left on
for a long time. Remove the smudge when cleaning.
!Caution Never use volatile solvents such as paint thinner or benzene or chemical
wipes. These substances could damage the surface of the Unit.
6-6-2
Inspection
Be sure to inspect the system periodically to keep it in optimal operating condition. In general, inspect the system once every 6 to 12 months, but inspect
more frequently if the system is used with high temperature or humidity or
under dirty/dusty conditions.
Inspection Equipment
Prepare the following equipment before inspecting the system.
Required Equipment
Have a standard and phillips screwdriver, multimeter, alcohol, and a clean
cloth.
Equipment that Could be Needed
Depending on the system conditions, you might need a synchroscope, oscilloscope, thermometer, or hygrometer (to measure humidity).
Inspection Procedure
Check the items in the following table and correct any items that are below
standard.
Environmental
conditions
Installation
Item
Ambient and cabinet temperature
Standard
See below.
Equipment
Thermometer
Ambient and cabinet humidity
Dust/dirt accumulation
See below.
None
Are the Units mounted securely?
No looseness
Hygrometer
Visual inspection
Phillips screwdriver
Are the connecting cable connectors fully inserted?
No looseness
Phillips screwdriver
Are the external wiring screws
tight?
No looseness
Phillips screwdriver
Are the connecting cables undamaged?
No damage
Visual inspection
The following table shows the acceptable operating temperature and operating humidity ranges for CompoBus/S Units.
Unit
384
Master Unit
Acceptable temperature Acceptable humidity*
0 to 55°C
10% to 90%
Remote Terminal
Remote I/O Module
0 to 55°C
0 to 55°C
35% to 85%
35% to 85%
Sensor Amplifier Terminal
0 to 55°C
35% to 85%
Section 6-7
Precautions for Replacement of Units or Parts
Unit
Sensor Terminal
Acceptable temperature Acceptable humidity*
0 to 55°C
35% to 85%
Fiber Amplifier Communications –20 to 55°C
Unit
Connector Terminal
–10 to 55°C
35% to 85%
Water-resistant Terminal
Analog Terminal
–10 to 55°C
–10 to 55°C
25% to 85%
25% to 85%
CPM1A/CPM2A I/O Link Unit
CPM2C I/O Link Unit
0 to 55°C
0 to 55°C
10% to 90%
10% to 90%
25% to 85%
Note Acceptable humidity range with no condensation or frost.
6-7
Precautions for Replacement of Units or Parts
The CompoBus/S Master Unit and Slave Units make up the system. The
entire system is affected when a Unit is faulty, so a faulty Unit must be
repaired or replaced quickly. We recommend having spare Units available to
restore operation as quickly as possible.
6-7-1
Precautions for Unit Replacement
Observe the following precautions when replacing a faulty Unit.
• After replacement make sure that there are no errors with the new Unit.
• When a Unit is being returned for repair, attach a sheet of paper detailing
the problem and return the Unit to your OMRON dealer.
• If there is a faulty contact, try wiping the contact with a clean, lint-free
cloth dampened with alcohol. Re-mount the Unit after cleaning off any lint.
!Caution To prevent electric shock when replacing a Unit, be sure to turn OFF the
power supplies to all of the nodes (Master and Slaves) before removing the
faulty Unit.
6-7-2
Settings after Unit Replacement
After replacing a Unit, set the new Unit’s switches to the same settings that
were on the old Unit.
!Caution When the CPU Unit has been replaced, transfer any required DM Area or HR
Area data to the new CPU Unit before restarting operation.
6-7-3
Replacing Relays
Faulty relays or power MOSFET relays in Remote Terminals can be removed
and replaced.
!Caution Be sure to turn OFF the Slave’s power supply before removing the faulty relay
to prevent electric shock.
The relay’s pins often bend or break when the relay is removed, so remove
faulty relays only.
Remote Terminal Relays
1,2,3...
Use the following procedure to replace a relay in an Remote Terminal.
1. The relay removal tool attached to the Remote Terminal is used to remove
the relay. Align the relay removal tool so that it squeezes the old relay, push
it all the way in, and pull it out to remove the relay.
385
Precautions for Replacement of Units or Parts
Section 6-7
2. Check the orientation of the new relay carefully and insert it to the same
depth as the other relays.
386
Appendix
Standard Models
Masters
Master Units
Model
Applicable PLCs
C200HW-SRM21-V1
CS1W-SRM21
CS-series, C200HX/C200HG/C200HE-(Z)E, and C200HS
CS-series
CJ1W-SRM21
CQM1-SRM21-V1
CJ-series
CQM1
SRM1 Master Control Units
Model
SRM1-C01-V2
SRM1-C02-V2
Specifications
Dedicated CompoBus/S controller without RS-232C connector
Dedicated CompoBus/S controller with RS-232C connector
CPM2C-S Programmable Controllers
Model
CPM2C-S100C
Specifications
CPU Unit with CompoBus/S Master functions, 6 transistor inputs, 4
transistor outputs (NPN)
CPU Unit with CompoBus/S Master functions, 6 transistor inputs, 4
transistor outputs (PNP)
CPU Unit with CompoBus/S Master functions, DeviceNet Slave
functions, 6 transistor inputs, 4 transistor outputs (NPN)
CPU Unit with CompoBus/S Master functions, DeviceNet Slave
functions, 6 transistor inputs, 4 transistor outputs (PNP)
CPM2C-S110C
CPM2C-S100C-DRT
CPM2C-S110C-DRT
Other Masters
Model
Specifications
3G8B3-SRM@1
C200PC-ISA@2-SRM
CompoBus/S VME Board
SYSMAC Board
SDD-CS1
Uniline CompoBus/S Send Unit, manufactured by NKE
Slaves
Remote Terminals
Model
Specifications
Compatible with
High-speed
Communications
Mode
SRT1-ID04
SRT2-ID04
4 transistor inputs, two independent power supplies (NPN)
SRT1-ID04-1
SRT1-ID08
SRT2-ID04-1
SRT2-ID08
4 transistor inputs, two independent power supplies (PNP)
8 transistor inputs, two independent power supplies (NPN)
SRT1-ID08-1
SRT1-ID16
SRT2-ID08-1
SRT2-ID16
8 transistor inputs, two independent power supplies (PNP)
16 transistor inputs, two independent power supplies (NPN)
Compatible with Highspeed and Long-distance
Communications Modes
387
Appendix
Standard Models
Compatible with
High-speed
Communications
Mode
Model
Compatible with Highspeed and Long-distance
Communications Modes
Specifications
SRT1-ID16-1
SRT1-ID16T
SRT2-ID16-1
SRT2-ID16T
16 transistor inputs, two independent power supplies (PNP)
3-tier terminal block, 16 transistor inputs, two independent power
supplies (NPN)
SRT1-ID16T-1
SRT2-ID16T-1
3-tier terminal block, 16 transistor inputs, two independent power
supplies (NPN)
SRT1-OD04
SRT1-OD04-1
SRT2-OD04
SRT2-OD04-1
4 transistor outputs, two independent power supplies (NPN)
4 transistor outputs, two independent power supplies (PNP)
SRT1-OD08
SRT1-OD08-1
SRT2-OD08
SRT2-OD08-1
8 transistor outputs, two independent power supplies (NPN)
8 transistor outputs, two independent power supplies (PNP)
SRT1-OD16
SRT1-OD16-1
SRT2-OD16
SRT2-OD16-1
16 transistor outputs, two independent power supplies (NPN)
16 transistor outputs, two independent power supplies (PNP)
SRT1-OD16T
SRT2-OD16T
3-tier terminal block, 16 transistor outputs, two independent power
supplies (NPN)
SRT1-OD16T-1
SRT2-OD16T-1
SRT1-MD16T
SRT2-MD16T
SRT1-MD16T-1
SRT2-MD16T-1
SRT1-ROC08
SRT2-ROC08
3-tier terminal block, 16 transistor outputs, two independent power
supplies (NPN)
3-tier terminal block, 8 transistor inputs, 8 transistor outputs, two
independent power supplies (NPN)
3-tier terminal block, 8 transistor inputs, 8 transistor outputs, two
independent power supplies (NPN)
8 relay outputs, local power supply
SRT1-ROC16
SRT1-ROF08
SRT2-ROC16
SRT2-ROF08
16 relay outputs, local power supply
8 power MOS FET outputs, local power supply
SRT1-ROF16
SRT2-ROF16
16 power MOS FET outputs, local power supply
Connector Terminals
Model
Specifications
SRT2-VID08S
Connection with sensor connector (for cable connection), 8 transistor inputs, multiple
power supplies (NPN)
SRT2-VID08S-1
SRT2-VID16ML
Connection with sensor connector (for cable connection), 8 transistor inputs, multiple
power supplies (PNP)
Connection with MIL connector, 16 transistor inputs, multiple power supplies (NPN)
SRT2-VID16ML-1
SRT2-ID32ML
Connection with MIL connector, 16 transistor inputs, multiple power supplies (PNP)
Connection with MIL connector, 32 transistor inputs, multiple power supplies (NPN)
SRT2-ID32ML-1
SRT2-MD32ML
Connection with MIL connector, 32 transistor inputs, multiple power supplies (PNP)
Connection with MIL connector, 16 transistor inputs, 16 transistor outputs, multiple power
supplies (NPN)
Connection with MIL connector, 16 transistor inputs, 16 transistor outputs, multiple power
supplies (PNP)
Connection with sensor connector (for cable connection), 8 transistor outputs, multiple
power supplies (NPN)
SRT2-MD32ML-1
SRT2-VOD08S
SRT2-VOD08S-1
Connection with sensor connector (for cable connection), 8 transistor outputs, multiple
power supplies (PNP)
SRT2-VOD16ML
SRT2-VOD16ML-1
Connection with MIL connector, 16 transistor outputs, multiple power supplies (NPN)
Connection with MIL connector, 16 transistor outputs, multiple power supplies (PNP)
SRT2–OD32ML
SRT2–OD32ML-1
Connection with MIL connector, 32 transistor outputs, multiple power supplies (NPN)
Connection with MIL connector, 32 transistor outputs, multiple power supplies (PNP)
All models are compatible with both High-speed and Long-distance Communications Modes.
388
Appendix
Standard Models
Remote I/O Modules
Model
Compatible with Highspeed Communications
Mode
SRT1-ID16P
SRT1-OD16P
Specifications
Compatible with Highspeed and Long-distance
Communications Mode
SRT2-ID16P
SRT2-OD16P
Mounted to PCB, 16 inputs (NPN)
Mounted to PCB, 16 outputs (NPN)
Not compatible with Long-distance Communications Mode.
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
Model
Compatible with
High-speed
Communications
Mode
Specifications
SRT1-TID04S
SRT1-TKD04S
4 inputs (1 channel × 4 units), Communications Terminal, network power supply
4 inputs (4 channels × 1 unit), Communications Terminal, network power supply
SRT1-XID04S
4 inputs (1 channel × 4 units), Expansion Terminal
SRT1-XKD04S
4 inputs (4 channels × 1 unit), Expansion Terminal
Not compatible with Long-distance Communications Mode.
Fiber Amplifier Communications Unit
Model
E3X-SRT21
Specifications
8 inputs or 16 inputs (includes 2 status points) from Fiber Amplifier Unit, network power supply
This model is compatible with both High-speed and Long-distance Communications Modes.
Analog Terminals
Model
SRT2-AD04
SRT2-DA02
Specifications
4 analog inputs (switchable between 4, 3, 2, and 1 points), network power supply
2 analog outputs (switchable between 2 and 1 points), network power supply
Both models are compatible with both High-speed and Long-distance Communications Modes.
Sensor Terminals
Compatible with
High-speed
Communications
Mode
Model
Compatible with Highspeed and Long-distance
Communications Modes
Specifications
SRT1-ID08S
SRT1-ND08S
SRT2-ID08S
SRT2-ND08S
8 inputs, network power supply
4 inputs/4 outputs, network power supply
SRT1-OD08S
SRT2-OD08S
8 outputs, local power supply
389
Appendix
Standard Models
Water-resistant Terminals
Model
Specifications
SRT2-ID04CL
Connection with shielded connector (round water-resistant connector), 4 transistor inputs
(NPN), multiple power supplies, IP67 enclosure ratings
SRT2-ID04CL-1
Connection with shielded connector (round water-resistant connector), 4 transistor inputs
(PNP), multiple power supplies, IP67 enclosure ratings
Connection with shielded connector (round water-resistant connector), 8 transistor inputs
(NPN), multiple power supplies, IP67 enclosure ratings
Connection with shielded connector (round water-resistant connector), 8 transistor inputs
(PNP), multiple power supplies, IP67 enclosure ratings
Connection with shielded connector (round water-resistant connector), 4 transistor outputs (NPN), multiple power supplies, IP67 enclosure ratings
SRT2-ID08CL
SRT2-ID08CL-1
SRT2-OD04CL
SRT2-OD04CL-1
Connection with shielded connector (round water-resistant connector), 4 transistor outputs (PNP), multiple power supplies, IP67 enclosure ratings
SRT2-OD08CL
Connection with shielded connector (round water-resistant connector), 8 transistor outputs (NPN), multiple power supplies, IP67 enclosure ratings
SRT2-OD08CL-1
Connection with shielded connector (round water-resistant connector), 8 transistor outputs (PNP), multiple power supplies, IP67 enclosure ratings
All models are compatible with both High-speed and Long-distance Communications Modes.
Bit Chain Terminal (Manufacturing Discontinued)
Model
SRT1-B1T
Specifications
8 inputs, 8 outputs (switchable between inputs and outputs in a batch), local power supply
Not compatible with Long-distance Communications Mode.
I/O Link Unit for CPM1A/CPM2A
Model
CPM1A-SRT21
Specifications
8 inputs, 8 outputs, data exchange with CPM1A/CPM2A CPU Units
This model is compatible with both High-speed and Long-distance Communications Modes.
I/O Link Unit for CPM2C
Model
CPM2C-SRT21
Specifications
8 inputs, 8 outputs, data exchange with CPM2C CPU Unit
This model is compatible with both High-speed and Long-distance Communications Modes.
Other Slaves
Model
Specifications
FND-X06H-SRT
FND-X12H-SRT
Position Driver, 200-VAC input, 6 A
Position Driver, 200-VAC input, 12 A
FND-X25H-SRT
FND-X50H-SRT
Position Driver, 200-VAC input, 25 A
Position Driver, 200-VAC input, 50 A
FND-X06L-SRT
FND-X12L-SRT
Position Driver, 100-VAC input, 6 A
Position Driver, 100-VAC input, 12 A
Not compatible with Long-distance Communications Mode.
390
Appendix
Standard Models
• Slaves Manufactured by Other Companies
Model/Series
VQ Series
Specifications
SI manifold solenoid valve manufactured by SMC Corporation
SX Series
SY Series
MN4TB1 and MN4TB2 Series Solenoid valve with reduced wiring manufactured by CKD Corporation
M4TB3 and M4TB4 Series
M4G Series
MN4S0 Series
YS1A1, A2
YS2A1, A2
Valve with reduced wiring manufactured by KOGANEI Corporation
Contact the manufacturer for details.
Standard Connection Devices
Communications Cables
Manufacturer
Commercially available
Model
Remarks
VCTF cable (JIS C3306), 2 conductors (0.75 mm2 each)
VCTF cable (JIS C3306), 4 conductors (0.75 mm2 each)
OMRON
SCA1-4F10
OMRON Flat Cable, 100 m, 4 conductors (0.75 mm2 each)
Belden (U.S.A.)
Belden (U.S.A.)
#9409
#8489
Designated communications cable. (See note 1.)
Designated communications cable. (See note 2.)
Note 1. Electrical characteristics of the #9409 Belden communications cable are the same as those for the
commercially available 2-conductor VCTF cable.
2. Electrical characteristics of the #8489 Belden communications cable are the same as those for the
commercially available 4-conductor VCTF cable.
391
Appendix
Standard Models
Connectors
Model
Specifications
Branch Connector
SCN1-TH4
Use this connector to branch a cable.
(Used with OMRON Flat Cable only.)
Extension Connector
Connector Terminator
SCN1-TH4E
SCN1-TH4T
Use this connector to extend the OMRON Flat Cable.
This connector has a built-in terminator.
(Used with OMRON Flat Cable only.)
Round Water-resistant Connectors with Cable (socket
and plug)
XS2W-D42@-@81-@
Connector with Cable
(female socket on one end)
XS2F-D42@-@80-@
Connector with Cable (male
plug on one end)
XS2H-D421-@80-A
Connector Socket Assembly
(female) (Crimp terminals/
Solder terminals)
XS2C-D4S7
Use this connector to connect Water-resistant Terminals and Tjoints.
Can be used as a power supply cable (with the female socket
connected to the Water-resistant Terminal).
Can be used as an I/O cable for sensors that have connectors
(with the male plug connected to the Water-resistant Terminal, if
the product has a model number suffix “A”).
A connector with cable used to connect Water-resistant Terminals to T-branch connectors.
Can be used as a power supply cable (with the female socket
connected to the Water-resistant Terminal) and the other end
wired to a commercially available terminal block.
A connector with cable used to connect Water-resistant Terminals to I/O devices.
Can be used as an I/O cable (with the male plug connected to
the Water-resistant Terminal) and the other end wired to the I/O
device with loose wires.
A connector used to connect to the communications connectors
or external power supply connectors of Water-resistant Terminals
or T-joint plugs.
Applicable cable dia.: 3 to 6 mm
Applicable conductor size: 0.18 to 0.75 mm2
Connector Plug Assembly
(male) (Crimp terminals/Solder terminals)
XS2C-D4@@
A connector used to connect to the external power supply connectors of Water-resistant Terminals or T-joint plugs.
Applicable cable dia.: 3 to 6 mm
Applicable conductor size: 0.18 to 0.3 or 0.5 to 0.75 mm2
XS2G-D4S7
A connector used to connect to T-joint sockets.
Applicable cable dia.: 6 to 8 mm
Applicable conductor size: 0.18 to 0.75 mm2
XS2G-D4@@
A connector used to connect to I/O connectors of Water-resistant
Terminals or T-joint sockets.
Applicable cable dia.: 3 to 6 mm
Applicable conductor size: 0.18 to 0.3 or 0.5 to 0.75 mm2
A joint used to T-branch a VCTF cable (e.g., a communications
cable or power supply cable).
A communications connector for connecting CJ-series Master
Units. Communications cables (BD H, BD L, BS+, BS–) and
communications power lines (BS +, BS–) can be connected
simultaneously. This connector has screwless terminals for signal lines and connector lock screws.
T-joint
XS2R-D427-5
Communications Connector
(6-pin)
FK-MCP1.5/6-STF3.81
MC1.5/6-STF-3.81
A communications connector for connecting CJ-series Master
Units. Communications cables (BD H, BD L, BS+, BS–) and
communications power lines (BS +, BS–) can be connected
simultaneously. This connector has screw terminals for signal
lines and connector lock screws.
Communications Connector
(Connector Terminals)
BL3.5/6F (Product No.
160668)
Communications cables, communications power supply and I/O
power supply connectors manufactured by Weidmuller Co., Ltd.
Shielded Terminator Plug
(Male)
Terminal-block Terminator
SRS2-1
A shielded terminator plug used to connect to T-joints.
SRS1-T
This terminal block has a built-in terminator. (Can be used with 2or 4-conductor VCTF cable and OMRON’s Special Flat Cable.)
392
Appendix
Standard Models
Other Products
Connector Terminal Mounting Brackets
SRT2-ATT01 Mounting Bracket A
SRT2-ATT02 Mounting Bracket B
Related Slaves: Connector Terminals
Cable Connectors
Related Slaves: Connector Terminals with Sensor Connectors, Remote Terminals with Connector Output Transistors, Sensor Terminals
Model
XS8A-0441
XS8-1
Marking
Applicable wire size
0.3 to 0.5 mm
XS8A-0442
XS8-2
0.14 to 0.2 mm2
2
MIL Connectors
Related Slaves: Connector Terminals with MIL Connectors
Model
XG4M-2030-T
MIL Connector for SRT2-V@D16ML (-1)
Remarks
XG4M-4030-T
MIL Connector for SRT2-@D32ML (-1)
MIL Connector Cables for SRT2-V@D16ML(-1)
Slave model
number
SRT2-VID16ML
Connecting cable
G79-150C (50 cm)
G79-125C (25 cm)
G79-050C (50 cm)
G79-025C (25 cm)
SRT2-VID16ML-1
G79-050C (50 cm)
G79-025C (25 cm)
SRT2-VOD16ML
G79-050C (50 cm)
G79-025C (25 cm)
Compatible product
G7TC-IA16/ID16
XW2D-20G6
XW2B-20G5/20G4
XW2D-20G6
XW2B-20G5/20G4
G7TC-OC16/08
G70D Series
G70R-SOC08
G70A-ZOC16-3 and Relays
XW2D-20G6
XW2B-20G5/20G4
SRT2-VOD16ML-1
G79-I50C (50 cm)
G79-I25C (25 cm)
G79-050C (50 cm)
G79-025C (25 cm)
G7TC-OC16-1
G70D-SOC16-1/FOM16-1
G70A-ZOC16-4 and Relays
XW2D-20G6
XW2B-20G5/20G4
393
Appendix
Standard Models
MIL-compatible Cables for SRT2-@D32ML(-1)
Slave
MIL-compatible cable
Applicable models
SRT2-ID32ML
G79-I50-25D1 (50 cm)
G79-I75-50-D1 (75 cm)
G7TC-ID16
G7TC-IA16
SRT2-OD32ML
G79-O50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-O75-50-D1 (75 cm)
G7TC-OC16/OC08
G70D-SOC16/VSOC16
G70A-ZOC16-3
SRT2-MD32ML
G79-M50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-M75-50-D1 (75 cm)
Input: G7TC-ID16/-IA16
Output:
G7TC-OC08/OC16
G70D-SOC16/VSOC16
G70A-ZOC16-3
SRT2-ID32ML-1
G79-I50-25-D2 (50 cm)
G79-I75-50-D2 (75 cm)
G79-O50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-O75-50-D1 (75 cm)
G79-I50-25-D1 (50 cm)
G79-I75-50-D1 (75 cm)
G79-M50-25-D2 (50 cm)
G79-M75-50-D2 (75 cm)
G70A-ZIM16-5
SRT2-OD32ML-1
SRT2-MD32ML-1
G70A-ZOC16-4
G70D-SOC16-1
G7TC-OC16-4
M7F
Input:
G70A-ZIM16-5
Output:
G70A-ZOC16-4
G70D-SOC16-1
Remarks
I/O can be distinguished by
color
Input tubes: Red
Output tubes: Yellow
I/O can be distinguished by
color
Input tubes: Red
Output tubes: Yellow
I/O Connectors for External Power Supplies (Shield Round Waterresistant Connector for Water-resistant Terminals)
• Connectors for External Power Supplies
Connectors
Model
Connectors with Cable (female socket and plug)
Connector with Cable (socket on one end)
XS2W-D42@-@81-@
XS2F-D42@-@80-@
Connector Socket Assembly (female) (Crimp terminals/Solder terminals)
XS2C-D4@@
• I/O Connectors
Connector
Connector with Cable (male plug on one end)
Model
XS2H-D421-@80-A
Connectors with Cable (socket and plug)
Connector Plug Assembly (male) (Crimp terminals/Solder terminals)
XS2W-D42@-@81-A
XS2C-D4@@
Replaceable Relays
Relay
Relay
Model number
G6D-1A
Units
SRT2-ROC08 and SRT1-ROC16 Remote Terminals
Power MOS FET relay
G3DZ-2R6PL
SRT2-ROF08 and SRT1-ROF16 Remote Terminals
Fiber Amplifier Units
Model
E3X-DA6
E3X-DAB6
E3X-DAG6
E3X-DA6TW
E3X-DA8
E3X-DAB8
E3X-DAG8
E3X-DA8TW
E39-TM1
E3X-DA6-P
394
Remarks
Fiber Amplifier Units with Connectors:
Note: Models with retractable cords (such as E3X-DA11/21/41/51-N and E3X-DAB11-N)
and water-resistant models cannot be connected. Fiber Amplifier Units from specified lot
numbers can also not be connected. Refer to the Fiber Amplifier Unit Operation Manual
(Cat. No. Z152)
Index
A
alarm output
CQM1, 378
Analog Input Terminals
AD conversion data, 317
averaging function, 316
burnout detection function, 316
components, 309
dimensions, 318
DIP switch, 310
indicators, 310
input range, 313
internal circuitry, 312
models, 16, 389
node numbers, 311
used in CompoBus/S System, 8
wiring, 313
Analog Output Terminals
components, 320
DA conversion data, 325
dimensions, 326
DIP switch, 320
models, 16, 389
node numbers, 321
output range, 323
specifications, 319, 320
used in CompoBus/S System, 8
wiring, 323
averaging function, 316
B
Branch Connector, 28
installation, 56
specifications, 19
burnout detection function, 316
C
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS PLCs, 78
I/O allocation, 78
Slave I/O status, 46, 50
cables, 16
allowable current, 35
Cable Assemblies, 41, 64
connectors
assembling, 68
model numbers, 68
wiring and assembly, 67
details, 16
length, 29, 30, 37
models, 391
special flat cable, 24, 34
used in CompoBus/S System, 9, 10
VCTF, 24, 27, 33, 34
checklists
operation, 70
cleaning, 384
communications
baud rate, 5
cable assembly, 64
cycle time, 5
errors, 377
modes, 3, 5, 13, 14, 29
Connector Terminals, 199, 217, 229, 239, 250
CPM2C-S Series, 144
Remote I/O Modules, 262
Remote Terminals, 189
Sensor Terminals, 271, 280
SRM1 Master Control Units, 140
SRT2 Series, 149, 160, 165, 176, 182, 262
power supply, 32
settings, 354
CompoBus/S System
cables, 16, 37
communications, 24, 25
configuration, 6
connection example, 34
connection methods, 9, 27
main/branch line connections, 25
multidrop connections, 28
operations checklist, 70
power supply, 354
Slave Units, 7
startup checklist, 355
terminator connections, 31
with distinct main and branch lines, 8, 26, 27, 29, 31
with no distinction between main and branch lines, 9, 26,
27, 29, 31
connections
Sensor Amplifier Terminals, 343
Connector Terminals
communications mode settings, 199
components, 197
dimensions, 207
Mounting Brackets, 211, 235
indicators, 198
input devices and cables, 204
models, 15, 388
Mounting Brackets, 393
mounting, 208, 235
Mounting Brackets, 212
node numbers, 199
specifications, 194
transistor input
communications mode settings, 229
components, 227
dimensions, 234
DIP switch, 228
indicators, 228
input devices and cables, 233
internal circuitry, 229
node numbers, 228
specifications, 225
switch settings, 228
wiring, 230
transistor input and output
communications mode settings, 250
components, 248
395
Index
DIP switch, 249
indicators, 249
input devices and cables, 253
internal circuitry, 200
wiring, 251
transistor output
communications mode settings, 217, 239
components, 215, 237
dimensions, 225, 245, 255
DIP switch, 216, 238
indicators, 216, 238
input devices and cables, 222, 243
internal circuitry, 218, 240, 250
node numbers, 217, 238, 249
specifications, 213, 236, 246
switch settings, 238, 249
wiring, 220, 241
used in CompoBus/S System, 7
wiring, 202
Connector Terminator
installation, 62
specifications, 19
Connector Units
dimensions, 342
connectors
Branch Connector, 17
Connector Terminator, 17
details, 16, 41
Extension Connector, 17
installation, 55
models, 392
Terminal-block Terminator, 18
CPM2C-S Series
Master Unit dimensions, 142
setting node numbers, 144
setting the communications mode, 144
specifications, 140
CQM1
error detection with alarm output, 378
I/O allocation example, 134
I/O allocation in PLCs, 130, 136
Slave I/O status, 46, 50
D
dimensions
Analog Input Terminals, 318
Analog Output Terminals, 326
Connector Terminals, 207, 234
Mounting Brackets, 211, 235
transistor input, 234
transistor input and output, 255
transistor output, 225, 245
Connector Units, 342
CPM2C-S Master Units, 142
Master Units
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS, 75
CQM1, 127
Remote I/O Modules, 268
Remote Terminals
396
relay/power MOS FET, 193, 194
transistor input, 156, 162
transistor input and output, 185
transistor output, 172, 178
Sensor Amplifier Terminals, 340
Sensor Terminals, 294, 301
SRM1 Master Control Units, 138
Water-resistant Terminals, 274, 283
DIP switch
Analog Input Terminals, 310
Analog Output Terminals, 320
Connector Terminals
transistor input, 228
transistor output, 216, 238, 249
I/O Link Units, 328, 332
Master Units
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS, 77, 90,
107
CQM1, 129
Remote Terminals
relay/power MOS FET, 189
transistor input, 149
transistor input and output, 182
transistor output, 165
Sensor Amplifier Terminals, 338
Sensor Terminals, 290, 297
Water-resistant Terminals, 270, 279
E
E3X-N Connectors
no-object teaching, 348
optical axis adjustment, 346
sensitivity settings, 346
with/without-object teaching, 348
EC Directives, xxi
errors
detection
CQM1, 378
Master Units
CQM1, 377
Slave Units, 383
Extension Connector
allowable current, 36
installation, 59
specifications, 19
F
flags
status, 84, 97, 119, 358, 366
flat cables, 34
installation, 55
limitations, 35
H
High-speed Communications Mode, 3, 5
used in CompoBus/S System, 8
Index
I
I/O allocation
Analog Terminals, 84, 97, 119
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS PLCs, 78
Connector Terminals, 232, 243
CQM1
example, 134
I/O Link Units
communications mode settings, 329
components, 328, 332
DIP switch, 328, 332
indicators, 328, 332
models, 16, 390
node numbers, 328, 332
specifications, 327, 331
terminal arrangement, 330, 333
used in CompoBus/S System, 8
wiring, 330, 333
I/O response times, 41
characteristics, 41, 50
maximum, 44, 48
minimum, 42, 46
indicators
Analog Input Terminals, 310
Analog Output Terminals, 320
Connector Terminals, 198
transistor input, 228
transistor input and output, 249
transistor output, 216, 238
I/O Link Units, 328, 332
Master Units
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS, 76, 89,
106
CQM1, 128
Remote I/O Modules, 261
Remote Terminals
relay/power MOS FET, 189
transistor input, 149
transistor input and output, 181
transistor output, 165, 175
Sensor Amplifier Terminals, 338
Sensor Terminals, 289, 296
SRM1 Master Control Units, 139
Water-resistant Terminals, 270, 279, 304
input range
Analog Input Terminals, 313
inspecting, 384
installation
Branch Connector, 56
Connector Terminator, 62
Extension Connector, 59
flat cables, 55
solderless connector, 66
intended audience, xvi
internal circuitry
Analog Input Terminals, 312
Connector Terminals
transistor input, 229
transistor input and output, 200, 250
transistor output, 218, 240
Remote I/O Modules, 263
Remote Terminals
relay/power MOS FET, 191
transistor input, 150
transistor input and output, 183
transistor output, 166, 176
Sensor Amplifier Terminals, 339
Sensor Terminals, 291, 299
Water-resistant Terminals, 271, 280
L
Long-distance Communications Mode, 3, 5
used in CompoBus/S System, 9
M
main line, 25
Master Units, 78
communications modes, 13
compatibility, 10
components
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS, 75
CQM1, 128
dimensions
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS, 75
CQM1, 127
DIP switch
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS, 77, 90,
107
CQM1, 129
errors
CQM1, 377
I/O allocation
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS, 78
CQM1, 130
in CompoBus/S System, 8, 9
indicators
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS, 76, 89,
106
CQM1, 128
models, 13, 387
mounting, 54
node numbers, 131
number of points, 131
PLC word allocation, 131
rotary switch
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS, 76, 90,
107
settings, 78, 92, 114, 131
specifications
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS, 74
used in CompoBus/S System, 10
maximum switching capacity, xix
MIL connectors
models, 393
wiring and assembly, 258
models
397
Index
Analog Input Terminals, 16, 389
Analog Output Terminals, 16, 389
cable connectors, 68, 393
communications cables, 391
Connector Terminals, 15, 388
Mounting Brackets, 393
connectors, 392
I/O Link Units, 16, 390
list of standard models, 387
Master Units, 13, 387
MIL connectors, 393
Remote I/O Modules, 15, 389
Remote Terminals with Power MOS FETs, 15
Remote Terminals with Relays, 15
Remote Terminals with Transistors, 14
replaceable relays, 394
Sensor Amplifier Terminals, 389
Sensor Terminals, 15, 389
Slave Units, 14
SRM1 Master Control Units, 387
Water-resistant Terminals, 15, 390
mounting
Connector Terminals, 208, 212, 235, 245, 255
Mounting Brackets, 212
Master Units, 54
Slave Units, 54
multi-drop method, 28
N
node numbers
Analog Input Terminals, 311
Analog Output Terminals, 321
Connector Terminals
transistor input and output, 249
transistor output, 238
display, 4
I/O Link Units, 328, 332
Remote I/O Modules, 262
Remote Terminals
relay/power MOS FET, 190
Sensor Amplifier Terminals, 338
Sensor Terminals, 298
setting, 140, 144, 166, 175, 182, 199, 217, 228
noise protection
Sensor Terminals, 266
P
power ON, 354
power supply
arrangement, 39
common, 33
communications, 32
for Slave Units, 31, 32, 38, 39
independent, 33
local, 32
multiple power supplies for Slaves, 32
network power supply, 32
398
required for each Unit, 354
precautions
application, xviii
communications cables, xx
general, xv, xvi
operating environment, xvii
safety, xvi
R
reference values, 187
relay, 187
Remote I/O Modules
components, 261
dimensions, 268
indicators, 261
internal circuitry, 263
models, 15, 389
node numbers, 262
specifications, 260
terminal arrangement, 264
used in CompoBus/S System, 7
wiring, 264
Remote Terminals
models, 14, 15
relay/power MOS FET
components, 188
dimensions, 193, 194
DIP switch, 189
indicators, 189
internal circuitry, 191
node numbers, 190
specifications, 185
transistor input
communications mode settings, 149
components, 148
dimensions, 156, 162
DIP switch, 149
indicators, 149
internal circuitry, 150
specifications, 147, 156
terminal arrangement, 153
wiring, 153
transistor input and output
components, 181
DIP switch, 182
indicators, 181
internal circuitry, 183
node numbers, 182
specifications, 179, 180
switch settings, 182
terminal arrangement, 184
wiring, 184
transistor output
components, 164, 174
dimensions, 172, 178, 185
DIP switch, 165, 175
indicators, 165, 175
internal circuitry, 166, 176
node numbers, 166, 175
Index
specifications, 163, 173
switch settings, 175
terminal arrangement, 169
wiring, 169
used in CompoBus/S System, 7
replacing, 385
relays, 385
Units, 385
rotary switch
Master Units
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS, 76, 90,
107
S
safety precautions, xvi
Sensor Amplifier Terminals
components, 338
connections, 343
dimensions, 340
DIP switch, 338
E3X-N Connectors, 346
indicators, 338
internal circuitry, 339
models, 389
node numbers, 338
specifications, 336
terminal arrangement, 339
wiring, 339
Sensor Terminals
allowable voltage range, 38
combinations, 335
communications mode settings, 271, 280
compatibility, 291
components, 289, 296
dimensions, 294, 301
DIP switch, 290, 297
external devices and cables, 298
indicators, 289, 296
internal circuitry, 291, 299
models, 15, 389
node numbers, 298
noise protection, 266
specifications, 287, 295
terminal arrangement, 292
used in CompoBus/S System, 7
wiring, 292
shielded connectors
wiring and assembly, 284
Slave Analog Terminals, 13
Slave Units
allowable current, 36
characteristics, 7
errors, 383
I/O response times, 42, 46
I/O status at startup, 46, 50
in CompoBus/S System, 8, 9
local power supply, 16, 32
models, 14
mounting, 54
multiple power supplies, 16, 32
network power supply, 16, 32
solderless connector
installation, 66
special flat cable, 24, 34
allowable current, 35
used for Slave Unit power supply, 34
specifications, 24
Analog Output Terminals, 319
Branch Connector, 19
communications, 24
Connector Terminals
transistor input, 225
transistor input and output, 246
transistor input or output, 194
transistor output, 213, 236
Connector Terminator, 19
CPM2C-S Series, 140
Extension Connector, 19
I/O Link Units, 327, 331
Master Units
C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS, 74
with built-in CPU, 12
with communications functions, 10
Remote I/O Modules, 260
Remote Terminals
relay/power MOS FET, 185
transistor input, 147, 157
transistor input and output, 179, 180
transistor output, 163, 173
Sensor Amplifier Terminals, 336
Sensor Terminals, 287, 295
SRM1 Master Control Units, 12, 136
Terminal-block Terminator, 20
Water-resistant Terminals, 268, 272, 277, 281
SRM1 Master Control Units
dimensions, 138
indicators, 139
models, 387
setting the communications mode, 140
setting usable node numbers, 140
specifications, 12, 136
status flags, 84, 97, 119, 358, 366
system configuration, 6
T
T-branch method, 27
terminal arrangement
I/O Link Units, 330, 333
Remote I/O Modules, 264
Remote Terminals
transistor input, 153, 161
transistor input and output, 184
transistor output, 169
Sensor Amplifier Terminals, 339
Sensor Terminals, 292
Terminal Block Connector, 28
399
Index
Terminal-block Terminator
specifications, 20
terminators, 31
in CompoBus/S System, 9, 10
T-joints
allowable current, 36
used for CompoBus/S connections, 28
troubleshooting
Master Units, 360, 373
V
VCTF cable, 24, 27, 33
allowable current, 35
limitations, 35
used for Slave Unit power supply, 34
used in CompoBus/S System, 9, 10, 26
W
Water-resistant Terminals, 3
components, 270, 278, 303
dimensions, 274, 283
DIP switch, 270, 279
indicators, 270, 279, 304
internal circuitry, 271, 280
models, 15, 390
specifications, 268, 277
switch settings, 270, 279
used in CompoBus/S System, 7
wiring, 272, 281
wiring example, 41
wiring
Analog Input Terminals, 313
Analog Output Terminals, 323
Connector Terminals, 202
transistor input, 230
transistor input and output, 251
transistor output, 220, 241
I/O Link Units, 330, 333
Remote I/O Modules, 264
Remote Terminals
transistor input, 153
transistor input and output, 184
transistor output, 169
Sensor Amplifier Terminals, 339
Sensor Terminals, 292
400
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. W266-E1-09
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
01
Date
August 1996
Revised content
02
June 1997
03
June 1998
04
June 1999
Overall revision accompanying Master Unit version upgrade (supporting longdistance communications), Slave version upgrade (supporting long-distance
communications), and the addition of Slave models (Remote Terminals, 3-tier
Terminal Blocks, Connector Terminals, Analog Terminals, CPM1A/CPM2A I/O
Link Unit).
05
February 2001
Overall revision based on the following changes.
Special Flat Cable for long-distance communications.
Use of 4-conductor VCTF cable.
CPM2C-S Master Unit added.
Slaves added, including 32-point Connector Terminals, Water-resistant Terminals, and CPM2C I/O Link Units.
06
November 2001
Overall revision based on restructuring the manual and the following changes.
CJ1W-SRM21 Master Unit added supporting new functions (Slave registration
function and communications stop mode).
Slaves added, including Fiber Amplifier Communications Units and Position
Drivers.
Original production
Major revision mainly based on the addition of Slave Units (16-point Remote
Terminals, Sensor Amplifier Terminals, Remote I/O Modules), changes in indication of the number of connectable Slaves (node number indication), etc.
Pages xiii, xiv: Precautions added. 6 Conformance to EC Directives added.
Page 6: 1-2-2 System Configuration added.
Pages 6, 8, 60: Note 2 added.
Page 7: Information on the new SRM1 Master Control Unit added. CQM1CPU41-E/42-E/43-E/44-E changed to CQM1-CPU41-EV1/42-EV1/43-EV1/44EV1 respectively.
Page 10: Usable node number information added to the table.
Page 12: Models added to the table.
Pages 16 to 21, 32, 33: Node number information added.
Page 31: Caution on EC Directives added.
Page 32: Cautions added.
Pages 35 to 44: Changes to the specifications made.
Page 52: Remote I/O Module and Sensor Amplifier Terminal specifications
added.
Page 66: Table added to C200HX, C200HG, C200HE, and C200HS Master Unit
Installation.
Page 79: Remote I/O Module and Sensor Amplifier Terminal connection information added.
Page 101: Models lists updated. Communications Cable added.
Pages 9, 14, 36, 39, 40, 42, 45, 47, 125: Information on PNP-type Remote Terminals added.
401
Revision History
Revision code
07
Date
October 2003
08
October 2005
09
August 2007
402
Revised content
Additions and changes were made on the following pages:
Page xvii: Note added under table.
Page 2: Diagram changed to remove one of the terminators.
Page 3: Corrected “CIO 2000” to “CIO 2002” in third row of table for OUT data.
Page 6: Changed “CIO Area” to “I/O Area” in master characteristics.
Page 31: Moved diagram to preceding subheading.
Page 37: Changed order of symbol definitions for equations.
Page 53: Added information and diagram on mounting direction
Page 160: Swapped “V” and “G” terminals in specification for residual voltage,
and removed information on leakage current for specific models.
Page 172: Changed notes on COM terminals.
Pages 173, 174: Corrected dimension from “50” to “51” in diagram.
Page 193: Corrected “14” to “20.4” for I/O power supply voltage.
Page 215: Changed diagram for horizontal panel mounting.
Pages 254, 263, 264: Corrected dimension from “20” to “10” in diagram.
"PC" was globally changed to "PLC" in the sense of "Programmable Controller."
Page xiv: Precaution added toward bottom of page.
Page xv: Precaution added toward top of page and precaution changed in middle of page.
Page xvi: First indented bulleted text changed.
Page 138 and 160: Input currents changed in table.
Page 157: New note 2 added.
Added information on the CS1W-SRM21 Master Unit for CS-series PLCs to relevant sections throughout the manual.
Deleted information on Bit Chain Terminals due to discontinuation of manufacturing.
Mouser Electronics
Authorized Distributor
Click to View Pricing, Inventory, Delivery & Lifecycle Information:
Omron:
SRS2-1
工商网监
湘ICP备2023018690号
